As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 12, 2024

1933 Act Registration No. 333-135219

1940 Act Registration No. 811-05721

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM N-4

REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

POST-EFFECTIVE AMENDMENT NO. 59

and

REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940

AMENDMENT NO. 713

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H
(Exact Name of Registrant)

American Legacy® Design

THE LINCOLN NATIONAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(Name of Depositor)

1301 South Harrison Street
Post Office Box 1110
Fort Wayne, Indiana 46801
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices)

Depositor’s Telephone Number, Including Area Code: (260) 455-2000 Craig T. Beazer, Esquire
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
150 North Radnor Chester Road
Radnor, PA 19087 (Name and Address of Agent for Service)

Copy to:

Carolyn E. Augur, Esquire
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
350 Church Street
Hartford, Connecticut 06103

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Continuous

It is proposed that this filing will become effective:

/ / immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485

/X/ on May 1, 2024, pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485

/ / 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485

/ / on __________, pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485

Title of Securities being registered:
Interests in a separate account under individual flexible payment deferred variable annuity contracts.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the rates and percentages for the Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on or after May 1, 2024.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

Current Initial Protected Lifetime Income Fee Rate 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Enhancement Rate

6%

Protected Annual Income Rates for Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® and Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®

The Protected Annual Income amount is calculated when you elect the rider. Upon the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate will be based on your age (or the younger of you and your spouse under the joint life option) as of the date of that withdrawal, and thereafter may not change unless an Account Value Step-up occurs after reaching a new age band.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® 

Single Life PAI Rate		Joint Life PAI Rate
Age	PAI Rate	Age	PAI Rate
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.10%
65 – 69	6.00%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	6.15%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.30%	75+	5.85%

 

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® 

Single Life PAI Rate		Joint Life PAI Rate
Age	PAI Rate	Age	PAI Rate
59 – 64	4.75%	59 – 64	4.35%
65 – 69	6.10%	65 – 69	5.60%
70 – 74	6.30%	70 – 74	5.85%
75+	6.55%	75+	6.10%

 

Protected Annual Income Rates for Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® and Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max®

The initial Protected Annual Income rate is based on your age as of the date of the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal. Under the joint life option, the age of the younger of you or your spouse will be used. Thereafter the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase upon an Account Value Step-up after reaching a new age band and will decrease once the Contract Value reaches zero.

The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B. The rate in Table B will be based on the later of (a) your age at the time the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal occurred, or (b) your age as of the Valuation Date of the most recent Account Value Step-up. If no withdrawals have been taken prior to the Contract Value reaching zero, then your current age (single life option) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life option) will be used to determine the Protected Annual Income rate in Table B.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus® 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.70%	5.20%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	7.65%	7.10%	65 – 69	4.50%	4.25%
70 – 74	7.90%	7.15%	70 – 74	4.50%	4.25%
75+	8.00%	7.40%	75+	4.50%	4.25%

 

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus® 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.25%	59 – 64	3.50%	3.25%
65 – 69	7.50%	7.10%	65 – 69	5.00%	4.50%
70 – 74	7.75%	7.15%	70 – 74	5.00%	4.50%
75+	7.85%	7.50%	75+	5.00%	4.50%

 

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.70%	5.20%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.30%	7.90%	65 – 69	3.50%	3.25%
70 – 74	8.55%	8.10%	70 – 74	3.50%	3.25%
75+	8.80%	8.30%	75+	3.50%	3.25%

 

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max® 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.25%	59 – 64	3.50%	3.25%
65 – 69	8.50%	8.10%	65 – 69	3.50%	3.25%
70 – 74	8.75%	8.30%	70 – 74	3.50%	3.25%
75+	9.00%	8.50%	75+	3.50%	3.25%

 

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge Rate  

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for Contractowners who transition from Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

 

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for Contractowners who transition from Lin- coln ProtectedPay Secure Core®	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages

The Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of your Account Value or Protected Income Base, based on your age (or the age of the youngest life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected. The following rates apply to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit elections for Contractowners who transition from Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® and Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®.

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages For Contractowners Who Transition From Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® 

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
Under 40	2.15%	Under 40	2.15%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.25%
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	2.75%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	3.25%
70 – 74	4.50%	70 – 74	3.75%
75 – 79	4.75%	75 – 79	4.00%
80+	4.75%	80+	4.25%

 

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) Percentages For Contractowners Who Transition From Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® 

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
Under 40	2.25%	Under 40	2.25%
40 – 54	2.75%	40 – 54	2.50%
55 – 58	3.00%	55 – 58	2.75%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	4.75%	65 – 69	4.00%
70 – 74	5.25%	70 – 74	4.25%
75 – 79	5.50%	75 – 79	4.50%
80+	5.50%	80+	4.75%

 

In order to receive the percentages and rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed on and after May 1, 2024. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the rates and percentages for the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on or after May 1, 2023.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

Current Initial Protected Lifetime Income Fee Rate 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Enhancement Rate

6%

Protected Annual Income Rates

The Protected Annual Income amount is calculated when you elect the rider. Upon the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate will be based on your age (or the younger of you and your spouse under the joint life option) as of the date of that withdrawal, and thereafter may not change unless an Account Value Step-up occurs. 

Single Life PAI Rate		Joint Life PAI Rate
Age	PAI Rate	Age	PAI Rate
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	4.35%	59 – 64	3.85%
65 – 69	5.50%	65 – 69	4.75%
70 – 74	5.50%	70 – 74	4.85%
75+	5.65%	75+	5.15%

 

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) Charge Rate  

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for Contractowners who transition from Lin- coln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages

The Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of your Account Value or Protected Income Base, based on your age (or the age of the youngest life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected. The following rates apply to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections for Contractowners who transition from Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk). 

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
Under 40	2.00%	Under 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.20%
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.20%

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	2.75%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	3.50%
70 – 74	4.75%	70 – 74	3.75%
75 – 79	5.00%	75 – 79	4.00%
80+	5.00%	80+	4.25%

 

In order to receive the percentages and rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed on and after May 1, 2023. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the rates and percentages for the Lincoln Market Select® Advantage rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on or after May 1, 2023.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

Current Initial Protected Lifetime Income Fee Rate 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Enhancement Rate

6%

Protected Annual Income Rates

The Protected Annual Income amount is calculated when you elect the rider. Upon the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate will be based on your age (or the younger of you and your spouse under the joint life option) as of the date of that withdrawal, and thereafter may not change unless an Account Value Step-up occurs. 

Single Life PAI Rate		Joint Life PAI Rate
Age	PAI Rate	Age	PAI Rate
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	5.00%	65 – 69	4.35%
70 – 74	5.10%	70 – 74	4.45%
75+	5.25%	75+	4.75%

 

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge Rate 

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for Contractowners who transition from Lincoln Market Select® Advantage	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages

The Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of your Account Value or Protected Income Base, based on your age (or the age of the youngest life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected. The rates listed below are for i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections for Contractowners who transition from Lincoln Market Select® Advantage. 

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
Under 40	2.00%	Under 40	2.00%
40-54	2.25%	40-54	2.00%
55-58	2.25%	55-58	2.00%

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
59-64	3.00%	59-64	2.50%
65-69	3.75%	65-69	2.75%
70-74	4.00%	70-74	3.25%
75-79	4.25%	75-79	3.50%
80+	4.25%	80+	3.75%

 

In order to receive the percentages and rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed on and after May 1, 2023. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the rates for the Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on and after May 1, 2023.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

Current Initial Protected Lifetime Income Fee Rate 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Enhancement Rate

6%

The initial Protected Annual Income rate is based on your age as of the date of the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal. Under the joint life option, the age of the younger of you or your spouse will be used. Thereafter the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase upon an Account Value Step-up and will decrease once the Contract Value reaches zero.

The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B. The rate in Table B will be based on the later of (a) your age at the time the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal occurred, or (b) your age as of the Valuation Date of the most recent Account Value Step-up. If no withdrawals have been taken prior to the Contract Value reaching zero, then your current age (single life option) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life option) will be used to determine the Protected Annual Income rate in Table B. 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.00%	4.50%	59 – 64	3.00%	2.75%
65 – 69	7.50%	7.00%	65 – 69	3.00%	2.75%
70 – 74	8.00%	7.50%	70 – 74	3.00%	2.75%
75 – 79	8.00%	7.50%	75 – 79	3.00%	2.75%
80 +	8.00%	7.50%	80 +	3.00%	2.75%

 

In order to receive the rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application and/or election forms must be signed and dated on and after May 1, 2023. We must receive your application and/or election forms in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application and/or election forms, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the rates for the Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on and after May 1, 2020.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

The Protected Annual Income amount is determined (a) by multiplying the Protected Income Base by the applicable rate, and (b) whether or your Contract Value has been reduced to zero. Thereafter, the Protected Annual Income rate will decrease once the Contract Value reaches zero.

Two options are available, and you can decide which option is best suited to your needs. Option 1 may be appropriate if you would like lower initial income with higher income once the Contract Value reaches zero. Comparatively, Option 2 will provide a higher initial income with lower income once the Contract Value reaches zero.

For both Option1 and Option 2, the rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. Once the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will be used, and the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.

 

OPTION 1
TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life
70+	6.25%	N/A*	70+	5.00%

*Joint Life is currently not available. 

OPTION 2
TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age	Single Life
70+	7.00%	N/A*	70+	4.00%

*Joint Life is currently not available.

  In order to receive the rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application must be signed on and after May 1, 2020. We must receive your application in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time. Subject to the rules above, if the Protected Annual Income rates that we are currently offering on the day the contract is issued are higher than the rates we were offering on the date you signed your application, you will receive the higher set of rates. If the rates have decreased when we compare rates that we are offering on the day you signed your application to the set of rates that we are offering on the day your contract is issued, your contract will be issued with the rates that were in effect on the day you signed your application, subject to meeting the rules above.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) outlines the rider charges and the Protected Annual Income rates for the Lincoln Wealth PassSM rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or rider election forms signed on and after May 1, 2020 and may be superseded at any time.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rates will be disclosed on a new rate sheet at least 10 days in advance of the change. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

Current Initial Charge Rate 

Age at Issue 0 – 65	1.00%
Age at Issue 66 – 80	1.25%

Protected Annual Income Rate

The Protected Annual Income (“PAI”) rate will be based on the Contractowner’s age on the earlier of the latest date to begin withdrawals to stretch payments over the owner’s life expectancy (i.e., death of the original account owner or Contractowner), or the date that the Contract Value reduces to zero. Thereafter, the rate will not change. 

Age	PAI Rate
0 – 54	4.50%
55 – 58	5.00%
59 – 69	5.50%
70+	6.00%

In order to receive the rates indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed on and after May 1, 2020. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form, and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time. The rates set forth above may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion.

Subject to the rules above, if the Protected Annual Income rates that we are currently offering on the day the contract and/or rider is issued are higher than the rates we were offering on the date you signed your application or rider election form, you will receive the higher set of rates. If any rates have decreased when we compare the Protected Annual Income rates that we are offering on the day you signed your application or rider election form to the set of rates that we are offering on the day your contract and/ or rider is issued, your contract / rider will be issued with the set of rates that were in effect on the day you signed your application or rider election form, subject to meeting the rules above.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the rates and percentages for the 4LATER® Select Advantage rider. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on and after May 1, 2024.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

Current Initial Protected Lifetime Income Fee Rate 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

Enhancement Rate

6%

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge Rate 

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for Contractowners who transition from 4LATER® Select Advantage	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.50%	1.60%

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit 

Single Life GIB %		Joint Life GIB %
Age	GIB %	Age	GIB %
Under 40	2.15%	Under 40	2.15%
40-54	2.50%	40-54	2.25%
55-58	2.50%	55-58	2.25%
59-64	3.25%	59-64	2.75%
65-69	4.25%	65-69	3.25%
70-74	4.50%	70-74	3.75%
75-79	4.75%	75-79	4.00%
80+	4.75%	80+	4.25%

 

In order to receive the rate indicated in this Rate Sheet, your 4LATER® Select Advantage application or rider election form must be signed and dated on and after May 1, 2024. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement dated May 1, 2024

This Rate Sheet Prospectus Supplement (“Rate Sheet”) provides the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit rate and percentages that we are currently offering. This supplement is for informational purposes and requires no action on your part. This Rate Sheet must be retained with the current prospectus.

The rates below apply for applications and/or election forms signed on and after May 1, 2024.

The rates in this Rate Sheet can be superseded. In the event we change our rates, the new rate sheet will become effective at least 10 days after it is filed. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your financial professional, or online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This Rate Sheet has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and can be viewed at www.sec.gov.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) Charge Rate 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Current Initial Annual Charge*	1.35%	1.55%

*The charge is added to the product charge which included the mortality and expense risk charge for the death benefit you have elected.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) 

Single Life GIB Percentage		Joint Life GIB Percentage
Age	GIB Percentage	Age	GIB Percentage
Under 40	2.25%	Under 40	2.25%
40 – 54	2.75%	40 – 54	2.50%
55 – 58	3.00%	55 – 58	2.75%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	4.75%	65 – 69	4.00%
70 – 74	5.25%	70 – 74	4.25%
75 – 79	5.50%	75 – 79	4.50%
80+	5.50%	80+	4.75%

 

In order to receive the rate indicated in this Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be signed and dated on and after May 1, 2024. We must receive your application or rider election form in Good Order within 10 days from the date you sign your application or rider election form and the annuity must be funded within 60 calendar days. Good Order means the actual receipt by Lincoln at its Home Office of the requested transaction in writing, or by other means accepted by Lincoln, along with all the information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. Additional paperwork may be required if these conditions are not met and you still wish to purchase the annuity in order to receive the applicable rates in effect at that time.

*Purchasers of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage (regardless of the rider effective date) may use any remaining Guaranteed Amount (if greater than the Account Value) to calculate the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk).

American Legacy® Design
Individual Variable Annuity Contracts
Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H 

May 1, 2024

Home Office:
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
1301 South Harrison Street
Fort Wayne, IN 46802
1-800-942-5500
www.LincolnFinancial.com

This prospectus describes an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company). Three separate share classes are described in this prospectus, each of which has different features and charges:

•

American Legacy® Design 1 (standard)

•

American Legacy® Design 2 (4-year surrender charge)

•

American Legacy® Design 3 (3% bonus)

In deciding which share class to purchase, you should consider which features are important to you, and the amount of ongoing fees, expenses, and surrender charges you are willing to accept relative to your needs. In deciding whether to purchase any of the optional benefits, you should consider the desirability of the benefit relative to its additional cost and to your needs.

The Contract is primarily for use as either a nonqualified annuity or qualified retirement annuity under Sections 408 (IRAs) and 408A (Roth IRAs) of the tax code. Generally, you do not pay federal income tax on the Contract's growth until it is paid out. You receive tax deferral for an IRA whether or not the funds are invested in an annuity contract. Further, if your Contract is a Roth IRA, you generally will not pay income tax on a distribution, provided certain conditions are met. Therefore, there should be reasons other than tax deferral for purchasing a qualified annuity contract.

The Contract is designed to accumulate Contract Value and to provide retirement income over a certain period of time or for life subject to certain conditions. The benefits offered under these contracts may be a variable or fixed amount, if available, or a combination of both. These contracts also offer a Death Benefit payable upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant. This prospectus is used by both new purchasers and current Contractowners. Certain benefits described in this prospectus are no longer available.

If you are a new investor in the Contract, you may cancel your Contract within ten days of receiving it without paying fees or penalties. In some states, and under certain scenarios, this free look or cancellation period may be longer. Upon cancellation, you will receive either a full refund of the amount you paid with your application or your total Contract Value. You should review this prospectus and consult with your registered representative for additional information about the specific cancellation terms that may apply.

The state in which your Contract is issued will govern whether or not certain features, riders, restrictions, limitations, charges and fees will apply to your Contract. All material state variations are discussed in this prospectus, however, non-material variations may not be discussed. You should refer to your Contract regarding state-specific features. Please check with your registered representative regarding availability.

The minimum initial Purchase Payment for the Contract is $10,000 ($25,000 for contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010). Additional Purchase Payments may be made to the Contract and must be at least $100 per payment ($25 if transmitted electronically), and at least $300 annually. We reserve the right to limit, restrict, or suspend Purchase Payments made to the Contract upon advance written notice.

Except as noted below, you choose whether your Contract Value accumulates on a variable or a fixed (guaranteed) basis or both. Your Contract may not offer a fixed account or if permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting Purchase Payments or transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. If any portion of your Contract Value is in the fixed account, we promise to pay you your principal and a minimum interest rate. We may impose restrictions on the fixed account for the life of your Contract or during certain periods. Also, an Interest Adjustment may be applied to any withdrawal, surrender, or transfer from the fixed account before the expiration date of a Guaranteed Period.

Expenses for contracts offering a Bonus Credit may be higher. Because of this, the amount of the Bonus Credits may, over time, be offset by additional fees and charges.

1

All Purchase Payments, Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits, if applicable, for benefits on a variable basis will be placed in Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H (Variable Annuity Account [VAA]). You take all the investment risk on the Contract Value and the retirement income for amounts placed into one or more of the Contract’s variable options (“Subaccounts”), which, in turn, invest in corresponding underlying funds. If the Subaccounts you select make money, your Contract Value goes up; if they lose money, it goes down. How much it goes up or down depends on the performance of the Subaccounts you select. We do not guarantee how any of the Subaccounts or their funds will perform. Also, neither the U.S. Government nor any federal agency insures or guarantees your investment in the Contract. The contracts are not bank deposits and are not endorsed by any bank or government agency.

All prospectuses and other shareholder reports, will be made available on www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. This prospectus gives you information about the Contract that you should know before you decide to buy a Contract and make a Purchase Payment. You should also review the prospectus for the funds and keep all prospectuses for future reference.

The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available online at Investor.gov.

2

Table of Contents 

Item	Page
Special Terms	4
Important Information You Should Consider About the American Legacy® Design Variable Annuity Contract	7
Overview of the Contract	9
Fee Tables	12
Principal Risks	16
Investments of the Variable Annuity Account	18
Charges and Other Deductions	20
The Contracts	28
Contracts Offered in this Prospectus	28
Purchase Payments	29
Bonus Credits	30
Persistency Credits	30
Transfers On or Before the Annuity Commencement Date	32
Surrenders and Withdrawals	34
Benefits Available Under the Contract	36
Death Benefits	41
Living Benefit Riders	45
Lincoln ProtectedPay® Lifetime Income Suite	46
4LATER® Select Advantage	53
i4LIFE® Advantage	58
Guaranteed Income Benefit	63
Annuity Payouts	69
Fixed Side of the Contract	71
Distribution of the Contracts	74
Federal Tax Matters	75
Additional Information	81
Voting Rights	81
Return Privilege	82
State Regulation	82
Records and Reports	82
Legal Proceedings	83
Appendix A — Funds Available Under The Contract	A-1
Appendix B — Investment Requirements	B-1
Appendix C — Discontinued Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders	C-1
Appendix D — Protected Annual Income Rates for Previous Rider Elections	D-1
Appendix E — Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages for Previous Rider Elections	E-1
Appendix F — Enhancement Rates for Previous Rider Elections	F-1
Appendix G — Current Rider Charges for Previous Elections	G-1

3

Special Terms

In this prospectus, the following terms have the indicated meanings:

Access Period—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, a defined period of time during which we make Regular Income Payments to you while you still have access to your Account Value. This means that you may make withdrawals, surrender the Contract, and have a Death Benefit.

Account or Variable Annuity Account (VAA)—The segregated investment account, Account H, into which we set aside and invest the assets for the variable side of the contract offered in this prospectus.

Account Value—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the initial Account Value is the Contract Value on the Valuation Date that i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, the Account Value on a Valuation Date equals the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, reduced by Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments and withdrawals.

Account Value Step-up—(may be referred to as Account Value lock-in in marketing materials)—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the Guaranteed Amount, Protected Income Base and/or Enhancement Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary, subject to certain conditions.

Accumulation Unit—A measure used to calculate Contract Value for the variable side of the contract before the Annuity Commencement Date and to calculate the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value during the Access Period.

Annuitant—The person upon whose life the annuity benefit payments are based, and upon whose death a Death Benefit may be paid.

Annuity Commencement Date—The Valuation Date when funds are withdrawn or converted into Annuity Units or fixed dollar payout for payment of retirement income benefits under the Annuity Payout option you select(other than i4LIFE® Advantage).

Annuity Payout—A regularly scheduled payment (under any of the available annuity options) that occurs after the Annuity Commencement Date (or Periodic Income Commencement Date if i4LIFE® Advantage has been elected). Payments may be variable or fixed, or a combination of both.

Annuity Unit—A measure used to calculate the amount of Annuity Payouts for the variable side of the contract after the Annuity Commencement Date.

Beneficiary—The person you choose to receive any Death Benefit paid if you die before the Annuity Commencement Date.

Benefit Year—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after

that. Under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, if the Contractowner elects a step-up, the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the step-up and each anniversary of the step-up after that.

Bonus Credit—If you select Design 3, the additional amount credited to the Contract for each Purchase Payment.

Contract—The variable annuity contract you have entered into with Lincoln Life.

Contractowner (you, your, owner)—The person who can exercise the rights within the Contract (decides on investment allocations, transfers, payout option, designates the Beneficiary, etc.). Usually, but not always, the Contractowner is the Annuitant.

Contract Value (may be referred to as Account Value in marketing materials)—At any given time before the Annuity Commencement Date, the total value of all Accumulation Units of a Contract, plus the value of the fixed side of the contract, if any.

Contract Year—Each 12-month period starting with the effective date of the Contract and starting with each contract anniversary after that.

Death Benefit—Before the Annuity Commencement Date, the amount payable to your designated Beneficiary if the Contractowner dies. As an alternative, the Contractowner may receive a Death Benefit on the death of the Annuitant prior to the Annuity Commencement Date.

Enhancement—A feature under certain Living Benefit Riders in which the Guaranteed Amount or Protected Income Base will be increased, subject to certain conditions and limitations.

Enhancement Base— The Enhancement Base is equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, and is adjusted as set forth in this prospectus. Under the Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite, the Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Enhancement Value. Under certain other Living Benefit Riders, a value used to calculate the amount added to the Protected Income Base when an Enhancement occurs.

Enhancement Period—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the 10-year period during which an Enhancement is in effect. Additional Enhancement Periods may be available, depending on which Living Benefit Rider you have elected, subject to certain conditions.

Enhancement Value—Under the Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite, a value to which the Protected Income Base will increase, subject to certain conditions and limitations.

Excess Withdrawals—Amounts withdrawn during a Benefit Year, as specified for each Living Benefit Rider, which decrease or eliminate the guarantees under the rider.

4

Good Order—The actual receipt at our Home Office of the requested transaction in writing or by other means we accept, along with all information and supporting legal documentation necessary to complete the transaction. The forms we provide will identify the necessary documentation. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in Good Order, and we reserve the right to change or waive any Good Order requirements at any time.

Guaranteed Amount—The value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.

Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option—A fixed Annuity Payout option available under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage under which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount for life.

Guaranteed Period—The period during which Contract Value in a fixed account will be credited a guaranteed interest rate.

i4LIFE® Advantage Credit—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the additional amount credited to the Contract if both the minimum Access Period requirement and threshold value are met.

Interest Adjustment—An upward or downward adjustment on the amount of Contract Value in the fixed account upon a transfer, withdrawal or surrender of Contract Value from the fixed account due to fluctuations in interest rates.

Investment Requirements—Restrictions in how you may allocate your Subaccount investments if you own certain Living Benefit Riders.

Lifetime Income Period—Under i4LIFE® Advantage, the period of time following the Access Period during which we make Regular Income Payments to you for the rest of your life (and Secondary Life, if applicable). During the Lifetime Income Period, you will no longer have access to your Account Value or receive a Death Benefit.

Lincoln Life (we, us, our, Company)—The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company.

Living Benefit Rider—A general reference to optional riders that provide some type of a minimum income guarantee while you are alive. If you select a Living Benefit Rider, Excess Withdrawals may have adverse effects on the benefit, and you may be subject to Investment Requirements.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal—The guaranteed periodic withdrawal available under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage.

Nursing Home Enhancement—A feature that will increase the Protected Annual Income amount under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) and Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 or the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage upon admittance to an approved nursing care facility, subject to certain conditions.

Periodic Income Commencement Date—The Valuation Date on which the amount of i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments are determined.

Persistency Credit—If you select Design 2 or Design 3, the additional amount credited to the Contract after a specified contract anniversary.

Protected Amount—The value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income under the Lincoln Wealth PassSM rider, as adjusted by additional Purchase Payments and all withdrawals.

Protected Annual Income—(may be referred to as Guaranteed Annual Income or Maximum Annual Withdrawal in your Contract)—The guaranteed periodic withdrawal amount available from the Contract each Benefit Year for life under certain Living Benefit Riders.

Protected Annual Income Payout Option—(may be referred to as Guaranteed Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option or Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option in your Contract)—A payout option available under certain Living Benefit Riders in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life.

Protected Income Base—(may be referred to as Income Base or Guaranteed Amount in your Contract)—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount or the minimum payouts under your Contract at a later date.

Purchase Payments—Amounts paid into the Contract other than Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits.

Rate Sheet—A prospectus supplement, that will be filed periodically, where we declare the current protected lifetime income fee, Enhancement rate, withdrawal rates and, if applicable, Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages under certain Living Benefit Riders.

Regular Income Payments—The variable, periodic income payments paid under i4LIFE® Advantage.

Secondary Life—Under certain Living Benefit Riders, the person designated by the Contractowner upon whose life the annuity payments will also be contingent.

Selling Group Individuals—A Contractowner who meets one of the following criteria at the time of the contract purchase and who purchases the Contract without the assistance of a registered representative under contract with us:

•

Employees and registered representatives of any member of the selling group (broker-dealers who have selling agreements with us for this product) and their spouses and minor children.

•

Officers, directors, trustees or bona-fide full-time employees and their spouses and minor children, of Lincoln Financial Group or any of the investment advisers of the funds currently being offered, or their affiliated or managed companies.

Subaccount—Each portion of the VAA that reflects investments in Accumulation and Annuity Units of a class of a particular fund available under the contracts. There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each class of a fund.

5

Valuation Date—Each day the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) is open for trading.

Valuation Period—The period starting at the close of trading (normally 4:00 p.m. New York time) on each day that the NYSE

is open for trading (Valuation Date) and ending at the close of such trading on the next Valuation Date.

6

Important Information You Should Consider About the American Legacy® Design Variable Annuity Contract 

FEES AND EXPENSES Location in Prospectus

Charges for Early Withdrawals If you make a withdrawal in excess of the free withdrawal amount before the 7th anniversary since your last Purchase Payment (Design 1 and Design 3) or 4th anniversary (Design 2), you may be assessed a surrender charge of up to 8.5% of the amount withdrawn, declining to 0% over that time period. For example, if you purchase a Contract and make a withdrawal of $100,000 during the first year after your Purchase Payment, you could be assessed a charge of up to $8,500 on the Purchase Payment withdrawn. •Fee Tables •Examples •Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge

Transaction Charges None, other than surrender charges. •N/A

Ongoing Fees and Expenses (annual charges)	Minimum and Maximum Annual Fee Table. The table below describes the fees and expenses that you may pay each year, depending on the options you choose. These charges do not reflect Bonus Credits or Persistency Credits. Please refer to your contract specifications page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.			•Fee Tables •Examples •Charges and Other Deductions
	Annual Fee	Minimum	Maximum
	Base Contract – Account Value Death Benefit	1.12%1	1.57%1
	Base Contract – Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit	1.17%1	1.62%1
	Base Contract – Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit	1.42%1	1.87%1
	Base Contract – Estate Enhancement Benefit	1.62%1	2.07%1
	Investment options (fund fees and expenses)	0.53%1	1.20%1
	Optional benefits available for an additional charge (for a single optional benefit, if elected)	0.40%1	2.75%2
	1 As a percentage of average Account Value in the Subaccounts.
	2 As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base.

Lowest and Highest Annual Cost Table. Because your Contract is customizable, the choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of owning your Contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could pay each year. This estimate assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the Contract, which could add surrender charges that substantially increase costs.
Lowest Annual Cost: $1,933	Highest Annual Cost: $6,619
Assumes:	Assumes:
•Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation •Least expensive combination of contract class, fund fees and expenses •No optional benefits •No surrender charges •No additional Purchase Payments, transfers, or withdrawals	•Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation •Most expensive combination of contract class, optional benefits, fund fees and expenses •No surrender charges •No additional Purchase Payments, transfers, or withdrawals

7

	RISKS	Location in Prospectus
Risk of Loss	•You can lose money by investing in this Contract, including loss of principal.	•Principal Risks •Investments of the Variable Annuity Account
Not a Short-Term Investment	•This Contract is not designed for short-term investing and is not appropriate for the investor who needs ready access to cash. •Withdrawals may result in surrender charges. If you take a withdrawal, any surrender charge will reduce the value of your Contract or the amount of money that you actually receive. •The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and living benefit protections mean the Contract is more beneficial to investors with a long-term investment horizon. •Withdrawals are subject to ordinary income tax and may be subject to tax penalties.	•Principal Risks •Surrender and Withdrawals •Fee Tables •Charges and Other Deductions •Living Benefit Riders
Risks Associated with Investment Options	•An investment in this Contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance of the investment options you choose. Performance can vary depending on the performance of the investment options available under the Contract. •Each investment option (including the fixed account option) has its own unique risks. •You should review the investment options before making an investment decision.	•Principal Risks •Investments of the Variable Annuity Account
Insurance Company Risks	•An investment in the Contract is subject to the risks related to Lincoln Life. Any obligations (including under the fixed account option), guarantees, or benefits of the Contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. If we experience financial distress, we may not be able to meet our obligations to you. More information about Lincoln Life, including our financial strength ratings, is available upon request by calling 1- 800-942-5500 or visiting www.LincolnFinancial.com.	•Principal Risks

	RESTRICTIONS	Location in Prospectus
Investments	•The frequency of transfers between investment options is restricted. There are also restrictions on the minimum amount that may be transferred from a variable option and the maximum amount that may be transferred from the fixed account option. •We reserve the right to remove or substitute any funds as investment options that are available under the Contract. •You are generally restricted to no more than 12 transfers between investment options per Contract Year. Your ability to transfer between investment options may also be restricted as a result of Investment Requirements if you have elected an optional benefit.	•Principal Risks •Investments of the Variable Annuity Account
Optional Benefits	•Optional benefits may limit or restrict the investment options that you may select under the Contract. We may change these restrictions in the future. •Optional benefit availability may vary by state of issue or selling broker-dealer. •Excess Withdrawals may reduce the value of an optional benefit by an amount greater than the value withdrawn or result in termination of the benefit. •You are required to have a certain level of Contract Value for some new rider elections. •We may modify or stop offering an optional benefit that is currently available at any time. •If you elect certain optional benefits, you may be limited in the amount of Purchase Payments that you can make (and when).	•The Contracts •Living Benefit Riders •Appendix B – Investment Requirements •Appendix C – Discontinued Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders

8

	TAXES	Location in Prospectus
Tax Implications	•Consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in and payments received under this Contract. •If you purchase the Contract through a tax-qualified plan or IRA, you do not get any additional tax benefit under the Contract. •Earnings on your Contract are taxed at ordinary income tax rates when you withdraw them, and you may have to pay a penalty if you take a withdrawal before age 59½.	•Federal Tax Matters
	CONFLICTS OF INTEREST	Location in Prospectus
Investment Professional Compensation	•Your registered representative may receive compensation for selling this Contract to you, both in the form of commissions and because we may share the revenue it earns on this Contract with the professional’s firm. (Your investment professional may be your broker, investment adviser, insurance agent, or someone else). •This potential conflict of interest may influence your investment professional to recommend this Contract over another investment.	•Distribution of the Contracts •Principal Risks
Exchanges	•If you already own a contract, some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you a new Contract in place of the one you own. You should only exchange your contract if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new Contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.	•The Contracts - Replacement of Existing Insurance

Overview of the Contract

Purpose of the Contract

The American Legacy® Design variable annuity contract is designed to accumulate Contract Value and to provide income over a certain period of time or for life subject to certain conditions. The Contract can supplement your retirement income by providing a stream of income payments during the payout phase. The benefits offered under the Contract may be a variable or fixed amount, if available, or a combination of both. The Contract also offers a Death Benefit payable to your designated Beneficiaries upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant.

This Contract may be appropriate if you have a long-term investment horizon. It is not intended for people who may need to make early or frequent withdrawals or intend to engage in frequent trading in the Subaccounts.

Phases of the Contract

Your Contract has two phases: (1) an accumulation (savings) phase, prior to the Annuity Commencement Date; and (2) a payout (income) phase, after the Annuity Commencement Date.

Accumulation (Savings) Phase. To help you accumulate assets during the accumulation phase, you can invest your payments and earnings in:

•

The variable options available under the Contract, each of which has an underlying mutual fund with its own investment objective, strategies, and risks; investment adviser(s); expense ratio; and performance history; and

•

A fixed account option, if available, which guarantees principal and a minimum interest rate.

A list of funds in which you currently can invest is provided in Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract.

Annuity (Income) Phase. You can elect to annuitize your Contract and turn your Contract Value into a stream of income payments (sometimes called Annuity Payouts), at which time the accumulation phase of the Contract ends. These payments may continue for a fixed period of years, for your entire life, or for the longer of a fixed period or your life. The payments may also be fixed or variable. Variable payments will vary based on the performance of the funds that you choose.

If you annuitize, your investments will be converted to income payments and you may no longer be able to choose to make withdrawals from your Contract. All benefits (including guaranteed minimum Death Benefits and living benefits) terminate upon annuitization.

However, several Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract provide lifetime income payments that may be guaranteed, and still allow you to make withdrawals and be eligible for a Death Benefit. Withdrawals that exceed a Protected Income Amount are Excess Withdrawals that will reduce and could eliminate the income payments and other benefits of the rider, including access to a Death Benefit.

9

Primary Features and Options of the Contract

Contracts. This prospectus describes three share classes that have different ongoing fees and surrender charges. Each share class offers the same Death Benefits, Living Benefit Riders, and payout (income) options. Each share class has its own base contract expense and applicable surrender charge schedule. In deciding whether to elect any of the optional Living Benefit Riders or Death Benefits, you should consider the desirability of the benefit relative to its costs and to your needs, as well as all applicable restrictions and Investment Requirements.

Accessing your money. During the Accumulation Phase you can surrender the Contract or withdraw part of the Contract Value. If you withdraw early, you may have to pay a surrender charge, an Interest Adjustment may apply and/or you may incur a tax penalty if you are younger than 59½.

Tax treatment. You can transfer money between investment options without tax implications, and earnings (if any) on your investments are generally tax-deferred. You are taxed only when: (1) you make a surrender or withdrawal; (2) you receive an income payment from the Contract; or (3) upon payment of a Death Benefit.

Death Benefits. Your Contract includes a Death Benefit that will be paid upon the death of either the Contractowner or the Annuitant. Optional Death Benefits that pay different amounts and have different fees may be available.

Optional Living Benefit Riders. For an additional fee, you may be able to purchase one of the Living Benefit Riders listed below. The availability of each rider is subject to state availability. Each rider offers one of the following:

•

a minimum withdrawal benefit:

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite.

•

a minimum Annuity Payout:

•

4LATER® Select Advantage, or

•

i4LIFE® Advantage with or without the Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk).

The following Living Benefit Riders are no longer available for purchase:

•

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk),

•

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0,

•

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage,

•

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage,

•

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage,

•

Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM,

•

Lincoln Wealth PassSM,

•

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage,

•

4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk),

•

4LATER® Advantage,

•

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (versions 1, 2, 3, 4),

•

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, and

•

Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage.

These Living Benefit Riders provide different methods to take income from your Contract Value or receive lifetime payments and provide certain guarantees, regardless of the investment performance of the Contract. These guarantees are subject to certain conditions, as set forth elsewhere in the prospectus.

There is no guarantee that any Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage) will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time. Excess Withdrawals under certain Living Benefit Riders may result in a reduction or premature termination of those benefits or riders. If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. (These Investment Requirements are explained in Appendix B- Investment Requirements.)

Additional Services. The additional services listed below are available under the Contract for no additional charge (unless otherwise indicated).

•

Dollar-cost averaging (DCA) allows you to transfer amounts from the DCA fixed account, if available, or certain Subaccounts into other Subaccounts on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available.

•

Portfolio rebalancing is an option that restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of Contract Value allocated to each Subaccount.

•

Cross-Reinvestment allows you to automatically transfer the excess amount to another investment option when the amount invested in an investment option exceeds a baseline amount.

10

•

Automatic Withdrawal Service (AWS) provides for an automatic periodic withdrawal of your Contract Value. Withdrawals under AWS are subject to applicable surrender charges and applicable Interest Adjustments (as well as taxes and tax penalties).

11

Fee Tables

The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the Contract. Please refer to your Contract Specifications page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.

The first table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the Contract, surrender or make withdrawals from the Contract, or transfer Contract Value between investment options, and/or the fixed account (if available). State premium taxes may also be deducted.

  TRANSACTION EXPENSES

  

	Design 1	Design 2	Design 3
Surrender charge (as a percentage of Purchase Payments surrendered/withdrawn):1	6.0%	6.0%	8.5%
We may also apply an Interest Adjustment to amounts being withdrawn, surrendered or transferred from a Guaranteed Period account (except for dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment, withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage and Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage). See Fixed Side of the Contract.

1

For both Design 1 and Design 3, the surrender charge percentage is reduced over a 7-year period at the following rates: Design 1 – 6%, 6%, 5%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%; Design 3 – 8.5%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%. For Design 2, the surrender charge percentage is reduced over a 4-year period at the following rate: 6%, 6%,

5%, 5%. We may reduce or waive this charge in certain situations. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge. 

The next table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay each year during the time that you own the Contract (not including fund fees and expenses). If you choose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.

  ANNUAL CONTRACT EXPENSES

  

	Design 1	Design 2	Design 3
Administrative Expense (Annual Account Fee):1	$35	$35	$35
Base Contract Expense: (as a percentage of average Account Value in the Subaccounts)2
Account Value Death Benefit	1.10%	1.55%	1.55%
Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit	1.15%	1.60%	1.60%
Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB)	1.40%	1.85%	1.85%
Estate Enhancement Benefit (EEB)	1.60%	2.05%	2.05%

 

Optional Benefit Expenses (Protected Lifetime Income Fees)	Single Life	Joint Life
Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite:3, 4
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.75%	2.75%
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected on and after May 21, 2018:3, 4
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	2.45%
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to May 21, 2018:4, 5
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.00%	2.00%
Current Initial Annual Charge	1.25%	1.50%
Lincoln Market Select® Advantage:3, 4
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	2.45%
Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage:3, 4
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	2.45%
Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM:3, 4
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	N/A
Lincoln Wealth PassSM:3, 6

12

Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge
Age at Issue 0 – 65	2.25%	N/A
Age at Issue 66 – 80	2.25%	N/A
4LATER® Select Advantage riders elected on or after November 28, 2022:3, 7
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.75%	2.75%
4LATER® Select Advantage riders elected prior to November 28, 2022:3, 7
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	2.45%
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0:4, 8
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.00%	2.00%
Current Charge	1.25%	1.50%
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage:9
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	1.50%	1.50%
Current Charge	1.25%	1.25%
Additional Charge for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus	0.15%	0.15%
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option:10
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	1.50%	1.50%
Current Charge	1.00%	1.25%
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option:10
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	0.95%	N/A
Current Charge	0.95%	N/A
4LATER® Advantage:11
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	1.50%	N/A
Current Charge	0.90%	N/A
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk):5, 7
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.00%	2.00%
Current Charge	1.25%	1.50%
Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage:
Acceleration Benefit Charge12
Guaranteed Maximum Charge Level Benefit or Growth Benefit	1.50%	N/A
Current Charge Growth Benefit	0.50%	N/A
Current Charge Level Benefit	0.35%	N/A
Extension Benefit Charge13
Guaranteed Maximum Charge	N/A	N/A
Current Charge (Contractowners ages 70-74)	0.76%	N/A
Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge14
Guaranteed Maximum Charge	N/A	N/A
Current Charge (Contractowners ages 70-74)	0.14%	N/A
i4LIFE® Advantage:15
Current Charge	0.40%	0.40%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) riders elected on or after May 21, 2018:3, 16
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	2.45%
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit:16
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.25%	2.45%
Current Charge	1.10%	1.30%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to May 21, 2018 and i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4):16
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	2.00%	2.00%
Current Charge	0.95%	1.15%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3):17
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	1.50%	1.50%
Current Charge	0.95%	0.95%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2):17
Guaranteed Maximum Annual Charge	1.50%	1.50%
Current Charge	0.75%	0.75%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1):17

13

Current Charge 0.50% 0.50%

1

During the accumulation phase, the account fee will be deducted from your Contract Value on each contract anniversary, or upon surrender of the Contract. The account fee will be waived if your Contract Value is $100,000 or more on the contract anniversary (or date of surrender). This account fee may be less in some states and will be waived after the fifteenth Contract Year, regardless of your Contract Value.

2

Each base contract expense includes an administrative charge of 0.10%.

3

The current charge for new elections of this rider is disclosed in a Rate Sheet. The rates and/or percentages from previous effective periods are included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

4

As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups and Enhancements, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Contract Value proportionately on a quarterly basis. This same fee applies when transitioning to the appropriate version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (if available). See Charges and Other Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for more information about the Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite. A discussion of the charges for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), Lincoln Market Select® Advantage and Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

5

The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above (a) if the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary; or (b) upon the earlier of (1) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (2) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000.

6

As an annualized percentage of the Protected Amount, as increased by subsequent Purchase Payments and decreased by Excess Withdrawals. This charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The current protected lifetime income fee rate will be less than or equal to the stated maximum charge rate and will be disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. See Charges and Other Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for more information.

7

As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credit, Account Value Step-ups and Enhancements, and decreased by withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. This same fee applies when transitioning to the appropriate version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. See Charges and Other Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for more information about your Living Benefit Rider. A discussion of the charges for 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

8

The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the earlier of (a) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000 or (c) if the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary.

9

As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, Account Value Step-ups, Enhancements and the 200% step-up and decreased for withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The current annual fee rate may increase to the current annual fee listed above upon the earlier of (a) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. A discussion of the fees for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

10

As an annualized percentage of the Guaranteed Amount, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits and step-ups and decreased for withdrawals. This charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The current annual charge rate may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the next election of a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount. A discussion of the charges for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

11

As an annualized percentage of the Protected Income Base, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, automatic 15% enhancements, and resets and decreased for withdrawals. This fee is deducted from the Subaccounts on a quarterly basis. The protected lifetime income fee may increase to the current annual fee listed above upon the next election to reset the Protected Income Base. A discussion of the fees for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

12

The Acceleration Benefit Charge rate is assessed against the LTC Guaranteed Amount as of the date the charge is deducted up to the maximum allowable charge rate of 1.50% of the LTC Guaranteed Amount. The Acceleration Benefit Charge percentage rates are different for the Level Benefit and Growth Benefit. A discussion of the charges for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

13

The Extension Benefit Charge rate is assessed against the Extension Benefit as of the date the charge is deducted. The charge varies based upon your age as of the contract date. There is no maximum guaranteed charge for the Extension Benefit. The current Extension Benefit Charge rate may increase after the contract date subject to prior state regulatory approval, although it will be increased for all Contractowners in the same class as determined in a nondiscriminatory manner. The highest current charge rate will be 0.68% (0.17% quarterly) for contracts issued in the following states: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY. For all other states, the highest charge rate will be 0.76% (0.19% quarterly). A discussion of the charges for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

14

The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge rate is assessed against the Extension Benefit as of the date the charge is deducted. The charge varies based upon your age as of the contract date. There is no maximum guaranteed charge for the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. The current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge rate may increase after the contract date subject to prior state regulatory approval, although it will be the same for all Contractowners in the same class as determined in a nondiscriminatory manner. The highest current charge rate will be 0.14% (0.035% quarterly) for the state of Texas, 0.13% (0.0325% quarterly) for the state of California, and 0.11% (0.0275% quarterly) for contracts issued in the following states: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY. For all other states, the highest charge rate will be 0.12% (0.03% quarterly). A discussion of the charges for this closed rider can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

15

As an annualized percentage of average Account Value, computed daily. This charge is assessed only on and after the effective date of i4LIFE® Advantage and is added to your base contract expense. These charges continue during the Access Period. During the Lifetime Income Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate of 0.40% is added to the Account Value Death Benefit base contract expense. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Charge for more information.

16

These charges are added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charges to comprise the total charges. During the Lifetime Income Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is the Account Value Death Benefit base contract expense plus the i4LIFE® Advantage charge. The current annual charge rate for Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to 5/21/2018 and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), may increase periodically to the rate listed above upon the next automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for more information.

14

17

This charge is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charges to comprise the total charges. During the Lifetime Income Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate of 1.50%. The current annual charge for versions 2 and 3 may increase periodically to the rate listed above if

you elect an additional step-up period. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for more information. 

The next item shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses charged by the funds that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the Contract. A complete list of funds available under the Contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in an appendix to this prospectus. See Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract. 

Annual Fund Expenses	Minimum	Maximum
Expenses that are deducted from the fund assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other expenses before reimbursements.	0.53 %	1.20 %
Expenses that are deducted from the fund assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements.1	0.48 %	1.16 %

1

Any expense waivers or reimbursements will remain in effect until at least April 30, 2025, and can only be terminated early with approval by the fund’s board of directors.

EXAMPLES

The following Examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, contract fees, annual contract expenses, and annual fund fees and expenses.

The first Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the maximum fees and expenses of any of the funds and that EEB Death Benefit and Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite at the guaranteed maximum charge are in effect. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:

1) If you surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 

	1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
Design 1	$11,552	$22,159	$33,310	$61,775
Design 2	$11,995	$23,435	$31,340	$65,301
Design 3	$14,576	$25,686	$36,767	$66,187

2) If you annuitize or do not surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 

	1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
Design 1	$5,552	$17,159	$29,310	$61,775
Design 2	$5,995	$18,435	$31,340	$65,301
Design 3	$6,076	$18,686	$31,767	$66,187

The next Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year, the maximum fees and expenses of any of the funds and that i4LIFE® Advantage with the EGMDB Death Benefit and i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) at the guaranteed maximum charge are in effect. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:

1) If you surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 

	1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
Design 1	$11,438	$21,307	$31,071	$53,530
Design 2	$11,873	$22,529	$28,968	$56,647
Design 3	$14,373	$24,529	$33,968	$56,647

2) If you annuitize or do not surrender your Contract at the end of the applicable time period: 

15

	1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
Design 1	$5,438	$16,307	$27,071	$53,530
Design 2	$5,873	$17,529	$28,968	$56,647
Design 3	$5,873	$17,529	$28,968	$56,647

For more information, see Charges and Other Deductions in this prospectus, and the prospectus for the funds. Premium taxes may also apply, although they do not appear in the examples. The examples do not reflect any applicable Bonus Credits or Persistency Credits. Different fees and expenses not reflected in the examples may be imposed during a period in which Annuity Payouts are made. See Annuity Payouts. These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses. Actual expenses may be more or less than those shown.

Principal Risks

The principal risks of investing in the Contract include:

Risk of Loss. You can lose money by investing in this Contract, including loss of principal. Neither the U.S. Government nor any federal agency insures or guarantees your investment in the Contract.

Short-Term Investment Risk. This Contract is not designed for short-term investing and is not appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash. The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and living benefit protections also mean that the Contract is more beneficial to investors with a long-term horizon.

Variable Option Risk. You take all the investment risk on the Contract Value and the retirement income for amounts placed into one or more of the Subaccounts, which invest in corresponding underlying funds. If the Subaccounts you select make money, your Contract Value goes up; if they lose money, your Contract Value goes down. How much it goes up or down depends on the performance of the Subaccounts you select. Each underlying fund is subject to its own investment risks. When you invest in a Subaccount, you are exposed to the investment risks of the underlying fund.

Investment Requirements Risk. If you elect an optional benefit, you may be subject to Investment Requirements, which means you may not be permitted to invest in certain investment options or you may be permitted to invest in certain investment options only to a limited extent. Failing to satisfy applicable Investment Requirements may result in the termination of your optional benefit. We impose Investment Requirements to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under an optional benefit. In turn, your compliance with the Investment Requirements could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and the value of your guaranteed benefits.

Managed Volatility Fund Risk. Certain underlying funds may employ risk management strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. These funds usually, but not always, have “Managed Risk” or “Managed Volatility” in the name of the fund. These strategies could limit the upside participation of the fund in rising equity markets relative to other funds. The Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract also provide protection in the event of a market downturn. Likewise, there are additional costs associated with the Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders, which can limit the Contract’s upside participation in the markets. Many of these funds are included in the Investment Requirements associated with Living Benefit Riders. Risk management strategies, in periods of high market volatility, could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and the value of your guaranteed benefits. For more information on these funds and their risk management strategies, please see the funds’ prospectuses.

Withdrawal Risk (Illiquidity Risk). You should carefully consider the risks associated with taking a withdrawal or surrender under the Contract. If you take a withdrawal or surrender the Contract, any applicable surrender charges will reduce the value of your Contract or the amount of money that you ultimately receive. The proceeds of your withdrawal or surrender may be subject to ordinary income taxes, including a tax penalty if you are younger than age 59½.

You should also consider the impact that a withdrawal may have on the standard and optional benefits under your Contract. For example, under certain Living Benefit Riders, excess or early withdrawals may reduce the value of the guaranteed benefit by an amount greater than the amount withdrawn and could result in termination of the benefit.

Transfer Risk. Your ability to transfer amounts between investment options is subject to restrictions. You are generally restricted to no more than 12 transfers per Contract Year. There are also restrictions on the minimum amount that may be transferred from a variable option and the maximum amount that may be transferred from the fixed account option. If permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. Your ability to transfer between investment options may also be restricted as a result of Investment Requirements if you have elected an optional benefit.

Purchase Payment Risk. Your ability to make additional Purchase Payments may be restricted under the Contract, depending on the version of the Contract that you own, the optional benefits that you have elected, and other factors. You must obtain our approval for

16

Purchase Payments totaling $2 million or more. This amount includes total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by us or our affiliates (excluding any version of Lincoln Investor Advantage®, Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2SM contracts) for the same owner, joint owner, Annuitant, or Secondary Life. We reserve the right to further limit, restrict or suspend the ability to make additional Purchase Payments under the Contract.

If you elect a Living Benefit Rider (other than any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit), after the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year.

If you elect any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, no additional Purchase Payments will be allowed at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit, no additional Purchase Payments will be allowed after the Periodic Income Commencement Date for nonqualified contracts. If you elected Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider, no additional Purchase Payments can be made. For more information about these restrictions and limitations, see The Contracts – Purchase Payments.

Bonus Credit Risk. Expenses for contracts offering a Bonus Credit may be higher than similar contracts without a Bonus Credit. Because of this, the amount of the Bonus Credit may be more than offset by additional charges associated with the Bonus Credit.

Election of Optional Benefit Risk. There are a variety of optional benefits under the Contract that are designed for different financial goals and to protect against different financial risks. There is a risk that you may not choose the benefit or benefits that are best suited for you based on your present or future needs and circumstances. In addition, if you elect an optional benefit and do not use it, or if the contingencies upon which the benefit depend never occur, you will have paid for a benefit that did not provide a financial return. There is also a risk that a financial return of an optional benefit, if any, will ultimately be less than the amount you paid for the benefit. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which optional benefits (if any) are appropriate for you.

Fee and Expense Risk. You are subject to the risk that we may increase certain contract fees and charges, and that underlying fund expenses may increase.

Financial Strength and Claims-Paying Ability Risk. An investment in the Contract is subject to the risks related to us, Lincoln Life. Any obligations (including under the fixed account option), guarantees, or benefits of the Contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. If we experience financial distress, we may not be able to meet our obligations to you.

Cybersecurity and Business Interruption Risks. We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our annuity business. Because our business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyber-attacks, including ransomware and malware attacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, loss, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. The risk of cyber-attacks may be higher during periods of geopolitical turmoil. Such systems failures and cyber-attacks affecting us, any third-party administrator, the underlying funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the underlying funds, impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit value, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines, litigation, and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cyber security risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest, which may cause the funds underlying your Contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the underlying funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your Contract due to system disruptions, cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future.

In addition to cyber security risks, we are exposed to risks related to natural and man-made disasters, such as (but not limited to) storms, fires, floods, earthquakes, public health crises, malicious acts, and terrorist acts, any of which could adversely affect our ability to conduct business. A natural or man-made disaster, including a pandemic (such as COVID-19), could affect the ability or willingness of our employees or the employees of our service providers to perform their job responsibilities. They could also result in our business operations being less efficient than under normal circumstances and could lead to delays in our processing of contract-related transactions, including orders from Contractowners. Disasters may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which we rely, impact our ability to calculate accumulation unit values, or have other possible negative impacts. They may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest, which may negatively affect the value of the underlying funds and the value of your Contract. There can be no assurance that we or the underlying funds or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts associated with natural and man-made disasters.

17

Financial Statements

The December 31, 2023 financial statements of the VAA and the December 31, 2023 consolidated financial statements of Lincoln Life are located in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI). Instructions on how to obtain a free copy of the SAI are provided on the last page of this prospectus.

Investments of the Variable Annuity Account

You decide the Subaccount(s) to which you allocate Purchase Payments. For owners of the Design 3 contract, Bonus Credits are allocated to the Subaccounts at the same time and at the same percentage as the Purchase Payments being made. There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each class of each fund. You may change your allocation without penalty or charges. Shares of the funds will be sold at net asset value with no initial sales charge to the VAA in order to fund the contracts. The funds are required to redeem fund shares at net asset value upon our request.

Descriptions of the Funds

Information regarding each fund, including (1) its name, (2) its type or investment objective, (3) its investment adviser and any sub-investment adviser, (4) current expenses, and (5) performance is available in Appendix A: Funds Available Under the Contract. Each fund has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the fund. Paper or electronic copies of the fund prospectuses may be obtained by contacting our Home Office or visiting www.lfg.com/VAprospectus.

Certain Payments We Receive with Regard to the Funds

We (and/or our affiliates) incur expenses in promoting, marketing, and administering the contracts and the underlying funds. With respect to a fund, including affiliated funds, the adviser and/or distributor, or an affiliate thereof, may make payments to us (or an affiliate) for certain services we provide on behalf of the funds. Such services include, but are not limited to, recordkeeping; aggregating and processing purchase and redemption orders; providing Contractowners with statements showing their positions within the funds; processing dividend payments; providing subaccounting services for shares held by Contractowners; and forwarding shareholder communications, such as proxies, shareholder reports, dividend and tax notices, and printing and delivering prospectuses and updates to Contractowners. It is anticipated that such payments will be based on a percentage of assets of the particular fund attributable to the contracts along with certain other variable contracts issued or administered by us (or an affiliate). These percentages are negotiated and vary with each fund. Some advisers and/or distributors may pay us significantly more than other advisers and/or distributors and the amount we receive may be substantial. These percentages currently range up to 0.26%. We (or our affiliates) may profit from these payments. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the investment advisory fee deducted from fund assets. Contractowners, through their indirect investment in the funds, bear the costs of these investment advisory fees (see the funds' prospectuses for more information). Additionally, a fund's adviser and/or distributor or its affiliates may provide us with certain services that assist us in the distribution of the contracts and may pay us and/or certain affiliates amounts for marketing programs and sales support, as well as amounts to participate in training and sales meetings.

In addition to the payments described above, the American Funds and LVIP Funds offered as part of this Contract make payments to us under their distribution plans (12b-1 plans) for the marketing and distribution of fund shares. The payment rates range up to 0.35% based on the amount of assets invested in those funds. Payments made out of the assets of the fund will reduce the amount of assets that otherwise would be available for investment, and will reduce the fund's investment return. The dollar amount of future asset-based fees is not predictable because these fees are a percentage of the fund's average net assets, which can fluctuate over time. If, however, the value of the fund goes up, then so would the payment to us (or our affiliates). Conversely, if the value of the funds goes down, payments to us or our affiliates would decrease.

Selection of the Funds

We select the funds offered through the Contract based on several factors, including, without limitation, asset class coverage, the strength of the manager’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, performance, the capability and qualification of each sponsoring investment firm, and whether the fund is affiliated with us.

As noted above, a factor we may consider during the initial selection process is whether the fund (or an affiliate, investment adviser or distributor of the fund) being evaluated is an affiliate of ours and whether we are compensated for providing administrative, marketing, and/or support services that would otherwise be provided by the fund, its investment adviser or its distributor.

Some funds pay us significantly more than others and the amount we receive may be substantial. We often receive more revenue from an affiliated fund than one that is not affiliated with us. These factors give us an incentive to select a fund that yields more revenue, and this is often an affiliated fund.

We may also consider the ability of the fund to help manage volatility and our risks associated with the guarantees we provide under the Contract and under optional riders, especially the Living Benefit Riders.

18

We review each fund periodically after it is selected. We reserve the right to remove a fund or restrict allocation of additional Purchase Payments to a fund if we determine the fund no longer meets one or more of the factors and/or if the fund has not attracted significant Contractowner assets.

Finally, when we develop a variable annuity product in cooperation with a fund family or distributor (e.g., a “private label” product), we generally will include funds based on recommendations made by the fund family or distributor, whose selection criteria may differ from our selection criteria. Certain funds offered as part of this Contract have similar investment objectives and policies to other portfolios managed by the adviser. The investment results of the funds, however, may be higher or lower than the other portfolios that are managed by the adviser or sub-adviser. There can be no assurance, and no representation is made, that the investment results of any of the funds will be comparable to the investment results of any other portfolio managed by the adviser or sub-adviser, if applicable.

Certain funds invest their assets in other funds. As a result, you will pay fees and expenses at both fund levels. This will reduce your investment return. These arrangements are referred to as funds of funds or master-feeder funds, which may have higher expenses than funds that invest directly in debt or equity securities. An adviser affiliated with us manages some of the available funds of funds. Our affiliates may promote the benefits of such funds to Contractowners and/or suggest that Contractowners consider whether allocating some or all of their Contract Value to such portfolios is consistent with their desired investment objectives. In doing so, we may be subject to conflicts of interest insofar as we may derive greater revenues from the affiliated fund of funds than certain other funds available to you under your Contract.

Certain funds may employ risk management strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. These funds usually, but not always, have “Managed Risk” or “Managed Volatility” in the name of the fund. These strategies could limit the upside participation of the fund in rising equity markets relative to other funds. The Death Benefits and Living Benefit Riders offered under the Contract also provide protection in the event of a market downturn. Risk management strategies, in periods of high market volatility, could limit your participation in market gains; this may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and, in turn, the value of any guaranteed benefit that is tied to investment performance.

For more information on these funds and their risk management strategies, please see the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which combination of investment choices are appropriate for you.

Fund Shares

We will purchase shares of the funds at net asset value and direct them to the appropriate Subaccounts of the VAA. We will redeem sufficient shares of the appropriate funds to pay Annuity Payouts, Death Benefits, surrender/withdrawal proceeds or for other purposes described in the Contract. If you want to transfer all or part of your investment from one Subaccount to another, we may redeem shares held in the first Subaccount and purchase shares of the other. Redeemed shares are retired, but they may be reissued later.

Shares of the funds are not sold directly to the general public. They are sold to us, and may be sold to other insurance companies, for investment of the assets of the Subaccounts established by those insurance companies to fund variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts.

Reinvestment of Dividends and Capital Gain Distributions

All dividends and capital gain distributions of the funds are automatically reinvested in shares of the distributing funds at their net asset value on the date of distribution. Dividends are not paid out to Contractowners as additional units, but are reflected as changes in unit values.

Addition, Deletion or Substitution of Investments

We reserve the right, within the law, to make certain changes to the structure and operation of the VAA at our discretion and without your consent. We may add, delete, or substitute funds for all Contractowners or only for certain classes of Contractowners. New or substitute funds may have different fees and expenses, and may only be offered to certain classes of Contractowners.

Substitutions may be made with respect to existing investments or the investment of future Purchase Payments, or both. In the event of a substitution, the Contract Value allocated to the existing fund will be allocated to the substitute fund. Any future allocations to the substitute fund will automatically be allocated according to the instructions we have on file for you unless otherwise instructed by you. If we don’t have instructions from you on file, your Purchase Payments will be allocated to the substitute fund.

We may close Subaccounts to allocations of Purchase Payments or Contract Value, or both, at any time in our sole discretion. The funds, which sell their shares to the Subaccounts pursuant to participation agreements, also may terminate these agreements and discontinue offering their shares to the Subaccounts. In the event of a fund closure, any Contract Value you have invested in the closed fund will remain in that fund until you transfer it elsewhere. Any future allocation to the closed fund will be allocated in accordance with the instructions we have on file for you unless you instruct us otherwise.

19

In addition, a Subaccount may become unavailable due to the liquidation of its underlying fund portfolio. To the extent permitted by applicable law, upon notice to you and unless you otherwise instruct us, we will re-allocate any Contract Value in the liquidated fund to the money market subaccount. Any future allocations to the liquidated fund will automatically be allocated according to the instructions we have on file for you unless you instruct us otherwise.

From time to time, certain underlying funds may merge with other funds. If a merger of an underlying fund occurs, the Contract Value allocated to the existing fund will be merged into the surviving underlying fund. Any future allocations, including future Purchase Payments, to the merged fund will automatically be allocated to the surviving underlying fund unless you instruct us otherwise.

We may also:

•

remove, combine, or add Subaccounts and make the new Subaccounts available to you at our discretion;

•

transfer assets supporting the contracts from one Subaccount to another or from the VAA to another separate account;

•

combine the VAA with other separate accounts and/or create new separate accounts;

•

deregister the VAA under the 1940 Act; and

•

operate the VAA as a management investment company under the 1940 Act or as any other form permitted by law.

We may modify the provisions of the contracts to reflect changes to the Subaccounts and the VAA and to comply with applicable law. We will not make any changes without any necessary approval by the SEC. We will also provide you written notice.

Charges and Other Deductions

We will deduct the charges described below to cover our costs and expenses, services provided and risks assumed under the contracts. We incur certain costs and expenses for the distribution and administration of the contracts and for providing the benefits payable thereunder.

Our administrative services include:

•

processing applications for and issuing the contracts;

•

processing purchases and redemptions of fund shares as required (including dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment, portfolio rebalancing, and automatic withdrawal services – See Additional Services and the SAI for more information on these programs);

•

maintaining records;

•

administering Annuity Payouts;

•

furnishing accounting and valuation services (including the calculation and monitoring of daily Subaccount values);

•

reconciling and depositing cash receipts;

•

providing contract confirmations;

•

providing toll-free inquiry services; and

•

furnishing telephone and other electronic surrenders, withdrawals and fund transfer services.

The risks we assume include:

•

the risk that lifetime payments from Living Benefit Riders will exceed the Contract Value;

•

the risk that Death Benefits paid will exceed the actual Contract Value;

•

the risk that, if a Guaranteed Income Benefit rider is in effect, the required Regular Income Payments will exceed the Account Value;

•

the risk that Annuitants upon which Annuity Payouts are based live longer than we assumed when we calculated our guaranteed rates (these rates are incorporated in the Contract and cannot be changed);

•

the risk that more Contractowners than expected will qualify for waivers of the surrender charge;

•

the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges (which we cannot change);

•

the risk that the payments of the Acceleration and Growth Benefit under the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider exceed the Contract Value;

•

the risk the Covered Life under the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider will live longer while receiving benefits than we assumed in the rate setting process (these rates may change subject to state insurance department approval); and

•

the risk that the actual number of claims under the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider exceeds the number of claims we assumed in the rate setting process (these rates may change subject to state insurance department approval).

The amount of a charge may not necessarily correspond to the costs associated with providing the services or benefits indicated by the description of the charge. For example, the surrender charge collected may not fully cover all of the sales and distribution expenses actually incurred by us. Any remaining expenses will be paid from our general account which may consist, among other things, of proceeds derived from base contract expenses deducted from the account. A portion of the base contract expenses and a portion of the surrender charges are assessed to fully or partially recoup Bonus Credits paid into the Contract by us when Purchase

20

Payments are made. We may profit from one or more of the fees and charges deducted under the Contract. We may use these profits for any corporate purpose, including financing the distribution of the contracts.

Obligations under the contracts that are funded by our general account (rather than the Variable Annuity Account) include (1) the obligation to make lifetime or other benefit payments under Living Benefit Riders that exceed the Contract Value; (2) the obligation to pay Death Benefits that exceed the Contract Value; (3) the obligation to pay Annuity Payouts that exceed the Contract Value. Payment of these benefits and obligations is subject to our claims-paying ability and financial strength. We are also responsible for providing for all of the administrative services necessary in connection with the contracts (and bearing all of the associated expenses).

Deductions from the VAA

A charge is applied to the average daily net asset value of the Subaccounts based on which share class and Death Benefit you choose. Those charges are equal to an annual rate of: 

	Account Value Death Benefit	Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit	Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB)	Estate Enhancement Benefit (EEB)*
Design 1 (standard):
Mortality and expense risk charge	1.00 %	1.05 %	1.30 %	1.50 %
Administrative charge	0.10 %	0.10 %	0.10 %	0.10 %
Total Base Contract Expenses	1.10 %	1.15 %	1.40 %	1.60 %
Design 2 (4 year surrender charge):
Mortality and expense risk charge	1.45 %	1.50 %	1.75 %	1.95 %
Administrative charge	0.10 %	0.10 %	0.10 %	0.10 %
Total Base Contract Expenses	1.55 %	1.60 %	1.85 %	2.05 %
Design 3 (3% bonus)
Mortality and expense risk charge	1.45 %	1.50 %	1.75 %	1.95 %
Administrative charge	0.10 %	0.10 %	0.10 %	0.10 %
Total Base Contract Expenses	1.55 %	1.60 %	1.85 %	2.05 %

*This Death Benefit is no longer available for purchase.

Surrender Charge

A surrender charge applies (except as described below) to surrenders and withdrawals of Purchase Payments that have been invested for the period below. The surrender charge is calculated separately for each Purchase Payment. The contract anniversary is the annually occurring date beginning with the effective date of the Contract. For example, if the effective date of your Contract is January 2nd, your contract anniversary would be on January 2nd of each subsequent year. 

	Surrender charge as a percentage of the surrendered or withdrawn Purchase Payments
Number of contract anniversaries since Purchase Payment was invested	Design 1	Design 2	Design 3
0	6.0 %	6.0 %	8.5 %
1	6.0 %	6.0 %	8.0 %
2	5.0 %	5.0 %	7.0 %
3	5.0 %	5.0 %	6.0 %
4	4.0 %	0.0 %	5.0 %
5	3.0 %	0.0 %	4.0 %
6	2.0 %	0.0 %	3.0 %
7	0.0 %	0.0 %	0.0 %

A surrender charge does not apply to:

•

A surrender or withdrawal of a Purchase Payment beyond the seventh anniversary (Design 1 or Design 3), or fourth anniversary (Design 2), since the Purchase Payment was invested;

•

Withdrawals of Contract Value during a Contract Year to the extent that the total Contract Value withdrawn during the current Contract Year does not exceed the free amount. The free amount is equal to the greater of 10% of the current Contract Value or 10% of the total Purchase Payments (this does not apply upon surrender of the Contract);

21

•

Purchase Payments used in the calculation of the initial benefit payment to be made under an Annuity Payout option, other than the i4LIFE® Advantage option. If you have elected the Design 3 contract, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this provision will apply (except for contracts issued in the state of Oregon);

•

A surrender or withdrawal of any Purchase Payments, as a result of permanent and total disability of the Contractowner as defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the tax code, if the disability occurred after the effective date of the Contract and before the 65th birthday of the Contractowner. For contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, a different definition of permanent and total disability applies. If you have elected the Design 3 contract, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this provision will apply;

•

A surviving spouse at the time he or she assumes ownership of the Contract as a result of the death of the original Contractowner (however, the surrender charge schedule of the original Contract will continue to apply to the spouse's Contract);

•

A surrender or withdrawal of any Purchase Payments, as a result of the admittance of the Contractowner to an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility, where the admittance into the nursing home occurs after the effective date of the Contract and the owner has been confined for at least 90 consecutive days. If you have elected the Design 3 contract, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this provision will apply;

•

A surrender or withdrawal of any Purchase Payments as a result of the diagnosis of a terminal illness of the Contractowner. Diagnosis of a terminal illness must be after the effective date of the Contract and results in a life expectancy of less than one year as determined by a qualified professional medical practitioner. If you have elected the Design 3 contract, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this provision will apply;

•

A surrender of the Contract as a result of the death of the Contractowner, joint owner, or Annuitant;

•

A surrender or annuitization of any applicable Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits;

•

Purchase Payments when used in the calculation of the initial Account Value under the i4LIFE® Advantage option;

•

Regular Income Payments made under i4LIFE® Advantage including any payments to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit, or periodic payments made under any Annuity Payout option made available by us;

•

Withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount or the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders, subject to certain conditions;

•

Long-Term Care Benefit payments under the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider.

For purposes of calculating the surrender charge on withdrawals, we assume that:

1.

The free amount will be withdrawn from Purchase Payments on a first in-first out (“FIFO”) basis.

2.

Prior to the seventh anniversary (Design 1 and Design 3), and the fourth anniversary (Design 2), any amount withdrawn above the free amount during a Contract Year will be withdrawn in the following order:

•

from Purchase Payments (on a FIFO basis) until exhausted; then

•

from earnings until exhausted; then

•

from any applicable Bonus Credits.

The example below shows the calculation of the surrender charge on a withdrawal from the Design 3 contract based on the following assumptions:

•

$50,000 initial Purchase Payment; receives a $1,500 Bonus Credit (3%)

•

$30,000 Purchase Payment beginning year 5; receives a $900 Bonus Credit (3%)

•

$100,000 Contract Value in year 6 ($17,600 attributed to earnings; $2,400 to Bonus Credits; $80,000 to Purchase Payments)

•

$60,000 withdrawal beginning year 6

The $60,000 withdrawal is subject to surrender charges of $2,400 calculated as follows:

•

$10,000 is attributed to the free amount (greater of 10% of Contract Value ($10,000) or 10% of Purchase Payments ($8,000)); therefore, no surrender charges are assessed on the first $10,000

•

$40,000 of the remaining initial Purchase Payment subject to 4% surrender charge = $1,600

•

$10,000 of the next Purchase Payment subject to 8% surrender charge = $800

3.

On or after the seventh anniversary (Design 1 and Design 3), and the fourth anniversary (Design 2), any amount withdrawn above the free amount during a Contract Year will be withdrawn in the following order:

•

from Purchase Payments (on a FIFO basis) to which a surrender charge no longer applies until exhausted; then

•

from earnings and any applicable Persistency Credits until exhausted; then

•

from any applicable Bonus Credits attributable to Purchase Payments to which a surrender charge no longer applies until exhausted; then

•

from Purchase Payments (on a FIFO basis) to which a surrender charge still applies until exhausted; then

•

from any applicable Bonus Credits attributable to Purchase Payments to which a surrender charge still applies.

22

The example below shows the calculation of the surrender charge on a withdrawal from the Design 3 contract based on the following assumptions:

•

$50,000 initial Purchase Payment; receives a $1,500 Bonus Credit (3%)

•

$30,000 Purchase Payment beginning year 5; receives a $900 Bonus Credit (3%)

•

$150,000 Contract Value in year 9 ($67,600 attributed to earnings and Persistency Credits; $2,400 to Bonus Credits; $80,000 to Purchase Payments)

•

$125,000 withdrawal beginning year 9

$119,100 of the $125,000 withdrawal is not subject to surrender charges, and is broken down as follows:

•

$15,000 attributed to the free amount (greater of 10% of Contract Value ($15,000) or 10% of Purchase Payments ($8,000))

•

$35,000 attributed to remaining initial Purchase Payment not subject to surrender charges (invested more than 7 years)

•

$67,600 attributed to earnings including Persistency Credits (not subject to surrender charges)

•

$1,500 attributed to Bonus Credits on Purchase Payments not subject to surrender charges

$5,900 of the $125,000 withdrawal is subject to a 5% surrender charge since the second Purchase Payment was invested only four Contract Years. The surrender charge is $295.

We apply the surrender charge as a percentage of Purchase Payments, which means that you would pay the same surrender charge at the time of surrender regardless of whether your Contract Value has increased or decreased. The surrender charge is calculated separately for each Purchase Payment. The surrender charges associated with surrender or withdrawal are paid to us to compensate us for the loss we experience on contract distribution costs when Contractowners surrender or withdraw before distribution costs have been recovered.

There are charges associated with surrender of a Contract or withdrawal of Contract Value. You may specify whether these charges are deducted from the amount you request to be withdrawn or from the remaining Contract Value. If the charges are deducted from the remaining Contract Value, the amount of the total withdrawal will increase according to the impact of the applicable surrender charge percentage; consequently, the dollar amount of the surrender charge associated with the withdrawal will also increase. In other words, the dollar amount deducted to cover the surrender charge is also subject to a surrender charge.

If the Contractowner is a corporation or other non-individual (non-natural person), the Annuitant or joint Annuitant will be considered the Contractowner or joint owner for purposes of determining when a surrender charge does not apply.

Administrative Expense (Annual Account Fee)

During the accumulation period, we will deduct an account fee of $35 from the Contract Value on each contract anniversary to compensate us for the administrative services provided to you; this account fee will also be deducted from the Contract Value upon surrender. This fee may be lower in certain states, if required, and will be waived after the fifteenth Contract Year. The account fee will be waived for any Contract with a Contract Value that is equal to or greater than $100,000 on the contract anniversary (or date of surrender). There is no account fee on Design 3 contracts issued to Selling Group Individuals.

Protected Lifetime Income Fee

A fee or expense may also be deducted in connection with any benefits added to the Contract by rider or endorsement. The deduction of a protected lifetime income fee will be noted on your quarterly statement.

The protected lifetime income fee rate for new rider elections is disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit). The Rate Sheet indicates the current rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time in our sole discretion and may be higher or lower than the charge rate on the previous Rate Sheet. Rate information for previous effective periods is included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

Any change to the protected lifetime income fee rate will be disclosed in a new Rate Sheet at least ten days before that rate becomes effective. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500.

A discussion of the charges for closed riders can be found in an Appendix to this prospectus.

Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite and 4LATER® Select Advantage riders (elected on and after November 28, 2022, subject to state availability) Fee. If you elect Lincoln ProtectedPay® or 4LATER® Select Advantage (elected on and after November 28, 2022), there is a fee associated with the rider for as long as it is in effect.

The fee:

•

is based on the Protected Income Base (initial Purchase Payment if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, Account Value Step-ups, Enhancements, and as decreased for Excess Withdrawals. (The Protected Income Base is decreased by all withdrawals under 4LATER® Select Advantage.); and

23

•

may increase every year upon an Account Value Step-up or annually on the Benefit Year anniversary, after ten years from the rider effective date. (You may opt out of this increase – see details below.)

The fee will be deducted from the Contract Value proportionately on a quarterly basis. The first deduction of the charge will occur on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the rider’s effective date. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and the fixed account, if any, on the Valuation Date the rider charge is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Protected Income Base increases or decreases.

The protected lifetime income fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. Since the Account Value Step-up could increase your Protected Income Base every Benefit Year (if all conditions are met), the fee rate could also increase every Benefit Year, but the rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. See Fee Tables. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your rate to change. If you opt out of the step-up, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the step-up, adjusted for any additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals (or all withdrawals under 4LATER® Select Advantage). This opt-out will only apply for this single Account Value Step-up, and not to any subsequent Account Value Step-ups. You will need to notify us each time the fee rate increases if you want to opt out of subsequent Account Value Step-ups. If you opt out of an Account Value Step-up, you are still eligible for an Enhancement, if applicable, through the end of the Enhancement Period, including in the year you declined the Account Value Step-up.

The protected lifetime income fee rate will increase to the then current rate not to exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate, if after the first Benefit Year anniversary, cumulative Purchase Payments added to the Contract equal or exceed $100,000. You may not opt out of this protected lifetime income fee rate increase.

After ten years from the rider effective date, the protected lifetime income fee rate may increase annually on the Benefit Year anniversary at Lincoln’s sole discretion, up to the stated guaranteed maximum charge rate. You may opt out of this fee rate increase by giving us notice within 30 days after the increase. If you opt out of this fee rate increase, you may not opt in again and you will no longer be eligible for Account Value Step-ups.

The charge will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. However, a portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death), surrender of the contract, or the election of an Annuity Payout option, including i4LIFE® Advantage. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, no further charge will be deducted.

4LATER® Select Advantage riders (elected prior to November 28, 2022, subject to state availability) Fees. If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, there is a fee associated with that rider for as long as the rider is in effect.

The fee:

•

is based on the Protected Income Base (initial Purchase Payment, including any Bonus Credit, if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, Enhancements, and as decreased for Excess Withdrawals. (The Protected Income Base is decreased by all withdrawals under 4LATER® Select Advantage.); and

•

may increase every Benefit Year upon an Enhancement that occurs after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, or upon an Account Value Step-up. (You may opt out of this increase – see details below.)

The fee will be deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The first deduction of the fee will occur on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the rider’s effective date. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and fixed account, if any, of the Contract on the Valuation Date the protected lifetime income fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Protected Income Base increases or decreases, because the fee is based on the Protected Income Base. Refer to Living Benefit Riders for a discussion and example of the impact of the changes to the Protected Income Base.

The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. Since the Account Value Step-up could increase your Protected Income Base every Benefit Year (if all conditions are met), the fee rate could also increase every Benefit Year, but the rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. See Fee Tables. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your rate to change. If you opt out of the step-up, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base, if applicable, will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the step-up, adjusted for any additional Purchase Payments or withdrawals. This opt out will only apply for this single Account Value Step-up, and not to any subsequent Account Value Step-ups. You will need to notify us each time the fee rate increases if you want to opt out of subsequent Account Value Step-ups. If you opt out of an Account Value Step-up, you are still eligible for an Enhancement, if applicable, through the end of the Enhancement Period, including in the year you declined the Account Value Step-up.

The annual protected lifetime income fee rate will increase to the then current rate not to exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate, if after the first Benefit Year anniversary cumulative Purchase Payments added to the Contract equal or exceed $100,000. You may not opt out of this protected lifetime income fee rate increase. See Living Benefit Riders.

24

The following paragraph does not apply to 4LATER® Select Advantage riders elected prior to June 11, 2018 (subject to state approval).

An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base (less Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year) occurs if a 10-year Enhancement Period is in effect (as described further in the Living Benefit Rider section). During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the protected lifetime income fee may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. Since the Enhancement could increase your Protected Income Base each Benefit Year, your fee rate could increase each Benefit Year, but the fee rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Enhancement by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your fee rate to change. If you opt out of the Enhancement, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the Enhancement, adjusted for additional Purchase Payments or withdrawals, if any, and the Enhancement will not be applied. This opt out will only apply for this single Enhancement, and not to any subsequent Enhancements. You will need to notify us each time thereafter (if an Enhancement would cause your fee rate to increase) if you do not want the Enhancement.

The fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. However, a portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death), surrender of the Contract, or the election of an Annuity Payout option, including i4LIFE® Advantage. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, no further fee will be deducted.

i4LIFE® Advantage Charge. While this rider is in effect, there is a daily charge for i4LIFE® Advantage that is based on your Account Value. The annual i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate is 0.40% and is added to your base contract expense.

The initial Account Value is your Contract Value on the Valuation Date i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or your initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, your Account Value equals the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, and will be reduced by Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and any withdrawals.

If i4LIFE® Advantage is elected at the time the Contract is issued, i4LIFE® Advantage and the charge will begin on the Contract's effective date. Otherwise, i4LIFE® Advantage and the charge will begin on the Periodic Income Commencement Date which is the Valuation Date on which the Regular Income Payment is determined and the beginning of the Access Period. Refer to the i4LIFE® Advantage section for explanations of the Account Value, the Access Period, the Lifetime Income Period, and the Periodic Income Commencement Date.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, there is a fee associated with that rider for as long as the rider is in effect.

The Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate is based on your Account Value and is added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate.

The Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge rate will not change after the rider is elected unless there is an automatic step up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit or you elect an additional step-up period (version 2 and version 3) during which the Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped-up to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment (described later in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus). At the time of the step-up the annual Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate. See Fee Tables.

If we automatically administer the step-up for Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk and version 4) or step-up period election (version 2 or 3) for you and your charge rate is increased, you may ask us to reverse the step-up or the step-up period election by giving us notice within 30 days after the date on which the step-up or the step-up period election occurred. If we receive notice of your request to reverse the step-up, on a going forward basis, we will decrease the charge rate to the charge rate in effect before the step-up or step-up period election occurred. Any increased charges paid between the time of the step-up and the date we receive your notice to reverse the step-up will not be reimbursed. Future step-ups will continue even after you decline a current step-up. We will provide you with written notice when a step-up has resulted in an increase to the current charge rate so that you may give us timely notice if you wish to reverse a step-up. Version 1 does not step-up; therefore the charge rate does not change.

After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Contractowners who transition from a Prior Rider. If you have elected Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), Lincoln Market Select® Advantage or 4LATER® Select Advantage (a “Prior Rider”), you may carry over certain features of that Prior Rider to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. If you make this transition, your protected lifetime income fee of the Prior Rider will be the initial charge rate for your i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit rider.

25

This section applies to all of the transitions listed in the following chart. The charges and calculations described earlier in the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge section will not apply. If you are transitioning to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit from a closed rider (not shown below), see Appendix C for a discussion of the fees. 

If your Prior Rider is...	you will transition to...
Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)	i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)
Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® Lincoln Market Select® Advantage; or 4LATER® Select Advantage	i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit

 

The initial charge is a percentage of the greater of the Protected Income Base carried over from the Prior Rider or the Account Value. The charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is deducted quarterly, starting with the first three-month anniversary of the effective date of i4LIFE® Advantage and every three months thereafter. Your base contract expense also applies. Contractowners are guaranteed that in the future the guaranteed maximum charge rate for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be the guaranteed maximum charge rate that was in effect at the time they purchased the Prior Rider.

If your Prior Rider is Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® or Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®, after ten years from the rider effective date, the charge may increase annually on the Benefit Year anniversary at Lincoln's sole discretion, up to the stated guaranteed maximum charge rate. You may opt out of this rate increase by giving us notice within 30 days after the increase. If you opt out of this fee rate increase, you will no longer be eligible for Guaranteed Income Benefit step-ups.

For all other Prior Riders, the charge will not change unless there is an automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit (described in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus).

For all Prior Riders, at such time, the dollar amount of the charge will increase by a two part formula: 1) the charge will increase by the same percentage that the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment increased and 2) the charge will also increase by the percentage of any increase to the Prior Rider protected lifetime income fee. (The Prior Rider fee rate continues to be used as a factor in determining the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge.) This means that the charge may change annually. The charge may also be reduced if a withdrawal above the Regular Income Payment is taken. The dollar amount of the protected lifetime income fee will be reduced in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the Account Value. The annual dollar amount is divided by four (4) to determine the quarterly charge.

The following example is intended to show how the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge for purchasers of a Prior Rider could be calculated for a representative male Contractowner, as well as the impact to the charge due to increases to the Guaranteed Income Benefit and the Prior Rider fee rate. For illustration purposes, we will assume that the example is a nonqualified contract and the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is set at 4% of the Protected Income Base based upon the Contractowner’s age (see Guaranteed Income Benefit for a more detailed description). The example also assumes that the protected lifetime income fee for the Prior Rider is 1.50% (single life option). The first example demonstrates how the initial charge may be determined for an existing Contract with an Account Value and Protected Income Base. This calculation method applies to the purchase of any Prior Rider, except the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit rates and charges may vary, as set forth in the Guaranteed Income Benefit description later in this prospectus. The charges and rates shown here may be different from those that apply to your Contract. The calculation of the charge for your Contract will be based on the specific factors applicable to your Contract. 

1/1/24 Initial i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value	$100,000
1/1/24 Protected Income Base as of the last Valuation Date under the Prior Rider	$125,000
1/1/24 Initial Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit ($125,000 x 1.50%). The protected lifetime income fee for the Prior Rider is assessed against the Protected Income Base since it is larger than the Account Value	$1,875
1/2/24 Amount of initial i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment (an example of how the Regular Income Payment is calculated is shown in the SAI)	$5,173
1/2/24 Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4% x $125,000 Protected Income Base)	$5,000

The next example shows how the charge will increase if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped up to 75% of the Regular Income Payment. 

26

1/2/25 Recalculated Regular Income Payment (due to market gain in Account Value)	$6,900
1/2/25 New Guaranteed Income Benefit (75% x $6,900 Regular Income Payment)	$5,175
1/2/25 Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit ($1,875 x ($5,175/$5,000)) Prior charge x [ratio of increased Guaranteed Income Benefit to prior Guaranteed Income Benefit]	$1,940.63

Continuing the above example: 

1/2/25 Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit	$1,940.63
1/2/26 Recalculated Regular Income Payment (due to Account Value increase)	$7,400
1/2/26 New Guaranteed Income Benefit (75% x $7,400 Regular Income Payment)	$5,550
Assume the Prior Rider fee rate increases from 1.50% to 1.60%.
1/2/26 Annual Charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit ($1,940.63 x ($5,550/$5,175) x (1.60%/1.50%))	$2,220.01

The new annual charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is $2,220.01, which is equal to the current annual charge of $1,940.63 multiplied by the percentage increase of the Guaranteed Income Benefit ($5,550/$5,175) and then multiplied by the percentage increase to the Prior Rider protected lifetime income fee (1.60%/1.50%).

If the fee rate of your Prior Rider is increased, we will notify you in writing. You may contact us in writing or at the telephone number listed on the first page of this prospectus to reverse the step-up within 30 days after the date on which the step-up occurred. If we receive this notice, we will decrease the charge rate, on a going forward basis, to the charge rate in effect before the step-up occurred. Any increased charges paid between the time of the step-up and the date we receive your notice to reverse the step-up will not be reimbursed. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit increased due to the step-up we would decrease the Guaranteed Income Benefit to the Guaranteed Income Benefit in effect before the step-up occurred, reduced by any additional withdrawals. Future step-ups as described in the rider would continue.

After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, i4LIFE® Advantage will also be terminated and the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge will cease. A portion of the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider.

Deductions for Premium Taxes

Any premium tax or other tax levied by any governmental entity as a result of the existence of the contracts or the VAA will be deducted from the Contract Value, unless the governmental entity dictates otherwise, when incurred, or at another time of our choosing.

The applicable premium tax rates that states and other governmental entities impose on the purchase of an annuity are subject to change by legislation, by administrative interpretation or by judicial action. These premium tax rates generally depend upon the law of your state of residence. The tax rates range from zero to 5%.

Other Charges and Deductions

The surrender, withdrawal or transfer of value during a Guaranteed Period may be subject to the Interest Adjustment, if applicable. See Fixed Side of the Contract.

Base contract expenses of 1.10% of the value in the VAA will be assessed on all variable Annuity Payouts, including options that may be offered that do not have a life contingency and therefore no mortality risk. This charge includes the mortality and expense risk and administrative charge. The expense risk is the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges.

There are additional deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of the underlying funds that are more fully described in the prospectuses for the funds. Among these deductions and expenses are 12b-1 fees which reimburse us or an affiliate for certain expenses incurred in connection with certain administrative and distribution support services provided to the funds.

Additional Information

The charges described previously may be reduced or eliminated for any particular contract or an additional Bonus Credit may be paid. However, these reductions or benefits may be available only to the extent that we anticipate lower distribution and/or administrative expenses, or that we perform fewer sales or administrative services than those originally contemplated in establishing the level of those charges, or when required by law. Lower distribution and administrative expenses may be the result of economies associated with:

•

the use of mass enrollment procedures,

27

•

the performance of administrative or sales functions by the employer,

•

sales to Selling Group Individuals,

•

the use by an employer of automated techniques in submitting deposits or information related to deposits on behalf of its employees,

•

for Design 1 contracts only, the issue of a new Lincoln variable annuity contract with the proceeds from the surrender of an existing Lincoln variable annuity contract, if available with your broker-dealer and in your state, or

•

any other circumstances which reduce distribution or administrative expenses.

The exact amount of charges and fees or Bonus Credit applicable to a particular contract will be stated in that contract.

The Contracts

Contracts Offered in this Prospectus

This prospectus describes three share classes:

•

American Legacy® Design 1 (standard)

•

American Legacy® Design 2 (4-year surrender charge)

•

American Legacy® Design 3 (3% bonus)

Each share class offers you the ability to choose certain features, and has its own ongoing fees, expenses and applicable surrender charge schedule. In deciding what Contract to purchase, you should consider the amount of the ongoing fees, expenses and surrender charges you are willing to accept relative to your needs. In deciding whether to purchase any of the enhanced Death Benefits or other optional benefits, you should consider the desirability of the benefit relative to its additional cost and to your needs.

An enhanced Death Benefit and optional Living Benefit Riders may be available for an additional charge, and are described later in this prospectus, as long as they are currently available. You should check with your registered representative regarding availability.

American Legacy® Design 1 (standard)

The Design 1 contract has ongoing fees and expenses ranging from 1.10% to 1.60%, depending on which Death Benefit you have elected. It has a declining seven-year surrender charge on each Purchase Payment. Design 1 has a longer surrender charge period than Design 2. This means that it offers less liquidity than Design 2 but it has lower total separate account annual expenses.

American Legacy® Design 2 (4-year surrender charge)

The Design 2 contract has ongoing fees and expenses ranging from 1.55% to 2.05%, depending on which Death Benefit you have elected. It has a declining four-year surrender charge on each Purchase Payment, which is different than both Design 1 and Design 3. Design 2 offers greater liquidity than Design 1 and Design 3, has higher total separate account annual expenses than Design 1, but has the same total separate account expenses as Design 3. Contractowners of the Design 2 annuity contract will receive a Persistency Credit on a quarterly basis after the fourth contract anniversary. See The Contracts – Persistency Credits.

American Legacy® Design 3 (3% bonus)

The Design 3 contract has ongoing fees and expenses ranging from 1.55% to 2.05%, depending on which Death Benefit you have selected. It has a declining seven-year surrender charge on each Purchase Payment, which is the same as Design 1, but longer than Design 2. Design 3 has higher total separate account annual expenses than Design 1, but has the same total separate account expenses as Design 2. For each Purchase Payment made into the contact, we will credit the Contract with a 3% Bonus Credit. See The Contracts – Bonus Credits. Design 1 and 2 do not offer Bonus Credits. In addition, Contractowners of the Design 3 annuity contract will receive a Persistency Credit on a quarterly basis after the seventh contract anniversary. See The Contracts – Persistency Credits. The Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider is not available with this Contract.

Design 1 may be more appropriate for someone with a longer investment time horizon, who does not intend to withdraw Contract Value in excess of the free withdrawal amount during the surrender charge period, and who seeks a lower cost Contract. Design 2 may be more appropriate for someone who may want to withdraw Contract Value in excess of the free withdrawal amount four years after purchasing the Contract and is willing to pay higher ongoing fees and expenses. Design 3 may be more appropriate for someone with a longer investment time horizon, who does not intend to withdraw Contract Value in excess of the free withdrawal amount during the surrender charge period, and who seeks Bonus Credits. You should determine the appropriate period of time that you must own the Contract to receive the desired benefit from any Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits.

Purchasing an optional Living Benefit Rider under a Design 2 contract and paying a higher separate account charge, in order to have more liquidity earlier in the Contract, may not always be compatible. This is because you should typically own your Contract over the long term in order to get the maximum benefit from these types of Living Benefit Riders. For example, the longer you wait to make a withdrawal, the greater your withdrawal percentage may be, or there may be a certain number of years before you can use the benefit.

28

You should determine the appropriate balance among (a) more liquidity earlier in the Contract; (b) the impact of the separate account charge on your Contract Value; and (c) the period of time that you must own the Contract to receive the desired benefit from any optional Living Benefit Rider you purchase.

Purchase of Contracts

If you wish to purchase a Contract, you must apply for it through a registered representative authorized by us. The completed application is sent to us and we decide whether to accept or reject it. If the application is accepted, a Contract is prepared and executed by our legally authorized officers. The Contract is then sent to you either directly or through your registered representative. See Distribution of the Contracts. The purchase of multiple contracts with identical Contractowners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries will be allowed only upon Home Office approval.

When a completed application and all other information necessary for processing a purchase order is received in Good Order at our Home Office, an initial Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit, if applicable, will be priced no later than two business days after we receive the order. If you submit your application and/or initial Purchase Payment to your registered representative, we will not begin processing your purchase order until we receive the application and initial Purchase Payment from your registered representative’s broker-dealer. While attempting to finish an incomplete application, we may hold the initial Purchase Payment for no more than five business days unless we receive your consent to retain the payment until the application is completed. If the incomplete application cannot be completed within those five days and we have not received your consent, you will be informed of the reasons, and the Purchase Payment will be returned immediately. Once the application is complete, we will allocate your initial Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit, if applicable, within two business days.

Who Can Invest

To apply for a Contract, you must be of legal age in a state where the contracts may be lawfully sold and also be eligible to participate in any of the qualified or nonqualified plans for which the contracts are designed. At the time of issue, the Contractowner, joint owner and Annuitant must be under age 86. Certain Death Benefit options may not be available at all ages. Federal law requires all financial institutions to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person who opens an account in an effort to help the government fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering activities. When you open an account, we will ask for your name, address, date of birth, and other information that will allow us to identify you. We may also ask to see your driver's license, photo i.d., or other identifying documents.

In accordance with anti-money laundering laws and federal economic sanction policy, the Company may be required in a given instance to reject a Purchase Payment and/or freeze a Contractowner’s account. This means we could refuse to honor requests for transfers, withdrawals, surrenders or Death Benefits. Once frozen, monies would be moved from the VAA and fixed account, if any, to an interest-bearing account maintained solely for the Contractowner, and held in that account until instructions are received from the appropriate regulator.

Do not purchase this Contract if you plan to use it, or any of its riders, for speculation, arbitrage, viatical arrangement, or other similar investment scheme. The Contract may not be resold, traded on any stock exchange, or sold on any secondary market.

If you are purchasing the Contract through a tax-favored arrangement, including traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs, you should consider carefully the costs and benefits of the Contract (including annuity income benefits) before purchasing the Contract, since the tax-favored arrangement itself provides tax-deferred growth.

Replacement of Existing Insurance

Careful consideration should be given prior to surrendering or withdrawing money from an existing insurance contract to purchase a Contract described in this prospectus. Surrender charges may be imposed on your existing contract and/or a new surrender charge period may be imposed with the purchase of, or transfer into, this Contract. The benefits offered under this Contract may be less favorable or more favorable than the benefits offered under your current contract. It also may have different charges. You should also consult with your registered representative and/or your tax advisor prior to making an exchange. Cash surrenders from an existing contract may be subject to tax and tax penalties.

Purchase Payments

You may make Purchase Payments to the Contract at any time, prior to the Annuity Commencement Date, subject to certain conditions. You are not required to make any additional Purchase Payments after the initial Purchase Payment. The minimum initial Purchase Payment is $10,000 ($25,000 for contracts purchased prior to November 15, 2010). The minimum annual amount for additional Purchase Payments is $300. Please check with your registered representative about making additional Purchase Payments since the requirements of your state may vary. The minimum payment to the Contract at any one time must be at least $100 ($25 if transmitted electronically). If a Purchase Payment is submitted that does not meet the minimum amount, we will contact you to ask whether additional money will be sent, or whether we should return the Purchase Payment to you.

29

Purchase Payments totaling $2 million or more are subject to Home Office approval. This amount takes into consideration the total Purchase Payments for all variable annuity contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) (excluding any version of Lincoln Investor Advantage®, Lincoln Level Advantage® and Lincoln Level Advantage 2SM contracts) for the same Contractowner, joint owner, and/or Annuitant. If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, you may be subject to further restrictions in terms of your ability to make additional Purchase Payments, as more fully described below. If you stop making Purchase Payments, the Contract will remain in force, however, we may terminate the Contract as allowed by your state's non-forfeiture law for individual deferred annuities. We will not surrender your Contract if you are receiving guaranteed payments from us under one of the Living Benefit Riders. Purchase Payments may be made or, if stopped, resumed at any time until the Annuity Commencement Date, the surrender of the Contract, or the death of the Contractowner, whichever comes first.

After the first anniversary of a Living Benefit Rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed:

•

at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date if you elect any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit;

•

at any time after the Periodic Income Commencement Date if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit on a nonqualified contract; or

•

if you elected the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider.

For more information about these restrictions and limitations, see The Contracts – Purchase Payments. State variations may apply.

In addition to the specific Purchase Payment restrictions and limitations immediately above, upon advance written notice, we reserve the right to further limit, restrict, or suspend Purchase Payments made to the Contract.

These restrictions and limitations will limit your ability to increase your Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage with any version of Guaranteed Income Benefit) and/or increase the amount of any guaranteed benefit under a Living Benefit Rider by making additional Purchase Payments to the Contract. You should carefully consider these limitations and restrictions, and any other limitations and restrictions of the Contract, and how they may impact your long-term investment plans, especially if you intend to increase Contract Value (or Account Value under any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit) by making additional Purchase Payments over a long period of time. Please contact your registered representative and refer to the Living Benefit Riders section of this prospectus for additional information on any restrictions that may apply to your Living Benefit Rider. State variations may apply.

Bonus Credits

In some states, the term Bonus Credit may be referred to as value enhancement or a similar term in the Contract. If you purchase the Design 3 contract, for each Purchase Payment made into the Contract, we will credit the Contract with a 3% Bonus Credit. The amount of the Bonus Credit is calculated as a percentage of the Purchase Payment made. The amount of any Bonus Credit applied to the Contract will be noted on the confirmation sent after each Purchase Payment. The amount of the Bonus Credit will be added to the value of the Contract at the same time and allocated to variable Subaccounts and the fixed account in the same percentages as the Purchase Payment.

We offer a variety of variable annuity contracts. The amount of the Bonus Credit may be more than offset by higher surrender charges associated with the Bonus Credit. Similar products that do not offer Bonus Credits and have lower fees and charges may provide larger cash surrender values than this Contract, depending on the level of the Bonus Credits in this Contract and the performance of the owner’s chosen Subaccounts. We encourage you to talk with your registered representative and determine which annuity contract is most appropriate for you.

Persistency Credits

Contractowners of the Design 2 contract will receive a Persistency Credit on a quarterly basis after the fourth contract anniversary. The amount of the Persistency Credit is calculated by multiplying the Contract Value, less any Purchase Payments that have not been invested in the Contract for at least four years, by 0.1125%. This Persistency Credit will be allocated to the variable Subaccounts and the DCA fixed account in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount and fixed Subaccount at the time the Persistency Credit is paid into the Contract.

Contractowners of the Design 3 contract will receive a Persistency Credit on a quarterly basis after the seventh contract anniversary. The amount of the Persistency Credit is calculated by multiplying the Contract Value, less any Purchase Payments that have not been invested in the Contract for at least seven years, by the quarterly percentage of 0.1125%. This Persistency Credit will be allocated to the variable Subaccounts and the fixed Subaccounts in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount and fixed Subaccount at the time the Persistency Credit is paid into the Contract.

There is no additional charge to receive this Persistency Credit, and in no case will the Persistency Credit be less than zero. The amount of any Persistency Credit received will be noted on your quarterly statement.

30

Valuation Date

Accumulation and Annuity Units will be valued once daily at the close of trading (normally, 4:00 p.m., New York time) on each day the New York Stock Exchange is open (Valuation Date). On any date other than a Valuation Date, the Accumulation Unit value and the Annuity Unit value will not change.

Allocation of Purchase Payments

Purchase Payments allocated to the variable side of the contract are placed into the VAA’s Subaccounts, according to your instructions. You may also allocate Purchase Payments to the fixed account, if available. Corresponding Bonus Credits, if applicable, will be allocated to the Subaccount(s) and/or the fixed side of the contract in the same proportion in which you allocate Purchase Payments. In the absence of instructions accompanying a Purchase Payment or otherwise not being in Good Order, we will allocate a Purchase Payment in the same manner as your last Purchase Payment or, if not possible, contact you or your registered representative for additional information.

The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment which can be put into any one Subaccount is $20. The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment which can be put into a Guaranteed Period of the fixed account is $2,000, subject to state approval.

Purchase Payments received from you or your broker-dealer in Good Order at our Home Office prior to the close of the New York Stock Exchange (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time), will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date. Purchase Payments received in Good Order after market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. Purchase Payments submitted to your registered representative will generally not be processed by us until they are received from your registered representative’s broker-dealer. If your broker-dealer submits your Purchase Payment to us through the Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC) or, pursuant to terms agreeable to us, uses a proprietary order placement system to submit your Purchase Payment to us, and your Purchase Payment was placed with your broker-dealer prior to market close, then we will use the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date when processing your Purchase Payment. Purchase Payments placed with your broker-dealer after market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. There may be circumstances under which the New York Stock Exchange may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances, Purchase Payments received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.

The number of Accumulation Units determined in this way is not impacted by any subsequent change in the value of an Accumulation Unit. However, the dollar value of an Accumulation Unit will vary depending not only upon how well the underlying fund’s investments perform, but also upon the expenses of the VAA and the underlying funds.

If an underlying fund imposes restrictions with respect to the acceptance of Purchase Payments, allocations or transfers, we reserve the right to reject an allocation or transfer request at any time the underlying fund notifies us of such a restriction. We will notify you if your allocation request is or becomes subject to such restrictions.

Valuation of Accumulation Units

Purchase Payments allocated to the VAA are converted into Accumulation Units. This is done by dividing the amount allocated by the value of an Accumulation Unit for the Valuation Period during which the Purchase Payments are allocated to the VAA. The Accumulation Unit value for each Subaccount was or will be established at the inception of the Subaccount. It may increase or decrease from Valuation Period to Valuation Period. Accumulation Unit values are affected by investment performance of the funds, fund expenses, and the contract charges. The Accumulation Unit value for a Subaccount for a later Valuation Period is determined as follows:

1.

The total value of the fund shares held in the Subaccount is calculated by multiplying the number of fund shares owned by the Subaccount at the beginning of the Valuation Period by the net asset value per share of the fund at the end of the Valuation Period, and adding any dividend or other distribution of the fund if an ex-dividend date occurs during the Valuation Period; minus

2.

The liabilities of the Subaccount at the end of the Valuation Period; these liabilities include daily charges imposed on the Subaccount, and may include a charge or credit with respect to any taxes paid or reserved for by us that we determine result from the operations of the VAA; and

3.

The result is divided by the number of Subaccount units outstanding at the beginning of the Valuation Period.

The daily charges imposed on a Subaccount for any Valuation Period are equal to the daily base contract expense multiplied by the number of calendar days in the Valuation Period. Contracts with different features have different daily charges, and therefore, will have different corresponding Accumulation Unit values on any given day. In certain circumstances (for example, when separate account assets are less than $1,000), and when permitted by law, it may be prudent for us to use a different standard industry method for this calculation, called the Net Investment Factor method. We will achieve substantially the same result using either method.

31

Transfers On or Before the Annuity Commencement Date

After the first 30 days from the effective date of your Contract, you may transfer all or a portion of your investment from one Subaccount to another. A transfer among Subaccounts involves the surrender of Accumulation Units in one Subaccount and the purchase of Accumulation Units in the other Subaccount. A transfer will be done using the respective Accumulation Unit values determined at the end of the Valuation Date on which the transfer request is received.

Transfers (among the Subaccounts and as permitted between the variable and fixed accounts) are limited to 12 per Contract Year unless otherwise authorized by us. This limit does not apply to transfers made under the automatic transfer programs of dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment or portfolio rebalancing. See Additional Services and the SAI for more information on these programs. These transfer rights and restrictions also apply during the i4LIFE® Advantage Access Period (the time period during which you may make withdrawals from the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value). See i4LIFE® Advantage.

The minimum amount which may be transferred between Subaccounts is $300 (or the entire amount in the Subaccount, if less than $300). If the transfer from a Subaccount would leave you with less than $300 in the Subaccount, we may transfer the total balance of the Subaccount.

A transfer request may be made to our Home Office in writing or by fax. A transfer request may also be made by telephone or other electronic means, provided the appropriate authorization is on file with us. Our address, telephone number, and Internet address are on the first page of this prospectus. Requests for transfers will be processed on the Valuation Date that they are received when they are received in Good Order at our Home Office before the close of the New York Stock Exchange (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time). If we receive a transfer request in Good Order after market close, we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.

There may be circumstances under which the New York Stock Exchange may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances transfers received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date.

We may defer or reject a transfer request that is subject to a restriction imposed by an underlying fund.

After the first 30 days from the effective date of your Contract, if your Contract offers a fixed account, you may also transfer all or any part of the Contract Value from the Subaccount(s) to the fixed side of the contract, except during periods when (if permitted by your Contract) we have discontinued accepting transfers into the fixed side of the contract. The minimum amount which can be transferred to a fixed account is $2,000 or the total amount in the Subaccount if less than $2,000. However, if a transfer from a Subaccount would leave you with less than $300 in the Subaccount, we may transfer the total amount to the fixed side of the contract.

You may also transfer part of the Contract Value from a fixed account to the Subaccount(s) subject to the following restrictions:

•

total fixed account transfers are limited to 25% of the value of that fixed account in any 12-month period; and

•

the minimum amount that can be transferred is $300 or, if less, the amount in the fixed account.

Because of these restrictions, it may take several years to transfer all of the Contract Value in the fixed accounts to the Subaccounts. You should carefully consider whether the fixed account meets your investment criteria. Transfers of all or a portion of a fixed account (other than automatic transfer programs and i4LIFE® Advantage transfers) may be subject to Interest Adjustments, if applicable. For a description of the Interest Adjustment, see the Fixed Side of the Contract - Guaranteed Periods and Interest Adjustment.

Transfers may be delayed as permitted by the 1940 Act. See Delay of Payments.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

A surrender, withdrawal, or transfer request may be made to our Home Office in writing or by fax. These transactions may also be made by telephone or other electronic means, provided the appropriate authorization is on file with us. In order to prevent unauthorized or fraudulent transfers, we may require certain identifying information before we will act upon instructions. We may also assign the Contractowner a Personal Identification Number (PIN) to serve as identification. We will not be liable for following instructions we reasonably believe are genuine. Telephone and other electronic requests will be recorded and written confirmation of all transactions will be mailed or sent electronically to the Contractowner on the next Valuation Date.

Please note that the telephone and/or electronic devices may not always be available. Any telephone, fax machine, or other electronic device, whether it is yours, your service provider’s, or your registered representative’s, can experience outages or slowdowns for a variety of reasons. These outages or slowdowns may delay or prevent our processing of your request. Although we have taken precautions to limit these problems, we cannot promise complete reliability under all circumstances. If you are experiencing problems, you should make your request by writing to our Home Office.

Market Timing

Frequent, large, or short-term transfers among Subaccounts and the fixed account, such as those associated with “market timing” transactions, can affect the funds and their investment returns. Such transfers may dilute the value of the fund shares, interfere with

32

the efficient management of the fund's portfolio, and increase brokerage and administrative costs of the funds. As an effort to protect our Contractowners and the funds from potentially harmful trading activity, we utilize certain market timing policies and procedures (the “Market Timing Procedures”). Our Market Timing Procedures are designed to detect and prevent such transfer activity among the Subaccounts and the fixed account that may affect other Contractowners or fund shareholders.

In addition, the funds may have adopted their own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of their respective shares. The prospectuses for the funds describe any such policies and procedures, which may be more or less restrictive than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other funds and the Market Timing Procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent transfers among Subaccounts. While we reserve the right to enforce these policies and procedures, Contractowners and other persons with interests under the Contract should be aware that we may not have the contractual authority or the operational capacity to apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the funds. However, under SEC rules, we are required to: (1) enter into a written agreement with each fund or its principal underwriter that obligates us to provide to the fund promptly upon request certain information about the trading activity of individual Contractowners, and (2) execute instructions from the fund to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by specific Contractowners who violate the excessive trading policies established by the fund.

You should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the funds generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as retirement plans or separate accounts funding variable insurance contracts. The omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and/or individual owners of variable insurance contracts. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the funds’ ability to apply their respective disruptive trading policies and procedures. We cannot guarantee that the funds (and thus our Contractowners) will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans and/or other insurance companies that may invest in the funds. In addition, if a fund believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more transfer requests from Contractowners engaged in disruptive trading activity, the fund may reject the entire omnibus order.

Our Market Timing Procedures detect potential “market timers” by examining the number of transfers made by Contractowners within given periods of time. In addition, managers of the funds might contact us if they believe or suspect that there is market timing. If requested by a fund company, we may vary our Market Timing Procedures from Subaccount to Subaccount to comply with specific fund policies and procedures.

We may increase our monitoring of Contractowners who we have previously identified as market timers. When applying the parameters used to detect market timers, we will consider multiple contracts owned by the same Contractowner if that Contractowner has been identified as a market timer. For each Contractowner, we will investigate the transfer patterns that meet the parameters being used to detect potential market timers. We will also investigate any patterns of trading behavior identified by the funds that may not have been captured by our Market Timing Procedures.

Once a Contractowner has been identified as a market timer under our Market Timing Procedures, we will notify the Contractowner in writing that future transfers (among the Subaccounts and/or the fixed account) will be temporarily permitted to be made only by original signature sent to us by U.S. mail, first-class delivery for the remainder of the Contract Year (or calendar year if the Contract is an individual contract that was sold in connection with an employer sponsored plan). Overnight delivery or electronic instructions (which may include telephone, facsimile, or Internet instructions) submitted during this period will not be accepted. If overnight delivery or electronic instructions are inadvertently accepted from a Contractowner that has been identified as a market timer, upon discovery, we will reverse the transaction within 1 or 2 business days. We will impose this “original signature” restriction on that Contractowner even if we cannot identify, in the particular circumstances, any harmful effect from that Contractowner's particular transfers.

Contractowners seeking to engage in frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity may deploy a variety of strategies to avoid detection. Our ability to detect such transfer activity may be limited by operational systems and technological limitations. The identification of Contractowners determined to be engaged in such transfer activity that may adversely affect other Contractowners or fund shareholders involves judgments that are inherently subjective. We cannot guarantee that our Market Timing Procedures will detect every potential market timer. If we are unable to detect market timers, you may experience dilution in the value of your fund shares and increased brokerage and administrative costs in the funds. This may result in lower long-term returns for your investments.

Our Market Timing Procedures are applied consistently to all Contractowners. An exception for any Contractowner will be made only in the event we are required to do so by a court of law. In addition, certain funds available as investment options in your Contract may also be available as investment options for owners of other, older life insurance policies issued by us. Some of these older life insurance policies do not provide a contractual basis for us to restrict or refuse transfers which are suspected to be market timing activity. In addition, because other insurance companies and/or retirement plans may invest in the funds, we cannot guarantee that the funds will not suffer harm from frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity among Subaccounts and the fixed accounts of variable contracts issued by other insurance companies or among investment options available to retirement plan participants.

In our sole discretion, we may revise our Market Timing Procedures at any time without prior notice as necessary to better detect and deter frequent, large, or short-term transfer activity to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, and/or to impose additional or alternate restrictions on market timers (such as dollar or percentage limits on transfers). If we modify our Market Timing Procedures, they will be applied uniformly to all Contractowners or as applicable to all Contractowners investing in underlying funds.

33

Some of the funds have reserved the right to temporarily or permanently refuse payments or transfer requests from us if, in the judgment of the fund’s investment adviser, the fund would be unable to invest effectively in accordance with its investment objective or policies, or would otherwise potentially be adversely affected. To the extent permitted by applicable law, we reserve the right to defer or reject a transfer request at any time that we are unable to purchase or redeem shares of any of the funds available through the VAA, including any refusal or restriction on purchases or redemptions of the fund shares as a result of the funds' own policies and procedures on market timing activities. If a fund refuses to accept a transfer request we have already processed, we will reverse the transaction within 1 or 2 business days. We will notify you in writing if we have reversed, restricted or refused any of your transfer requests. Some funds also may impose redemption fees on short-term trading (i.e., redemptions of mutual fund shares within a certain number of business days after purchase). We reserve the right to administer and collect any such redemption fees on behalf of the funds. You should read the funds’ prospectuses for more details on their redemption fees and their ability to refuse or restrict purchases or redemptions of their shares.

Transfers After the Annuity Commencement Date

You may transfer all or a portion of your investment in one Subaccount to another Subaccount or to the fixed side of the contract, as permitted under your Contract. Those transfers will be limited to three times per Contract Year. You may also switch from a variable Annuity Payout to a fixed Annuity Payout. You may not switch from a fixed Annuity Payout to a variable Annuity Payout. Once elected, the fixed Annuity Payout is irrevocable.

These provisions also apply during the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period. See i4LIFE® Advantage.

Ownership

The Contractowner on the date of issue will be the person or entity designated in the contract specifications. The Contractowner of a nonqualified contract may name a joint owner.

As Contractowner, you have all rights under the Contract. According to Indiana law, the assets of the VAA are held for the exclusive benefit of all Contractowners and their designated Beneficiaries; and the assets of the VAA are not chargeable with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct. We reserve the right to approve all ownership and Annuitant changes. Nonqualified contracts may not be sold, discounted, or pledged as collateral for a loan or for any other purpose. Qualified contracts are not transferable unless allowed under applicable law. Nonqualified contracts may not be collaterally assigned. Assignments may have an adverse impact on any Death Benefits or benefits offered under Living Benefit Riders in this product and may be prohibited under the terms of a particular feature. We assume no responsibility for the validity or effect of any assignment. Consult your tax advisor about the tax consequences of an assignment.

Joint Ownership

If a Contract has joint owners, the joint owners shall be treated as having equal undivided interests in the Contract. Either owner, independently of the other, may exercise any ownership rights in this Contract. Not more than two owners (an owner and joint owner) may be named and contingent owners are not permitted.

Annuitant

The following rules apply prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You may name only one Annuitant (unless you are a tax-exempt entity, then you can name two joint Annuitants). You (if the Contractowner is a natural person) have the right to change the Annuitant at any time by notifying us in writing of the change. However, we reserve the right to approve all Annuitant changes. This may not be allowed if certain riders are in effect. The new Annuitant must be under age 86 as of the effective date of the change. This change may cause a reduction in the Death Benefits or benefits offered under Living Benefit Riders. See The Contracts – Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders. A contingent Annuitant may be named or changed by notifying us in writing. Contingent Annuitants are not allowed on contracts owned by non-natural owners. On or after the Annuity Commencement Date, the Annuitant or joint Annuitants may not be changed and contingent Annuitant designations are no longer applicable.

Surrenders and Withdrawals

Before the Annuity Commencement Date, we will allow the surrender of the Contract or a withdrawal of the Contract Value upon your written request on an approved Lincoln distribution request form (available from the Home Office), by fax, or other electronic means. Withdrawal requests may be made by telephone or our website, subject to certain restrictions. All surrenders and withdrawals may be made in accordance with the rules discussed below. Surrender or withdrawal rights after the Annuity Commencement Date depend on the Annuity Payout option selected.

The amount available upon surrender/withdrawal is the Contract Value less any applicable charges, fees, and taxes at the end of the Valuation Period during which the written request for surrender/withdrawal is received in Good Order at the Home Office. If we receive a surrender or withdrawal request in Good Order at our Home Office before the close of the NYSE (normally 4:00 p.m., New York time), we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit value computed on that Valuation Date. If we receive a surrender or withdrawal request in Good Order at our Home Office after market close, we will process the request using the Accumulation Unit

34

value computed on the next Valuation Date. There may be circumstances under which the NYSE may close early (prior to 4:00 p.m., New York time). In such instances, surrender or withdrawal requests received after such early market close will be processed using the Accumulation Unit value computed on the next Valuation Date. The minimum amount which can be withdrawn is $300. Unless a request for withdrawal specifies otherwise, withdrawals will be made from all Subaccounts within the VAA and from the fixed account in the same proportion that the amount of withdrawal bears to the total Contract Value. Surrenders and withdrawals from the fixed account may be subject to the Interest Adjustment. See Fixed Side of the Contract. Unless prohibited, surrender/withdrawal payments will be mailed within seven days after we receive a valid written request at the Home Office. The payment may be postponed as permitted by the 1940 Act.

There are charges associated with surrender of a Contract or withdrawal of Contract Value. You may specify whether these charges are deducted from the amount you request to be withdrawn or from the remaining Contract Value. If the charges are deducted from the remaining Contract Value, the amount of the total withdrawal will increase according to the impact of the applicable surrender charge percentage; consequently, the dollar amount of the surrender charge associated with the withdrawal will also increase. In other words, the dollar amount deducted to cover the surrender charge is also subject to a surrender charge.

Surrenders and withdrawals may be taxable and, prior to age 59½, subject to a tax penalty. The tax consequences of a surrender/withdrawal are discussed later in this prospectus. See Federal Tax Matters – Taxation of Withdrawals and Surrenders.

Withdrawals may have a negative impact on certain optional living benefits and on certain death benefits, and the impact could be significant. A withdrawal may reduce or even terminate certain benefits.

In addition to surrender charges, withdrawals from the fixed account may be subject to an Interest Adjustment, which could have a significant negative impact.

Asset Allocation Models

You may allocate your Purchase Payment among a group of Subaccounts within an asset allocation model. Each model invests different percentages of the Contract Value in some or all of the Subaccounts currently available within your annuity contract. If you select an asset allocation model, 100% of your Contract Value (and any additional Purchase Payments you make) will be allocated among certain Subaccounts in accordance with the model’s asset allocation strategy. You may not make transfers among the Subaccounts. We will proportionately deduct any withdrawals you make from the Subaccounts in the asset allocation model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model at any time.

Your registered representative may discuss asset allocation models with you to assist in deciding to allocate your Purchase Payments among the various Subaccounts and/or the fixed account. You should consult with your registered representative as to whether a model is appropriate for you.

Each of the asset allocation models seeks to meet its investment objective while avoiding excessive risk. The models also strive to achieve diversification among asset classes in order to help provide returns commensurate with a given level of risk over the long-term. There can be no assurance, however, that any of the asset allocation models will achieve its investment objective. If you are seeking a more aggressive strategy, these models may not be appropriate for you.

The asset allocation models are intended to provide a diversified investment portfolio by combining different asset classes to help it reach its stated investment goal. While diversification may help reduce overall risk, it does not eliminate the risk of loss and it does not protect against loss in a declining market.

In order to maintain the model’s specified Subaccount allocation percentages, you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option and you thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a quarterly basis based upon your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. We reserve the right to change the rebalancing frequency at any time, in our sole discretion, but will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change in frequency.

The models are static asset allocation models. This means that they have fixed allocations made up of underlying funds that are offered within your Contract and the percentage allocations will not change over time. Once you have selected an asset allocation model, we will not make any changes to the fund allocations within the model except for the rebalancing described above. If you wish to change your fund allocations either to new funds or to a different model, you must submit new allocation instructions to us. You may terminate a model at any time. There is no additional charge from Lincoln for participating in a model.

The election of certain Living Benefit Riders may require that you allocate Purchase Payments in accordance with Investment Requirements that may be satisfied by choosing an asset allocation model. Different requirements and/or restrictions may apply under the individual rider. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements. To the extent you are using a model to satisfy your Investment Requirements, the model is intended, in part, to reduce the risk of investment loss that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under the Living Benefit Riders.

The models were designed and prepared by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation (LFIC), which is an affiliate of ours, for use by Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (LFD), the principal underwriter of the contracts. LFD provides models to broker-dealers who may

35

offer the models to their own clients. In making these models and Subaccounts available as investment options under your Contract, LFIC, LFD and the Company are not providing you with investment advice, nor are they recommending to you any particular model or Subaccount. You should consult with your registered representative to determine whether you should utilize or invest in any model or Subaccount, or whether it is suitable for you based upon your goals, risk tolerance, and time horizon.

If a fund within a model closes to new investors, investors that have been invested before the fund closed may remain in the model. However, the model would no longer be offered to new investors. If a fund within a model liquidates, we may transfer assets from that Subaccount to another Subaccount after providing notice to you. If this transfer occurs, and you own a Living Benefit Rider and are subject to Investment Requirements, you may no longer comply with the Investment Requirements. See the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus for more information. If a fund within a model merges with another fund, we will add the surviving fund to the model.

Benefits Available Under the Contract

The following tables summarize information about the benefits available under the Contract. A detailed description of each benefit follows the table. 

Standard Benefits
Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Account Value Death Benefit	Provides a Death Benefit equal to the Contract Value.	•1.10% (Design 1) •1.55% (Design 2 and Design 3)	•Poor investment performance could significantly reduce the benefit. •Withdrawals could significantly reduce the benefit.
Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit	Provides a Death Benefit equal to the greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all Purchase Payments, adjusted for withdrawals.	•1.15% (Design 1) •1.60% (Design 2 and Design 3)	•Withdrawals could significantly reduce the benefit.
Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB)	Provides a Death Benefit equal to the greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all Purchase Payments, adjusted for withdrawals; (3) the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary prior to age 81 as adjusted for withdrawals.	•1.40% (Design 1) •1.85% (Design 2 and Design 3)	•Not available if age 80 or older at the time of issuance. •Withdrawals could significantly reduce the benefit. •Poor investment performance could significantly reduce and limit potential increases to the highest Contract Value.
Dollar-Cost Averaging	Allows you to automatically transfer amounts between certain investment options on a monthly basis.	None	•Minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged is $1,500 over any time period between 3 and 60 months. •Cannot be used simultaneously with portfolio rebalancing or cross reinvestment.
Portfolio Rebalancing	Allows you to automatically reallocate your Contract Value among investment options on a periodic basis based on your standing allocation instructions.	None	•Cannot be used simultaneously with dollar cost averaging or cross reinvestment.
Cross-Reinvestment	When the amount invested in an investment option exceeds a baseline amount, allows you to automatically transfer the excess amount to another investment option.	None	•Cannot be used simultaneously with dollar cost averaging or portfolio rebalancing. •Not available for new participants.
Automatic Withdrawal Service	Allows you to take periodic withdrawals from your Contract automatically.	None	•Automatically terminates once i4LIFE® Advantage begins.

 

36

Optional Benefits – Available for Election
Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite	Provides: •Varying income options; •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals; •An Enhancement that may increase the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base; and •Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount.	•2.75% Single and Joint Life Options (as a percentage of the Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements or step-ups. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •The fee rate may increase with additional Purchase Payments, step-ups, and at any time after ten years from the rider effective date. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited.
4LATER® Select Advantage	Provides: •Protected Income Base which will be used to establish the amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base. Must later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit in order to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Select Advantage.	•2.75% Single and Joint Life Options (as a percentage of the Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Not available for purchase with a qualified contract. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited.
i4LIFE® Advantage	Provides: •Variable periodic Regular Income Payments for life. •The ability to make additional withdrawals and surrender the Contract during the Access Period. •The optional Guaranteed Income Benefit, which provides a minimum payout floor for those Regular Income Payments.	•i4LIFE® Advantage: 0.40% in addition to the base contract expense for the Death Benefit you have elected. •Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk): 2.25%* (single life option); 2.45%* (joint life option) *The Guaranteed Income Benefit charge is in addition to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge and your base contract expense.	•Guaranteed Income Benefit limits available investment options (Investment Requirements apply). •Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Restrictions apply to the length of the Access Period. •Additional Purchase Payments may be subject to restrictions.

 

37

Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Estate Enhancement Benefit Rider	Provides a Death Benefit equal to the greatest of (1) Contract Value; (2) all Purchase Payments, adjusted for withdrawals; (3) the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary prior to age 81 (decreased proportionately by subsequent withdrawals); (4) current Contract Value plus an amount based on earnings under the Contract.	•1.60% (Design 1) •2.05% (Design 2 and Design 3)	•If there are no contract earnings, the calculations of the Death Benefit using contract earnings will not be available. •Withdrawals could significantly reduce the benefit.
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)	Provides: •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base; •Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount; and •Nursing Home Enhancement.	•2.25% Single Life Option •2.45% Joint Life Option (as a percentage of the Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements or step-ups. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited.
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0	Provides: •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base; •Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount	•2.00% (as a percentage of Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Subject to a $10 million maximum across all Living Benefit Riders. •Excess withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements or step-ups. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited.
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage	Provides: •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals for you and any joint life regardless of investment performance. •Includes step-up and enhancement features that may result in a higher guaranteed minimum at certain points in time.	•1.50% (as a percentage of Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Subject to a $10 million maximum across all Living Benefit Riders. •Must be at least age 59 (single life option) or age 65 (joint life option) to begin taking guaranteed withdrawals. •Excess and early withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements or step-ups. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate. •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions.

38

Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Lincoln Market Select® Advantage	Provides: •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base; and •Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount.	•2.25% Single Life Option •2.45% Joint Life Option (as a percentage of the Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements or step-ups. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited.
Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage	Provides: •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base; and •Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount.	•2.25% Single Life Option •2.45% Joint Life Option (as a percentage of the Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate benefits. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements or step-ups. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited. •The guaranteed payments will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero. •Your Protected Income Base will not carry over to i4LIFE® Advantage.
Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM	Provides: •Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base; and •Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount.	•2.25% (as a percentage of Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited. •The guaranteed payments will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero. •Your Protected Income Base will not carry over to i4LIFE® Advantage.
Lincoln Wealth PassSM	•Provides income payments that guarantee a return of principal over your life expectancy. •Designed for a Beneficiary with Death Benefit proceeds from another nonqualified contract, or from a qualified (IRA and Roth IRA) contract or a qualified retirement plan if the original Contractowner died on or before December 31, 2019.	•2.25% (as an annualized percentage of Protected Amount)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Subject to $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited.

39

Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage	Provides: •A minimum guaranteed amount that you can withdraw, in installments, from your Contract. Lifetime periodic withdrawals may also be available if certain conditions are met.	•1.50% (as an annualized percentage of the Guaranteed Amount)	•Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Investment Requirements apply. •Subject to a $10 million maximum across all Living Benefit Riders. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited. •A step-up of the Guaranteed Amount may increase the fee rate.
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)	Provides: •Protected Income Base which will be used to establish the amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage; •An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base; •Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base. You must later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) in order to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk).	•2.00% (as a percentage of Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Not available for purchase with a qualified contract. •Subject to a $10 million maximum Protected Income Base across all Living Benefit Riders. •Additional Purchase Payments may be limited. •Purchase Payments and step-ups may increase fee rate.
4LATER® Advantage	•Establishes a benefit base used to calculate a guaranteed income benefit under i4LIFE® Advantage when you are ready to elect it. •The benefit base has the potential for enhancements and resets. Guaranteed income benefit after election of i4LIFE® Advantage has a step-up feature that may result in a higher guaranteed minimum at certain points in time.	•1.50% (as a percentage of Protected Income Base)	•Investment Requirements apply. •Withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Any withdrawal may negatively impact or eliminate the potential for enhancements, resets, or step-ups. •Resets may increase current fee rate. •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions.

40

Optional Benefits – No Longer Available for Election1
Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit	•Provides a minimum payout floor for Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage.	•Select Guaranteed Income Benefit: 2.25%* (single life option); 2.45%* (joint life option) •Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to 5/21/2018 and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) riders: 2.00%* (single/joint life option) •Guaranteed Income Benefit (versions 1, 2 and 3): 1.50%* (single/joint life option) *The Guaranteed Income Benefit charge is in addition to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge and your base contract expense.	•Guaranteed Income Benefit limits available investment options (Investment Requirements apply). •Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Restrictions apply to the length of the Access Period. •Additional Purchase Payments can be subject to restrictions.
Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage (LTC Rider)	The LTC Rider provides the potential to receive as LTC Benefits your Purchase Payments plus an additional amount equal to two times your Purchase Payments. These benefits are paid to you income tax- free. In addition, you have the opportunity to increase your tax-free long-term care benefits if there is investment gain in your Contract. The LTC Rider includes an Acceleration Benefit (paid out of your Contract Value), and Extension Benefit (which we pay out of our general account) and an optional Growth Benefit (for an additional charge).	•Acceleration Benefit Charge: up to 1.50% of LTC Guaranteed Amount •Extension Benefit Charge: up to 0.76% of the Extension Benefit •Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge: up to 0.14% of the Extension Benefit.	•Investment Requirements apply. •Excess Withdrawals could significantly reduce or terminate the benefit. •Additional Purchase Payments may not be made.

See Appendix C – Discontinued Living Benefit Riders for a description of the discontinued Living Benefit Riders.

Death Benefits

The chart below provides a brief overview of how the Death Benefit proceeds will be distributed if death occurs prior to i4LIFE® Advantage elections or prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Refer to your Contract for the specific provisions applicable upon death. 

upon death of:	and...	and...	Death Benefit proceeds pass to:
Contractowner	There is a surviving joint owner	The Annuitant is living or deceased	Joint owner
Contractowner	There is no surviving joint owner	The Annuitant is living or deceased	Designated Beneficiary
Contractowner	There is no surviving joint owner and the Beneficiary predeceases the Contractowner	The Annuitant is living or deceased	Contractowner's estate

41

upon death of:	and...	and...	Death Benefit proceeds pass to:
Annuitant	The Contractowner is living	There is no contingent Annuitant	The youngest Contractowner becomes the contingent Annuitant and the Contract continues. The Contractowner may waive* this continuation and receive the Death Benefit proceeds.
Annuitant	The Contractowner is living	The contingent Annuitant is living	Contingent Annuitant becomes the Annuitant and the Contract continues
Annuitant	The Contractowner is a trust or other non-natural person**	No contingent Annuitant allowed with non-natural Contractowner	Designated Beneficiary

 *

Notification from the Contractowner to receive the Death Benefit proceeds must be received within 75 days of the death of the Annuitant.

 **

Death of Annuitant is treated like death of the Contractowner.

A Death Benefit may be payable if the Contractowner (or a joint owner) or Annuitant dies prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You can choose the Death Benefit. Only one Death Benefit may be in effect at any one time and this Death Benefit terminates if you elect i4LIFE® Advantage or elect any other annuitization option. Generally, the more expensive the Death Benefit is, the greater the protection.

You should consider the following provisions carefully when designating the Beneficiary, Annuitant, any contingent Annuitant and any joint owner, as well as before changing any of these parties. The identity of these parties under the Contract may significantly affect the amount and timing of the Death Benefit or other amount paid upon a Contractowner's or Annuitant's death.

You may designate a Beneficiary during your lifetime and change the Beneficiary by filing a written request with our Home Office. Each change of Beneficiary revokes any previous designation. We reserve the right to request that you send us the Contract for endorsement of a change of Beneficiary.

Upon the death of the Contractowner, a Death Benefit will be paid to the Beneficiary. Upon the death of a joint owner, the Death Benefit will be paid to the surviving joint owner. If the Contractowner is a corporation or other non-individual (non-natural person), the death of the Annuitant will be treated as death of the Contractowner.

If an Annuitant who is not the Contractowner or joint owner dies, then the contingent Annuitant, if named, becomes the Annuitant and no Death Benefit is payable on the death of the Annuitant. If no contingent Annuitant is named, the Contractowner (or younger of joint owners) becomes the Annuitant. Alternatively, a Death Benefit may be paid to the Contractowner (and joint owner, if applicable, in equal shares). Notification of the election of this Death Benefit must be received by us within 75 days of the death of the Annuitant. The Contract terminates when any Death Benefit is paid due to the death of the Annuitant.

If a Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant was added or changed subsequent to the effective date of the Contract (unless the change occurred because of the death of a prior Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant), upon death, we will only pay the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the death claim.

If your Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid.

Account Value Death Benefit. The Account Value Death Benefit provides a Death Benefit equal to the Contract Value on the Valuation Date the Death Benefit is approved by us for payment. No additional Death Benefit is provided. Once you have selected this Death Benefit option, it cannot be changed. (Your Contract may refer to this benefit as the Contract Value Death Benefit.) For example, assume an initial deposit into the Contract of $10,000. The Contract Value increases and equals $12,000 on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved. The amount of Death Benefit paid equals $12,000.

Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit. The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit is the default Death Benefit under this Contact; this means that if you do not select a Death Benefit, the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit will be automatically selected for you at contract issue. There is an additional charge for this Death Benefit. The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit provides a Death Benefit equal to the greater of:

•

the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or

•

the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders (except Lincoln Wealth PassSM) may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite or Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage, and Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM.

42

For example, assume an initial deposit into the Contract of $10,000, and no withdrawals have been taken. The Contract Value decreases and equals $8,000 on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved. Since your principal is guaranteed, the amount of Death Benefit paid equals $10,000.

In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.

The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit may be discontinued by completing the Change of Death Benefit form and sending it to our Home Office. The benefit will be discontinued as of the Valuation Date we receive the request and the Account Value Death Benefit will apply. We will begin deducting the charge for the Account Value Death Benefit as of that date. See Charges and Other Deductions.

Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit (EGMDB). The EGMDB provides a Death Benefit equal to the greatest of:

•

the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or

•

the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders (except Lincoln Wealth PassSM) may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite or Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage, and Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM; or

•

the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary (including the inception date) (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant and prior to the death of the Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable) or Annuitant for whom a death claim is approved for payment. The highest Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and is decreased by withdrawals subsequent to that anniversary date in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value.

The following example shows how the Death Benefit amount is calculated under the EGMDB: 

7/3/2024 Initial Deposit / Contract Value	$10,000
7/3/2028 Contract Value	$25,000
7/3/2029 Contract Value	$23,500

The EGMDB provides a Death Benefit equal to the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary, so the amount of Death Benefit paid equals $25,000 on the date the death claim is approved.

In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals(surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.

There is an additional charge for this Death Benefit. You may discontinue the EGMDB at any time by completing the Change of Death Benefit form and sending it to our Home Office. The benefit will be discontinued as of the Valuation Date we receive the request, and the Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit or the Account Value Death Benefit will apply. We will begin deducting the applicable charge for the new Death Benefit as of that date. See Charges and Other Deductions.

The EGMDB is only available under nonqualified, IRA or Roth IRA contracts if the Contractowner, joint owner and Annuitant are under age 80 at the time of issuance.

Death Benefits which are no longer available for election include: Estate Enhancement Benefit Rider (EEB Rider). An Appendix to this prospectus provides a detailed description of this Death Benefit.

General Death Benefit Information

Only one of these Death Benefits may be in effect at any one time. Your Death Benefit terminates on and after the Annuity Commencement Date. i4LIFE® Advantage only provides Death Benefit options during the Access Period. There are no Death Benefits during the Lifetime Income Period. Please see the i4LIFE® Advantage – i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefit section of this prospectus for more information.

If there are joint owners, upon the death of the first Contractowner, we will pay a Death Benefit to the surviving joint owner. The surviving joint owner will be treated as the primary, designated Beneficiary. Any other Beneficiary designation on record at the time of death will be treated as a contingent Beneficiary. If the surviving joint owner is the spouse of the deceased joint owner, he/she may continue the Contract as sole Contractowner. Upon the death of the spouse who continued the Contract, we will pay a Death Benefit to the designated Beneficiary(s).

43

If the Beneficiary is the spouse of the Contractowner, then the spouse may elect to continue the Contract as the new Contractowner. All Contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. You are strongly encouraged to consult a tax advisor before electing spousal rights under the Contract.

Should the surviving spouse elect to continue the Contract, a portion of the Death Benefit may be credited to the Contract. Any portion of the Death Benefit that would have been payable (if the Contract had not been continued) that exceeds the current Contract Value on the Valuation Date we approve the claim will be added to the Contract Value. A portion of the Death Benefit credited to the Contract will be allocated to the variable Subaccounts in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount. If the Contract is continued in this way the Death Benefit in effect at the time the Beneficiary elected to continue the Contract will remain as the Death Benefit.

The value of the Death Benefit will be determined as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim. Approval of payment will occur upon our receipt of a claim submitted in Good Order. To be in Good Order, we require all the following:

1.

an original certified death certificate or other proof of death satisfactory to us; and

2.

written authorization for payment; and

3.

all required claim forms, fully completed (including selection of a settlement option).

Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, the payment of Death Benefits provided under this Contract must be made in compliance with Code Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable, as amended from time to time. Death Benefits may be taxable. See Federal Tax Matters.

Unless otherwise provided in the Beneficiary designation, one of the following procedures will take place on the death of a Beneficiary:

•

if any Beneficiary dies before the Contractowner, that Beneficiary’s interest will go to any other Beneficiaries named, according to their respective interests; and/or

•

if no Beneficiary survives the Contractowner, the proceeds will be paid to the Contractowner’s estate.

If the Beneficiary is a minor, court documents appointing the guardian/custodian may be required.

The Beneficiary may choose the method of payment of the Death Benefit unless the Contractowner has already selected a settlement option. If the Contract is a nonqualified contract, the Death Benefit payable to the Beneficiary or joint owner must be distributed within five years of the Contractowner’s date of death unless the Beneficiary begins receiving, within one year of the Contractowner’s death, the distribution in the form of a life annuity or an annuity for a designated period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy. If the Death Benefit is not distributed within five years of the Contractowner’s date of death, for any reason, including the claim was not presented in Good Order, then the Company will pay the proceeds to the Beneficiary.

If the Contract is a qualified contract or IRA, then according to the IRC, the Death Benefit payable to the Beneficiary or joint owner must be distributed within ten years of the Contractowner’s date of death unless the Beneficiary is an “eligible designated beneficiary”. An eligible designated beneficiary may take the Death Benefit distribution in the form of a life annuity or an annuity for a designated period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy, subject to certain additional exceptions. If the Contract is not distributed within the ten-year deadline, for any reason, including that the claim was not presented in Good Order, the balance is treated as a required minimum distribution under the Internal Revenue Code and subject to a 50% tax.

Upon the death of the Annuitant, Federal tax law requires that an annuity election be made no later than 60 days after we have approved the death claim for payment.

The recipient of a Death Benefit may elect to receive payment either in the form of a lump sum settlement or an Annuity Payout. If a lump sum settlement is elected, the proceeds will be mailed within seven days of approval by us of the claim subject to the laws, regulations and tax code governing payment of Death Benefits. This payment may be postponed as permitted by the Investment Company Act of 1940.

Abandoned Property. Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the date a benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a Death Benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the Beneficiary of the Death Benefit, or the Beneficiary does not come forward to claim the Death Benefit in a timely manner, the Death Benefit will be “escheated”. This means that the Death Benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the Beneficiary or the Contractowner last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. This escheatment is revocable and the state is obligated to pay the Death Benefit (without interest) if your Beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation.

To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your Beneficiary designations, including addresses, if and as they change. You may update your Beneficiary designations by submitting a Beneficiary change form to our Home Office.

44

Additional Services

These additional services are available to you under your Contract: dollar-cost averaging (DCA), automatic withdrawal service (AWS), cross-reinvestment service, and portfolio rebalancing. Currently, there is no charge for these services. However, we reserve the right to impose one after appropriate notice to Contractowners. In order to take advantage of one of these services, you will need to complete the appropriate election form that is available from our Home Office or call 1-800-942-5500. These services will stop once we become aware of a pending death claim. For further detailed information on these services, please see Additional Services in the SAI.

Dollar-Cost Averaging. Dollar-cost averaging allows you to transfer amounts from the DCA fixed account, if available, or select variable Subaccounts into the Subaccounts on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available.

You may elect to participate in the DCA program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by completing our election form, by calling our Home Office, or by other electronic means. The minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged (DCA’d) is $1,500 over any time period between three and 60 months. We may offer different time periods for new Purchase Payments and for transfers of Contract Value. State variations may exist. Once elected, the program will remain in effect until the earlier of:

•

the Annuity Commencement Date;

•

the value of the amount being DCA’d is depleted; or

•

you cancel the program by written request or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file.

We reserve the right to limit certain time periods or to restrict access to this program at any time.

A transfer made as part of this program is not considered a transfer for purposes of limiting the number of transfers that may be made, or assessing any charges or Interest Adjustment which may apply to transfers. Upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment allocated to the DCA fixed account, the existing program duration will be extended to reflect the end date of the new DCA program. However, the existing interest crediting rate will not be extended. The existing interest crediting rate will expire at its originally scheduled expiration date and the value remaining in the DCA account from the original amount as well as any additional Purchase Payments will be credited with interest at the standard DCA rate at the time. If you cancel the DCA program, your remaining Contract Value in the DCA program will be allocated to the Subaccounts according to your allocation instructions. We reserve the right to discontinue or modify this program at any time. If you have chosen DCA from one of the Subaccounts, only the amount allocated to that DCA program will be transferred. Investment gain, if any, will remain in that Subaccount unless you reallocate it to one of the other Subaccounts. If you are enrolled in automatic rebalancing, this amount may be automatically rebalanced based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of rebalancing. DCA does not assure a profit or protect against loss.

Automatic Withdrawal Service. The automatic withdrawal service (AWS) provides for an automatic periodic withdrawal of your Contract Value. Withdrawals under AWS are subject to applicable surrender charges and Interest Adjustments. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge and Fixed Side of the Contract – Interest Adjustment. Withdrawals under AWS will be noted on your quarterly statement. AWS is also available for amounts allocated to the fixed account, if applicable.

Cross-Reinvestment Service. The cross-reinvestment service automatically transfers the Contract Value in a designated Subaccount that exceeds a baseline amount to another specific Subaccount at specific intervals. You specify the applicable Subaccounts, the baseline amount and the interval period. As of May 1, 2010, this service is no longer available to new participants. Any Contractowner who had enrolled in this service prior to this date may continue to participate.

Portfolio Rebalancing. Portfolio rebalancing is an option that restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of Contract Value allocated to each Subaccount. The rebalancing may take place monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually. Rebalancing events will be noted on your quarterly statement. The fixed account is not available for portfolio rebalancing.

Only one of the three additional services (DCA, cross-reinvestment and portfolio rebalancing) may be used at one time. For example, you cannot have DCA and cross-reinvestment running simultaneously. We reserve the right to discontinue any or all of these administrative services at any time.

Living Benefit Riders

The Living Benefit Riders described in this section provide different methods to take income from your Contract Value or receive lifetime payments and provide certain guarantees, regardless of the investment performance of the Contract. These guarantees are subject to certain conditions, as set forth below. There are differences between the riders in the features provided, income rates, investment options, charge rates, and charge structure. Additionally, the age at which you may begin receiving a benefit from your rider may vary between riders. In addition, the purchase of one rider may impact the availability of another rider. Not all riders will be available at all times. Before you elect a rider, or terminate your existing rider to elect a new rider, you should carefully review the terms and conditions of each rider. Riders elected at contract issue will be effective on the Contract’s effective date. Riders elected after the Contract is issued will be effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us. You cannot elect more than one Living Benefit Rider or payout option offered in your Contract at any one time. Your registered representative will help you determine which Living Benefit Rider best suits your financial goals.

45

The benefits and features of the optional Living Benefit Riders are separate and distinct from the downside protection strategies that may be employed by the funds offered under the Contract. The riders do not guarantee the investment results of the funds.

There is no guarantee that any Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage) will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of a rider available to new purchasers. Certain broker-dealers may require Contractowners to make post-contract issue rider requests through their registered representative. If your registered representative of record is affiliated with such a broker-dealer we will not process your request until you consult with your registered representative.

Excess Withdrawals under certain Living Benefit Riders may result in a reduction or premature termination of those benefits or of those riders. If you are not certain how an Excess Withdrawal will reduce your future guaranteed amounts, you should contact either your registered representative or us prior to requesting a withdrawal to find out what impact, if any, the Excess Withdrawal will have on any guarantees under the Living Benefit Rider.

If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See Appendix B – Investment Requirements and Appendix C – Discontinued Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders for more information.

From time to time, we relax our rules that apply to dropping certain riders and subsequently adding certain new ones. For example, we may waive the waiting period and instead permit you to add a new rider immediately after dropping your old one. We may also let you drop a rider before it has been in effect for the required holding period. When you drop your old rider, your old rider and charge will be terminated.

If you drop a rider for a new one during a period of time when we do not have an offer in place or have a different offer, you will not be eligible for any future offers related to the rider you previously dropped, even if such future offer would have included a greater or different benefit.

Rate Sheets

The current Enhancement rate, Protected Annual Income rates, and Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages available under certain Living Benefit Riders are declared in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the current rates and/or current percentages and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates and/or percentages. The rates and/or percentages may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rates and/or percentages on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate and/or percentage indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. The rates and/or percentages from previous effective periods are included in Appendix D, E and F to this prospectus.

Lincoln ProtectedPay® Lifetime Income Suite

Lincoln ProtectedPay® is a suite of Living Benefit Riders available for purchase that provides:

•

Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals for you (and your spouse if the joint life option is selected) up to the Protected Annual Income amount which is based upon a Protected Income Base;

•

An Enhancement that increases the Protected Income Base if certain criteria are met, as set forth below;

•

Annual step-ups of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement;

•

Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount (after reaching a higher age-band and after an Account Value Step-up).

The rider suite provides flexible investment and income choices to meet your individual needs through six options:

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus®

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus®

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max®

•

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max®

In the following discussion, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® and Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®, together, are referred to as the “Core options.” Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus® and Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus®, together, are referred to as the “Plus options.” Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® and Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max®, together, are referred to as the “Max options”.

46

You should carefully consider which is the best option for you. Consider the following:

•

The Select options provide more investment choices, but overall, lower income rates.

•

The Secure options provide less investment choice, but overall, higher income rates.

•

The Core options provide level income that does not decrease if the Contract Value reaches $0 and the opportunity to transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.

•

The Plus options provide higher initial income that decreases further than the Core options, if the Contract Value reaches $0.

•

The Max options provide the highest initial income that decreases further than the Plus options, if the Contract Value reaches $0.

The income option selected is irrevocable unless you follow the termination guidelines listed later in this discussion.

Protected Annual Income payments are based upon specified percentages of the Protected Income Base, which are age-based and may increase over time. For the Plus and Max options, your Protected Annual Income payments will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero. You may receive Protected Annual Income payments for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse if the joint life option is chosen.

Please note any withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet, or that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals. In most states, amounts that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value, and Enhancement Base by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal and will terminate the rider if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero. As a result, the Protected Annual Income amount would be reduced as well. If the Enhancement Base is reduced to zero, you will not be eligible for further Enhancements. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of an Enhancement.

The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

Availability. Lincoln ProtectedPay® riders are available for election on all new and existing contracts. If you elect the rider at contract issue, it will be effective on the Contract's effective date. If you elect the rider after the Contract is issued, the rider will be effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us and will be the rider version available for sale at that time. We reserve the right to discontinue offering post-issue elections of this rider at any time upon advanced written notice to you. This means that there is a chance you may not be able to elect it in the future. The initial Purchase Payment or Contract Value (if purchased after the Contract is issued) must be at least $25,000. Rider elections are subject to Home Office approval if your Contract Value totals $2 million or more.

Lincoln ProtectedPay® is available for purchase with nonqualified and qualified (IRAs and Roth IRAs) annuity contracts. The Contractowner/Annuitant as well as the spouse under the joint life option must be age 85 or younger at the time this rider is elected (at least age 58 for contracts issued in the state of Maryland).

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The Protected Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups and Enhancements, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Protected Income Base will be reset on each Benefit Year anniversary to the greater of the current Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Value, or the Contract Value Step-up. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.

The Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Enhancement Value. The Enhancement Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment or the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments (according to the timeline outlined below) and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by an Enhancement or Account Value Step-up.

The Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value, and the Enhancement Base are not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and the Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and Enhancement Base by $10,000. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable

47

Bonus Credit) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Value and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income amount but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be added to the Enhancement Base. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credit) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.

Enhancement. We will increase the Enhancement Value on each Benefit Year anniversary during the Enhancement Period if no withdrawal occurred in that Benefit Year. An Enhancement will occur on a Benefit Year anniversary only if all following conditions are satisfied.

On each Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will be equal to the Enhancement Value, if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under the age of 86;

b.

there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period;

d. the Enhancement Value is greater than the Protected Income Base immediately prior to a Benefit Year anniversary;

e. the Enhancement Value is greater than the Contract Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary; and

f. the Enhancement Base is greater than zero.

The initial Enhancement Value is equal to the initial Protected Income Base. The Enhancement Value on the first Benefit Year anniversary, assuming no withdrawal occurred in that Benefit Year, is the sum of (A) and (A) multiplied by (B), where “A” is the Enhancement Base and “B” is the Enhancement Rate. If there is a withdrawal, the Enhancement Value will not increase that year.

On each subsequent rider date anniversary thereafter, assuming no withdrawal occurred in that Benefit Year, the Enhancement Value established on the previous Benefit Year anniversary is increased by an amount equal to the Enhancement Base multiplied by the Enhancement Rate. Excess Withdrawals reduce the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and Enhancement Base as discussed below. The reduction to the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and the Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value or Enhancement Base.

The current Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the rate may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Enhancement rate for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your rate will not change as a result.

The Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is declared in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Enhancement rate and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with this rate. The rate may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rate on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Enhancement Rates for previous effective periods are included in Appendix F to this prospectus.

Note: The Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary if an Account Value Step-up to the Protected Income Base occurs, or where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value (including a Protected Annual Income payment) in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the Enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of a 6% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base and assumes that no withdrawals have been made.

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000; Enhancement Base = $100,000; Enhancement Value = $100,000

Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000; Enhancement Value = $115,000

48

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Value will not be less than $121,900 (= $115,000 + ($100,000 x 6% + $15,000 x 6%)).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 of $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000; Enhancement Value $125,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is after the first 90 days from the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Value will not be less than $131,900 (= $125,000 + ($100,000 x 6% + $15,000 x 6%)). The additional $10,000 will be added to the Enhancement Base on the second Benefit Year anniversary.

As explained below and as noted above, an Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal to or greater than what the Enhancement Value provides, you will not receive the Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the Enhancement would not apply each year. An Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the Enhancement is included in the Withdrawal Amount section below.

Enhancement Period. The Enhancement Period is a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. Enhancements are not available once the Enhancement Period has expired.

Account Value Step-ups. The Protected Income Base will increase to equal the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner/Annuitant and spouse (joint life option) are under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals or fees (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is greater than the Protected Income Base immediately prior to that Benefit Year anniversary; and

c.

the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Enhancement Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary.

The Account Value Step-up will not increase the Enhancement Base or the Enhancement Value and is available even in those years when a withdrawal has occurred.

Your protected lifetime income fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. That means if the current fee rate has increased, this would cause an increase in your annual fee rate for this rider. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary. See Charges and Other Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for details. If you decline an Account Value Step-up, you will continue to be eligible for future Account Value Step-ups and Enhancements if you meet the conditions listed above.

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-ups and the Enhancement impact the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments): 

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base	Enhancement Base	Enhancement Value
At issue	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$104,000	$106,000	$100,000	$106,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$115,000	$115,000	$100,000	$112,000
3rd Benefit Year anniversary	$116,000	$118,000	$100,000	$118,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Contract Value is higher than the previous Protected Income Base of $100,000, but since the Enhancement would increase the Protected Income Base to a higher amount, the Protected Income Base is increased to equal the Enhancement Value of $106,000, and the Enhancement Base remains at $100,000.

On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the Contract Value of $115,000 is higher than the Enhancement Value of $112,000 ($112,000 = $106,000 + ($100,000 x 6%)), so the Protected Income Base is increased to equal the Contract Value of $115,000, and the Enhancement Base remains at $100,000.

On the third Benefit Year anniversary, the Contract Value is higher than the previous Protected Income Base of $115,000, but since the Enhancement would increase the Protected Income Base to a higher amount, the Protected Income Base is increased to equal the Enhancement Value of $118,000, and the Enhancement Base remains at $100,000.

49

Withdrawal Amount. Protected Annual Income withdrawals are available at the youngest age on the Rate Sheet. The minimum age may vary between the different rider options. The Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year. As long as the Protected Annual Income amount is not reduced to zero, these withdrawals may be taken for your lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option). You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero as a result of an Excess Withdrawal. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate. The Protected Annual Income amount for the Plus and Max options will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero.

The Protected Annual Income amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Income Base by the applicable rate, which varies by which rider option is selected, based on your age and whether the single or joint life option has been elected, and, for the Plus and Max options, whether or not your Contract Value has been reduced to zero. Under the joint life option, the age of the younger of you or your spouse will be used. The Protected Annual Income amount will change upon an Account Value Step-up, an Enhancement, additional Purchase Payments, and Excess Withdrawals, as described below.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a contract to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet information by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus, or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Protected Annual Income rates for previous effective periods are included in Appendix D to this prospectus.

After your first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate can only increase on a Benefit Year anniversary on or after you have reached an applicable higher age band and after there has also been an Account Value Step-up. If you have reached an applicable higher age band and there has not also been a subsequent Account Value Step-up, then the Protected Annual Income rate will not increase until the next Account Value Step-up occurs. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the remaining amount into the next Benefit Year.

Core options: If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, the remaining Protected Annual Income amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next Benefit Year anniversary, the scheduled amount will automatically resume and continue for your life (and your spouse’s life if the joint life option is chosen) under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base or Enhancement Value in a lump sum.

Plus and Max options: If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate and amount will be immediately reduced, as reflected on your Rate Sheet. The Protected Annual Income amount payable as calculated in Table A of the Rate Sheet cannot exceed the remaining Contract Value. However, if the total Protected Annual Income amount received in the Benefit Year your Contract Value is reduced to zero is less than the recalculated Protected Annual Income amount based on Table B of the Rate Sheet, the difference is payable for the remainder of that Benefit Year. Otherwise, you will not be able to receive further Protected Annual Income payments until the next Benefit Year anniversary. Withdrawals equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will continue automatically for your life (and your spouse’s life if applicable) under the Protected Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base or Enhancement Value in a lump sum.

For all rider options, cumulative withdrawals during a Benefit Year that are equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base or Enhancement Value. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount.

The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount affect the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, Enhancement Value, and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and a Contract Value of $200,000 on the rider’s effective date: 

50

Contract Value on the rider's effective date	$200,000
Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base and Enhancement Value on the rider's effective date	$200,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider's effective date ($200,000 x 5%)	$10,000
Contract Value six months after rider's effective date	$210,000
Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base and Enhancement Value six months after rider's effective date	$200,000
Withdrawal six months after rider's effective date	$10,000
Contract Value after withdrawal ($210,000 - $10,000)	$200,000
Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base and Enhancement Value after withdrawal ($200,000 - $0)	$200,000
Contract Value on first Benefit Year anniversary	$205,000
Protected Income Base first Benefit Year anniversary	$205,000
Enhancement Value and Enhancement Base on first Benefit Year anniversary	$200,000
Protected Annual Income amount on first Benefit Year anniversary ($205,000 x 5%)	$10,250

Since there was a withdrawal during the first year, an Enhancement is not available, but the Account Value Step-up was available and increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $205,000. On the first anniversary of the rider’s effective date, the Protected Annual Income amount is $10,250 (5% x $205,000). The Enhancement Base and Enhancement Value remain at $200,000.

Purchase Payments added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment. The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract. Persistency Credits added to the Contract do not immediately increase the Protected Annual Income amount but are added to the Contract Value and may increase the Protected Income Base upon an Account Value Step-up which in return may increase the Protected Annual Income amount.

Enhancements and Account Value Step-ups will increase the Protected Income Base and thus the Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Annual Income amount, after the Protected Income Base is adjusted by an Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up, will be equal to the adjusted Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate. For the Plus and Max options, the Protected Annual Income will be lower when your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than an Excess Withdrawal, which will result in a reduced Protected Annual income amount.

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:

1.

the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal;

2.

withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet; or

3.

withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.

When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:

1.

the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base and Enhancement Value are reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base and Enhancement Value could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and

2.

the Protected Annual Income amount will be recalculated to equal the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the new Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal).

Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year, if applicable, in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your registered representative or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have questions about Excess Withdrawals.

The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, the Enhancement Value, the Protected Annual Income amount, and your Contract Value. The example assumes that the Contractowner makes a $10,940 withdrawal, which cause a $10,200 reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000

51

Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000
Enhancement Value = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)

After a $10,940 Withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $6,690 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value is reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250 and the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Enhancement Value are not reduced:

Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000
Enhancement Value = $85,000

The Contract Value is also reduced by the $6,690 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base and the Enhancement Value are reduced by 12%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $55,750.

Contract Value = $49,060 ($55,750 - $6,690)
Contract Value Reduction % due to the Excess Withdrawal = 12% ($6,690 ÷ $55,750)
Protected Income Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Enhancement Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Enhancement Value = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% of $74,800 Protected Income Base)

On the following Benefit Year anniversary:

Contract Value = $48,000
Protected Income Base = $74,800
Enhancement Base = $74,800
Enhancement Value = $74,800
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% x $74,800)

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, Enhancement Value and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Enhancement Value may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider and Contract will terminate.

Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount. Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waivers to surrender charge provisions set forth in the prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $10,940 withdrawal: the $4,250 Protected Annual Income amount is not subject to surrender charges; the $6,690 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges according to the surrender charge schedule in your prospectus. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge.

Withdrawals from IRA contracts will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this RMD exception to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

2.

The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than the RMD are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph);

4. This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and

5. The younger of you or your spouse (joint life option) reach the youngest age band on the Rate Sheet.

If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to the RMD, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

52

Protected Annual Income Payout Option. The Protected Annual Income Payout Option (“PAIPO”) is an Annuity Payout option under which the Contractowner (and joint life if applicable) will receive annuity payments for life. This option is different from other Annuity Payout options, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value. If you are required to take annuity payments because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, you have the option of electing the PAIPO. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero and you have a remaining Protected Income Base, you will receive payments under the PAIPO.

Core options: Contractowners may decide to choose the PAIPO over i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit if they feel this may provide a higher final payment over time and they place more importance on this payment over access to the Account Value.

Plus and Max options: Annuity payments made under PAIPO will be equal to the Protected Income Base multiplied by the Protected annual Income rate shown in Table B of your Rate Sheet.

For all rider options, payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for your life or the life of you and your spouse for the joint life option. Once you elect the PAIPO, the death benefit terminates, and the Beneficiary will not receive a Death Benefit payment.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln ProtectedPay® has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base or Enhancement Value upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant and provides no increase in value to the Death Benefit over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln ProtectedPay® does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts - Death Benefits.

Upon the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant (single life option), this rider will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Upon the first death under the joint life option, withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount continue to be available for the life of the surviving spouse. The Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will continue to be available, if applicable, as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln ProtectedPay® will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death).

Termination. After the fifth Benefit Year anniversary, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Lincoln ProtectedPay® will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option will continue if applicable);

•

upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage;

•

upon the death under the single life option or the death of the surviving Secondary Life under the joint life option;

•

when the Protected Income Base or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal;

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the Secondary Life under the joint life option assumes ownership of the Contract upon the death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed due to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree; or

•

upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value to equal the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base or Enhancement Value. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time, except i4LIFE® Advantage.

Core options: i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit option. Contractowners who elect Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® may decide to later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit. Contractowners who elect Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® may decide to later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). This transition must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.

4LATER® Select Advantage

4LATER® Select Advantage is a Living Benefit Rider available for purchase that provides a Protected Income Base which will be used to establish the amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage. If you elect 4LATER® Select Advantage, you must later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit in order to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Select Advantage.

The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

53

Availability. The 4LATER® Select Advantage rider is available for election on all new and existing contracts. If you elect the rider at contract issue, it will be effective on the Contract's effective date. If you elect the rider after the Contract is issued, the rider will be effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us and will be the rider version available for sale at that time. We reserve the right to discontinue offering post-issue elections of this rider at any time upon advanced written notice to you. This means that there is a chance that you may not be able to elect it in the future. The initial Purchase Payment or Contract Value (if purchased after the Contract is issued) must be at least $25,000. Rider elections are subject to Home Office approval if your Contract Value totals $2 million or more.

4LATER® Select Advantage is not available with qualified contracts and is designed primarily for purchasers of nonqualified contracts where the Contractowner and Annuitant are different people (single life option) or with joint life benefits where the Secondary Life is not a spouse. The Contractowner, Annuitant, and Secondary Life under the joint life option must be age 85 or younger at the time this rider is elected.

If you own a Living Benefit Rider and you wish to elect 4LATER® Select Advantage, you must first terminate your existing Living Benefit Rider. In most cases, you must wait at least 12 months after this termination and also comply with your existing Living Benefit Rider’s termination rules, before you will be able to elect 4LATER® Select Advantage. For further information on termination rules, see the “Termination” section associated with your Living Benefit Rider. In all cases, by terminating your existing Living Benefit Rider, you will no longer be entitled to any of the benefits that have accrued under that rider.

If you elected 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) and you want to terminate that rider to elect 4LATER® Select Advantage, we are currently waiving the five-year holding period that is required before terminating a rider. Additionally, we will no longer require a one-year waiting period before electing a new Living Benefit Rider in these situations. Other than the termination of your current rider, and the waiver of the holding period, your Contract will not change in any way. Any applicable existing or future surrender charges will continue to apply, as described in your Contract and this prospectus. We are doing this as a customer service to you, and there is no financial incentive being provided to you, your registered representative, or to anyone else if you decide to terminate your existing 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider and elect 4LATER® Select Advantage. There is no guarantee that these waivers will be offered in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time.

In general, anytime you terminate a rider, you will no longer be entitled to any of the benefits that have accrued under that rider. If you decide to drop an existing rider, your current Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will terminate without value. In other words, you cannot transfer either your current Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base to the new rider. Your initial Protected Income Base under 4LATER® Select Advantage will be equal to the Contract Value on the new rider effective date. Your initial Enhancement Base will be equal to the Protected Income Base on the rider effective date.

You should carefully compare the features and benefits provided by your existing rider to the features and benefits provided by 4LATER® Select Advantage before making your decision. Different riders do not include all the same features and may not provide the same level of guarantee. You should also compare the fees and charges of each rider. If you have any question about terminating your existing rider to elect a new one, you should contact your registered representative or call us at 1-800-942-5500.

If you decide to elect 4LATER® Select Advantage, you will be required to adhere to the Investment Requirements for your new rider. See – Investment Requirements.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit amount under i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit at a later date. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The Protected Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups and Enhancements, and decreased by all withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or Secondary Life if joint life option) are the covered lives.

For rider elections on and after November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), the Protected Income Base will be reset on each Benefit Year anniversary to the greater of the current Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Value, or the Account Value Step-up. The Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Enhancement Value. The Enhancement Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment or the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments and decreased by all withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by an Enhancement. The Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value, and the Enhancement Base are not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

54

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and the Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base). For example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and Enhancement Base by $10,300. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credit) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Value and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income amount but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be added to the Enhancement Base. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credit) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

For rider elections on and after June 11, 2018, and prior to November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), the Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Protected Income Base upon an Enhancement. The Enhancement Base is equal to the Protected Income Base on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by all withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by an Enhancement. The Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base are not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base). For example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by $10,300. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credit) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating an Enhancement. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credit) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

Rider elections prior to June 11, 2018 do not have an Enhancement Base.

After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.

Each withdrawal reduces the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Enhancement Value (if applicable), in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal. The reduction to the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal.

The following example demonstrates the impact of a withdrawal on the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, Enhancement Value (if applicable), and the Contract Value. The Contractowner makes a withdrawal of $11,200 which causes a $12,550 reduction in the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Enhancement Value (if applicable).

Prior to the withdrawal:
Contract Value = $112,000
Protected Income Base = $125,500
Enhancement Base = $125,500
Enhancement Value = $125,500

After a withdrawal of $11,200, the Contract Value is reduced by 10% ($11,200) and the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and Enhancement Base are also reduced by 10%, the same proportion by which the withdrawal reduced the Contract Value ($11,200 ÷ $112,000)

Contract Value = $100,800 ($112,000 - $11,200)
Protected Income Base = $112,950 ($125,500 x 10% = $12,550; $125,500 - $12,550 = $112,950)
Enhancement Base = $112,950 ($125,500 x 10% = $12,550; $125,500 - $12,550 = $112,950)
Enhancement Value = $112,950 ($125,500 x 10% = $12,550; $125,500 - $12,550 = $112,950)

In a declining market, withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Enhancement Value and as a result will reduce your future Guaranteed Income Benefit. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to withdrawals, this rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to a withdrawal, both the rider and the Contract will terminate.

Enhancement. The current Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the rate may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Enhancement rate for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your rate will not change as a result.

55

The Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is set forth in a supplement to a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Enhancement rate and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with this rate. The rate may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rate on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Enhancement rates for previous effective periods are included in Appendix F to this prospectus.

For rider elections on after November 28, 2022, we will calculate the Enhancement Value on each Benefit Year anniversary during the Enhancement Period if no withdrawal occurred in that Benefit Year. The Enhancement will occur on a Benefit Year anniversary only if all following conditions are satisfied.

On each Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will be the greater of the Account Value and the Enhancement Value, if:

a. the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under the age of 86;

b. there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period;

d. the Enhancement Value is greater than the Protected Income Base immediately prior to a Benefit Year anniversary adjustment;

e. the Enhancement Value is greater than the Contract Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary; and

f. the Enhancement Base is greater than zero.

The initial Enhancement Value on the first Benefit Year anniversary, assuming no withdrawal occurred in that Benefit Year, is the sum of (A) and ((A) multiplied by (B)), where “A” is the Enhancement Base and “B” is the Enhancement Rate. If there is a withdrawal, the Enhancement Value will not increase that year.

On each subsequent rider date anniversary thereafter, assuming no withdrawal occurred in that Benefit Year, the Enhancement Value established on the previous Benefit Year anniversary is increased by an amount equal to the Enhancement Base multiplied by the Enhancement Rate. Withdrawals reduce the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and Enhancement Base as discussed below. The reduction to the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value and the Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Value or Enhancement Base.

For rider elections prior to November 28, 2022, you are eligible for an increase in the Protected Income Base through an Enhancement on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Annuitant (single life option) or the Annuitant and Secondary Life (joint life option) are under age 86;

b.

there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c.

the rider is within the Enhancement Period (described below);

d.

the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement amount is added would be greater than the Contract Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary; and

e.

the Enhancement Base is greater than zero.

The Enhancement equals the Enhancement Base or the Protected Income Base (depending on the rider purchase date), minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, multiplied by the Enhancement Rate. The Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base are not reduced by Purchase Payments received in the first 90 days after the rider effective date.

During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the annual rate may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. If you decline an Enhancement, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement starting on the next Benefit Year anniversary as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Note: The Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary if an Account Value Step-up to the Protected Income Base occurs, or where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the Enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

56

The following is an example of the impact of the 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base and assumes that no withdrawals or Bonus Credits have been made.

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000; Enhancement Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 of $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000; Enhancement Base = $125,000

This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date for the rider. It will not be eligible for an Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).

As explained below, an Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal to or greater than what the Enhancement provides, you will not receive the Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the Enhancement would not apply. The Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

Enhancement Period. The Enhancement Period is a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider.

•

Rider elections prior to June 11, 2018 and on and after November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), have only one 10-year Enhancement Period. The Enhancement Period does not reset, and Enhancements are not available once the Enhancement Period has expired.

•

Riders elected on and after June 11, 2018, and prior to November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), have multiple Enhancement Periods that reset immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the Enhancements will stop at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs.

Account Value Step-up. For rider elections on and after November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), the Protected Income Base will increase to equal the highest Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner/Annuitant and spouse (joint life option) are under age 86; and

b.

the highest Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is greater than the Protected Income Base immediately prior to that Benefit Year anniversary; and

c.

the Account Value Step-up is greater than the Enhancement Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary.

The Account Value Step-up will not increase the Enhancement Base or the Enhancement Value and is available even in those years when a withdrawal has occurred.

For rider elections prior to November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will increase to equal the highest Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Annuitant (single life option), or the Secondary Life (joint life option) are still living and under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement (if any).

For rider elections on or after June 11, 2018, and prior to November 28, 2022 (subject to state availability), each time the Account Value Step-up occurs, a new Enhancement Period starts. The Account Value Step-up is available even in years when a withdrawal has occurred.

For all rider elections, the fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. That means if the current fee rate has increased, this would cause an increase in your annual fee rate for this rider. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up. See Charges & Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for details. If you decline an Account Value Step-up, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement through the end of the Enhancement Period, including in the year you declined the Account Value Step-up, as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

57

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-up and the 5% Enhancement impact the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base
At issue	$50,000	$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$56,700

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700).

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. 4LATER® Select Advantage has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, or Enhancement Value upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of the 4LATER® Select Advantage does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. Generally, all Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9), as amended. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

If the Contractowner is not also named as the Annuitant or the Secondary Life, upon the first death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life, the 4LATER® Select Advantage rider will continue. Upon the second death of either the Annuitant or Secondary Life, the rider will terminate.

Upon the death of the Contractowner, this rider will continue only if either Annuitant or the Secondary Life becomes the new Contractowner and payments under i4LIFE® Advantage begin within one year after the death of the Contractowner.

Termination. After the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the 4LATER® Select Advantage rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. After this time, the rider will also terminate if the Contractowner fails to adhere to the Investment Requirements. 4LATER® Select Advantage will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date;

•

if the Annuitant is changed including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

upon the second death of either the Annuitant or Secondary Life;

•

when the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to withdrawals;

•

the last day that you can elect i4LIFE® Advantage (age 95, younger of you or your spouse); or

•

upon termination of the underlying contract.

This termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base or Enhancement Value (if applicable). Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit option. If you elect 4LATER® Select Advantage, you must later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit in order to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Select Advantage. This transition must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.

i4LIFE® Advantage

i4LIFE® Advantage (the Variable Annuity Payout Option Rider in your Contract) is an optional Annuity Payout rider you may purchase at an additional cost and is separate and distinct from other Annuity Payout options offered under your Contract and described later in this prospectus. You may also purchase i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit for an additional charge. See Charges and Other Deductions – i4LIFE® Advantage Charge.

i4LIFE® Advantage provides variable, periodic Regular Income Payments for life subject to certain conditions. The optional Guaranteed Income Benefit, if available, provides a minimum payout floor for those Regular Income Payments. These payments are made during two time periods; an Access Period and a Lifetime Income Period, which are discussed in further detail below. If your Account Value is reduced to zero (except by additional withdrawals as described below), these payments will continue for your life (or the lives of you and your Secondary Life under the joint lifetime option) during the Lifetime Income Period. i4LIFE® Advantage is different from other Annuity Payout options provided by Lincoln because with i4LIFE® Advantage, you have the ability to make additional withdrawals or surrender the Contract during the Access Period. If your Account Value is reduced to zero due to any additional withdrawals, i4LIFE® Advantage will end and your Contract will terminate. The Guaranteed Income Benefit is described in further detail below.

58

When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, you must choose the Annuitant and Secondary Life (if applicable). The Annuitant and Secondary Life may not be changed after i4LIFE® Advantage is elected. For qualified contracts, the Secondary Life must be the spouse. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits regarding the impact of a change to the Annuitant prior to the i4LIFE® Advantage election.

If i4LIFE® Advantage is selected, the applicable transfer provisions among Subaccounts and the fixed account will continue to be those specified in your annuity contract for transfers on or before the Annuity Commencement Date. However, once i4LIFE® Advantage begins, any automatic withdrawal service will terminate. See The Contracts – Transfers on or Before the Annuity Commencement Date.

Additional Purchase Payments may be made during the Access Period for an IRA annuity contract, unless a Guaranteed Income Benefit has been elected. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit option has been elected on an IRA contract, additional Purchase Payments may be made until the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is calculated. Additional Purchase Payments will not be accepted after the Periodic Income Commencement Date for a nonqualified annuity contract.

Availability. i4LIFE® Advantage is available for contracts with a Contract Value of at least $50,000 and may be elected at the time of application or at any time before any other Annuity Payout option under this Contract is elected by sending a completed i4LIFE® Advantage election form to our Home Office. i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) is the only version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit that is currently available, unless you are transitioning to Guaranteed Income Benefit from a Prior Rider. You may elect any available version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit when you elect i4LIFE® Advantage or during the Access Period, if still available for election, subject to the terms and conditions at that time. You may choose not to purchase the Guaranteed Income Benefit at the time you purchase i4LIFE® Advantage by indicating that you do not want the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit on the election form. Additionally, certain Living Benefit Riders allow a transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions. If you intend to use the Protected Income Base or the Guaranteed Amount from a previously elected Living Benefit Rider to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you must elect the Guaranteed Income Benefit at the time you elect i4LIFE® Advantage.

i4LIFE® Advantage and the Guaranteed Income Benefit are available on nonqualified annuities, IRAs and Roth IRAs (check with your registered representative regarding availability in the SEP market). i4LIFE® Advantage for IRA contracts is only available if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, are age 59½ or older at the time the rider is elected. i4LIFE® Advantage without the Guaranteed Income Benefit must be elected by age 90 on IRA contracts or age 105 on nonqualified contracts. i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit must be elected by age 80 on IRA contracts or age 95 on nonqualified contracts. i4LIFE® Advantage is not available to beneficiaries of IRA contracts. Additional limitations on issue ages and features may be necessary to comply with the IRC provisions for required minimum distributions.

Access Period. The Access Period begins on the Periodic Income Commencement Date and is a defined period of time during which we pay variable, periodic Regular Income Payments and provide a Death Benefit. During this period, you may surrender the Contract and make withdrawals from your Account Value (defined below). The Lifetime Income Period begins immediately at the end of the Access Period and the remaining Account Value is used to make Regular Income Payments for the rest of your life (or the Secondary Life if applicable). During the Lifetime Income Period, you will no longer be able to make withdrawals or surrenders or receive a Death Benefit. If your Account Value is reduced to zero because of Regular Income Payments or market loss, your Access Period ends.

The minimum and maximum Access Periods are established at the time you elect i4LIFE® Advantage with or without the Guaranteed Income Benefit. The current Access Period requirements are outlined in the following chart: 

	Minimum Access Period	Maximum Access Period
i4LIFE® Advantage (without a Guaranteed Income Benefit) for new elections on and after November 20, 2023	10 years	The length of time between your age and age 115 for nonqualified contracts; age 100 for qualified contracts
i4LIFE® Advantage (without a Guaranteed Income Benefit) for elections prior to November 20, 2023	5 years	The length of time between your age and age 115 for nonqualified contracts; age 100 for qualified contracts
Select Guaranteed Income Benefit Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age (nearest birthday) and age 90	To age 115 for nonqualified contracts; to age 100 for qualified contracts
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections on or after May 21, 2012	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age (nearest birthday) and age 100	To age 115 for nonqualified contracts; to age 100 for qualified contracts

59

	Minimum Access Period	Maximum Access Period
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) elections prior to May 21, 2012	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age (nearest birthday) and age 90	To age 115 for nonqualified contracts; to age 100 for qualified contracts
Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2 and 3)	Longer of 15 years or the difference between your age (nearest birthday) and age 85	To age 115 for nonqualified contracts; to age 100 for qualified contracts

 

The minimum Access Period requirements may vary if you transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit from another rider. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions below.

Generally, shorter Access Periods will produce a higher initial Regular Income Payment than longer Access Periods. At any time during the Access Period, you may extend or shorten the length of the Access Period subject to Home Office approval. Additional restrictions may apply if you are under age 59½ when you request a change to the Access Period. Currently, if you extend the Access Period, it must be extended at least 5 years. If you change the Access Period, subsequent Regular Income Payments will be adjusted accordingly, and the Account Value remaining at the end of the new Access Period will be applied to continue Regular Income Payments for your life. For versions 1, 2, and 3 of the Guaranteed Income Benefit, an extension of your Access Period will also reduce your i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit in proportion of the reduction in the Regular Income Payment. This reduction of the i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit does not apply to Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk, or Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4). If you shorten the Access Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will terminate. Currently, changes to the Access Period can only be made on Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversaries.

Additional limitations on issue ages and features may be necessary to comply with the IRC provisions for required minimum distributions. We may reduce or terminate the Access Period for IRA i4LIFE® Advantage contracts in order to keep the Regular Income Payments in compliance with IRC provisions for required minimum distributions. If we lower the Access Period to comply with IRC provisions, there is no impact to the Guaranteed Income Benefit.

Account Value. The initial Account Value is the Contract Value on the Valuation Date i4LIFE® Advantage is effective (or your initial Purchase Payment if i4LIFE® Advantage is purchased at contract issue), less any applicable premium taxes. During the Access Period, the Account Value on a Valuation Date will equal the total value of all of the Contractowner's Accumulation Units plus the Contractowner's value in the fixed account, and will be reduced by Regular Income Payments and Guaranteed Income Benefit payments made as well as any withdrawals taken. You will have access to your Account Value during the Access Period. After the Access Period ends, the remaining Account Value will be applied to continue Regular Income Payments for your life (and the Secondary Life under the joint life option) and the Account Value will be reduced to zero.

Regular Income Payments during the Access Period. i4LIFE® Advantage provides for variable, periodic Regular Income Payments for as long as an Annuitant (or Secondary Life, if applicable) is living.

When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, you will make several choices that will impact the amount of your Regular Income Payments:

•

single or joint life option;

•

the date you will receive the initial Regular Income Payment;

•

the frequency of the payments (monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually);

•

the frequency the payment is recalculated;

•

the assumed investment return (AIR); and

•

the date the Access Period ends and the Lifetime Income Period begins.

Some of the choices will not be available if you elect the Guaranteed Income Benefit.

If you do not choose a payment frequency, the default is a monthly payment frequency. In most states, you may also elect to have Regular Income Payments from nonqualified contracts recalculated only once each year rather than recalculated at the time of each payment. This results in level Regular Income Payments between recalculation dates. Qualified contracts are only recalculated once per year, on December 31st (if not a Valuation Date, then on the first Valuation Date of the calendar year). For nonqualified contracts, the Contractowner must elect the levelized option for Regular Income Payments if Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected.

AIR rates of 3% or 4% may be available for Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage. For i4LIFE® Advantage elections prior to November 20, 2023, AIR rates of 5% and 6% were also available, but certain states had limited the availability of 5% and 6% AIR. The higher the AIR you choose, the higher your initial Regular Income Payment will be and the higher the return must be to increase subsequent Regular Income Payments.

A 3% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments under:

•

Elections of Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) on or after May 18, 2020; and

60

•

Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections prior to February 19, 2019.

A 4% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments under:

•

Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections made between February 19, 2019 and May 17, 2020; and

•

Elections of all other versions of Guaranteed Income Benefit prior to May 18, 2020.

The AIR used to calculate the Regular Income Payments if transitioning from a Prior Rider may be different. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions below.

Regular Income Payments must begin within one year of the date you elect i4LIFE® Advantage and will continue until the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life, if applicable, or surrender.

Regular Income Payments are not subject to any applicable surrender charges or Interest Adjustments. See Charges and Other Deductions. For information regarding income tax consequences of Regular Income Payments, see Federal Tax Matters.

The initial Regular Income Payment is calculated from the Account Value on a date no more than 14 days prior to the date you select to begin receiving Regular Income Payments. This calculation date is called the Periodic Income Commencement Date, and is the same date the Access Period begins. The amount of the initial Regular Income Payment is determined by dividing the Contract Value (or Purchase Payment if elected at contract issue), less applicable premium taxes by 1,000 and multiplying the result by an annuity factor. The annuity factor is based upon:

•

the age of the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable;

•

the length of the Access Period selected;

•

the frequency of the payments;

•

the AIR selected; and

•

the Individual Annuity Mortality table.

The annuity factor used to determine the Regular Income Payments reflects the fact that, during the Access Period, you have the ability to withdraw the entire Account Value and that a Death Benefit will be paid to your Beneficiary upon your death. These benefits during the Access Period result in a slightly lower Regular Income Payment, during both the Access Period and the Lifetime Income Period, than would be payable if this access was not permitted and no lump-sum Death Benefit was payable. (The Contractowner must elect an Access Period of no less than the minimum Access Period which is currently set at 10 years.) The annuity factor also reflects the requirement that there be sufficient Account Value at the end of the Access Period to continue your Regular Income Payments for the remainder of your life (and/or the Secondary Life if applicable), during the Lifetime Income Period, with no further access or Death Benefit.

The amount of your Regular Income Payment will be impacted by the length of the Access Period you have chosen. For example, if a 70-year old male makes a $100,000 initial Purchase Payment, elects monthly payments, a 4% AIR, and a 20-year Access Period, the initial Regular Income Payment will be $504.96 per month ($6,059.60 annually). Using the same assumptions, but with a 30-year Access Period, the initial Regular Income Payment will be $448.41 per month ($5,380.90 annually). This may vary by state of issue.

The Account Value will vary with the actual net investment return of the Subaccounts selected and the interest credited on the fixed account, which then determines the subsequent Regular Income Payments during the Access Period. Each subsequent Regular Income Payment (unless the levelized option is selected) is determined by dividing the Account Value on the applicable Valuation Date by 1,000 and multiplying this result by an annuity factor revised to reflect the declining length of the Access Period. As a result of this calculation, the actual net returns in the Account Value are measured against the AIR to determine subsequent Regular Income Payments. If the actual net investment return (annualized) for the Contract exceeds the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will increase at a rate approximately equal to the amount of such excess. Conversely, if the actual net investment return for the Contract is less than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will decrease. For example, if net investment return is 3% higher (annualized) than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment for the next year will increase by approximately 3%. Conversely, if actual net investment return is 3% lower than the AIR, the Regular Income Payment will decrease by approximately 3%.

Withdrawals made during the Access Period will also reduce the Account Value that is available for Regular Income Payments, and subsequent Regular Income Payments will be recalculated and could be increased or reduced, based on the Account Value following the withdrawal.

For a joint life option, if either the Annuitant or Secondary Life dies during the Access Period, Regular Income Payments will be recalculated using a revised annuity factor based on the single surviving life, if doing so provides a higher Regular Income Payment. On a joint life option, the Secondary Life spouse must be either the primary Beneficiary or joint owner in order to receive the remaining payments after the first spouse’s death.

For nonqualified contracts, if the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, both die during the Access Period, the Guaranteed Income Benefit (if any) will terminate and the annuity factor will be revised for a non-life contingent Regular Income Payment and Regular Income Payments will continue until the Account Value is fully paid out and the Access Period ends. For qualified contracts, if

61

the Annuitant and Secondary Life, if applicable, both die during the Access Period, i4LIFE® Advantage (and any Guaranteed Income Benefit) will terminate.

Regular Income Payments during the Lifetime Income Period. The Lifetime Income Period begins at the end of the Access Period if either the Annuitant or Secondary Life is living. Your earlier elections regarding the frequency of Regular Income Payments, AIR and the frequency of the recalculation do not change. The initial Regular Income Payment during the Lifetime Income Period is determined by dividing the Account Value on the last Valuation Date of the Access Period by 1,000 and multiplying the result by an annuity factor revised to reflect that the Access Period has ended. The annuity factor is based upon:

•

the age of the Annuitant and Secondary Life (if living);

•

the frequency of the Regular Income Payments;

•

the AIR selected; and

•

the Individual Annuity Mortality table.

The impact of the length of the Access Period and any withdrawals made during the Access Period will continue to be reflected in the Regular Income Payments during the Lifetime Income Period. To determine subsequent Regular Income Payments, the Contract is credited with a fixed number of Annuity Units equal to the initial Regular Income Payment (during the Lifetime Income Period) divided by the Annuity Unit value (by Subaccount). Subsequent Regular Income Payments are determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units per Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value. Your Regular Income Payments will vary based on the value of your Annuity Units. If your Regular Income Payments are adjusted on an annual basis, the total of the annual payment is transferred to Lincoln Life's general account to be paid out based on the payment mode you selected. Your payment(s) will not be affected by market performance during that year. Your Regular Income Payment(s) for the following year will be recalculated at the beginning of the following year based on the current value of the Annuity Units.

Regular Income Payments will continue for as long as the Annuitant or Secondary Life, if applicable, is living, and will continue to be adjusted for investment performance of the Subaccounts your Annuity Units are invested in (and the fixed account if applicable). Regular Income Payments vary with investment performance.

During the Lifetime Income Period, there is no longer an Account Value; therefore, no withdrawals are available and no Death Benefit is payable. In addition, transfers are not allowed from a fixed annuity payment to a variable annuity payment.

i4LIFE® Advantage Credit. If you elect i4LIFE® Advantage on and after November 20, 2023 (subject to state approval) you will receive a quarterly i4LIFE® Advantage Credit if you select a minimum Access Period that is the longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 85, and you maintain a minimum threshold value. The threshold values and applicable credit percentages are outlined in the chart below. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is not applied to Contracts with the Guaranteed Income Benefit.

If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the first i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will apply three months from the contract issue date. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the first i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will apply three months from the first Regular Income Payment. Thereafter, it will apply every three months, if all conditions are met. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will end at the end of the Access Period. If the Contract is terminated for any reason, including death, no further i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will be paid. Proportionate credits will not be applied.

The amount of the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit is calculated on each quarterly Valuation Date by multiplying:

•

the variable Account Value on that date; by

•

the quarterly i4LIFE® Advantage Credit percentage (determined by the applicable tier). 

	Tier 1	Tier 2
Minimum Threshold Value	$500,000	$1,000,000
Credit Percentage (Annually)	0.10%	0.20%
Credit Percentage (Quarterly)	0.025%	0.050%

If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial threshold value equals the initial Purchase Payment. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial threshold value equals the Account Value on the first Regular Income Payment date. The threshold value will be increased by additional Purchase Payments (qualified contracts only), which may cause your Contract to move into a Tier 1 threshold, or to move from a Tier 1 to a Tier 2 threshold and receive the applicable credit. Conversely, additional withdrawals (exclusive of i4LIFE® Advantage payments and required minimum distributions) will reduce your threshold value on a dollar-for-dollar basis, potentially dropping a Tier 2 contract to a Tier 1 contract, or to become ineligible for the credit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will not be applied when the minimum threshold value is not met at the time of the quarterly evaluation.

If you shorten the Access Period so that it no longer meets the stated requirement, the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will end. However, if you subsequently extend the Access Period to meet the requirement, the i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will resume if the minimum threshold value requirement is met.

The i4LIFE® Advantage Credit will be allocated to the Subaccounts in proportion to the Contract Value in each variable Subaccount on the quarterly Valuation Date. There is no additional charge to receive this i4LIFE® Advantage Credit, and in no case will the i4LIFE®

62

Advantage Credit be less than zero. The amount of any i4LIFE® Advantage Credit received will be noted on your quarterly statement. Confirmation statements for each individual transaction will not be issued. i4LIFE® Advantage Credits are not considered Purchase Payments.

Guaranteed Income Benefit

The Guaranteed Income Benefit is an optional benefit that is available for an additional charge. It provides that your Regular Income Payments will never be less than a minimum payout floor, regardless of the actual investment performance of your Contract. i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) is the only version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit that is currently available, unless you are transitioning to Guaranteed Income Benefit from a Prior Rider.

If you purchase any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, you will be required to adhere to Investment Requirements, which will limit your ability to invest in certain Subaccounts offered in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements for more information. You will be subject to those Investment Requirements for the entire time you own the rider. Failure to comply with the Investment Requirements will result in the termination of the rider.

There is no guarantee that any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be available to elect in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue this option at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit available to new purchasers or may create different versions for use with various Living Benefit Riders. However, certain Living Benefit Riders may guarantee a Contractowner the right to transition from that Prior Rider to a version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit that may no longer be offered. The transition rules are set forth below.

In certain states the total annual Guaranteed Income Benefit that would otherwise be payable may be subject to a maximum amount. Please refer to your Contract or contact your registered representative for more information.

Guaranteed Income Benefit Amount. For Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk), and Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4), the Guaranteed Income Benefit will be based on A, or, if transitioning from a Prior Rider, the greater of A and B:

A.

the Account Value immediately prior to electing Guaranteed Income Benefit; or

B.

the Protected Income Base under the Prior Rider (or the Guaranteed Amount under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage) reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up (or inception date if no step-ups have occurred).

The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of the above, based on your age (or the age of the younger life under a joint life option) at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected or, if transitioning from a Prior Rider, the date of the first Regular Income Payment.

The following is an example of how the Guaranteed Amount or the Protected Income Base from another Living Benefit Rider may be used to calculate the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. The example assumes that a 4.5% Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage is used to calculate the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. 

Account Value (equals Contract Value on date i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected)	$100,000
Guaranteed Amount/Protected Income Base on date i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected:	$140,000
Initial Regular Income Payment	$5,411
Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4.5% x $140,000 Guaranteed Amount/Protected Income Base which is greater than $100,000 Account Value)	$6,300

For Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2 and 3), the Guaranteed Income Benefit is initially equal to 75% of the Regular Income Payment (which is based on your Account Value) in effect at the time the Guaranteed Income Benefit is elected.

Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages and Age-Bands. The specific percentages and applicable age-bands for calculating the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit are discussed below.

The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages applicable to new rider elections are determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the percentages may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. This percentage structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior percentages, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages will not change as a result.

63

Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages applicable to new rider elections, including transitions from a Prior Rider, are set forth in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a Contract to be issued with that percentage.

The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages in the Rate Sheet can be superseded. The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages in any subsequent Rate Sheet may be higher or lower than the percentages on the previous Rate Sheet. Your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet in order to get the percentage indicated in a Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages for previous effective periods are included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4). The specified percentages and the corresponding age-bands for calculating the Guaranteed Income Benefit under Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) are outlined in an Appendix to this prospectus. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) is only available for purchase if you are guaranteed the right to elect a prior version under a Prior Rider.

Guaranteed Income Benefit General Provisions

For all versions of the Guaranteed Income Benefit, if the amount of your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment has fallen below the Guaranteed Income Benefit, because of poor investment results, a payment equal to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is the minimum payment you will receive. If the market performance in your Contract is sufficient to provide Regular Income Payments at a level that exceeds the Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Guaranteed Income Benefit will never come into effect. If the Guaranteed Income Benefit is paid, it will be paid with the same frequency as your Regular Income Payment. If your Regular Income Payment is less than the Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will reduce the Account Value by the Regular Income Payment plus an additional amount equal to the difference between your Regular Income Payment and the Guaranteed Income Benefit (in other words, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments reduce the Account Value by the entire amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment). This payment will be made from the variable Subaccounts and the fixed account proportionately, according to your investment allocations.

If your Account Value reaches zero as a result of payments to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will continue to pay you an amount equal to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. If your Account Value reaches zero, your Access Period will end and your Lifetime Income Period will begin. Additional amounts withdrawn from the Account Value to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit may terminate your Access Period earlier than originally scheduled, and will reduce your Death Benefit. If your Account Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits. After the Access Period ends, we will continue to pay the Guaranteed Income Benefit for as long as the Annuitant (or the Secondary Life, if applicable) is living.

The following example illustrates how poor investment performance, which results in a Guaranteed Income Benefit payment, affects the i4LIFE® Account Value: 

i4LIFE® Account Value before market decline	$135,000
i4LIFE® Account Value after market decline	$100,000
Monthly Guaranteed Income Benefit	$810
Monthly Regular Income Payment after market decline	$769
Account Value after market decline and Guaranteed Income Benefit payment	$99,190

The Contractowner receives an amount equal to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. The entire amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit is deducted from the Account Value.

Guaranteed Income Benefit Step-up

Select Guaranteed Income Benefit and Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk and version 4). The Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step up every year to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. For nonqualified contracts, the step-up will occur annually on the first Valuation Date on or after each Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary starting on the first Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. For qualified contracts, the step-up will occur annually on the first Valuation Date of the first periodic income payment of each calendar year.

The following example illustrates how the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit is calculated for a Contractowner with a nonqualified contract, and how a step-up would increase the Guaranteed Income Benefit in a subsequent year. The example assumes a 4% percentage was used to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit, and that the Account Value has increased due to positive investment returns

64

resulting in a higher recalculated Regular Income Payment. See Living Benefit Riders – i4LIFE® Advantage – Regular Income Payments during the Access Period for a discussion of recalculation of the Regular Income Payment. 

8/1/2024 Amount of initial Regular Income Payment	$4,801
8/1/2024 Account Value at election of Guaranteed Income Benefit	$100,000
8/1/2024 Initial Guaranteed Income Benefit (4% x $100,000 Account Value)	$4,000
8/1/2025 Recalculated Regular Income Payment	$6,000
8/1/2025 Guaranteed Income Benefit after step-up (75% of $6,000)	$4,500

The Guaranteed Income Benefit was increased to 75% of the recalculated Regular Income Payment.

Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3). Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3) will automatically step up every year to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. The step-up will occur on every Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary during a 5-year step-up period. At the end of a step-up period you may elect a new step-up period by submitting a written request to the Home Office. If you prefer, when you start the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you can request that we administer this election for you.

Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2). The Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step-up every three years to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment, if the result is greater than the immediately prior Guaranteed Income Benefit. The step-up will occur on every third Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary during a 15-year step-up period. At the end of a step-up period, you may elect a new 15-year step-up period by submitting a written request to the Home Office. If you prefer, when you start the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you can request that we administer this election for you.

Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1). If you have Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 1), the Guaranteed Income Benefit will not step-up on an anniversary, but will remain level.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions

Certain Living Benefit Riders (“Prior Rider”) allow you to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. 

If your Prior Rider is...	you will transition to…
•Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® •Lincoln Market Select® Advantage •4LATER® Select Advantage	Select Guaranteed Income Benefit
•Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® •Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)	Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)
•Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0	Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)

 

The following discussion applies to all of these transitions.

If you have elected one of the Prior Riders listed above, you are guaranteed the right to transition to the applicable version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit even if that version is no longer available for purchase. You are also guaranteed that the Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage and Access Period requirements will be at least as favorable as those in effect at the time you purchased your Prior Rider. The Investment Requirements under your Prior Rider continue to apply after you transition to the Guaranteed Income Benefit. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements for a description of these investment requirements. The initial Guaranteed Income Benefit will be an amount equal to a specified percentage of the greater of your Account Value or Protected Income Base or Guaranteed Amount, as applicable, based on your age (or the younger life under a joint life option) at the time of the first Regular Income Payment.

Your decision to transition to the Guaranteed Income Benefit must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date, and by the maximum age to elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, which is age 95 for nonqualified contracts and age 80 for qualified contracts. Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) (purchased prior to May 18, 2020), Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (purchased prior to April 2, 2012), or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) who have waited until after the fifth Benefit Year anniversary may elect the appropriate version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit until age 99 for nonqualified contracts and age 85 for qualified contracts.

If you have the single life option under your Prior Rider, you must transition to the single life option under i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit; joint life option must transition to the joint life option. The minimum Access Period requirements may vary based on which Prior Rider you elected, and are specifically listed in the chart below.

65

While i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect, the Contractowner cannot change the payment mode elected or decrease the length of the Access Period.

Different minimum Access Period requirements may apply if you use the greater of the Account Value or Protected Income Base (less amounts paid since the last automatic step-up) under a Prior Rider to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit as set forth below: 

Minimum Access Period
	Elections of i4LIFE® Advantage prior to the 5th Benefit Year anniversary	Elections of i4LIFE® Advantage on and after the 5th Benefit Year anniversary
Purchasers of: •Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 on or after April 2, 2012	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 100	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 95
Purchasers of: •Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) prior to May 18, 2020 •4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) •Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 prior to April 2, 2012	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 90	Longer of 15 years or the difference between your age and age 85
Purchasers of: •Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® •Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® •Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) on or after May 18, 2020 •Lincoln Market Select® Advantage •4LATER® Select Advantage	Longer of 20 years or the difference between your age and age 90	N/A

 

A 3% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments for all transitions to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, and for transitions to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) if your Prior Rider was purchased on or after May 18, 2020. A 4% AIR will be used to calculate the Regular Income Payments for all other transitions to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) if your Prior Rider was purchased prior to May 18, 2020.

When deciding whether to transition from your Prior Rider to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, you should consider that depending on your age (and the age of your Secondary Life under the joint life option) and the selected length of the Access Period, i4LIFE® Advantage may provide a higher payout than the Protected Annual Income amounts from your Prior Rider. You should consider electing i4LIFE® Advantage when you are ready to immediately start receiving i4LIFE® Advantage payments, whereas with your Prior Rider, you may defer taking withdrawals until a later date. Payments from a nonqualified contract that a person receives under the i4LIFE® Advantage rider are treated as “amounts received as an annuity” under section 72 of the Internal Revenue Code because the payments occur after the annuity starting date. These payments are subject to an “exclusion ratio” as provided in section 72(b) of the Code, which means a portion of each Annuity Payout is treated as income (taxable at ordinary income rates), and the remainder is treated as a nontaxable return of Purchase Payments. In contrast, withdrawals under your Prior Rider are not treated as amounts received as an annuity because they occur prior to the annuity starting date. As a result, such withdrawals are treated first as a return of any existing gain in the Contract (which is the measure of the extent to which the Contract Value exceeds Purchase Payments), and then as a nontaxable return of Purchase Payments.

i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits

When you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, the Death Benefit option that you previously elected will become the Death Benefit election under i4LIFE® Advantage, unless you elect a less expensive Death Benefit option. If you had previously elected EEB Death Benefit, you must elect a new Death Benefit. Existing Contractowners with the Account Value Death Benefit, who elect i4LIFE® Advantage must choose the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. The amount paid under the new Death Benefit may be less than the amount that would have been paid under the Death Benefit provided before i4LIFE® Advantage began (if premium taxes have been deducted from the Contract Value).

i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit is only available during the Access Period and is equal to the Account Value as of the Valuation Date on which we approve the payment of the death claim. You may not change this Death Benefit once it is elected.

66

i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit. The i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit is only available during the Access Period and is equal to the greater of:

•

the Account Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or

•

the sum of all Purchase Payments, less the sum of Regular Income Payments and other withdrawals where:

•

Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and withdrawals under a Prior Rider that are not Excess Withdrawals, reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the payment; and

•

all other withdrawals, if any, reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value.

References to Purchase Payments and withdrawals include Purchase Payments and withdrawals made prior to the election of i4LIFE® Advantage if your Contract was in force with the Guarantee of Principal or greater Death Benefit option prior to that election. Withdrawals that were not treated as Excess Withdrawals under a Prior Rider will reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the withdrawal.

In a declining market, withdrawals which are deducted in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value, may have a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.

The following example demonstrates the impact of a proportionate withdrawal on your Death Benefit: 

i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit	$200,000
Regular Income Payment	$25,000
Account Value at the time of additional withdrawal	$150,000
Additional withdrawal	$15,000	($15,000/$150,000=10% withdrawal)
Death Benefit Value after Regular Income Payment = $200,000 - $25,000 = $175,000
Reduction in Death Benefit value for withdrawal = $175,000 x 10% = $17,500
Death Benefit Value after additional withdrawal = $175,000 - $17,500 = $157,500

The Regular Income Payment reduced the Death Benefit by $25,000 and the additional withdrawal caused a 10% reduction in the Death Benefit, the same percentage that the withdrawal reduced the Account Value.

During the Access Period, contracts with the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit may elect to change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit by contacting us in writing at our Home Office. This change will be effective on the Valuation Date we receive the request, at our Home Office, and we will begin deducting the lower i4LIFE® Advantage charge at that time. Once the change is effective, you may not elect to return to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB. The i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB is only available during the Access Period and is the greatest of:

•

the Account Value as of the Valuation Date on which we approve the payment of the claim; or

•

the sum of all Purchase Payments, less the sum of Regular Income Payments and other withdrawals where:

•

Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and withdrawals under a Prior Rider that are not Excess Withdrawals, reduce the Death Benefit by the dollar amount of the payment; and

•

all other withdrawals, if any, reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value.

References to Purchase Payments and withdrawals include Purchase Payments and withdrawals made prior to the election of i4LIFE® Advantage if your Contract was in force with the Guarantee of Principal or greater Death Benefit option prior to that election; or

•

the highest Account Value or Contract Value on any contract anniversary date (including the inception date of the Contract) after the EGMDB is effective (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that contract anniversary) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased and prior to the date of death. The highest Account Value or Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits and is decreased by Regular Income Payments, including withdrawals to provide the Guaranteed Income Benefit and all other withdrawals subsequent to the anniversary date on which the highest Account Value or Contract Value is obtained. Regular Income Payments, including Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and withdrawals are deducted in the same proportion that Regular Income Payments, Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, and withdrawals reduce the Contract Value or Account Value.

When determining the highest anniversary value, if you elected the EGMDB (or more expensive Death Benefit option) in the base contract and this Death Benefit was in effect when you purchased i4LIFE® Advantage, we will look at the Contract Value before i4LIFE®

67

Advantage and the Account Value after the i4LIFE® Advantage election to determine the highest anniversary value. We will look at such values on the contract annual anniversary date.

In a declining market, withdrawals which are deducted in the same proportion that withdrawals reduce the Account Value, may have a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.

Contracts with the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB may elect to change to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guarantee of Principal or the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit by contacting us in writing at the Home Office. This change will be effective on the Valuation Date we receive the request, at our Home Office, and we will begin deducting the lower i4LIFE® Advantage charge at that time. Once the change is effective, you may not elect to return to the i4LIFE® Advantage EGMDB.

General Death Benefit Provisions. These Death Benefit options are only available during the Access Period and will terminate when the Account Value equals zero, because the Access Period terminates.

If there is a change in the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant during the life of the Contract, for any reason other than death, the only Death Benefit payable for the new person will be the i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value Death Benefit. On a joint life option, the Secondary Life spouse must be either the primary Beneficiary or joint owner in order to receive the remaining payments after the first spouse’s death.

For nonqualified contracts, upon the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant, the Contractowner (or Beneficiary) may elect to terminate the Contract and receive full payment of the Death Benefit or may elect to continue the Contract and receive Regular Income Payments. Upon the death of the Secondary Life, who is not also an owner, only the surrender value is paid.

If you are the owner of an IRA annuity contract, and there is no Secondary Life, and you die during the Access Period, the i4LIFE® Advantage will terminate. A spouse Beneficiary may start a new i4LIFE® Advantage program.

If a death occurs during the Access Period, the value of the Death Benefit will be determined as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim. Approval of payment will occur upon our receipt of all the following:

1.

an original certified death certificate or any other proof of death satisfactory to us; and

2.

written authorization for payment; and

3.

all required claim forms, fully completed (including selection of a settlement option).

Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, the payment of Death Benefits provided under this Contract must be made in compliance with Code Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable, as amended from time to time. Death Benefits may be taxable. See Federal Tax Matters.

Upon notification to us of the death, Regular Income Payments may be suspended until the death claim is approved by us. Upon approval, a lump sum payment for the value of any suspended payments will be made as of the date the death claim is approved, and Regular Income Payments will continue, if applicable. The excess, if any, of the Death Benefit over the Account Value will be credited into the Contract at that time.

If a lump sum settlement is elected, the proceeds will be mailed within seven days of approval by us of the claim subject to the laws, regulations and tax code governing payment of Death Benefits. This payment may be postponed as permitted by the Investment Company Act of 1940.

i4LIFE® Advantage General Provisions

Withdrawals. You may request a withdrawal at any time during the Access Period. We reduce the Account Value by the amount of the withdrawal, and all subsequent Regular Income Payments and Guaranteed Income Benefit payments, if applicable, will be recalculated. The Guaranteed Income Benefit is reduced proportionately. Withdrawals may have tax consequences. See Federal Tax Matters. Withdrawals are subject to any applicable surrender charges except when amounts may be withdrawn free of surrender charges. See Charges and Other Deductions. The Interest Adjustment may apply.

The following example demonstrates the impact of a withdrawal on the Guaranteed Income Benefit payments: 

68

i4LIFE® Regular Income Payment before additional withdrawal	$1,200
Guaranteed Income Benefit before additional withdrawal	$900
Account Value at time of additional withdrawal	$150,000
Additional withdrawal	$15,000	(a 10% withdrawal)
Reduction in Guaranteed Income Benefit for additional withdrawal = $900 x 10% = $90
Guaranteed Income Benefit after additional withdrawal = $900 - $90 = $810

Surrender. At any time during the Access Period, you may surrender the Contract by withdrawing the surrender value. If the Contract is surrendered, the Contract terminates and no further Regular Income Payments will be made. Withdrawals are subject to any applicable surrender charges except when amounts may be withdrawn free of surrender charges. See Charges and Other Deductions. The Interest Adjustment may apply.

Termination. You may terminate i4LIFE® Advantage prior to the end of the Access Period by notifying us in writing. The termination will be effective on the next Valuation Date after we receive the notice.

For IRA annuity contracts, upon termination, the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will end and your base contract expense will resume. Your Contract Value upon termination will be equal to the Account Value on the Valuation Date we terminate i4LIFE® Advantage.

For nonqualified contracts, your i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefit will terminate, and the Account Value Death Benefit will be in effect. The i4LIFE® Advantage charge will end, and the charge for the Account Value Death Benefit will begin. All earnings in the Contract will be subject to income taxation in the year of the termination. A termination will be treated as a surrender for income tax purposes. If you choose to keep your underlying contract in force, this transaction will be treated as a repurchase for purposes of calculating future income taxes. Your Contract Value upon termination will be equal to the Account Value on the Valuation Date we terminate i4LIFE® Advantage.

i4LIFE® Advantage will terminate due to any of the following events:

•

the death of the Annuitant (or the later of the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life if a joint payout was elected); or

•

a Contractowner requested a decrease in the Access Period or a change to the Regular Income Payment frequency; or

•

upon written notice from the Contractowner to us; or

•

assignment of the Contract; or

•

failure to comply with Investment Requirements.

A termination of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit due to a decrease in the Access Period, a change in the Regular Income Payment frequency, or upon written notice from the Contractowner will be effective as of the Valuation Date on the next Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. Termination will be only for the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit and not the i4LIFE® Advantage election, unless otherwise specified. However, if you used the greater of the Account Value, Protected Income Base, or Guaranteed Amount under a previously held Living Benefit Rider to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit, any termination of the Guaranteed Income Benefit will also result in a termination of the i4LIFE® Advantage election. If you terminate the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit you may be able to re-elect it, if available, after one year. The election will be treated as a new purchase, subject to the terms and charges in effect at the time of election and the i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment will be recalculated. The i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be based on the Account Value at the time of the election.

Annuity Payouts

When you apply for a Contract, you may select any Annuity Commencement Date permitted by law, which is usually on or before the Annuitant's 99th birthday. Your broker-dealer may recommend that you annuitize at an earlier age. As an alternative, Contractowners with Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage may elect to annuitize their Guaranteed Amount under the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option. Contractowners with Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and any version of Lincoln ProtectedPay® lifetime income suite, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0, Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage or Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM may elect to annuitize their Protected Income Base under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option.

The Contract provides optional forms of payouts of annuities (annuity options), each of which is payable on a variable basis, a fixed basis or a combination of both as you specify. The Contract provides that all or part of the Contract Value may be used to purchase an Annuity Payout option. The minimum rates used to purchase any of the annuity options discussed below are shown in the Contract.

You may elect Annuity Payouts in monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual installments. If the payouts from any Subaccount would be or become less than $50, we have the right to reduce their frequency until the payouts are at least $50 each. Following are explanations of the annuity options available.

69

Annuity Options

The annuity options outlined below do not apply to Contractowners who have elected i4LIFE® Advantage or any version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option, the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option, or the Protected Annual Income Payout Option.

Life Annuity. This option offers a periodic payout during the lifetime of the Annuitant and ends with the last payout before the death of the Annuitant. This option offers the highest periodic payout since there is no guarantee of a minimum number of payouts or provision for a Death Benefit for Beneficiaries. However, there is the risk under this option that the recipient would receive no payouts if the Annuitant dies before the date set for the first payout; only one payout if death occurs before the second scheduled payout, and so on. The Annuitant must be under age 81 to elect this option.

Life Annuity with Payouts Guaranteed for Designated Period. This option guarantees periodic payouts during a designated period, usually 10 or 20 years, and then continues throughout the lifetime of the Annuitant. The designated period is selected by the Contractowner.

Joint Life Annuity. This option offers a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. The payouts continue during the lifetime of the survivor. However, under a joint life annuity, if both Annuitants die before the date set for the first payout, no payouts will be made. Only one payment would be made if both deaths occur before the second scheduled payout, and so on.

Joint Life Annuity with Guaranteed Period. This option guarantees periodic payouts during a designated period, usually 10 or 20 years, and continues during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. The payouts continue during the lifetime of the survivor. The designated period is selected by the Contractowner.

Joint Life and Two Thirds to Survivor Annuity. This option provides a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a designated joint Annuitant. When one of the joint Annuitants dies, the survivor receives two thirds of the periodic payout made when both were alive.

Joint Life and Two-Thirds Survivor Annuity with Guaranteed Period. This option provides a periodic payout during the joint lifetime of the Annuitant and a joint Annuitant. When one of the joint Annuitants dies, the survivor receives two-thirds of the periodic payout made when both were alive. This option further provides that should one or both of the Annuitants die during the elected guaranteed period, usually 10 or 20 years, full benefit payment will continue for the rest of the guaranteed period.

Life Annuity with Unit Refund. This option offers a periodic payout during the lifetime of the Annuitant with the guarantee that upon death a payout will be made of the value of the number of Annuity Units (see Variable Annuity Payouts) equal to the excess, if any, of:

•

the total amount applied under this option divided by the Annuity Unit value for the date payouts begin, minus

•

the Annuity Units represented by each payout to the Annuitant multiplied by the number of payouts paid before death.

The value of the number of Annuity Units is computed on the date the death claim is approved for payment by the Home Office.

Life Annuity with Cash Refund. Fixed annuity benefit payments that will be made for the lifetime of the Annuitant with the guarantee that upon death, should (a) the total dollar amount applied to purchase this option be greater than (b) the fixed annuity benefit payment multiplied by the number of annuity benefit payments paid prior to death, then a refund payment equal to the dollar amount of (a) minus (b) will be made.

Under the annuity options listed above, you may not make withdrawals. Other options, with or without withdrawal features, may be made available by us. You may pre-select an Annuity Payout option as a method of paying the Death Benefit to a Beneficiary. If you do, the Beneficiary cannot change this payout option. You may change or revoke in writing to our Home Office, any such selection, unless such selection was made irrevocable. If you have not already chosen an Annuity Payout option, the Beneficiary may choose any Annuity Payout option. At death, options are only available to the extent they are consistent with the requirements of the Contract as well as Sections 72(s) and 401(a)(9) of the tax code, if applicable.

General Information

Any previously selected Death Benefit in effect before the Annuity Commencement Date will no longer be available on and after the Annuity Commencement Date. You may change the Annuity Commencement Date, change the annuity option or change the allocation of the investment among Subaccounts up to 30 days before the scheduled Annuity Commencement Date, upon written notice to the Home Office. You must give us at least 30 days’ notice before the date on which you want payouts to begin. We may require proof of age, sex, or survival of any payee upon whose age, sex, or survival payments depend.

Unless you select another option, the Contract automatically provides for a life annuity with Annuity Payouts guaranteed for 10 years (on a fixed, variable or combination fixed and variable basis, in proportion to the account allocations at the time of annuitization) except when a joint life payout is required by law. Under any option providing for guaranteed period payouts, the number of payouts which remain unpaid at the date of the Annuitant’s death (or surviving Annuitant’s death in case of joint life Annuity) will be paid to you or your Beneficiary as payouts become due after we are in receipt of:

70

•

An original certified death certificate or other proof of death satisfactory to us;

•

written authorization for payment; and

•

all claim forms, fully completed.

Variable Annuity Payouts

Variable Annuity Payouts will be determined using:

•

the Contract Value on the Annuity Commencement Date, less any surrender charges on Purchase Payments made within twelve months of annuitization and any applicable premium taxes;

•

the annuity tables contained in the Contract;

•

the annuity option selected; and

•

the investment performance of the fund(s) selected.

To determine the amount of payouts, we make this calculation:

1.

Determine the dollar amount of the first periodic payout; then

2.

Credit the Contract with a fixed number of Annuity Units equal to the first periodic payout divided by the Annuity Unit value; and

3.

Calculate the value of the Annuity Units each period thereafter.

Annuity Payouts assume an investment return of 3%, 4%, 5% or 6% per year, as applied to the applicable mortality table. Some of these assumed interest rates may not be available in your state; therefore, please check with your registered representative. You may choose your assumed interest rate at the time you elect a variable Annuity Payout on the administrative form provided by us. The higher the assumed interest rate you choose, the higher your initial annuity payment will be. The amount of each payout after the initial payout will depend upon how the underlying fund(s) perform, relative to the assumed rate. If the actual net investment rate (annualized) exceeds the assumed rate, the payment will increase at a rate proportional to the amount of such excess. Conversely, if the actual net investment rate is less than the assumed rate, annuity payments will decrease. The higher the assumed interest rate, the less likely future annuity payments are to increase, or the payments will increase more slowly than if a lower assumed rate was used. There is a more complete explanation of this calculation in the SAI.

Fixed Side of the Contract

Currently the fixed account is available for dollar cost averaging purposes only.

You may allocate Purchase Payments to the fixed side of the contract, if available. Allocations made to the fixed side of the contract are added to your Contract Value. Certain charges related to the Contract and the charges for the Living Benefit Riders are deducted from your Contract Value. Therefore, a portion of those charges may be deducted from the fixed account. See Charges and Other Deductions section of this prospectus for more information. Since amounts in the fixed account make up part of your Contract Value, those amounts may be used to calculate benefits under the Living Benefit Riders. See the Living Benefit Riders section in this prospectus for more information.

Purchase Payments and Contract Value allocated to the fixed side of the contract become part of our general account, and do not participate in the investment experience of the VAA. The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the Indiana Department of Insurance as well as the insurance laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the contracts are distributed.

In reliance on certain exemptions, exclusions and rules, we have not registered interests in the general account as a security under the Securities Act of 1933 and have not registered the general account as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the general account nor any interests in it are regulated under the 1933 Act or the 1940 Act. We have been advised that the staff of the SEC has not made a review of the disclosures which are included in this prospectus which relate to our general account and to the fixed account under the Contract. These disclosures, however, may be subject to certain provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses. This prospectus is generally intended to serve as a disclosure document only for aspects of the Contract involving the VAA, and therefore contains only selected information regarding the fixed side of the contract. Complete details regarding the fixed side of the contract are in the Contract.

We guarantee an annual effective interest rate of not less than 1.50% per year on amounts held in a fixed account. Any amount surrendered, withdrawn from or transferred out of a fixed account prior to the expiration of the Guaranteed Period is subject to the Interest Adjustment and other charges (see Interest Adjustment and Charges and Other Deductions). This may reduce your value upon surrender, withdrawal or transfer but will not reduce the amount below the value it would have had if 1.50% (or the guaranteed minimum interest rate for your Contract) interest had been credited to the fixed account. Refer to Transfers before the Annuity Commencement Date and Transfers after the Annuity Commencement Date for additional transfer restrictions from the fixed account.

71

ANY INTEREST IN EXCESS OF 1.50% (OR THE GUARANTEED MINIMUM INTEREST RATE STATED IN YOUR CONTRACT) WILL BE DECLARED IN ADVANCE AT OUR SOLE DISCRETION. CONTRACTOWNERS BEAR THE RISK THAT NO INTEREST IN EXCESS OF THE MINIMUM INTEREST RATE WILL BE DECLARED.

Your Contract may not offer a fixed account or if permitted by your Contract, we may discontinue accepting Purchase Payments or transfers into the fixed side of the contract at any time. Please contact your registered representative for further information. Older versions of the Contract may not provide for Guaranteed Periods or an Interest Adjustment (below).

Guaranteed Periods

The fixed account is divided into separate Guaranteed Periods, which credit guaranteed interest.

You may allocate Purchase Payments to one or more Guaranteed Periods of 1 to 10 years. We may add Guaranteed Periods or discontinue accepting Purchase Payments into one or more Guaranteed Periods at any time. The minimum amount of any Purchase Payment that can be allocated to a Guaranteed Period is $2,000. Each Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit, if applicable, allocated to the fixed account will start its own Guaranteed Period and will earn a guaranteed interest rate. The duration of the Guaranteed Period affects the guaranteed interest rate of the fixed account. A Guaranteed Period ends on the date after the number of calendar years in the Guaranteed Period. Interest will be credited daily at a guaranteed rate that is equal to the effective annual rate determined on the first day of the Guaranteed Period. Amounts surrendered, transferred or withdrawn prior to the end of the Guaranteed Period will be subject to the Interest Adjustment. Each Guaranteed Period Purchase Payment and its corresponding Bonus Credit, if applicable, will be treated separately for purposes of determining any applicable Interest Adjustment. Any amount withdrawn from a Guaranteed Period may be subject to any applicable surrender charges, account fees and premium taxes.

You may transfer amounts from the fixed account to the variable Subaccount(s) subject to the following restrictions:

•

fixed account transfers are limited to 25% of the value of that fixed account in any 12-month period; and

•

the minimum amount that can be transferred is $300 or, if less, the amount in the fixed account.

Because of these restrictions, it may take several years to transfer amounts from the fixed account to the variable Subaccounts. You should carefully consider whether the fixed account meets your investment criteria. Any amount withdrawn from the fixed account may be subject to any applicable surrender charges, account fees and premium taxes.

We will notify the Contractowner in writing at least 30 days prior to the expiration date for any Guaranteed Period amount. A new Guaranteed Period of the same duration as the previous Guaranteed Period will begin automatically at the end of the previous Guaranteed Period, unless we receive, prior to the end of a Guaranteed Period, a written election by the Contractowner. The written election may request the transfer of the Guaranteed Period amount to a different fixed account or to a variable Subaccount from among those being offered by us. Transfers of any Guaranteed Period amount which become effective upon the date of expiration of the applicable Guaranteed Period are not subject to the limitation of twelve transfers per Contract Year or the additional fixed account transfer restrictions.

Interest Adjustment

Any surrender, withdrawal or transfer of a Guaranteed Period amount before the end of the Guaranteed Period (other than dollar cost averaging, cross-reinvestment, Maximum Annual Withdrawals under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, or Regular Income Payments under i4LIFE® Advantage) will be subject to the Interest Adjustment. A surrender, withdrawal or transfer effective upon the expiration date of the Guaranteed Period will not be subject to the Interest Adjustment. The Interest Adjustment will be applied to the amount being surrendered, withdrawn or transferred. The Interest Adjustment will be applied after the deduction of any applicable account fees. Any transfer, withdrawal, or surrender of Contract Value from the fixed account will be increased or decreased by an Interest Adjustment, unless the transfer, withdrawal or surrender is effective:

•

during the free look period (See Return Privilege).

•

on the expiration date of a Guaranteed Period.

•

as a result of the death of the Contractowner or Annuitant.

•

subsequent to the diagnosis of a terminal illness of the Contractowner. Diagnosis of the terminal illness must be after the effective date of the Contract and result in a life expectancy of less than one year, as determined by a qualified professional medical practitioner. For contracts with Bonus Credits, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this waiver will apply.

•

subsequent to the admittance of the Contractowner into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. Admittance into such facility must be after the effective date of the Contract and continue for 90 consecutive days prior to the surrender or withdrawal. For contracts with Bonus Credits, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this waiver will apply.

•

subsequent to the permanent and total disability of the Contractowner if such disability begins after the effective date of the Contract and prior to the 65th birthday of the Contractowner. For contracts with Bonus Credits, Purchase Payments must be invested for at least twelve months before this waiver will apply.

72

•

upon annuitization of the Contract.

These provisions may not be applicable to your Contract or available in your state. Please check with your registered representative regarding the availability of these provisions.

In general, the Interest Adjustment reflects the relationship between the yield rate in effect at the time a Purchase Payment is allocated to a fixed subaccount’s Guaranteed Period under the Contract and the yield rate in effect at the time of the Purchase Payment’s surrender, withdrawal or transfer. It also reflects the time remaining in the Guaranteed Period. If the yield rate at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer is lower than the yield rate at the time the Purchase Payment was allocated, then the application of the Interest Adjustment will generally result in a higher payment at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer. Similarly, if the yield rate at the time of surrender, withdrawal or transfer is higher than the yield rate at the time of the allocation of the Purchase Payment, then the application of the Interest Adjustment will generally result in a lower payment at the time of the surrender, withdrawal or transfer. The yield rate is published by the Federal Reserve Board.

The Interest Adjustment is calculated by multiplying the transaction amount by: 

(1+A)n	–1
(1+B+K)n

 

where:
A	=	yield rate for a U.S. Treasury security with time to maturity equal to the Subaccount’s Guaranteed Period, determined at the beginning of the Guaranteed Period.
B	=	yield rate for a U.S. Treasury security with time to maturity equal to the time remaining in the Guaranteed Period if greater than one year, determined at the time of surrender, withdrawal or transfer. For remaining periods of one year or less, the yield rate for a one year U.S. Treasury security is used.
K	=	a 0.25% adjustment (unless otherwise limited by applicable state law). This adjustment builds into the formula a factor representing direct and indirect costs to us associated with liquidating general account assets in order to satisfy surrender requests. This adjustment of 0.25% has been added to the denominator of the formula because it is anticipated that a substantial portion of applicable general account portfolio assets will be in relatively illiquid securities. Thus, in addition to direct transaction costs, if such securities must be sold (e.g., because of surrenders), the market price may be lower. Accordingly, even if interest rates decline, there will not be a positive adjustment until this factor is overcome, and then any adjustment will be lower than otherwise, to compensate for this factor. Similarly, if interest rates rise, any negative adjustment will be greater than otherwise, to compensate for this factor. If interest rates stay the same, there will be no Interest Adjustment.
n	=	The number of years remaining in the Guaranteed Period (e.g., 1 year and 73 days = 1 + (73 divided by 365) = 1.2 years).
		Straight-Line interpolation is used for periods to maturity not quoted.

See the SAI for examples of the application of the Interest Adjustment.

Small Contract Surrenders

We may surrender your Contract, in accordance with the laws of your state if:

•

your Contract Value drops below certain state specified minimum amounts ($1,000 or less) for any reason, including if your Contract Value decreases due to the performance of the Subaccounts you selected;

•

no Purchase Payments have been received for two (2) full, consecutive Contract Years; and

•

the annuity benefit at the Annuity Commencement Date would be less than $20.00 per month (these requirements may differ in some states).

At least 60 days before we surrender your Contract, we will send you a letter at your last address we have on file, to inform you that your Contract will be surrendered. You will have the opportunity to make additional Purchase Payments to bring your Contract Value above the minimum level to avoid surrender. If we surrender your Contract, we will not assess any surrender charge. We will not surrender your Contract if you are receiving guaranteed payments from us under one of the Living Benefit Riders.

Delay of Payments

Contract proceeds from the VAA will be paid within seven days, except:

•

when the NYSE is closed (other than weekends and holidays);

•

times when market trading is restricted or the SEC declares an emergency, and we cannot value units or the funds cannot redeem shares; or

•

when the SEC so orders to protect Contractowners.

Payment of contract proceeds from the fixed account may be delayed for up to six months.

73

Due to federal laws designed to counter terrorism and prevent money laundering by criminals, we may be required to reject a Purchase Payment and/or deny payment of a request for transfers, withdrawals, surrenders, or Death Benefits, until instructions are received from the appropriate regulator. We also may be required to provide additional information about a Contractowner's account to government regulators.

Reinvestment Privilege

You may elect to make a reinvestment purchase with any part of the proceeds of a surrender/withdrawal, (including previously credited Bonus Credits), and we will recredit that portion of the surrender/withdrawal charges attributable to the amount returned.

This election must be made by your written authorization to us on an approved Lincoln reinvestment form and received in our Home Office within 30 days of the date of the surrender/withdrawal, and the repurchase must be of a Contract covered by this prospectus. If the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider was in effect prior to your surrender, it will not be reinstated, and Lincoln reserves the right to not reinstate certain riders that were in effect prior to the surrender/withdrawal. In the case of a qualified retirement plan, a representation must be made that the proceeds being used to make the purchase have retained their tax-favored status under an arrangement for which the contracts offered by this prospectus are designed. The number of Accumulation Units which will be credited when the proceeds are reinvested will be based on the value of the Accumulation Unit(s) on the next Valuation Date. This computation will occur following receipt of the proceeds and request for reinvestment at the Home Office. You may utilize the reinvestment privilege only once. No Bonus Credits will apply when a reinvestment purchase occurs. For tax reporting purposes, we will treat a surrender/withdrawal and a subsequent reinvestment purchase as separate transactions (and a Form 1099 may be issued, if applicable). Any taxable distribution that is reinvested may still be reported as taxable. You should consult a tax advisor before you request a surrender/withdrawal or subsequent reinvestment purchase.

We may not accept reinvestment into the fixed side of the contract.

Amendment of Contract

We reserve the right to amend the Contract to meet the requirements of the 1940 Act or other applicable federal or state laws or regulations. You will be notified in writing of any changes, modifications or waivers. Any changes are subject to prior approval of your state’s insurance department (if required).

Distribution of the Contracts

Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) serves as Principal Underwriter of this Contract. LFD is affiliated with Lincoln Life and is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and is a member of FINRA (Financial Industry Regulatory Authority). The Principal Underwriter has entered into selling agreements with broker-dealers that are unaffiliated with us. While the Principal Underwriter has the legal authority to make payments to broker-dealers which have entered into selling agreements, we will make such payments on behalf of the Principal Underwriter in compliance with appropriate regulations. We also pay on behalf of LFD certain of its operating expenses related to the distribution of this and other of our contracts. The Principal Underwriter may also offer “non-cash compensation”, as defined under FINRA’s rules, which includes among other things, merchandise, gifts, marketing support, sponsorships, seminars, entertainment and travel expenses. You should ask your registered representative how the broker-dealer will be compensated for the sale of the Contract to you, or for any alternative proposal that may have been presented to you. You should take such compensation into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation made to you in connection with the purchase of a Contract. The following paragraphs describe how payments are made by us and the Principal Underwriter to various parties.

Compensation Paid to Unaffiliated Selling Firms. The Principal Underwriter pays commissions to all Selling Firms. The maximum commission the Principal Underwriter pays to Selling Firms is 5.25% of Purchase Payments, plus 0.30% annual trail compensation beginning in years two and beyond. Some Selling Firms may elect to receive a lower commission when a Purchase Payment is made along with an earlier quarterly payment based on Contract Value for so long as the Contract’s Selling Firm remains in effect. Upon annuitization, the maximum commission the Principal Underwriter pays to Selling Firms is 5.25% of annuitized value and/or ongoing annual compensation of up to 1.05% of annuity value or statutory reserves. LFD also acts as wholesaler of the contracts and performs certain marketing and other functions in support of the distribution and servicing of the contracts.

LFD may pay certain Selling Firms or their affiliates additional amounts for, among other things: (1) “preferred product” treatment of the contracts in their marketing programs, which may include marketing services and increased access to registered representatives; (2) sales incentives relating to the contracts; (3) costs associated with sales conferences and educational seminars for their registered representatives; (4) other sales expenses incurred by them; (5) and inclusion in the financial products the Selling Firm offers.

Lincoln Life may provide loans to broker-dealers or their affiliates to help finance marketing and distribution of the contracts, and those loans may be forgiven if aggregate sales goals are met. In addition, we may provide staffing or other administrative support and services to broker-dealers who distribute the contracts. LFD, as wholesaler, may make bonus payments to certain Selling Firms based

74

on aggregate sales of our variable insurance contracts (including the contracts) or persistency standards. These additional payments are not offered to all Selling Firms, and the terms of any particular agreement governing the payments may vary among Selling Firms.

These additional types of compensation are not offered to all Selling Firms. The terms of any particular agreement governing compensation may vary among Selling Firms and the amounts may be significant. The prospect of receiving, or the receipt of, additional compensation may provide Selling Firms and/or their registered representatives with an incentive to favor sales of the contracts over other variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to which a Selling Firm receives lower levels of or no additional compensation. You may wish to take such payment arrangements into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts. Additional information relating to compensation paid in 2023 is contained in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI).

Compensation Paid to Other Parties. Depending on the particular selling arrangements, there may be others whom LFD compensates for the distribution activities. For example, LFD may compensate certain “wholesalers”, who control access to certain selling offices, for access to those offices or for referrals, and that compensation may be separate from the compensation paid for sales of the contracts. LFD may compensate marketing organizations, associations, brokers or consultants which provide marketing assistance and other services to broker-dealers who distribute the contracts, and which may be affiliated with those broker-dealers. Commissions and other incentives or payments described above are not charged directly to Contractowners or the VAA. All compensation is paid from our resources, which include fees and charges imposed on your Contract.

Contractowner Questions

The obligations to purchasers under the contracts are those of Lincoln Life. This prospectus provides a general description of the material features of the Contract. Contracts, endorsements and riders may vary as required by state law. This prospectus provides a general description of the materials feature of the contract. Questions about your Contract should be directed to us at 1-800-942-5500.

Federal Tax Matters

Introduction

The Federal income tax treatment of the Contract is complex and sometimes uncertain. The Federal income tax rules may vary with your particular circumstances. This discussion does not include all the Federal income tax rules that may affect you and your Contract. This discussion also does not address other Federal tax consequences (including consequences of sales to foreign individuals or entities), or state or local tax consequences, associated with the Contract. As a result, you should always consult a tax advisor about the application of tax rules found in the Internal Revenue Code (“Code”), Treasury Regulations and applicable IRS guidance to your individual situation.

Nonqualified Annuities

This part of the discussion describes some of the Federal income tax rules applicable to nonqualified annuities. A nonqualified annuity is a contract not issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan, such as an IRA or a section 403(b) plan, receiving special tax treatment under the Code. We may not offer nonqualified annuities for all of our annuity products.

Tax Deferral On Earnings

Under the Code, you are generally not subject to tax on any increase in your Contract Value until you receive a Contract distribution. However, for this general rule to apply, certain requirements must be satisfied:

•

An individual must own the Contract (or the Code must treat the Contract as owned by an individual).

•

The investments of the VAA must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Treasury regulations.

•

Your right to choose particular investments for a Contract must be limited.

•

The Annuity Commencement Date must not occur near the end of the Annuitant’s life expectancy.

Contracts Not Owned By An Individual

If a Contract is owned by an entity (rather than an individual) the Code generally does not treat it as an annuity contract for Federal income tax purposes. This means that the entity owning the Contract pays tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract. Examples of contracts where the owner pays current tax on the Contract’s earnings, Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits, if applicable, are contracts issued to a corporation or a trust. Some exceptions to the rule are:

•

Contracts in which the named owner is a trust or other entity that holds the Contract as an agent for an individual; however, this exception does not apply in the case of any employer that owns a contract to provide deferred compensation for its employees;

•

Immediate annuity contracts, purchased with a single premium, when the annuity starting date is no later than a year from purchase and substantially equal periodic payments are made, not less frequently than annually, during the Annuity Payout period;

75

•

Contracts acquired by an estate of a decedent;

•

Certain qualified contracts;

•

Contracts purchased by employers upon the termination of certain qualified plans; and

•

Certain contracts used in connection with structured settlement agreements.

Investments In The VAA Must Be Diversified

For a Contract to be treated as an annuity for Federal income tax purposes, the investments of the VAA must be “adequately diversified.” Treasury regulations define standards for determining whether the investments of the VAA are adequately diversified. If the VAA fails to comply with these diversification standards, you could be required to pay tax currently on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract. Although we do not control the investments of the underlying investment options, we expect that the underlying investment options will comply with the Treasury regulations so that the VAA will be considered “adequately diversified.”

Restrictions

The Code limits your right to choose particular investments for the Contract. Because the IRS has issued little guidance specifying those limits, the limits are uncertain and your right to allocate Contract Values among the Subaccounts may exceed those limits. If so, you would be treated as the owner of the assets of the VAA and thus subject to current taxation on the income, Bonus Credits, Persistency Credits, and gains, if applicable, from those assets. We do not know what limits may be set by the IRS in any guidance that it may issue and whether any such limits will apply to existing contracts. We reserve the right to modify the Contract without your consent in an attempt to prevent you from being considered as the owner of the assets of the VAA for purposes of the Code.

Loss Of Interest Deduction

After June 8, 1997, if a Contract is issued to a taxpayer that is not an individual, or if a Contract is held for the benefit of an entity, the entity may lose a portion of its deduction for otherwise deductible interest expenses. However, this rule does not apply to a Contract owned by an entity engaged in a trade or business that covers the life of one individual who is either (i) a 20% Owner of the entity, or (ii) an officer, director, or employee of the trade or business, at the time first covered by the Contract. This rule also does not apply to a Contract owned by an entity engaged in a trade or business that covers the joint lives of the 20% Owner or the entity and the Owner’s spouse at the time first covered by the Contract.

Age At Which Annuity Payouts Begin

The Code does not expressly identify a particular age by which Annuity Payouts must begin. However, those rules do require that an annuity contract provide for amortization, through Annuity Payouts, of the Contract’s Purchase Payments, Bonus Credits, Persistency Credits, and earnings. As long as annuity payments begin or are scheduled to begin on a date on which the Annuitant’s remaining life expectancy is enough to allow for a sufficient Annuity Payout period, the Contract should be treated as an annuity. If the annuity contract is not treated as an annuity, you would be currently taxed on the excess of the Contract Value over the investment in the Contract.

Tax Treatment Of Payments

We make no guarantees regarding the tax treatment of any Contract or of any transaction involving a Contract. However, the rest of this discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity under the Code and that any increase in your Contract Value will not be taxed until there is a distribution from your Contract.

Taxation Of Withdrawals And Surrenders

You will pay tax on withdrawals to the extent your Contract Value exceeds your investment in the Contract. This income (and all other income from your Contract) is considered ordinary income (and does not receive capital gains treatment and is not qualified dividend income). You will pay tax on a surrender to the extent the amount you receive exceeds your investment in the Contract. In certain circumstances, your Purchase Payments and investment in the Contract are reduced by amounts received from your Contract that were not included in income. Surrender and reinstatement of your Contract will generally be taxed as a withdrawal. If your Contract has a Living Benefit Rider, and if the guaranteed amount under that rider immediately before a withdrawal exceeds your Contract Value, the Code may require that you include those additional amounts in your income. Please consult your tax advisor.

Taxation Of Annuity Payouts, including Regular Income Payments

The Code imposes tax on a portion of each Annuity Payout (at ordinary income tax rates) and treats a portion as a nontaxable return of your investment in the Contract. We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your Annuity Payout. Once you have recovered the total amount of the investment in the Contract, you will pay tax on the full amount of your Annuity Payouts. If Annuity Payouts end because of the Annuitant’s death and before the total amount in the Contract has been distributed, the amount not received will generally be deductible. If withdrawals, other than Regular Income Payments, are taken from i4LIFE® Advantage during the Access Period, they are taxed subject to an exclusion ratio that is determined based on the amount of the payment.

76

Taxation Of Deductions For Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage Rider Charges

The Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage rider (“LTC Rider”) is a Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contract under section 7702B(b) of the Code. As previously described in this prospectus, the LTC Rider charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. For tax years beginning after December 31, 2009, the deductions from the Contract Value to pay LTC Rider charges will not be reported as taxable distributions from the variable annuity contract and such deductions will reduce your basis in the Contract. The deductions from the Contract Value will reduce the Contract Value, but not below zero.

Taxation Of Amounts Paid As Long-Term Care Benefits

If your Contract includes the LTC Rider (discussed in greater detail in the LTC Rider section), distributions from your Contract that are made under the terms of the LTC Rider will not be treated as taxable income to you as long as such benefits do not exceed the greater of (i) the expenses that you actually incur for covered services, or (ii) a maximum per diem, or daily, dollar amount determined by the IRS. All payments that you receive under all Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contracts, as well as any payments under an accelerated benefit rider made to you if you are chronically ill, are included in determining whether the benefit limits have been exceeded and reduce your basis in the Contract. These payments may also reduce the basis in your annuity contract.

Taxation Of Death Benefits

We may distribute amounts from your Contract because of the death of a Contractowner or an Annuitant. The tax treatment of these amounts depends on whether the Contractowner or the Annuitant dies before or after the Annuity Commencement Date.

Death prior to the Annuity Commencement Date:

•

If the Beneficiary receives Death Benefits under an Annuity Payout option, they are taxed in the same manner as Annuity Payouts.

•

If the Beneficiary does not receive Death Benefits under an Annuity Payout option, they are taxed in the same manner as a withdrawal.

Death after the Annuity Commencement Date:

•

If Death Benefits are received in accordance with the existing Annuity Payout option following the death of a Contractowner who is not the Annuitant, they are excludible from income in the same manner as the Annuity Payout prior to the death of the Contractowner.

•

If Death Benefits are received in accordance with the existing Annuity Payout option following the death of the Annuitant (whether or not the Annuitant is also the Contractowner), the Death Benefits are excludible from income if they do not exceed the investment in the Contract not yet distributed from the Contract. All Annuity Payouts in excess of the investment in the Contract not previously received are includible in income.

•

If Death Benefits are received in a lump sum, the Code imposes tax on the amount of Death Benefits which exceeds the amount of Purchase Payments not previously received.

Additional Taxes Payable On Withdrawals, Surrenders, Or Annuity Payouts

The Code may impose a 10% additional tax on any distribution from your Contract which you must include in your gross income. The 10% additional tax does not apply if one of several exceptions exists. These exceptions include withdrawals, surrenders, or Annuity Payouts that:

•

you receive on or after you reach 59½,

•

you receive because you became disabled (as defined in the Code),

•

you receive from an immediate annuity,

•

a Beneficiary receives on or after your death, or

•

you receive as a series of substantially equal periodic payments based on your life or life expectancy (non-natural owners holding as agent for an individual do not qualify).

Unearned Income Medicare Contribution

Congress enacted the “Unearned Income Medicare Contribution” as a part of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. This tax, which affects individuals whose modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds, is a 3.8% tax on the lesser of (i) the individual's “unearned income,” or (ii) the dollar amount by which the individual's modified adjusted gross income exceeds the applicable threshold. Unearned income includes the taxable portion of distributions that you take from your annuity contract. If you take a distribution from your Contract that may be subject to the tax, we will include a Distribution Code “D” in Box 7 of the Form 1099-R issued to report the distribution. Please consult your tax advisor to determine whether your annuity distributions are subject to this tax.

Special Rules If You Own More Than One Annuity Contract

In certain circumstances, you must combine some or all of the nonqualified annuity contracts you own in order to determine the amount of an Annuity Payout, a surrender, or a withdrawal that you must include in income. For example, if you purchase two or more

77

deferred annuity contracts from the same life insurance company (or its affiliates) during any calendar year, the Code treats all such contracts as one contract. Treating two or more contracts as one contract could affect the amount of a surrender, a withdrawal or an Annuity Payout that you must include in income and the amount that might be subject to the additional tax described previously.

Loans and Assignments

Except for certain qualified contracts, the Code treats any amount received as a loan under your Contract, and any assignment or pledge (or agreement to assign or pledge) of any portion of your Contract Value, as a withdrawal of such amount or portion.

Gifting A Contract

If you transfer ownership of your Contract to a person other than to your spouse (or to your former spouse incident to divorce), and receive a payment less than your Contract’s value, you will pay tax on your Contract Value to the extent it exceeds your investment in the Contract not previously received. The new owner’s investment in the Contract would then be increased to reflect the amount included in income.

Charges for Additional Benefits

Your Contract automatically includes a basic Death Benefit and may include other optional riders. Certain enhancements to the basic Death Benefit may also be available to you. The cost of the basic Death Benefit and any additional benefit are deducted from your Contract. It is possible that the tax law may treat all or a portion of the Death Benefit and other optional protected lifetime income fees, if any, as a contract withdrawal.

Special Considerations for Same-Sex Spouses

In 2013, the U.S. Supreme Court held that same-sex spouses who are married under state law are treated as spouses for purposes of federal law. You are strongly encouraged to consult a tax advisor before electing spousal rights under the Contract.

Qualified Retirement Plans

We have designed the contracts for use in connection with certain types of retirement plans that receive favorable treatment under the Code. Contracts issued to or in connection with a qualified retirement plan are called “qualified contracts.” We issue contracts for use with various types of qualified retirement plans. The Federal income tax rules applicable to those plans are complex and varied. As a result, this prospectus does not attempt to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of qualified retirement plans. Persons planning to use the Contract in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a competent tax advisor.

Types of Qualified Contracts and Terms of Contracts

Qualified retirement plans may include the following:

•

Individual Retirement Accounts and Annuities (“Traditional IRAs”)

•

Roth IRAs

•

Traditional IRA that is part of a Simplified Employee Pension Plan (“SEP”)

•

SIMPLE 401(k) plans (Savings Incentive Matched Plan for Employees)

•

401(a) / (k) plans (qualified corporate employee pension and profit-sharing plans)

•

403(a) plans (qualified annuity plans)

•

403(b) plans (public school system and tax-exempt organization annuity plans)

•

H.R. 10 or Keogh Plans (self-employed individual plans)

•

457(b) plans (deferred compensation plans for state and local governments and tax-exempt organizations)

Our individual variable annuity products are not available for use with any of the foregoing qualified retirement plan accounts, with the exception of Traditional IRA, SEP IRA, and Roth IRA arrangements. Our individual variable annuity products are no longer available for purchase under a 403(b) plan, and we do not accept additional premiums or transfers to existing 403(b) contracts. We require confirmation from your 403(b) plan sponsor that surrenders, loans or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer processing payments you request until all information required under the Code has been received. By requesting a surrender, loan or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, your Contract, and transactions under the Contract and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or record keeper, and other providers.

We will amend contracts to be used with a qualified retirement plan as generally necessary to conform to the Code’s requirements for the type of plan. However, the rights of a person to any qualified retirement plan benefits may be subject to the plan’s terms and conditions, regardless of the contract’s terms and conditions. In addition, we are not bound by the terms and conditions of qualified retirement plans to the extent such terms and conditions contradict the contract, unless we consent.

78

The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE) Act of 2019

The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE) Act (the “SECURE Act”) was enacted on December 20, 2019. The SECURE Act made a number of significant changes to the rules that apply to qualified retirement plans and IRA’s, including the following:

•

Eliminated the age 70½ limit for making contributions to an IRA. Beginning in 2020, an IRA owner can make contributions to his or her IRA at any age.

•

Changed the required minimum distribution rules that apply after the death of a participant or IRA owner.

•

Created the “Qualified Birth or Adoption” exception to the 10% additional tax on early distributions.

The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement 2.0 (SECURE 2.0)

The Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement (SECURE 2.0) Act (the “SECURE 2.0 Act”) was enacted on December 29, 2022. The SECURE 2.0 Act made specific changes to retirement plans and IRA’s, including:

•

Increased the required beginning date measuring age from age 72 to 73 for any participant or IRA owner who did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023. As a result, required minimum distributions are generally required to begin by April 1 of the year following the year in which the participant or IRA owner reaches age 73.

•

Further increased the required beginning date measuring age to 75 by 2033.

•

Created exception to the 10% additional tax for distributions for domestic violence and emergencies.

•

Added provisions that permit rollover of 529 plan amounts to a Roth IRA for the beneficiary, within certain limits.

Tax Treatment of Qualified Contracts

The Federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans and qualified contracts vary with the type of plan and contract. For example:

•

Federal tax rules limit the amount of Purchase Payments or contributions that can be made, and the tax deduction or exclusion that may be allowed for the contributions. These limits vary depending on the type of qualified retirement plan and the participant’s specific circumstances (e.g., the participant’s compensation).

•

Minimum annual distributions are required under some qualified retirement plans once you reach age 73 or retire, if later as described below.

•

Loans are allowed under certain types of qualified retirement plans, but Federal income tax rules prohibit loans under other types of qualified retirement plans. For example, Federal income tax rules permit loans under some section 403(b) plans, but prohibit loans under Traditional and Roth IRAs. If allowed, loans are subject to a variety of limitations, including restrictions as to the loan amount, the loan’s duration, the rate of interest, and the manner of repayment. Your Contract or plan may not permit loans.

Please note that qualified retirement plans such as 403(b) plans, 401(k) plans and IRAs generally defer taxation of contributions and earnings until distribution. As such, an annuity does not provide any additional tax deferral benefit beyond the qualified retirement plan itself.

Tax Treatment of Payments

The Federal income tax rules generally include distributions from a qualified contract in the participant’s income as ordinary income. These taxable distributions will include contributions that were deductible or excludible from income. Thus, under many qualified contracts, the total amount received is included in income since a deduction or exclusion from income was taken for contributions to the contract. There are exceptions. For example, you do not include amounts received from a Roth IRA in income if certain conditions are satisfied.

Required Minimum Distributions

Under most qualified plans, you must begin receiving payments from the Contract in certain minimum amounts by your “required beginning date”. Prior to the SECURE 2.0 Act, the required beginning date was April 1 of the year following the year you attain age 72 or retired. If you did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023, then your required beginning date will be April 1 of the year following the year in which you attain age 73 or retire. If you own a traditional IRA, your required beginning date under prior law was April 1 of the year following the year in which you attained age 72. If you did not attain age 72 prior to January 1, 2023, then your required beginning date will be April 1 of the year following the year in which you attain age 73. If you own a Roth IRA, you are not required to receive minimum distributions from your Roth IRA during your life.

Failure to comply with the minimum distribution rules applicable to certain qualified plans, such as Traditional IRAs, will result in the imposition of an excise tax. This excise tax equals 50% of the amount by which a required minimum distribution exceeds the actual distribution from the qualified plan.

Treasury regulations applicable to required minimum distributions include a rule that may impact the distribution method you have chosen and the amount of your distributions. Under these regulations, the presence of an enhanced Death Benefit, or other benefit which could provide additional value to your Contract, may require you to take additional distributions. An enhanced Death Benefit is

79

any Death Benefit that has the potential to pay more than the Contract Value or a return of investment in the Contract. Annuity contracts inside Custodial or Trusteed IRAs will also be subject to these regulations. Please contact your tax advisor regarding any tax ramifications.

Additional Tax on Early Distributions from Qualified Retirement Plans

The Code may impose a 10% additional tax on an early distribution from a qualified contract that must be included in income. The Code does not impose the additional tax if one of several exceptions applies. The exceptions vary depending on the type of qualified contract you purchase. For example, in the case of an IRA, the 10% additional tax will not apply to any of the following withdrawals, surrenders, or Annuity Payouts:

•

Distribution received on or after the Annuitant reaches 59½,

•

Distribution received on or after the Annuitant’s death or because of the Annuitant’s disability (as defined in the Code),

•

Distribution received as a series of substantially equal periodic payments based on the Annuitant’s life (or life expectancy),

•

Distribution received as reimbursement for certain amounts paid for medical care, or

•

Distribution received for a “qualified birth or adoption” event.

These exceptions, as well as certain others not described here, generally apply to taxable distributions from other qualified retirement plans. However, the specific requirements of the exception may vary.

Unearned Income Medicare Contribution

Congress enacted the “Unearned Income Medicare Contribution” as a part of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. This tax affects individuals whose modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds, is a 3.8% tax on the lesser of (i) the individual’s “unearned income,” or (ii) the dollar amount by which the individual’s modified adjusted gross income exceeds the applicable threshold. Distributions that you take from your Contract are not included in the calculation of unearned income because your Contract is a qualified plan contract. However, the amount of any such distribution is included in determining whether you exceed the modified adjusted gross income threshold. Please consult your tax advisor to determine whether your annuity distributions are subject to this tax.

Transfers and Direct Rollovers

As a result of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001 (EGTRRA), you may be able to move funds between different types of qualified plans, such as 403(b) and 457(b) governmental plans, by means of a rollover or transfer. You may be able to rollover or transfer amounts between qualified plans and traditional IRAs. These rules do not apply to Roth IRAs and 457(b) non-governmental tax-exempt plans. There are special rules that apply to rollovers, direct rollovers and transfers (including rollovers or transfers of after-tax amounts). If the applicable rules are not followed, you may incur adverse Federal income tax consequences, including paying taxes which you might not otherwise have had to pay. Before we send a rollover distribution, we will provide a notice explaining tax withholding requirements (see Federal Income Tax Withholding). We are not required to send you such notice for your IRA. You should always consult your tax advisor before you move or attempt to move any funds.

The IRS issued Announcement 2014-32 confirming its intent to apply the one-rollover-per-year limitation of 408(d)(3)(B) on an aggregate basis to all IRAs that an individual owns. This means that an individual cannot make a tax-free IRA-to-IRA rollover if he or she has made such a rollover involving any of the individual’s IRAs in the current tax year. If an intended rollover does not qualify for tax-free rollover treatment, contributions to your IRA may constitute excess contributions that may exceed contribution limits. This one-rollover-per-year limitation does not apply to direct trustee-to-trustee transfers.

Direct Conversions and Recharacterizations

The Pension Protection Act of 2006 (PPA) permits direct conversions from certain qualified, retirement, 403(b) or 457(b) plans to Roth IRAs (effective for distributions after 2007). You are also permitted to recharacterize your traditional IRA contribution as a Roth IRA contribution, and to recharacterize your Roth IRA contribution as a traditional IRA contribution. The deadline for the recharacterization is the due date (including extensions) for your individual income tax return for the year in which the contribution was made. Upon recharacterization, you are treated as having made the contribution originally to the second IRA account. The recharacterization does not count toward the one-rollover-per-year limitation described above.

Effective for tax years beginning after December 31, 2017, pursuant to the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (Pub. L. No. 115-97), recharacterizations are no longer allowed in the case of a conversion from a non-Roth account or annuity to a Roth IRA. This limitation applies to conversions made from pre-tax accounts under an IRA, qualified retirement plan, 403(b) plan, or 457(b) plan. Roth IRA conversions made in 2017 may be recharacterized as a contribution to a traditional IRA if the recharacterization is completed by October 15, 2018.

There are special rules that apply to conversions and recharacterizations, and if they are not followed, you may incur adverse Federal income tax consequences. You should consult your tax advisor before completing a conversion or recharacterization.

80

Death Benefit and IRAs

Pursuant to Treasury regulations, IRAs may not invest in life insurance contracts. We do not believe that these regulations prohibit the Death Benefit from being provided under the Contract when we issue the Contract as a Traditional or Roth IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that the presence of the Death Benefit under a Contract issued as a Traditional or Roth IRA could result in increased taxes to you. Certain Death Benefit options may not be available for all of our products.

Federal Income Tax Withholding

We will withhold and remit to the IRS a part of the taxable portion of each distribution made under a Contract unless you notify us in writing prior to the distribution that tax is not to be withheld. In certain circumstances, Federal income tax rules may require us to withhold tax. At the time a withdrawal, surrender, or Annuity Payout is requested, we will give you an explanation of the withholding requirements.

Certain payments from your Contract may be considered eligible rollover distributions (even if such payments are not being rolled over). Such distributions may be subject to special tax withholding requirements. The Federal income tax withholding rules require that we withhold 20% of the eligible rollover distribution from the payment amount, unless you elect to have the amount directly transferred to certain qualified plans or contracts. The IRS requires that tax be withheld, even if you have requested otherwise. Such tax withholding requirements are generally applicable to 401(a), 403(a) or (b), HR 10, and 457(b) governmental plans and contracts used in connection with these types of plans.

Our Tax Status

Under the Code, we are not required to pay tax on investment income and realized capital gains of the VAA. We do not expect that we will incur any Federal income tax liability on the income and gains earned by the VAA. However, the Company does expect, to the extent permitted under the Code, to claim the benefit of the foreign tax credit as the owner of the assets of the VAA. Therefore, we do not impose a charge for Federal income taxes. If there are any changes in the Code that require us to pay tax on some or all of the income and gains earned by the VAA, we may impose a charge against the VAA to pay the taxes.

Changes in the Law

The above discussion is based on the Code, related regulations, and interpretations existing on the date of this prospectus. However, Congress, the IRS, and the courts may modify these authorities, sometimes retroactively.

Additional Information

Voting Rights

As required by law, we will vote the fund shares held in the VAA at meetings of the shareholders of the funds. The voting will be done according to the instructions of Contractowners who have interests in any Subaccounts which invest in classes of the funds. If the 1940 Act or any regulation under it should be amended or if present interpretations should change, and if as a result we determine that we are permitted to vote the fund shares in our own right, we may elect to do so.

The number of votes which you have the right to cast will be determined by applying your percentage interest in a Subaccount to the total number of votes attributable to the Subaccount. In determining the number of votes, fractional shares will be recognized.

Each underlying fund is subject to the laws of the state in which it is organized concerning, among other things, the matters which are subject to a shareholder vote, the number of shares which must be present in person or by proxy at a meeting of shareholders (a “quorum”), and the percentage of such shares present in person or by proxy which must vote in favor of matters presented. Because shares of the underlying fund held in the VAA are owned by us, and because under the 1940 Act we will vote all such shares in the same proportion as the voting instructions which we receive, it is important that each Contractowner provide their voting instructions to us. For funds un-affiliated with Lincoln, even though Contractowners may choose not to provide voting instruction, the shares of a fund to which such Contractowners would have been entitled to provide voting instruction will be voted by us in the same proportion as the voting instruction which we actually receive. For funds affiliated with Lincoln, shares of a fund to which such Contractowners would have been entitled to provide voting instruction will, once we receive a sufficient number of instructions we deem appropriate to ensure a fair representation of Contractowners eligible to vote, be voted by us in the same proportion as the voting instruction which we actually receive. As a result, the instruction of a small number of Contractowners could determine the outcome of matters subject to shareholder vote. All shares voted by us will be counted when the underlying fund determines whether any requirement for a minimum number of shares be present at such a meeting to satisfy a quorum requirement has been met. Voting instructions to abstain on any item to be voted on will be applied proportionately to reduce the number of votes eligible to be cast.

Whenever a shareholders meeting is called, we will provide or make available to each person having a voting interest in a Subaccount proxy voting material, reports and other materials relating to the funds. Since the funds engage in shared funding, other persons or entities besides Lincoln Life may vote fund shares. See Investments of the Variable Annuity Account.

81

Return Privilege

Within the free-look period after you receive the Contract, you may cancel it for any reason by sending us a letter of instruction, indicating your intent to exercise the free-look provision. A Contract canceled under this provision will be void. Except as explained in the following paragraph, we will return the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date on which we receive the cancellation request, plus any premium taxes plus for Design 3 contracts only, mortality and expense risk charges and administrative charges proportionately attributable to any applicable Bonus Credits, less any applicable Bonus Credits paid into the Contract by us. In addition, for Design 3 contracts only, if the Contract Value on the date of cancellation is less than the sum of Purchase Payments minus withdrawals, we will also return both the investment loss and fund management fees, each in an amount that is proportionately attributable to any applicable Bonus Credits. No surrender charges or Interest Adjustment will apply. There are no additional Investment Requirements during the free-look period other than as required under an elected optional benefit. A purchaser who participates in the VAA is subject to the risk of a market loss on the Contract Value, excluding any applicable Bonus Credits during the free-look period.

For contracts written in those states whose laws require that we assume this market risk during the free-look period, a Contract may be canceled, subject to the conditions explained before, except that we will return the greater of the Purchase Payment(s) or the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we receive, the cancellation request, plus any premium taxes that had been deducted. IRA purchasers will also receive the greater of Purchase Payments or Contract Value as of the Valuation Date on which we receive the cancellation request.

If you cancel this Contract within the free-look period, we reserve the right not to accept another application for this Contract for a period of six months.

State Regulation

As a life insurance company organized and operated under Indiana law, we are subject to provisions governing life insurers and to regulation by the Indiana Commissioner of Insurance. Our books and accounts are subject to review and examination by the Indiana Department of Insurance at all times. A full examination of our operations is conducted by that Department at least every five years.

Records and Reports

As presently required by the 1940 Act and applicable regulations, we are responsible for maintaining all records and accounts relating to the VAA. We have entered into an agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company, c/o WeWork, 1100 Main Street, Suite 400, Kansas City, MO 64105, to provide accounting services to the VAA. We will mail to you, at your last known address of record at the Home Office, at least semi-annually after the first Contract Year, reports containing information required by that Act or any other applicable law or regulation.

A written (or electronic, if elected) confirmation of each transaction will be provided to you on the next Valuation Date, except for the following transactions, which are mailed quarterly:

•

deduction of any account fee or protected lifetime income fees;

•

crediting of persistency credits, if applicable;

•

any rebalancing event under Asset Allocation Models, Investment Requirements or the portfolio rebalancing service;

•

any transfer or withdrawal under any applicable additional service: dollar cost averaging, AWS, or the cross-reinvestment service; and

•

Regular Income Payments from i4LIFE® Advantage.

Other Information

You may elect to receive your prospectus, prospectus supplements, quarterly statements, and annual and semiannual reports electronically over the Internet, if you have an e-mail account and access to an Internet browser. Once you select eDelivery, via the Internet Service Center, all documents available in electronic format will no longer be sent to you in hard copy. You will receive an e-mail notification when the documents become available online. It is your responsibility to provide us with your current e-mail address. You can resume paper mailings at any time without cost, by updating your profile at the Internet Service Center, or contacting us. To learn more about this service, please log on to www.LincolnFinancial.com, select service centers and continue on through the Internet Service Center.

Special Arrangements

At times, we may offer variations of the contracts described in this prospectus to existing owners as part of an exchange program. Contracts purchased through this exchange offer may impose different fees and expenses and provide certain additional benefits from those described in this prospectus.

82

Legal Proceedings

In the ordinary course of its business and otherwise, the Company and its subsidiaries or its separate accounts and Principal Underwriter may become or are involved in various pending or threatened regulatory or legal proceedings, including purported class actions, arising from the conduct of its business. In some instances, the proceedings include claims for unspecified or substantial punitive damages and similar types of relief in addition to amounts for alleged contractual liability or requests for equitable relief.

After consultation with legal counsel and a review of available facts, it is management’s opinion that the proceedings, after consideration of any reserves and rights to indemnification, ultimately will be resolved without any material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position of the Company and its subsidiaries, or the financial position of its separate accounts or Principal Underwriter. However, given the large and indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these proceedings and the inherent difficulty in predicting the outcome of such proceedings, it is reasonably possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could be material to the Company’s operating results for any particular reporting period.

Please refer to the Statement of Additional Information for possible additional information regarding legal proceedings.

83

 

(This page intentionally left blank)

84

 

(This page intentionally left blank)

85

 

(This page intentionally left blank)

86

Appendix A — Funds Available Under The Contract

The following is a list of funds currently available under the Contract. Depending on the optional benefits you choose, you may not be able to invest in certain funds. Current performance of the Subaccounts can be found at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. More information about the funds is available in the prospectuses for the Funds, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus. You can also request this information and current fund performance at no cost by calling 1-800-942-5500 or by sending an email request to CustServSupportTeam@lfg.com.

The current expenses and performance information below reflects fees and expenses of the Fund, but do not reflect the other fees and expenses that your Contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these other charges were included. Each fund’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance. 

Investment Objective	Fund and Adviser/Sub-adviser1	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
			1 year	5 year	10 year
High total return (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long term.	American Funds Asset Allocation Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after January 9, 2017.	0.55%	14.27%	9.20%	7.25%
High total return (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long term.	American Funds Asset Allocation Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before January 9, 2017.	0.80%	14.02%	8.92%	6.98%
Seeks to provide a level of current income that exceeds the average yield on U.S. stocks generally and to provide a growing stream of income over the years.	American Funds Capital Income Builder® - Class 4	0.78%2	8.75%	7.18%	N/A
To provide, over the long term, with a high level of total return consistent with prudent investment management.	American Funds Capital World Bond Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.73%	6.14%	-0.33%	0.36%
To provide, over the long term, with a high level of total return consistent with prudent investment management.	American Funds Capital World Bond Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.98%	5.89%	-0.56%	0.12%
Long-term growth of capital while providing current income.	American Funds Capital World Growth and Income Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.66%2	20.88%	10.34%	7.62%
Long-term growth of capital while providing current income.	American Funds Capital World Growth and Income Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.91%2	20.65%	10.07%	7.36%
The balanced accomplishment of three objectives: long-term growth of capital, conservation of principal and current income.	American Funds Global Balanced Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after January 9, 2017.	0.77%2	13.83%	7.44%	5.40%
The balanced accomplishment of three objectives: long-term growth of capital, conservation of principal and current income.	American Funds Global Balanced Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before January 9, 2017.	1.02%2	13.45%	7.16%	5.20%
Long-term growth of capital.	American Funds Global Growth Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.66%2	22.60%	13.65%	9.58%

A-1

Investment Objective	Fund and Adviser/Sub-adviser1	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
			1 year	5 year	10 year
Long-term growth of capital.	American Funds Global Growth Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.91%2	22.29%	13.36%	9.30%
Long-term growth of capital. A fund of funds.	American Funds Global Growth PortfolioSM - Class 4	0.97%	23.03%	11.36%	N/A
Long-term capital growth.	American Funds Global Small Capitalization Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.91%2	16.17%	8.31%	5.78%
Long-term capital growth.	American Funds Global Small Capitalization Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	1.16%2	15.79%	8.03%	5.51%
To provide long-term growth of capital while providing current income. A fund of funds.	American Funds Growth and Income PortfolioSM - Class 4	0.82%	15.86%	8.53%	N/A
Growth of capital.	American Funds Growth Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.59%	38.49%	18.68%	14.36%
Growth of capital.	American Funds Growth Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.84%	38.13%	18.38%	14.07%
Long-term growth of capital and income.	American Funds Growth-Income Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.53%	26.14%	13.36%	10.91%
Long-term growth of capital and income.	American Funds Growth-Income Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.78%	25.82%	13.08%	10.63%
To provide investors with a high level of current income; capital appreciation is the secondary objective.	American Funds High-Income Trust - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.57%2	12.45%	6.09%	4.41%
To provide investors with a high level of current income; capital appreciation is the secondary objective.	American Funds High-Income Trust - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.82%2	12.18%	5.84%	4.15%
Long-term growth of capital.	American Funds International Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.78%	15.84%	4.83%	3.41%
Long-term growth of capital.	American Funds International Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	1.03%	15.56%	4.58%	3.15%
Long-term growth of capital while providing current income.	American Funds International Growth and Income Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.81%	15.76%	6.11%	3.31%

A-2

Investment Objective	Fund and Adviser/Sub-adviser1	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
			1 year	5 year	10 year
Long-term growth of capital while providing current income.	American Funds International Growth and Income Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	1.06%	15.66%	5.86%	3.06%
To provide high total return (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long term while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund - Class P2	0.90%2	10.23%	5.91%	4.74%
High total return (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long term while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM - Class P2	1.04%2	10.52%	4.56%	N/A
Long-term growth of capital and current income while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM - Class P2	0.91%2	11.71%	5.66%	N/A
To provide growth of capital while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Growth Fund - Class P2	0.94%2	23.50%	10.98%	8.30%
Long-term growth of capital while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM - Class P2	0.94%2	15.57%	6.73%	N/A
To achieve long-term growth of capital and income while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Growth- Income Fund - Class P2	0.87%2	15.90%	7.60%	6.15%
To provide long-term growth of capital while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk International Fund - Class P2	1.10%2	6.22%	0.79%	0.24%
To produce income and to provide an opportunity for growth of principal consistent with sound common stock investing while seeking to manage volatility and provide downside protection. A fund of funds.	American Funds Managed Risk Washington Mutual Investors Fund - Class P2	0.89%2	9.73%	5.59%	4.73%
To provide current income and preservation of capital.	American Funds Mortgage Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.57%2	3.68%	0.80%	1.48%
To provide current income and preservation of capital.	American Funds Mortgage Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.82%2	3.51%	0.57%	1.24%
Long-term capital appreciation.	American Funds New World Fund® - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.82%2	15.99%	8.64%	4.69%

A-3

Investment Objective	Fund and Adviser/Sub-adviser1	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
			1 year	5 year	10 year
Long-term capital appreciation.	American Funds New World Fund® - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	1.07%2	15.67%	8.37%	4.43%
To provide as high a level of current income as is consistent with the preservation of capital.	American Funds The Bond Fund of America - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.48%2	5.02%	1.89%	2.08%
To provide as high a level of current income as is consistent with the preservation of capital.	American Funds The Bond Fund of America - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.73%2	4.72%	1.62%	1.83%
To provide a high level of current income consistent with prudent investment risk and preservation of capital.	American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after January 9, 2017.	0.51%2	2.89%	1.04%	1.52%
To provide a high level of current income consistent with prudent investment risk and preservation of capital.	American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before January 9, 2017.	0.76%2	2.62%	0.79%	1.27%
To provide the investors with current income, consistent with the maturity and quality standards applicable to the fund, and preservation of capital and liquidity.	American Funds Ultra-Short Bond Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.56%	4.64%	1.37%	0.74%
To provide the investors with current income, consistent with the maturity and quality standards applicable to the fund, and preservation of capital and liquidity.	American Funds Ultra-Short Bond Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.81%	4.44%	1.12%	0.53%
To produce income and to provide an opportunity for growth of principal consistent with sound common stock investing.	American Funds Washington Mutual Investors Fund - Class 2 This fund is not available in contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.	0.52%2	17.29%	12.60%	9.91%
To produce income and to provide an opportunity for growth of principal consistent with sound common stock investing.	American Funds Washington Mutual Investors Fund - Class 4 This fund is not available in contracts issued before May 22, 2017.	0.77%2	16.97%	12.33%	9.64%
A balance between a high level of current income and growth of capital, with an emphasis on growth of capital. A fund of funds.	LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund - Service Class advised by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation	0.93%2	13.27%	7.63%	5.72%
A balance between a high level of current income and growth of capital. A fund of funds.	LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund - Service Class advised by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation	0.95%	11.41%	5.39%	4.14%
A balance between a high level of current income and growth of capital, with a greater emphasis on growth of capital. A fund of funds.	LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund - Service Class advised by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation	0.97%	13.57%	5.82%	4.14%

A-4

Investment Objective	Fund and Adviser/Sub-adviser1	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
			1 year	5 year	10 year
A balance between a high level of current income and growth of capital, with a greater emphasis on growth of capital. A fund of funds.	LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund - Service Class advised by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation	0.94%2	14.55%	8.17%	6.12%
A high level of current income with some consideration given to growth of capital. A fund of funds.	LVIP American Income Allocation Fund - Service Class advised by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation	0.93%2	10.40%	5.73%	4.51%
Current income, consistent with the preservation of capital. A fund of funds.	LVIP American Preservation Fund - Service Class advised by Lincoln Financial Investments Corporation	0.86%2	3.74%	0.98%	1.00%

1

The name of the adviser or sub-adviser is not listed if the name is incorporated into the name of the fund or the fund company.

2

This fund is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement. As a result, this fund’s annual expenses reflect temporary expense reductions. See the fund prospectus for additional information.

A-5

Appendix B — Investment Requirements

If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit), you will be subject to Investment Requirements. This requirement means you will be limited in your choice of Subaccount investments and in how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. This also means you will not be able to allocate Contract Value to all of the Subaccounts that are available to Contractowners who have not elected a Living Benefit Rider. We impose Investment Requirements to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under a Living Benefit Rider.

If you elect a Living Benefit Rider, Investment Requirements apply whether you purchase the rider at Contract issue or add it to an existing Contract. The Living Benefit Rider you purchase and the date of purchase will determine which Investment Requirements Option will apply to your Contract. See Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 below. Currently, if you purchase i4LIFE® without Guaranteed Income Benefit, you will not be subject to any Investment Requirements, although we reserve the right to impose Investment Requirements for this rider in the future. If we do exercise our right to do so, you will have to reallocate your Account Value subject to such requirements.

Certain of the underlying funds that are included in the Investment Requirements, including funds managed by an adviser affiliated with us, employ risk management strategies that are intended to control the funds’ overall volatility, and for some funds, to also reduce the downside exposure of the funds during significant market downturns.

These funds are included under Investment Requirements (particularly in the Investment Requirements for the Managed Risk riders) in part because the reduction in volatility helps us to reduce the risk of investment losses that may require us to use our own assets to make guaranteed payments under a Living Benefit Rider. At the same time, risk management strategies in periods of high market volatility or other market conditions, could limit your participation in market gains. This may conflict with your investment objectives by limiting your ability to maximize potential growth of your Contract Value and, in turn, the value of any guaranteed benefit that is tied to investment performance. You should consult your registered representative to determine whether these funds align with your investment objectives. For more information about the funds and the investment strategies they employ, please refer to the funds’ current prospectuses. Fund prospectuses are available by contacting us.

Under each option, we have divided the Subaccounts of your Contract into groups and have specified the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value that must be in each group at the time you purchased the rider (or when the rider Investment Requirements are enforced, if later). In addition, depending on when you purchased your Contract, you may allocate your Contract Value and Purchase Payments in accordance with certain asset allocation models, as noted below. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. Some investment options are not available to you if you purchase certain riders. The Investment Requirements may not be consistent with an aggressive investment strategy. You should consult with your registered representative to determine if the Investment Requirements are consistent with your investment objectives.

The chart below is provided to help you determine which option of Investment Requirements, if any, applies to the Living Benefit Rider you purchased. If you do not elect a Living Benefit Rider, the Investment Requirements will not apply to your Contract. Different Investment Requirements may apply if you terminate one rider and elect another rider. 

If you elect...	and the date of election is...	you will be subject to Investment Requirements
Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max®	On or after November 28, 2022	Option 3 for Managed Risk riders
Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max®	On or after November 28, 2022	Option 3
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)	On or after April 2, 2012	Option 3 for Managed Risk riders
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)	On or after July 16, 2012	Option 3 for Managed Risk riders
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)	On or after May 21, 2012	Option 3 for Managed Risk riders
Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage	On or after May 22, 2017	Option 3
Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM	On or after January 14, 2019	Option 3
4LATER® Select Advantage	On or after January 9, 2017	Option 3

B-1

If you elect...	and the date of election is...	you will be subject to Investment Requirements
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit	On or after August 29, 2016	Option 3
Lincoln Market Select® Advantage	On or after October 5, 2015	Option 3
Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage	On or after June 27, 2011	Option 3
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0	On or after November 15, 2010	Option 3
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage	February 19, 2008 through January 19, 2009 On or after January 20, 2009	Option 2 Option 3
Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage	Prior to April 10, 2006 April 10, 2006 through January 19, 2009 On or after January 20, 2009	N/A Option 1 Option 3
4LATER® Advantage	April 10, 2006 through January 19, 2009 On or after January 20, 2009	Option 1 Option 3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.1)	Prior to April 10, 2006 On or after April 10, 2006	N/A Option 1
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.2)	April 10, 2006 through January 19, 2009 On or after January 20, 2009	Option 1 Option 3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.3)	October 6, 2008 through January 19, 2009 On or after January 20, 2009	Option 2 Option 3
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (v.4)	On or after November 15, 2010	Option 3

 

Investment Requirements – Option 1

No more than 35% of your Contract Value (includes Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage is in effect) can be invested in the following Subaccounts (“Limited Subaccounts”) (Note: not all Subaccounts are available with all contracts):

•

American Funds Capital Income Builder®

•

American Funds Global Growth Fund

•

American Funds Global Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Global Small Capitalization Fund

•

American Funds High-Income Trust

•

American Funds International Fund

•

American Funds International Growth and Income Fund

•

American Funds New World Fund®

All other Subaccounts will be referred to as “Non-Limited Subaccounts” .

You can select the percentages of Contract Value, if any, allocated to the Limited Subaccounts, but the cumulative total investment in all the Limited Subaccounts cannot exceed 35% of the total Contract Value. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, if the Contract Value in the Limited Subaccounts exceeds 35%, Lincoln will rebalance your Contract Value so that the Contract Value in the Limited Subaccounts is 30%. If you are enrolled in portfolio rebalancing, the cumulative total investment in all the Limited Subaccounts cannot exceed 35% of total Contract Value. If your current portfolio rebalancing does not adhere to this requirement, your portfolio rebalancing program will be terminated.

If rebalancing is required, the Contract Value in excess of 30% will be removed from the Limited Subaccounts on a pro rata basis and invested in the remaining Non-Limited Subaccounts on a pro rata basis according to the Contract Value percentages in the Non-Limited Subaccounts at the time of the reallocation. If there is no Contract Value in the Non-Limited Subaccounts at that time, portfolio rebalancing will be paused until updated allocation instructions are received from you. We will provide you with notice of such change. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement.

We may move Subaccounts on or off the Limited or Non-Limited Subaccount list, exclude Subaccounts and asset allocation models from being available for investment, change the number of Limited Subaccount groups, change the percentages of Contract Value allowed in the Limited or Non-Limited Subaccounts or change the frequency of the Contract Value rebalancing, at any time, in our sole discretion. We will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the Subaccount investments.

At the time you receive notice of a change or when you are notified that we will begin enforcing the Investment Requirements, you may:

B-2

1.

submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value in excess of 35% in the Limited Subaccounts; or

2.

take no action and be subject to the quarterly rebalancing as described above; or

3.

terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event if you do not wish to be subject to these Investment Requirements.

Investment Requirements – Option 2

You can select the percentages of Contract Value (includes Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect) to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts in a group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group.

In accordance with these Investment Requirements, you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option under your Contract and thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a periodic basis. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, we will rebalance your Contract Value, proportionately, based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Any reallocation of Contract Value among the Subaccounts made by you prior to a rebalancing date will become your allocation instructions for rebalancing purposes. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. We reserve the right to change the rebalancing frequency, at any time, in our sole discretion. We will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change in frequency. If we rebalance Contract Value from the Subaccounts and your allocation instructions do not comply with the Investment Requirements, portfolio rebalancing will be paused, and any subsequent transfer requests will be considered not in Good Order until updated allocation instructions are received. These investments will become your allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise.

We may change the list of Subaccounts in a group, change the number of groups, change the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value allowed in a group or change the investment options that are or are not available to you, at any time, in our sole discretion. We will not make changes more than once per calendar year. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the Subaccount investments.

At the time you receive notice of a change to the Investment Requirements, you may:

1.

submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value, before the effective date specified in the notice, so that the Investment Requirements are satisfied;

2.

if you take no action, such changes will apply only to additional Purchase Payments or to future transfers of Contract Value. You will not be required to change allocations to existing Subaccounts, but you will not be allowed to add money, by either an additional Purchase Payment or a contract transfer, in excess of the new percentage applicable to a Subaccount or Subaccount group. This does not apply to Subaccounts added to Investment Requirements on or after June 30, 2009. For Subaccounts added to Investment Requirements on or after June 30, 2009, you may be subject to rebalancing as described above. If this results in a change to your allocation instructions, then these will be your new allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise; or

3.

terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event if you do not wish to be subject to the new terms of the Investment Requirements.

At this time, the Subaccount groups are as follows: 

Group 1 Investments must be at least 25% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 2 Investments cannot exceed 75% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 3 Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract Value or Account Value
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund American Funds High-Income Trust American Funds Mortgage Fund American Funds The Bond Fund of America American Funds U.S. Government Securities LVIP American Preservation Fund	All other investment options except as discussed below.	No Subaccounts at this time.

The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.

To satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts on the following list; however, if you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value to or among these Subaccounts, then these Subaccounts will be considered as part of Group 1 or 2 above, as applicable, and you will be subject to the Group 1 or 2 restrictions.

•

American Funds Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Capital World Bond Fund

•

American Funds Global Balanced Fund

•

American Funds High-Income Trust

B-3

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Mortgage Fund

•

American Funds The Bond Fund of America

•

American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund

•

LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

To satisfy these Investment Requirements, Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models, made available to you by your broker dealer. At this time, 100% of the Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value can be allocated to one of the following models: American Legacy Fundamental Growth and Income Model, American Legacy Fundamental Equity Growth Model, American Legacy Fundamental Balanced Model, or American Legacy Fundamental Income Model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Contract Value among Group 1 or Group 2 Subaccounts as described above. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider.

If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus rider before January 20, 2009, your only investment options until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary are to allocate 100% of your Contract Value to the American Funds Asset Allocation Fund (a Subaccount), the American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund or the LVIP American Income Allocation Fund, or to one of these asset allocation models: the American Legacy Fundamental Balanced Model or the American Legacy Fundamental Income Model.

Investment Requirements – Option 3

If you elect Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max®, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), you must allocate your Contract Value in accordance with the Investment Requirements for Managed Risk Riders section below.

If you elect Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM, you must allocate your Contract Value in accordance with the Investment Requirements for the Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM section below.

If you elect any other Living Benefit Rider, you must allocate your Contract Value in accordance with the Investment Requirements for i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit or other Living Benefit Riders sections below, according to which rider you purchased and the date of purchase. For all Living Benefit Riders, you can select the percentages of Contract Value (or Account Value if i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is in effect) to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts within the group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group.

You must hold the rider for a minimum period of time after election (the minimum time is specified under the Termination section of each rider). During this time, you will be required to adhere to the Investment Requirements. After this time, failure to adhere to the Investment Requirements will result in termination of the rider.

Certain Living Benefit Riders guarantee you the right to transition to a version of the i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit even if that version is no longer available for purchase. If you transition to i4LIFE® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Investment Requirements under your Prior Living Benefit Rider continue to apply. See i4LIFE® Advantage – i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.

If you purchase a Living Benefit Rider (except i4LIFE® Advantage without Guaranteed Income Benefit), you agree to be automatically enrolled in the portfolio rebalancing option under your Contract and thereby authorize us to automatically rebalance your Contract Value on a periodic basis. On each quarterly anniversary of the effective date of the rider, we will rebalance your Contract Value, proportionately, based on your allocation instructions in effect at the time of the rebalancing. Any reallocation of Contract Value among the Subaccounts made by you prior to a rebalancing date will become your allocation instructions for rebalancing purposes. Confirmation of the rebalancing will appear on your quarterly statement. If we rebalance Contract Value from the Subaccounts and your allocation instructions do not comply with the Investment Requirements, portfolio rebalancing will be paused, and any subsequent transfer requests will be considered not in Good Order until updated allocation instructions are received. These investments will become your allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise.

For certain Living Benefit Riders, the Subaccounts of your Contract are divided into groups and have specified minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value that must be in each group at the time you purchase the rider. Please review the Investment Requirements below to determine which Investment Requirements apply to your rider. You can select the percentages of Contract Value to allocate to individual Subaccounts within each group, but the total investment for all Subaccounts within the group must comply with the specified minimum or maximum percentages for that group. We may change the list of Subaccounts in a group, change the number of groups, change the minimum or maximum percentages of Contract Value allowed in a group, change the investment options

B-4

that are or are not available to you, or change the rebalancing frequency at any time in our sole discretion. For other Living Benefit Riders, we may only make certain Subaccounts available to you, which are listed below.

For all Living Benefit Riders, we may add or remove Subaccounts at any time in our sole discretion. You will be notified at least 30 days prior to the date of any change. We may make such modifications at any time when we believe the modifications are necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. Our decision to make modifications will be based on several factors including the general market conditions and the style and investment objectives of the subaccount investments.

At the time you receive notice of a change to the Investment Requirements, you may:

1.

submit your own reallocation instructions for the Contract Value, before the effective date specified in the notice, so that the Investment Requirements are satisfied; or

2.

take no action and be subject to the quarterly rebalancing as described above. If this results in a change to your allocation instructions, then these will be your new allocation instructions until you tell us otherwise; or

3.

terminate the applicable rider immediately, without waiting for a termination event, if you do not wish to be subject to these Investment Requirements.

Option 3 –Investment Requirements for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elected on or after May 21, 2018 and prior to May 18, 2020. If you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) on or after May 21, 2018 and prior to May 18, 2020, you must allocate 100% of your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts only. Not all funds may be available, refer to the “Description of the Funds” section of this prospectus for more information.

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth-Income Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk International Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Washington Mutual Investors Fund

•

American Funds Mortgage Fund*

•

American Funds The Bond Fund of America*

•

American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund*

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

*This fund is only available to contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.

The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.

B-5

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for Managed Risk Riders. If you elected Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max®, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), or elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) prior to May 21, 2018 or on or after May 18, 2020, or are transitioning from to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) from one of these riders (if applicable), you must currently allocate your Contract Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts only. 

Group 1 Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 2 Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 3 Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract Value or Account Value
American Funds Mortgage Fund* American Funds The Bond Fund of America* American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund* LVIP American Preservation Fund	American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM American Funds Managed Risk Growth Fund American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM American Funds Managed Risk Growth-Income Fund American Funds Managed Risk International Fund American Funds Managed Risk Washington Mutual Investors Fund LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund	No Subaccounts at this time.

*This fund is only available to contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.

As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Mortgage Fund*

•

American Funds The Bond Fund of America*

•

American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund*

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

*This fund is only available to contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017.

Option 3—Investment Requirements for Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM. If you elect Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM, you must allocate 100% of your Contract Value among the following Subaccounts:

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elected on or after May 21, 2018 and prior to May 18, 2020 for Contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017. If your Contract was issued on or after May 22, 2017 and you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit on or after May 21, 2018 and prior to May 18, 2020, you must currently allocate 100% of your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among all Subaccounts except those listed below.

•

American Funds Capital World Bond Fund

•

American Funds Global Small Capitalization Fund

•

American Funds New World Fund

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.

B-6

As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, Account Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models made available to you by your broker-dealer. If so, currently 100% of the Account Value can be allocated to one of the following models: American Funds Asset Allocation Fund & American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund Model, American Funds Balanced Model Portfolio, American Funds Conservative Model Portfolio, American Funds IS TRICAP Global Moderate Growth Portfolio or American Funds IS TRICAP Moderate Growth Portfolio. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Account Value according to the Investment Requirements listed above. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. We may exclude an asset allocation model from being available for investment at any time, in our sole discretion. You will be notified prior to the date of such a change.

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elected on or after May 21, 2018 and prior to May 18, 2020 for Contracts issued prior to May 22, 2017. If your Contract was issued prior to May 22, 2017 and prior to May 18, 2020, and you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit on or after May 21, 2018 and prior to May 18, 2020, you must currently allocate 100% of your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts only.

•

American Funds Capital Income Builder®

•

American Funds Global Balanced Fund

•

American Funds Global Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth-Income Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk International Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Washington Mutual Investors Fund

•

LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging

As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of Account Value in accordance with the American Funds Asset Allocation Fund & American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund, American Funds IS TRICAP Moderate Growth Portfolio or American Funds IS TRICAP Global Moderate Growth Portfolio asset allocation model made available to you by your broker-dealer. If you terminate the asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. We may exclude an asset allocation model from being available for investment at any time, in our sole discretion. You will be notified prior to the date of such a change.

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for other Living Benefit Riders for Contracts issued on or after May 22, 2017. If you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit prior to May 21, 2018, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max®, Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage, Lincoln Wealth PassSM, 4LATER® Select Advantage or Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage on or after May 22, 2017, or you are transitioning to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed income Benefit from one of these riders (if applicable), you must currently allocate your Contract Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 

Group 1 Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value

Group 2 Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value

American Funds Mortgage Fund American Funds The Bond Fund of America American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund LVIP American Preservation Fund

American Funds Asset Allocation Fund American Funds Capital Income Builder® American Funds Capital World Growth and Income Fund American Funds Global Balanced Fund American Funds Global Growth Fund American Funds Global Growth PortfolioSM American Funds Growth and Income PortfolioSM American Funds Growth Fund American Funds Growth-Income Fund American Funds High-Income Trust American Funds International Fund American Funds International Growth and Income Fund American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM American Funds Ultra-Short Bond Fund

B-7

Group 1 Investments must be at least 20% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 2 Investments cannot exceed 80% of Contract Value or Account Value
	American Funds Washington Mutual Investors Fund LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.

As an alternative, if you purchased your Contract on or after May 22, 2017, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.

•

American Funds Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Global Balanced Fund

•

American Funds Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Mortgage Fund

•

American Funds The Bond Fund of America

•

American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund

•

LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.

Additionally, Contract Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models made available to you by your broker-dealer. If so, currently 100% of the Contract Value can be allocated to one of the following models: American Funds Balanced Model Portfolio, American Funds Conservative Model Portfolio, American Funds Asset Allocation Fund & American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund Model, American Funds IS TRICAP Global Moderate Growth Portfolio or American Funds IS TRICAP Moderate Growth Portfolio. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Contract Value according to the Investment Requirements listed above. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. We may exclude an asset allocation model from being available for investment at any time, in our sole discretion. You will be notified prior to the date of such a change.

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for other Living Benefit Riders for Contracts issued prior to May 22, 2017 that elect a rider on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners). If you elected i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) but prior to May 21, 2018, or Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus®, Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max®, Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage, Lincoln Wealth PassSM, 4LATER® Select Advantage, or Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners), or you are transitioning to i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit from one of these riders (if applicable), you must currently allocate 100% of your Contract Value or Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts.

•

American Funds Global Balanced Fund

•

American Funds Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.

B-8

As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, contracts that purchase one of these Living Benefit Riders on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) and prior to January 9, 2017 may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or Account Value among the American Funds Asset Allocation Fund (85%) and the American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund (15%).

Contracts issued prior to May 22, 2017, that purchase one of these Living Benefit Riders on or after January 9, 2017 may satisfy these Investment Requirements by allocating 100% of the Contract Value or Account Value in accordance with the American Funds Asset Allocation Fund & American Funds U.S. Government/AAA-Rated Securities Fund, American Funds IS TRICAP Moderate Growth Portfolio or American Funds IS TRICAP Global Moderate Growth Portfolio asset allocation model made available to you by your broker-dealer. If you terminate the asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider. We may exclude an asset allocation model from being available for investment at any time, in our sole discretion. You will be notified prior to the date of such a change.

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for other Living Benefit Riders elected on or after October 5, 2015 and prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners). For i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) and Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage riders purchased on or after October 5, 2015 and prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners), you must currently allocate your Contract Value or Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 

Group 1 Investments must be at least 30% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 2 Investments cannot exceed 70% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 3 Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract Value or Account Value
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund American Funds Mortgage Fund American Funds The Bond Fund of America American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund LVIP American Preservation Fund	American Funds Asset Allocation Fund American Funds Capital Income Builder® American Funds Capital World Growth and Income Fund American Funds Global Balanced Fund American Funds Global Growth Fund American Funds Global Growth PortfolioSM American Funds Growth and Income PortfolioSM American Funds Growth Fund American Funds Growth-Income Fund American Funds High-Income Trust American Funds International Fund American Funds International Growth and Income Fund American Funds Ultra-Short Bond Fund American Funds Washington Mutual Investors Fund LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund LVIP American Income Allocation Fund	American Funds Global Small Capitalization Fund American Funds New World Fund®

The fixed account is only available for dollar cost averaging.

As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.

•

American Funds Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Capital World Bond Fund

•

American Funds Global Balanced Fund

•

American Funds Mortgage Fund

•

American Funds The Bond Fund of America

•

American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund

•

LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.

B-9

Option 3 – Investment Requirements for other Living Benefit Riders elected prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners). If you elected a Living Benefit Rider other than Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners), you must currently allocate your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among one or more of the following Subaccounts. 

Group 1 Investments must be at least 30% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 2 Investments cannot exceed 70% of Contract Value or Account Value	Group 3 Investments cannot exceed 10% of Contract Value or Account Value
American Funds Capital World Bond Fund American Funds Mortgage Fund American Funds The Bond Fund of America American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund LVIP American Preservation Fund	All other Subaccounts, except as described below.	No Subaccounts at this time.

The fixed account, if available, is only available for dollar cost averaging.

As an alternative, to satisfy these Investment Requirements, you may allocate 100% of your Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among the Subaccounts listed below. If you allocate less than 100% of Contract Value or i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value among these Subaccounts, then the Subaccounts listed below that are also listed in Group 1 will be subject to the Group 1 restrictions. Any remaining Subaccounts listed below that are not listed in Group 1 will fall into Group 2 and be subject to Group 2 restrictions.

•

American Funds Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Capital World Bond Fund

•

American Funds Global Balanced Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Asset Allocation Fund

•

American Funds Managed Risk Global Allocation PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth and Income PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Managed Risk Growth PortfolioSM

•

American Funds Mortgage Fund

•

American Funds The Bond Fund of America

•

American Funds U.S. Government Securities Fund

•

LVIP American Balanced Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Global Balanced Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Global Growth Allocation Managed Risk Fund

•

LVIP American Growth Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Income Allocation Fund

•

LVIP American Preservation Fund

To satisfy these Investment Requirements, Contract Value may be allocated in accordance with certain asset allocation models depending on when you purchased your Contract, made available to you by your broker-dealer. If so, currently 100% of the Contract Value can be allocated to one of the following models: American Legacy Fundamental Equity Growth Model, American Legacy Fundamental Balanced Model, or American Legacy Fundamental Income Model. You may only choose one asset allocation model at a time, though you may change to a different asset allocation model available in your Contract that meets the Investment Requirements or reallocate Contract Value among Group 1 or Group 2 Subaccounts as described above. These models are not available for contracts issued on or after November 15, 2010. If you terminate an asset allocation model, you must follow the Investment Requirements applicable to your rider.

If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus rider on or after January 20, 2009, your only investment options until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary are to allocate 100% of your Contract Value to the LVIP American Income Allocation Fund subaccount or the American Legacy Fundamental Income Model. This model is not available for contracts purchased on or after November 15, 2010.

B-10

Appendix C — Discontinued Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders

The Death Benefit and Living Benefit Riders described in this Appendix are no longer available. This Appendix contains important information for Contractowners who purchased their Contract and one of the following Death Benefit or Living Benefit Riders.

Death Benefit

Estate Enhancement Benefit Rider (EEB Rider). The amount of Death Benefit payable under this rider is the greatest of the following amounts:

•

the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim; or

•

the sum of all Purchase Payments decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount under applicable Living Benefit Riders may reduce the sum of all Purchase Payment amounts on a dollar-for-dollar basis. See Appendix C — Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage or Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM; or

•

the highest Contract Value on any contract anniversary (including the inception date) prior to the 81st birthday of the deceased Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant and prior to the death of the Contractowner, joint owner or Annuitant for whom a death claim is approved for payment. The highest Contract Value is increased by Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits and is decreased by withdrawals subsequent to that anniversary date in the same proportion that withdrawals reduced the Contract Value; or

•

the current Contract Value as of the Valuation Date we approve the payment of the claim plus an amount equal to the enhancement rate times the lesser of:

•

the contract earnings; or

•

the covered earnings limit.

Note: If there are no contract earnings, there will not be an amount provided under this item.

The following example shows how the Death Benefit amount is calculated under the EEB. It assumes that the oldest Contractowner or Annuitant age is 68, an initial deposit of $100,000 and an enhancement rate of 40%. 

Contract Value on the Valuation Date the death claim is approved	$120,000
Contract earnings	$20,000 ($120,000 - $100,000)
Covered earnings limit	$200,000 ($100,000 x 2)
The enhancement rate is multiplied by the lesser of the contract earnings amount ($20,000) or the covered earnings limit amount ($200,000)	$8,000 (40% x $20,000)
Total Death Benefit amount	$128,000 ($120,000 + $8,000)

The enhancement rate is based on the age of the oldest Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant on the date when the rider becomes effective. If the oldest is under age 70, the rate is 40%. If the oldest is age 70 to 75, the rate is 25%. The EEB rider is not available if the oldest Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable), or Annuitant is age 76 or older at the time the rider would become effective.

Contract earnings equal:

•

the Contract Value as of the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved by us for payment; minus

•

the Purchase Payments as of the effective date of this rider; minus

•

each Purchase Payment that is made to the Contract on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment; plus

•

any Purchase Payment that has previously been withdrawn, which is the amount by which each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, exceeded the contract earnings immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The previously withdrawn contractual basis associated with each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider is an amount equal to the greater of $0 and (A), where

(A)

is the amount of the withdrawal minus the greater of $0 and (B); where

(B)

is the result of [(i) - (ii)]; where

(i)

is the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal; and

C-1

(ii)

is the amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract prior to the withdrawal.

The covered earnings limit equals 200% of:

•

the Contract Value as of the effective date of this rider (determined before the allocation of any Purchase Payments on that date); plus

•

each Purchase Payment that is made to the Contract on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, and prior to the contract anniversary immediately preceding the 76th birthday of the oldest of the Contractowner, joint owner (if applicable) or Annuitant; minus

•

any contractual basis that has previously been withdrawn, which is the amount by which each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider, and prior to the date of death of the individual for whom a death claim is approved for payment, exceeded the contract earnings immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The previously withdrawn contractual basis associated with each withdrawal made on or after the effective date of the rider is an amount equal to the greater of $0 and (A), where

(A)

is the amount of the withdrawal minus the greater of $0 and (B); where

(B)

is the result of [(i) - (ii)]; where

(i)

is the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal; and

(ii)

is the amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract prior to the withdrawal.

If the EEB rider is in effect, the enhancement rate for future benefits will be based on the age of the older of the surviving spouse or the Annuitant at the time the EEB is added to the Contract. The contract earnings and the covered earnings limit will be reset, treating the current Contract Value (after crediting any Death Benefit amount into the Contract as described above) as the initial deposit for purposes of future benefit calculations. If either the surviving spouse or the surviving Annuitant is 76 or older, the EEB Death Benefit will be reduced to the EGMDB for a total annual charge of 1.85% or 1.40% depending on which Contract you purchase.

The EEB rider may not be terminated unless you surrender the Contract or the Contract is in the Annuity Payout period.

In a declining market, withdrawals reduce the Death Benefit in the same proportion the Contract Value is reduced, which has a magnified effect on the reduction of the Death Benefit payable. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. All references to withdrawals include deductions for any applicable charges associated with those withdrawals (surrender charges for example) and premium taxes, if any.

Charges and Deductions for Discontinued Living Benefit Riders

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk), Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0, Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage, Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM, and 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) Fees. If you have elected a Living Benefit Rider, there is a fee associated with that rider for as long as the rider is in effect.

The protected lifetime income fee rates for the riders listed above are: 

	Guaranteed Maximum Annual Fee Rate*
	Single Life	Joint Life
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) on or after May 21, 2018	2.25%	2.45%
Lincoln Market Select® Advantage riders elected on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners)	2.25%	2.45%
Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage	2.25%	2.45%

 

*The current charge for elections of this rider were disclosed in a Rate Sheet. The rates from previous effective periods are included in Appendix G to this prospectus. 

C-2

	Current Annual Fee Rate		Guaranteed Maximum Annual Fee Rate
	Single Life	Joint Life	Single Life	Joint Life
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to May 21, 20181	1.25%	1.50%	2.00%	2.00%
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.02	1.25% (0.3125% quarterly)	1.50% (0.3750% quarterly)	2.00%	2.00%
Lincoln Market Select® Advantage riders elected on or after May 16, 2016 and prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners)	0.95%	1.15%	2.25%	2.45%
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) 3	1.05% (0.2625% quarterly)	1.25% (0.3125% quarterly)	2.00%	2.00%
Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM	1.35% (0.3375% quarterly)	N/A	2.25%	N/A

 

1 Beginning February 20, 2024, the current annual fee rate for the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to May 21, 2018, will increase from 1.05% to 1.25% (single life option); 1.25% to 1.50% (joint life option) if (a) the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary; or (b) upon the earlier of (1) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (2) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. This fee increase will also occur upon a step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit following a transition to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.

2 Beginning February 22, 2021, the current annual fee rate for the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM 2.0 Advantage rider increased from 1.05% to 1.25% (single life option); 1.25% to 1.50% (joint life option) upon the earlier of (a) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000 or (c) if the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. This fee increase will also occur upon a step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit following a transition to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.

3 Beginning February 20, 2024, the current annual fee rate for the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will increase from 1.05% to 1.25% (single life option; 1.25% to 1.50% (joint life option) if (a) the Protected Income Base increases as a result of an Enhancement after the tenth Benefit Year anniversary; or (b) upon the earlier of (1) the next Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (2) the next Benefit Year anniversary if cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. This fee increase will also occur upon a step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit following a transition to the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit.

The protected lifetime income fee:

•

is based on the Protected Income Base (initial Purchase Payment, including any Bonus Credit, if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, Enhancements, and as decreased for Excess Withdrawals. (The Protected Income Base is decreased by all withdrawals under 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)); and

•

may increase every Benefit Year upon an Account Value Step-up or an Enhancement. (You may opt out of this increase – see details below.)

The fee will be deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The first deduction of the fee will occur on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the rider’s effective date. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and fixed account, if any, of the Contract on the Valuation Date the protected lifetime income fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Protected Income Base increases or decreases, because the fee is based on the Protected Income Base. Refer to Living Benefit Riders for a discussion and example of the impact of the changes to the Protected Income Base.

Opting Out of Fee Rate Increases Resulting from an Account Value Step-up

The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. Since the Account Value Step-up could increase your Protected Income Base every Benefit Year (if all conditions are met), the fee rate could also increase every Benefit Year, but the rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. See Fee Tables. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your rate to change. If you opt

C-3

out of the step-up, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the step-up, adjusted for any additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals (or all withdrawals under 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)). This opt out will only apply for this single Account Value Step-up, and not to any subsequent Account Value Step-ups. You will need to notify us each time thereafter (if an Account Value Step-up would cause your fee rate to increase) if you do not want the Account Value Step-up.

The annual protected lifetime income fee rate will increase to the then current rate not to exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate, if after the first Benefit Year anniversary cumulative Purchase Payments added to the Contract equal or exceed $100,000. You may not opt out of this protected lifetime income fee rate increase. See Living Benefit Riders.

Opting Out of Fee Rate Increases Resulting from an Enhancement

The following paragraph is not applicable for Lincoln Market Select® Advantage riders elected prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 for riders elected after the contract effective date) (subject to state approval).

An Enhancement to the Protected Income Base (less Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year) occurs if a 10-year Enhancement Period is in effect (as described further in the Living Benefit Rider section). During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the protected lifetime income fee may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. Since the Enhancement could increase your Protected Income Base each Benefit Year, your fee rate could increase each Benefit Year, but the fee rate will never exceed the stated guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Enhancement by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your fee rate to change. If you opt out of the Enhancement, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will be lowered to the value they were immediately prior to the Enhancement, adjusted for additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals (or all withdrawals under any version of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)), if any, and the Enhancement will not be applied. This opt out will only apply for this single Enhancement and not to any subsequent Enhancements. You will need to notify us each time thereafter (if an Enhancement would cause your fee rate to increase) if you do not want the Enhancement.

To opt out of any of the events discussed above, you may contact us in writing or by telephone (if you have proper authorization for telephone transactions in place).

No Opt Out of Fee Rate Increases Resulting from Purchase Payments

The fee rate will also increase if, after the first Benefit Year anniversary, cumulative Purchase Payments added to the Contract equal or exceed $100,000. You may not opt out of this fee rate increase.

The fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. However, a portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death), surrender of the Contract, or the election of an Annuity Payout option, including i4LIFE® Advantage. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, no further fee will be deducted.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Contractowners who transition from a Prior Rider. If you have elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) (a “Prior Rider”), you may carry over certain features of that Prior Rider to transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. If you make this transition, your current charge rate of the Prior Rider will be the initial charge rate for your i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit rider.

This section applies to all of the transitions listed in the following chart. The charges and calculations described earlier in the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge section will not apply. 

If your Prior Rider is...	you will transition to...
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0	i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4)
4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)	i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)

 

The initial charge is a percentage of the greater of the Protected Income Base carried over from the Prior Rider or the Account Value. The charge for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit is deducted quarterly, starting with the first three-month anniversary of the effective date of i4LIFE® Advantage and every three months thereafter. The total base contract expense charge for the Death Benefit you have elected on your base contract also applies. Contractowners are guaranteed that in the future the guaranteed maximum charge rate for i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be the guaranteed maximum charge rate that was in effect at the time they purchased the Prior Rider.

C-4

The charge will not change unless there is an automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Income Benefit (described in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus). At such time, the dollar amount of the charge will increase by a two part formula: 1) the charge will increase by the same percentage that the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment increased and 2) the charge will also increase by the percentage of any increase to the Prior Rider current charge rate. (The Prior Rider charge rate continues to be used as a factor in determining the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge.) This means that the charge may change annually. The charge may also be reduced if a withdrawal above the Regular Income Payment is taken. The dollar amount of the rider charge will be reduced in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the Account Value. The annual dollar amount is divided by four (4) to determine the quarterly charge.

See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit for Contractowners who Transition from a Prior Rider in the prospectus for an example of how the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit charge for purchasers of a Prior Rider could be calculated.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Fee. There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect. The current annual fee rate for both single and joint life options are listed in the following table. 

	Current Fee
Beginning January 11, 2021	1.25%
January 20, 2009 through January 10, 2021	0.90%
Prior to January 20, 2009	0.75%

The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of (a) the last Account Value Step-up of the Protected Income Base or (b) the Benefit Year anniversary following any deposit where cumulative Purchase Payments received after the first Benefit Year anniversary equal or exceed $100,000. If the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus was purchased, an additional 0.15% is added to your rider fee. See Appendix C – Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage – Protected Income Base for a description of the calculation of the Protected Income Base.

The fee is based on the Protected Income Base as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, 5% Enhancements, and the 200% step-up and decreased for withdrawals. The 200% step-up is not available for riders purchased on and after October 5, 2009. We will deduct the cost of this rider from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the effective date of the rider. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount of the Contract on the Valuation Date the protected lifetime income fee is assessed. For riders purchased on and after March 2, 2009, the charge is also deducted in proportion to the value in the fixed account used for dollar cost averaging purposes. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Protected Income Base increases or decreases, because the fee is based on the Protected Income Base. Refer to Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage – Protected Income Base for a discussion and example of the impact of the changes to the Protected Income Base.

Since the Account Value Step-up could increase your Protected Income Base every Benefit Year (if all conditions are met), the fee rate could also increase every Benefit Year, but the rate will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate of 1.50%. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up by giving us notice within 30 days after the Benefit Year anniversary if you do not want your rate to change. If you opt out of the step-up, the fee rate and the Protected Income Base will return to the value they were immediately prior to the step-up, adjusted for additional Purchase Payments or Excess Withdrawals, if any. This opt-out will only apply for this particular Account Value Step-up and is not available if additional Purchase Payments would cause your fee to increase. You will need to notify us each time the fee rate increases if you want to opt out of subsequent Account Value Step-ups.

An increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the 5% Enhancement or 200% step-up will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee.

Once cumulative additional Purchase Payments into your annuity contract after the first Benefit Year equal or exceed $100,000, any additional Purchase Payment will cause the fee rate for your rider to change to the current fee rate in effect on the next Benefit Year anniversary, but the fee rate will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual fee rate. The new fee rate will become effective on the Benefit Year anniversary. You cannot opt out of this fee rate increase.

The protected lifetime income fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. A portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death) or surrender of the Contract.

If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero while the Contractowner is receiving a lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal, no protected lifetime income fee will be deducted.

If you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus Option, an additional 0.15% of the Guaranteed Amount will be added to the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage charge. This total charge rate (which may change as discussed above) is in effect until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. If you exercise your Plus Option, this entire rider and its charge will terminate. If you do not exercise

C-5

the Plus Option, after the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, the 0.15% charge for the Plus Option will be removed and the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider and charge will continue. If you make a withdrawal prior to the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, you will not be able to exercise the Plus Option, but the additional 0.15% charge will remain on your Contract until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary.

Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Purchasers. For purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage who terminate their rider and purchase i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Guaranteed Income Benefit which is purchased with i4LIFE® Advantage is subject to a current annual charge of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage that was in effect immediately prior to your transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This fee is added to your base contract expense and the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate to comprise the total Mortality and Expense charge, which is based on the Account Value (See Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Fee).

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage are guaranteed that in the future the guaranteed maximum charge for the i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will be the guaranteed maximum charge then in effect at the time that they purchase the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage. The Guaranteed Income Benefit percentage charge will not change unless you elect an additional step-up period during which the Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped-up to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment (described later). At the time you elect a new step-up period, the percentage charge will change to the current charge in effect at that time (if the current charge has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum annual charge of 1.50% of the Account Value. If we automatically administer the step-up period election for you and your percentage charge is increased, you may ask us to reverse the step-up period election by giving us notice within 30 days after the date on which the step-up period election occurred. If we receive this notice we will decrease the percentage charge on a going forward basis, to the percentage charge in effect before the step-up period election occurred. You will have no more step-ups unless you notify us that you wish to start a new step-up period (described in the i4LIFE® Advantage section of this prospectus).

After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage Charge. There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect. The current annual fee rate is listed in the following tables.

1.

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage 5 Year Elective Step-up option – The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the next election of a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount. 

	Current Fee
Beginning January 11, 2021	0.95%
December 3, 2012 through January 10, 2021	0.85%
January 20, 2009 through December 2, 2012	0.65%
Prior to January 20, 2009	0.45%

2.

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up (including the prior versions of Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up, single life only) – The fee for your rider is based on the last date of the automatic or elected step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. 

	Current Fee
	Single Life	Joint Life
Beginning January 11, 2021	1.00%	1.25%
December 3, 2012 through January 10, 2021	0.85%	1.00%
Prior to December 3, 2012	0.65%	0.80%

The charge is based on the Guaranteed Amount (initial Purchase Payment or Contract Value at the time of election) as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and step-ups and decreased for withdrawals. We will deduct the cost of this rider from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the effective date of the rider. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount of the Contract on the Valuation Date the rider charge is assessed. In Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option and the prior version of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up (without the single or joint life option), the charge may be deducted in proportion to the value in the fixed account as well. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the Guaranteed Amount increases or decreases, because the charge is based on the Guaranteed Amount. Because Bonus Credits increase the Guaranteed Amount, Bonus Credits also increase the amount we deduct for the cost of the rider. Refer to Appendix C – Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage, Guaranteed Amount section for a discussion and example of the impact of changes to the Guaranteed Amount.

C-6

Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the annual rider charge rate will not change upon each automatic step-up of the Guaranteed Amount for the 10-year period.

If you elect to step-up the Guaranteed Amount for another step-up period (including if we administer the step-up election for you or if you make a change from a joint life to a single life option after a death or divorce), a portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days prior to the step-up, will be deducted on the Valuation Date of the step-up based on the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the step-up. This deduction covers the cost of the rider from the time of the previous deduction to the date of the step-up. After a Contractowner's step-up, we will deduct the rider charge for the stepped-up Guaranteed Amount on a quarterly basis, beginning on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the step-up. At the time of the elected step-up, the rider charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed), but it will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 0.95% of the Guaranteed Amount for the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option or 1.50% of the Guaranteed Amount for the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option. If you never elect to step-up your Guaranteed Amount, your rider charge rate will never change, although the amount we deduct will change as the Guaranteed Amount changes. The rider charge will be discontinued upon the earlier of the Annuity Commencement Date, election of i4LIFE® Advantage or termination of the rider. A portion of the rider charge, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except upon death) or surrender of the Contract.

Rider Charge Waiver. For the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option, after the later of the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the rider or the fifth anniversary of the most recent step-up of the Guaranteed Amount, the rider charge may be waived. For the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, no rider charge waiver is available with the single life and joint life options. The earlier version of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option has a waiver charge provision which may occur after the fifth Benefit Year anniversary following the last automatic step-up opportunity.

Whenever the above conditions are met, on each Valuation Date the rider charge is to be deducted, if the total withdrawals from the Contract have been less than or equal to 10% of the sum of: (1) the Guaranteed Amount on the effective date of this rider or on the most recent step-up date; and (2) Purchase Payments (and Bonus Credits) made after the step-up, then the quarterly rider charge will be waived. If the withdrawals have been more than 10%, then the rider charge will not be waived.

Lincoln Wealth PassSM Fee. If you have elected Lincoln Wealth PassSM, you will pay a fee for the rider as long as the rider is in effect. The fee rate is based on the age of the covered life on the rider effective date, multiplied by the protected lifetime income fee base, which is equal to the initial Protected Amount, as increased for subsequent Purchase Payments and decreased for Excess Withdrawals.

The protected lifetime income fee rates for new rider elections are disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the current rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time in our sole discretion and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet. Rate information for previous effective periods is included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

Any change to the protected lifetime income fee rate will be disclosed in a new rate sheet at least ten days before that rate becomes effective. Current Rate Sheets will be included with this prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500.

The protected lifetime income fee will be deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis, with the first deduction occurring on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the rider’s effective date. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and the fixed account, if any, on the Valuation Date the fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase or decrease as the protected lifetime income fee base increases or decreases.

After five years from the rider effective date, the protected lifetime income fee rate may increase annually on the Benefit Year anniversary at Lincoln’s sole discretion, up to the stated guaranteed maximum fee rate.

The protected lifetime income fee will be discontinued upon termination of the rider. However, a portion of the fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the rider (except for death), surrender of the Contract, or the election of an Annuity Payout option, including i4LIFE® Advantage. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, no further fee will be deducted.

4LATER® Advantage Fee. There is a fee associated with this rider as long as the rider is in effect. The current annual fee rate is listed in the following table. 

	Current Fee
Beginning January 11, 2021	0.90%
January 20, 2009 through January 10, 2021	0.65%
Prior to January 20, 2009	0.50%

C-7

The fee for your rider is based on the latest date of the last automatic or elected reset of the Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base (an amount equal to the initial Purchase Payment and any applicable Bonus Credit if purchased at contract issue, or Contract Value at the time of election if elected after the contract effective date), as adjusted, is a value that will be used to calculate the 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. The Protected Income Base is increased for subsequent Purchase Payments, automatic 15% enhancements and resets, and decreased for withdrawals. An amount equal to the quarterly 4LATER® Advantage protected lifetime income fee rate multiplied by the Protected Income Base will be deducted from the Subaccounts on every three-month anniversary of the later of the 4LATER® Advantage rider effective date or the most recent reset of the Protected Income Base. This deduction will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount on the Valuation Date the 4LATER® Advantage protected lifetime income fee is assessed. The amount we deduct will increase as the Protected Income Base increases, because the fee is based on the Protected Income Base. As described in more detail below, the only time the Protected Income Base will change is when there are additional Purchase Payments, withdrawals, automatic enhancements at the end of the 3-year waiting periods or in the event of a reset to the current Account Value.

Upon a reset of the Protected Income Base, a portion of the protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days prior to the reset, will be deducted on the Valuation Date of the reset based on the Protected Income Base immediately prior to the reset. This deduction covers the cost of the 4LATER® Advantage rider from the time of the previous deduction to the date of the reset. After the reset, we will deduct the 4LATER® Advantage protected lifetime income fee for the reset Protected Income Base on a quarterly basis, beginning on the Valuation Date on or next following the three-month anniversary of the reset. At the time of the reset, the annual fee rate will be the current fee rate in effect at the time of reset. At the time of each reset (whether you elect the reset or we administer the reset for you), the annual fee rate will change to the current fee rate in effect at the time of the reset, not to exceed the guaranteed maximum charge rate of 1.50% of the Protected Income Base. At the time of reset, a new Waiting Period will begin. Subsequent resets may be elected at the end of each new Waiting Period. The reset will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the reset is approved by us. If you never elect to reset your Protected Income Base, your 4LATER® Advantage protected lifetime income fee rate will never change, although the amount we deduct will change as your Protected Income Base changes.

Prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date, a portion of the 4LATER® Advantage protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be deducted upon termination of the 4LATER® Advantage rider for any reason other than death. On the Periodic Income Commencement Date, a portion of the 4LATER® Advantage protected lifetime income fee, based on the number of days the rider was in effect that quarter, will be made to cover the cost of 4LATER® Advantage since the previous deduction.

i4LIFE® Advantage with 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit Charge for Contractowners who previously purchased 4LATER® Advantage. The 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit which is purchased with i4LIFE® Advantage is subject to an annual charge rate of 4LATER® Advantage that was in effect immediately prior to your transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This fee is added to your base contract expense and the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate to comprise the total mortality and expense risk charge, which is based on Account Value (See 4LATER® Advantage Fee).

On and after the Periodic Income Commencement Date, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit charge will be added to the i4LIFE® Advantage charge rate as a daily percentage of average Account Value. This is a change to the calculation of the 4LATER® charge because after the Periodic Income Commencement Date, when the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is established, the Income Base is no longer applicable. The 4LATER® charge rate is the same immediately before and after the Periodic Income Commencement Date; however, the charge is multiplied by the Income Base (on a quarterly basis) prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date and then multiplied by the average daily Account Value after the Periodic Income Commencement Date.

After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will not change unless the Contractowner elects additional 15-year step-up periods during which the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is stepped-up to 75% of the current Regular Income Payment. At the time you elect a new 15-year step-up period, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit charge rate will change to the current charge rate in effect at that time (if the current charge rate has changed) up to the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 1.50% of Account Value.

After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, if the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is terminated, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit annual charge will also terminate but the i4LIFE® Advantage charge will continue.

Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage (LTC Rider) Charge. While the LTC rider is in effect, there is a charge for the LTC Rider (“LTC Charge”) that is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The LTC Charge will consist of the sum of three charges:

•

the Acceleration Benefit Charge,

•

the Extension Benefit Charge, and

•

the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge (if elected).

The first deduction will occur on the business day on or next following the three-month contract anniversary and will be deducted every three months thereafter. This deduction will be made proportionately from the Contract Value in the Subaccounts, the fixed account for use with dollar-cost averaging and the LTC Fixed Account until the Contract Value is reduced to zero. Deductions from the Subaccounts and the fixed accounts will be made in proportion to the value in each Subaccount and fixed account. A proportional LTC

C-8

Charge will be deducted upon termination of the LTC Rider, upon commencement of Annuity Payouts and upon contract surrender. A proportional LTC Charge will not be deducted if the LTC Rider is terminated due to death.

Acceleration Benefit Charge

The Acceleration Benefit Charge has a guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 1.50% of the LTC Guaranteed Amount. The current annual charge rate is 0.50% of the LTC Guaranteed Amount under the Growth Benefit option and 0.35% of the LTC Guaranteed Amount under the Level Benefit option. The annual charge rate may change at any time and will never exceed the guaranteed maximum annual charge rate of 1.50% of the LTC Guaranteed Amount. We will give you a minimum of 30 days written notice of our intent to raise the current annual charge rate. Any increase to the annual charge rate will be applied on the next quarterly deduction following the effective date of the annual charge rate change. Any change to the annual charge rate will be the same for all Contractowners in the same class on a nondiscriminatory manner. The Acceleration Benefit Charge annual charge rate for the Growth Benefit option will not change to the annual charge rate for the Level Benefit after you terminate the automatic step-ups. 

The LTC Charge will be higher if you choose the Growth Benefit option because the Acceleration Benefit Charge annual percentage

rate is higher for the Growth Benefit option than it is for the Level Benefit option and the LTC Guaranteed Amount against which the

Acceleration Benefit Charge annual percentage rate is assessed may be higher due to automatic step-ups.

The Acceleration Benefit Charge is calculated by multiplying the LTC Guaranteed Amount as of the date on which the charge is deducted by ¼ of the Acceleration Benefit Charge annual charge rate. With the Level Benefit option, the Acceleration Benefit Charge will decrease as the LTC Guaranteed Amount is reduced by Acceleration Benefit payments or Excess Withdrawals. With the Growth Benefit option, the Acceleration Benefit Charge will increase or decrease as the LTC Guaranteed Amount increases by automatic step-ups or is reduced by Acceleration Benefit payments, Growth Benefit payments or Excess Withdrawals. The Acceleration Benefit Charge will be deducted until the LTC Guaranteed Amount is reduced to zero or there is no Contract Value remaining, whichever occurs first.

Extension Benefit Charge

The Extension Benefit Charge does not have a guaranteed maximum annual charge rate and may change at any time. The current Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rates range as set forth in the charts below. The initial Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate will be stated on the Specifications page of your LTC Rider. We will give you a minimum of 30 days written notice of our intent to raise the current Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate. Any increase to the current Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate will be applied on the next quarterly deduction following the effective date of the annual charge rate change. Any change to the current Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate will be subject to prior regulatory approval and will be the same for all Contractowners in the same class on a nondiscriminatory manner. If the current Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate is increased to an amount greater than a specified percentage of the initial current Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate, you may cancel the LTC Rider and receive the Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit. See Determining LTC Benefits – Nonforfeiture Benefit for more information.

 

Extension Benefit Charge: 50% Benefit for Assisted Living Services
States: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY
Age on Contract Date	Extension Benefit Charge
45-49	0.26%
50-54	0.30%
55-59	0.32%
60-64	0.38%
65-69	0.50%
70-74	0.68%

 

Extension Benefit Charge: 100% Benefit for Assisted Living Services
All other states
Age on Contract Date	Extension Benefit Charge
45-49	0.28%
50-54	0.32%
55-59	0.36%
60-64	0.40%
65-69	0.54%
70-74	0.76%

The Extension Benefit Charge is calculated by multiplying the Extension Benefit as of the date on which the charge is deducted multiplied by ¼ of the Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate as of the date on which the charge is deducted. On the contract date, the Extension Benefit will be double the Acceleration Benefit. The Extension Benefit Charge will increase as the Extension Benefit increases due to Purchase Payments made within the first 90 days. The Extension Benefit Charge will decrease as the Extension Benefit is reduced by Extension Benefit payments or Excess Withdrawals. The Extension Benefit Charge will be deducted until the Extension Benefit is reduced to zero or there is no Contract Value remaining, whichever occurs first. The Extension Benefit Charge annual charge rate is based upon your age as of the contract date.

Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge

The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge does not have a guaranteed maximum annual charge rate and may change at any time. The current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rates range as set forth in the charts below. The initial Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate will be stated on the specification pages of your LTC Rider. We will give you a minimum of 30

C-9

days written notice of our intent to raise the current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate. Any increase to the current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate will be applied on the next quarterly deduction following the effective date of the annual charge rate change. Any change to the current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate will be subject to prior regulatory approval and will be the same for all Contractowners in the same class on a nondiscriminatory manner. If the current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate is increased to an amount greater than a specified percentage of the initial current Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate, you may cancel the LTC Rider and receive the Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit. See Determining LTC Benefits – Nonforfeiture Benefit for more information.

 

Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge: 50% Benefit for Assisted Living Services
States: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY
Age on Contract Date	Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge
45-49	0.04%
50-54	0.05%
55-59	0.05%
60-64	0.06%
65-69	0.08%
70-74	0.11%

 

Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge: 100% Benefit for Assisted Living Services
Age on Contract Date	Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge
	Texas	California	All other states
45-49	0.06%	0.06%	0.05%
50-54	0.06%	0.06%	0.05%
55-59	0.07%	0.07%	0.06%
60-64	0.07%	0.07%	0.06%
65-69	0.10%	0.10%	0.09%
70-74	0.14%	0.13%	0.12%

The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge is calculated by multiplying the Extension Benefit as of the date on which the charge is deducted multiplied by ¼ of the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate as of the date on which the charge is deducted. On the contract date, the Extension Benefit will be double the Acceleration Benefit. The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge will increase as the Extension Benefit increases due to Purchase Payments made within the first 90 days after the contract date. The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge will decrease as the Extension Benefit is reduced by Extension Benefit payments or Excess Withdrawals. The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge will be deducted until the Extension Benefit is reduced to zero or there is no Contract Value remaining, whichever occurs first. The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge annual charge rate is based upon your age as of the contract date. 

Example: The following example illustrates the calculation of the LTC Benefit Charge for a 60 year old who lives in Georgia. The example assumes the Level Benefit option and the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit have been chosen.
Acceleration Benefit:		$100,000
LTC Guaranteed Amount:		$100,000
Extension Benefit:		$200,000
Acceleration Benefit Charge Annual Charge Rate:		0.35%
Extension Benefit Charge Annual Charge Rate:		0.38%
Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge Annual Charge Rate:		0.06%
LTC Charge (Annual)*:		$1,230
	* $350 Acceleration Benefit Charge (0.35% x $100,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount) + $760 Extension Benefit Charge (0.38% x $200,000 Extension Benefit) + $120 Optional Nonforfeiture Charge (0.06% x $200,000 Extension Benefit) = $1,230 annual LTC Charge

 

Example: The following example illustrates the calculation of the LTC Benefit Charge for a 60 year old who lives in Georgia. The example assumes the Growth Benefit option and the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit have been chosen.
Acceleration Benefit:	$100,000
LTC Guaranteed Amount:	$100,000
Extension Benefit:	$200,000
Growth Benefit:	$0
Acceleration Benefit Charge Annual Charge Rate:	0.50%
Extension Benefit Charge Annual Charge Rate:	0.38%
Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge Annual Charge Rate:	0.06%
LTC Charge (Annual)*:	$1,380

C-10

*$500 Acceleration Benefit Charge (0.50% x $100,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount) + $760 Extension Benefit

Charge (0.38% x $200,000 Extension Benefit) + $120 Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge (0.06% x

$200,000 Extension Benefit)= $1,380 annual LTC Charge

Discontinued Living Benefit Riders

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)

All terms that apply to Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) apply to Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 except as noted. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 is no longer available for purchase.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) is a Living Benefit Rider that provides:

•

Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals for you (and your spouse if the joint life option is selected) up to the Protected Annual Income amount which is based upon a Protected Income Base;

•

An Enhancement amount added to the Protected Income Base if certain criteria are met, as set forth below;

•

Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement; and

•

Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount (after reaching a higher age-band and after an Account Value Step-up).

Protected Annual Income payments are based upon specified percentages of the Protected Income Base which are age-based and may increase over time. You may receive Protected Annual Income payments for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse if the joint life option is chosen.

Please note any withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet, or that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount(s) are considered Excess Withdrawals. In most states, amounts that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are also considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base as well by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal, and will terminate the rider if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero. As a result, the Protected Income Amount would be reduced as well. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of an Enhancement.

The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The Protected Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Enhancements, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.

For rider elections on and after February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 for existing Contractowners), and subject to state availability, the Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Protected Income Base upon an Enhancement. The Enhancement Base is equal to the Protected Income Base on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by an Enhancement. Rider elections prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 for existing Contractowners), do not have an Enhancement Base, but will use the Protected Income Base to determine the Enhancement.

Neither the Protected Income Base nor the Enhancement Base is available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base) and Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit. For example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by $10,300. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credit) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income

C-11

amount but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating an Enhancement. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credit) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason including market loss. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed after the Nursing Home Enhancement is requested and approved by us (as described later in this prospectus).

Excess Withdrawals reduce the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base as discussed below. The reduction to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base for determining the Enhancement Amount.

Enhancement. You are eligible for an increase in the Protected Income Base through an Enhancement on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a. the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under age 86;

b. there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period (described below);

d. the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement amount is added would be greater than the Contract Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary; and

e. the Enhancement Base, if applicable, is greater than zero.

The Enhancement equals the Enhancement Base or the Protected Income Base (depending on the rider purchase date), minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, multiplied by the Enhancement Rate. The Protected Income Base or the Enhancement Base are not reduced by Purchase Payments received in the first 90 days after the rider effective date for determining the Enhancement Amount.

The current Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the rate may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Enhancement rate for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your rate will not change as a result.

The Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is set forth in a supplement to a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Enhancement rate and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with this rate. The rate may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rate on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Enhancement Rates for previous effective periods are included in Appendix F to this prospectus.

During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the annual rate may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. If you decline an Enhancement, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement starting on the next Benefit Year anniversary as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Note: The Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary if an Account Value Step-up to the Protected Income Base occurs, or where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value (including a Protected Annual Income payment) in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the Enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of a 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base and assumes that no withdrawals or Bonus Credits have been made.

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000; Enhancement Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000

C-12

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 of $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000; Enhancement Base = $125,000

This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider. It will not be eligible for an Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).

As explained below, an Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal to or greater than what the Enhancement provides, you will not receive the Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the Enhancement would not apply. The Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the 5% Enhancement is included in the Withdrawal Amount section below.

Enhancement Period. The original Enhancement Period is a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. A new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the Enhancements will stop at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs.

Account Value Step-ups. The Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will automatically step-up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner/Annuitant and spouse (joint life option) are under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement (if any).

Each time the Account Value Step-up occurs a new Enhancement Period starts. The Account Value Step-up is available even in years when a withdrawal has occurred.

The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. That means if the current fee rate has increased, this would cause an increase in your annual fee rate for this rider. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up. See Charges & Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for details. If you decline an Account Value Step-up, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement through the end of the Enhancement Period, including in the year you declined the Account Value Step-up, as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-up and the 5% Enhancement impact the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base
At issue	$50,000	$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$56,700

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). An Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

Withdrawal Amount. Protected Annual Income withdrawals are available at the youngest age on the Rate Sheet. The Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year. As long as the Protected Annual Income amount is not reduced to zero, these withdrawals may be taken for your lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option).

The initial Protected Annual Income amount is calculated when you purchase the rider. If you (or younger of you and your spouse if the joint life option is elected) are under the youngest age on the Rate Sheet at the time the rider is elected the initial Protected Annual

C-13

Income amount will be zero. If you (or the younger of you and your spouse if the joint life option is elected) are older than the youngest age on the Rate Sheet at the time the rider is elected the initial Protected Annual Income amount will be equal to a specified percentage of the Protected Income Base. Upon your first withdrawal the Protected Annual Income rate is based on your age (single life option) or the younger of you and your spouse’s age (joint life option) at the time of the withdrawal.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rates indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Rate information for previous effective periods is included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

After your first withdrawal the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase on a Benefit Year anniversary on or after you have reached an applicable higher age band and after there has also been an Account Value Step-up. If you have reached an applicable age band and there has not also been a subsequent Account Value Step-up, then the Protected Annual Income rate will not increase until the next Account Value Step-up occurs. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the remaining amount into the next Benefit Year.

If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, the remaining Protected Annual Income amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will automatically resume and continue for your life (and your spouse’s life if the joint life option is chosen) under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base in a lump sum. You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero as a result of an Excess Withdrawal. If either the Contract Value or Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal the rider will terminate.

Cumulative withdrawals during a Benefit Year that are equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount.

The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount affect the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Enhancement, a 4.00% Protected Annual Income rate and a Contract Value of $200,000: 

Contract Value on the rider’s effective date	$200,000
Bonus Credits	$6,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base on the rider's effective date	$206,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider's effective date ($206,000 x 4.00%)	$8,240
Contract Value six months after rider's effective date	$215,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base six months after rider's effective date	$206,000
Withdrawal six months after rider's effective date	$8,240
Contract Value after withdrawal ($215,000 - $8,240)	$206,760
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base after withdrawal ($206,000 - $0)	$206,000
Contract Value on first Benefit Year anniversary	$210,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base on first Benefit Year anniversary	$210,000
Protected Annual Income amount on first Benefit Year anniversary ($210,000 x 4.00%)	$8,400

Since there was a withdrawal during the first year, an Enhancement is not available, but the Account Value Step-up was available and increased the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base to the Contract Value of $210,000. On the first anniversary of the rider’s effective date, the Protected Annual Income amount is $8,400 (4.00% x $210,000).

Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment and any applicable Bonus Credits. For example, assuming a Contractowner has a Protected Annual

C-14

Income amount of $8,000 (4.00% of $200,000 Protected Income Base), an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 ($10,300 with the Bonus Credit) increases the Protected Annual Income amount that Benefit Year to $8,412 (= $8,000 + 4.00% of $10,300). The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract. Persistency Credits added to the Contract do not immediately increase the Protected Annual Income amount but are added to the Contract Value and may increase the Protected Income Base upon an Account Value Step-up which in return may increase the Protected Annual Income amount.

Enhancements and Account Value Step-ups will increase the Protected Income Base and thus the Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Annual Income amount after the Protected Income Base is adjusted either by an Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up will be equal to the adjusted Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate.

Nursing Home Enhancement. (The Nursing Home Enhancement is not available in certain states. Please check with your registered representative.) The Protected Annual Income rate will be increased to 10%, called the Nursing Home Enhancement, during a Benefit Year when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 70 or older, or the younger of the Contractowner and spouse is age 70 or older (joint life option), and one is admitted into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. For election of any version of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 prior to May 20, 2013, the Nursing Home Enhancement is available when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 65 or older, or the younger of the Contractowner and spouse is age 65 or older (joint life option), and one is admitted into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. (The Nursing Home Enhancement is not available until the next Benefit Year anniversary after age 70 (or 65 for rider elections prior to May 20, 2013) if a withdrawal has been taken since the rider effective date.) The Nursing Home Enhancement applies if the admittance into such facility occurs 60 months or more after the effective date of the rider, the individual was not in the nursing home in the year prior to the effective date of the rider, and upon entering the nursing home, the person has then been confined for at least 90 consecutive days. For the joint life option if both spouses qualify, the Nursing Home Enhancement is available for either spouse, but not both spouses. You should carefully consider the fact that the enhanced Protected Annual Income rate is only available for one measuring life before an election is made. For Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) elections on and after January 20, 2015, the Nursing Home Enhancement will not be available if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, including withdrawals, market performance, or protected lifetime income fees.

You may request the Nursing Home Enhancement by filling out a request form provided by us. Proof of nursing home confinement will be required each year. If you leave the nursing home, or for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) elections on and after January 20, 2015, if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, your Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced to the amount you would otherwise be eligible to receive. Any withdrawals made prior to the entrance into a nursing home and during the Benefit Year that the Nursing Home Enhancement commences, will reduce the amount available that year for the Nursing Home Enhancement. Purchase Payments may not be made into the Contract after a request for the Nursing Home Enhancement is approved by us and any Purchase Payments made either in the 12 months prior to entering the nursing home or while you are residing in a nursing home will not be included in the calculation of the Nursing Home Enhancement.

The requirements of an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility are set forth in the Nursing Home Enhancement Claim Form. The criteria for the facility include, but are not limited to: providing 24 hour a day nursing services; an available physician; an employed nurse on duty or call at all times; maintains daily clinical records; and able to dispense medications. This does not include an assisted living or similar facility. The admittance to a nursing home must be pursuant to a plan of care provided by a licensed health care practitioner, and the nursing home must be located in the United States. The remaining references to the Protected Annual Income amount also include the Nursing Home Enhancement amount.

Owners of contracts issued in South Dakota who elect any version of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 on or after January 1, 2013, have the option to increase the Protected Annual Income rate upon the diagnosis of a terminal illness, subject to certain conditions. The Protected Annual Income amount will be increased to 10% during a Benefit Year when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 70 or older or the younger of the Contractowner and spouse is age 70 or older (joint life option), and one is diagnosed by a licensed physician that his or her life expectancy is twelve months or less. For election of any version of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 from January 1, 2013 to May 20, 2013, the terminal illness provision is available when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 65 or older, or the younger of the Contractowner and spouse is age 65 or older (joint life option), and one is diagnosed by a licensed physician that his or her life expectancy is twelve months or less. (The terminal illness provision is not available until the next Benefit Year anniversary after age 70 (or 65 for rider elections prior to May 20, 2013) if a withdrawal has been taken since the rider effective date.) This provision applies if the diagnosis of terminal illness occurs 60 months or more after the effective date of the rider and the diagnosis was not made in the year prior to the effective date of the rider. For the joint life option if both spouses qualify, this provision for terminal illness is available for either spouse, but not both spouses. You should carefully consider the fact that the enhanced Protected Annual Income rate is only available for one measuring life before an election is made. For Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) elections on and after January 20, 2015, the terminal illness provision will not be available if your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason, including withdrawals, market performance, or protected lifetime income fees.

Once either the Nursing Home Enhancement or the terminal illness enhancement is elected for one spouse, neither enhancement will be available for the other spouse. You may request the terminal illness enhancement by filling out a request form provided by us. For Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) elections on and after January 20, 2015, if your Contract Value is reduced

C-15

to zero for any reason, your Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced to the amount you would otherwise be eligible to receive. Any withdrawals made prior to the diagnosis of a terminal illness and during the Benefit Year that the terminal illness enhancement commences will reduce the amount available that year for the terminal illness enhancement. Purchase Payments may not be made into the Contract after a request for the terminal illness enhancement is approved by us and any Purchase Payments made either in the 12 months prior to the terminal illness diagnosis or during the duration of the terminal illness will not be included in the calculation of the terminal illness enhancement. Any requirements to qualify for the terminal illness enhancement are set forth in the Terminal Illness Claim Form. The remaining references to the Protected Annual Income amount also include the terminal illness enhancement amount for owners of contracts issued in South Dakota only.

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:

1.

the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal;

2.

withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet; or

3.

withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.

When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:

1.

The Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and

2.

The Protected Annual Income amount will be recalculated to equal the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal).

Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year, if applicable, in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your registered representative or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have questions about Excess Withdrawals.

The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base, the Protected Annual Income amount and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5.00% Protected Annual Income rate and a $10,940 withdrawal, which causes a $10,200 reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)

After a $10,940 Withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $6,690 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value is reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250 and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are not reduced:

Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000

The Contract Value is also reduced by the $6,690 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by 12%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $55,750 Contract Value ($6,690 ÷ $55,750)

Contract Value = $49,060 ($55,750 - $6,690)
Protected Income Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Enhancement Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% of $74,800 Protected Income Base)

On the following Benefit Year anniversary, the Contract Value has been reduced due to a declining market, but the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are unchanged:

Contract Value = $48,000
Protected Income Base = $74,800
Enhancement Base = $74,800
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% x $74,800)

C-16

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal the rider will terminate.

Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount. Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waivers of surrender charge provisions set forth in this prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $12,000 withdrawal: the $3,825 Protected Annual Income amount is not subject to surrender charges; the $8,175 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges according to the surrender charge schedule in this prospectus. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge. Withdrawals attributed to Bonus Credits are not subject to surrender charges.

Withdrawals from IRA contracts will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMDs to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

2.

The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than the RMD are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph);

4. This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and

5. The younger of you or your spouse (joint life option) reach the youngest age on the Rate Sheet.

If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to the RMD, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

Protected Annual Income Payout Option. The Protected Annual Income Payout Option (“PAIPO”) is an Annuity Payout option under which the Contractowner (and joint life if applicable) will receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life. This option is different from other Annuity Payout options, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value. If you are required to take annuity payments because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, you have the option of electing the PAIPO. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero and you have a remaining Protected Income Base, you will receive the PAIPO.

Contractowners may decide to choose the PAIPO over i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit if they feel this may provide a higher final payment over time and they place more importance on this payment over access to the Account Value. Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for your life or the lives of you and your spouse for the joint life option.

If you are receiving the PAIPO, the Beneficiary may be eligible to receive final payment upon death of the single life or surviving joint life. If the Account Value Death Benefit option was in effect immediately prior to electing the PAIPO, the Beneficiary will not be eligible to receive the final payment. The final payment is a one-time lump-sum payment. If the effective date of the rider is the same as the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals. If the effective date of the rider is after the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased for Purchase Payments received after the rider effective date and decreased by withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals reduce the final payment in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the PAIPO will reduce the final payment dollar for dollar.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts - Death Benefit.

Upon the death of the single life, this rider will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death).

C-17

Upon the first death under the joint life option, withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount continue to be available for the life of the surviving spouse. The Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will continue if applicable as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death).

As an alternative, after the first death, the surviving spouse, if under age 86, may choose to terminate the joint life option and purchase a new single life option under the terms and charge in effect at the time for a new purchase (depending on rider availability). In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider whether the change will cause the Protected Income Base and the Protected Annual Income amount to decrease.

Termination. After the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Owners of contracts issued in Florida who elect their rider on or after January 20, 2015 and prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if elected after the contract effective date), may terminate the rider after the first anniversary of the effective date of the rider. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option will continue if applicable);

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

upon election of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage for Contractowners who elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) prior to January 1, 2017;

•

upon the death under the single life option or the death of the surviving Secondary Life under the joint life option;

•

when the Protected Income Base or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal;

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed due to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree; or

•

upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time. If you elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Management Risk) prior to January 1, 2017, we will no longer require a one-year waiting period before electing Lincoln Market Select® Advantage.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit option. Contractowners who elect either version of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may decide to later transition to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This transition must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage

The Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider provides minimum, guaranteed, periodic withdrawals for your life as Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option) or for the lives of you as Contractowner/Annuitant and your spouse as joint owner or primary Beneficiary (joint life option) regardless of the investment performance of the Contract, provided that certain conditions are met. The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral. A minimum Protected Income Base is used to calculate the periodic withdrawals from your Contract, but is not available as a separate benefit upon death or surrender. The Protected Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit applicable to that Purchase Payment (or Contract Value if elected after contract issue) increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Account Value Step-ups, 5% Enhancements and the step-up to 200% of the initial Protected Income Base (if applicable to your Contract) and decreased by withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. No additional Purchase Payments are allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason.

This rider provides annual withdrawals of 5% of the initial Protected Income Base called Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts. With the single life option, you may receive Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for your lifetime. If you purchased the joint life option, Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for the lifetimes of you and your spouse are available. Withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount and any withdrawals prior to age 59 (for the single life option) or age 65 (for the joint life option) may significantly reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of the 5% Enhancement, the 200% step-up (if applicable to your Contract) and Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus. These options are discussed below in detail.

C-18

An additional option, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus, provides that on the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, provided you have not made any withdrawals, you may choose to cancel your Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage rider and receive an increase in your Contract Value of an amount equal to the excess of your initial Protected Income Base (and Purchase Payments plus applicable Bonus Credits made within 90 days of rider election) over your Contract Value. This option guarantees at least a return of your initial Purchase Payment after 7 years. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus must have been purchased with Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus is discussed in detail below.

If you purchased this rider, you are limited in how you can invest in the Subaccounts in your Contract. In addition, the fixed account is not available except for use with dollar cost averaging. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements – Option 3 if you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage on or after January 20, 2009. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements – Option 2 if you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage prior to January 20, 2009.

We have designed the rider to protect you from outliving your Contract Value. If the rider terminates or you (and your spouse, if applicable) die before your Contract Value is reduced to zero, neither you nor your estate will receive any lifetime withdrawals from us under the rider. We limit your withdrawals to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount and impose Investment Requirements in order to minimize the risk that your Contract Value will be reduced to zero before your (or your spouse’s) death.

If the rider was elected at contract issue, then the rider was effective on the Contract’s effective date. If the rider was elected after the Contract was issued the rider became effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us. You cannot simultaneously elect Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage with any other Living Benefit Rider.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculation scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under this rider. The Protected Income Base is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elected the rider at the time you purchased the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base equals your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elected the rider after we issued the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base equals the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million. This maximum takes into consideration the total Protected Income Bases under the Living Benefit Riders from all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (or spouse if joint life option) are the covered life.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits automatically increase the Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base by $10,300. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason including market loss.

The following example demonstrates the impact of additional Purchase Payments on the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage charge: 

Initial Purchase Payment	$100,000
Additional Purchase Payment in Year 2	$95,000	No change to charge
Additional Purchase Payment in Year 3	$50,000	Charge will be the then current charge
Additional Purchase Payment in Year 4	$25,000	Charge will be the then current charge

Each withdrawal reduces the Protected Income Base as discussed below.

5% Enhancement to the Protected Income Base. On each Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base, minus Purchase Payments and any applicable Bonus Credits received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5% if the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under 86 and the rider is within the 10 year period described below. Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before the 5% Enhancement will be made on the portion of the Protected Income Base equal to that Purchase Payment and Bonus Credit. Any Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Protected Income Base for purposes of receiving the 5% Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

Note: The 5% Enhancement is not available in any Benefit Year there is a withdrawal from Contract Value including a Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A 5% Enhancement will occur in subsequent years after a withdrawal only under certain conditions. If you are eligible (as defined below) for the 5% Enhancement in the next year, the enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of the 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base for a Design 1 contract:

C-19

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000

Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000

Additional Purchase Payment on day 95 = $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base is $130,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05 + $10,000). The $10,000 Purchase Payment on day 95 is not eligible for the 5% Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary.

The 5% Enhancement will be in effect for 10 years from the effective date of the rider. The 5% Enhancement will cease upon the death of the Contractowner/Annuitant or upon the death of the survivor of the Contractowner or spouse (if joint life option is in effect) or when the oldest of these individuals reaches age 86. A new 10-year period will begin each time an Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value occurs as described below. As explained below, the 5% Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides a greater increase to the Protected Income Base, you will not receive the 5% Enhancement. The 5% Enhancement cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million. For riders purchased prior to January 20, 2009, the 5% Enhancement will be in effect for 15 years from the effective date of the rider, and a new 15-year period will begin following each Account Value Step-up.

Any withdrawal from the Contract Value limits the 5% Enhancement as follows:

a.

The 5% Enhancement will not occur on any Benefit Year anniversary in which there is a withdrawal, including a Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, from the Contract during that Benefit Year. The 5% Enhancement will occur on the following Benefit Year anniversary if no other withdrawals are made from the Contract and the rider is within the 10-year period as long as the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option) is 59 or older or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life option) are age 65 or older.

b.

If the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option) is under age 59 or the Contractowner or spouse (joint life option) is under age 65, and a withdrawal is made from the Contract, the 5% Enhancement will not occur again until an Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value (as described below) occurs.

An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the 5% Enhancement is included in the Withdrawals section below.

If your Protected Income Base is increased by the 5% Enhancement on the Benefit Year anniversary, your charge rate for the rider will not change. However, the amount you pay for the rider will increase since the charge for the rider is based on the Protected Income Base.

Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base will automatically step-up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life option) are both still living and under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is greater than the Protected Income Base after the 5% Enhancement (if any) or 200% step-up (if any, as described below).

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-ups and the 5% Enhancement will work (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits and issue age above 59 (single life) or 65 (joint life)): 

	Contract Value	Guaranteed Amount	Potential for Charge to Change	Length of 5% Enhancement Period
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000	$50,000	$50,000	No	10
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000	Yes	10
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$56,700	No	9
3rd Benefit Year anniversary	$57,000	$59,535	No	8
4th Benefit Year anniversary	$64,000	$64,000	Yes	10

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). On the third Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $56,700 = $2,835). On the fourth Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value was greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,977 (5% of $59,535) and a new 10-year Enhancement Period began.

An Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

C-20

Step-up to 200% of the initial Protected Income Base. If you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage on or after October 5, 2009, the 200% step-up will not be available. For Contractowners who purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage on or after January 20, 2009 but before October 5, 2009, on the Benefit Year anniversary after you (single life) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life) reach age 65, or the rider has been in effect for 10 years, whichever event is later, we will step-up your Protected Income Base to 200% of your initial Protected Income Base (plus any Purchase Payments including Bonus Credits made within 90 days of rider election), less any withdrawals, if this would increase your Protected Income Base to an amount higher than that provided by the 5% Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up for that year, if applicable. (You will not also receive the 5% Enhancement or Account Value Step-up if the 200% step-up applies.) This step-up will not occur if:

1.

any withdrawal was made prior to age 59 (single life) or age 65 (joint life);

2.

an Excess Withdrawal (defined below) has occurred; or

3.

cumulative withdrawals totaling more than 10% of the initial Protected Income Base (plus Purchase Payments and applicable Bonus Credits within 90 days of rider election) have been made (even if these withdrawals were within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount).

For example, assume the initial Protected Income Base is $200,000. A $10,000 Maximum Annual Withdrawal was made at age 65 and at age 66. If one more $10,000 Maximum Annual Withdrawal was made at age 67, the step-up would not be available since withdrawals cannot exceed $20,000 (10% of $200,000).

If you purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage prior to January 20, 2009, you will not be eligible to receive the 200% step-up of the Protected Income Base until the Benefit Year anniversary after you (single life) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life) reach age 70, or the rider has been in effect for 10 years, whichever event is later.

This Step-up is only available one time and it will not occur if, on the applicable Benefit Year anniversary, your Protected Income Base exceeds 200% of your initial Protected Income Base (plus Purchase Payments within 90 days of rider election). Required minimum distributions (RMDs) from qualified contracts may adversely impact this benefit because you may have to withdraw more than 10% of your initial Protected Income Base. See the terms governing RMDs in the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount section below.

The following example demonstrates the impact of this step-up on the Protected Income Base:

Initial Purchase Payment at age 55 = $200,000; Protected Income Base = $200,000; Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount = $10,000.

After 10 years, at age 65, the Protected Income Base is $272,339 (after applicable 5% Enhancements and two $10,000 Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amounts) and the Contract Value is $250,000. Since the Protected Income Base is less than $360,000 ($200,000 initial Protected Income Base reduced by the two $10,000 withdrawals x 200%), the Protected Income Base is increased to $360,000.

The 200% step-up (if applicable to your Contract) cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

Protected Annual Income Amount. You may make periodic withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount each Benefit Year for your (Contractowner) lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option) as long as you are at least age 59 (single life option) or you and your spouse are both at least age 65 (joint life option) and your Protected Annual Income amount is greater than zero.

On the effective date of the rider, the Protected Annual Income amount is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Income Base. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the extra amount into the next Benefit Year.

If your Contract Value is reduced to zero because of market performance, withdrawals equal to the remaining Protected Annual Income amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will resume and continue automatically for your life (and your spouse if applicable under joint life option) under the Protected Annual Income Payment Option (discussed later). You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base in a lump sum.

Note: if any withdrawal is made, the 5% Enhancement is not available during that Benefit Year and Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus is not available (see below). Withdrawals may also negatively impact the 200% step-up (see above).

The tax consequences of withdrawals are discussed in Federal Tax Matters section of this prospectus.

All withdrawals you make, whether or not within the Protected Annual Income amount, will decrease your Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount.

The Protected Annual Income amount will be doubled, called the Nursing Home Enhancement, during a Benefit Year when the Contractowner/Annuitant is age 59 or older or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life option), are both age 65 or older, and one is admitted into an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility. The Nursing Home Enhancement applies if the admittance into such facility occurs 60 months or more after the effective date of the rider (36 months or more for Contractowners who purchased this rider prior to January 20, 2009), the individual was not in the nursing home in the year prior to the effective date of the

C-21

rider, and upon entering the nursing home, the person has been then confined for at least 90 consecutive days. Proof of nursing home confinement will be required each year. If you leave the nursing home, your Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced by 50% starting after the next Benefit Year anniversary.

The requirements of an accredited nursing home or equivalent health care facility are set forth in the Nursing Home Enhancement Claim Form. The criteria for the facility include, but are not limited to: providing 24 hour a day nursing services; an available physician; an employed nurse on duty or call at all times; maintains daily clinical records; and able to dispense medications. This does not include an assisted living or similar facility. For riders purchased on or after January 20, 2009, the admittance to a nursing home must be pursuant to a plan of care provided by a licensed health care practitioner, and the nursing home must be located in the United States.

The remaining references to the 5% Protected Annual Income amount also include the Nursing Home Enhancement Protected Annual Income amount.

The Protected Annual Income amount is increased by 5% of any additional Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits. For example, if the Protected Annual Income amount of $2,575 (5% of $51,500 Protected Income Base) is in effect and an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 is made which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit, the new Protected Annual Income amount is $3,090 ($2,575 + 5% of $10,300).

5% Enhancements, Account Value Step-ups and the 200% step-up (if applicable to your Contract) will cause a recalculation of the eligible Protected Annual Income amount to the greater of:

a.

the Protected Annual Income amount immediately prior to the 5% Enhancement, Account Value Step-up or 200% step-up; or

b.

5% of the Protected Income Base on the Benefit Year anniversary.

See the chart below for examples of the recalculation.

The Protected Annual Income amount from Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount from Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage under all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) applicable to you (or your spouse if joint life option) can never exceed 5% of the maximum Protected Income Base.

Withdrawals after age 59 (Single Life Option) or age 65 (Joint Life Option). If the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) after age 59 (single life) or age 65 (joint life) are within the Protected Annual Income amount, then:

1.

the withdrawal will reduce the Protected Income Base by the amount of the withdrawal on a dollar-for-dollar basis, and

2.

the Protected Annual Income amount will remain the same.

The impact of withdrawals prior to age 59 or age 65 will be discussed later in this section. The following example illustrates the impact of Protected Annual Incomes on the Protected Income Base and the recalculation of the Protected Annual Income amount (assuming no additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits and the Contractowner (single life) is older than 59 and the Contractowner and spouse (joint life) are both older than 65): 

	Contract Value	Guaranteed Amount	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000	$50,000	$50,000	$2,500
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000	$2,700
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$51,000	$51,300	$2,700
3rd Benefit Year anniversary	$57,000	$57,000	$2,850
4th Benefit Year anniversary	$64,000	$64,000	$3,200

The initial Protected Annual Income amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Income Base. Since withdrawals occurred each year (even withdrawals within the Protected Annual Income amount), the 5% Enhancement of the Protected Income Base was not available. However, each year the Account Value Step-up occurred (first, third and fourth Benefit Year anniversaries), the Protected Annual Income amount was recalculated to 5% of the current Protected Income Base.

Withdrawals within the Protected Annual Income amount are not subject to surrender charges. Withdrawals from Individual Retirement Annuity contracts will be treated as within the Protected Annual Income amount (even if they exceed the 5% Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken in systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the RMD rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMDs to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

2.

The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than RMDs are made within that Benefit Year (except as described in next paragraph);

C-22

4.

This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and

5.

You are over age 59 (age 65 of the youngest life for joint life option).

If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributed to RMDs, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals (see below).

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount. When Excess Withdrawals occur:

1.

The Protected Income Base is reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.

2.

The Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to 5% of the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal); and

3.

The 200% step-up will never occur.

The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base and the Protected Annual Income amount. A $12,000 withdrawal caused a $15,182 reduction in the Protected Income Base.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $5,000 (5% of the initial Protected Income Base of $100,000)

After a $12,000 Withdrawal ($5,000 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $7,000 is the Excess Withdrawal):

The Contract Value and Protected Income Base are reduced dollar for dollar for the Protected Annual Income amount of $5,000:

Contract Value = $55,000
Protected Income Base = $80,000

The Contract Value is reduced by the $7,000 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base is reduced by 12.73%, the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $55,000 Contract Value ($7,000 / $55,000)

Contract Value = $48,000

Protected Income Base = $69,818 ($80,000 x 12.73% = $10,184; $80,000 - $10,182 = $69,818)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,491 (5% of $69,818)

In a declining market, withdrawals that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount may substantially deplete or eliminate your Protected Income Base and reduce or deplete your Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value.

The portion of Excess Withdrawals attributed to Purchase Payments (and not Bonus Credits) will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waiver of surrender charge provisions set forth in your prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $12,000 withdrawal: the $5,000 Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is not subject to surrender charges; the $7,000 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges. See Charges and Deductions – Surrender Charges. Withdrawals attributed to Bonus Credits are not subject to surrender charges.

Withdrawals before age 59/65. If any withdrawal is made prior to the time the Contractowner is age 59 (single life) or the Contractowner and spouse (joint life) are both age 65, including withdrawals equal to Protected Annual Income amounts, the following will occur:

1.

The Protected Income Base will be reduced in the same proportion that the entire withdrawal reduced the Contract Value (this means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than a dollar-for-dollar reduction);

2.

The Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to 5% of the new (reduced) Protected Income Base;

3.

The 5% Enhancement to the Protected Income Base is not available until after an Account Value Step-up to the Contract Value occurs. This Account Value Step-up will not occur until the Contract Value exceeds the Protected Income Base on a Benefit Year anniversary (see the 5% Enhancement section above); and

4.

The 200% step-up will never occur.

C-23

The following is an example of the impact of a withdrawal prior to age 59 for single or age 65 for joint:

•

$100,000 Purchase Payment

•

$100,000 Protected Income Base

•

A 10% market decline results in a Contract Value of $90,000

•

$5,000 Protected Annual Income amount

If a $5,000 withdrawal is made before age 59, the Protected Income Base will be $94,444 ($100,000 reduced by 5.56% ($5,000/$90,000)) and the new Protected Annual Income amount is $4,722 (5% x $94,444). Surrender charges will apply unless one of the waiver of surrender charge provisions is applicable. See Charges and Other Deductions - Surrender Charge.

In a declining market, withdrawals prior to age 59 (or 65 if Joint Life) may substantially deplete or eliminate your Protected Income Base and reduce or deplete your Protected Annual Income amount.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus. If you have purchased Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus (“Plus Option”), on the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, you may elect to receive an increase in your Contract Value equal to the excess of your initial Protected Income Base (plus any Purchase Payments and applicable Bonus Credits made within 90 days of the rider effective date), over your current Contract Value. Making this election will terminate the Plus Option as well as Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and the total charge for this rider and you will have no further rights to Protected Annual Income amounts or any other benefits under this rider. You have 30 days after the seventh Benefit Year anniversary to make this election, but you will receive no more than the difference between the Contract Value and the initial Protected Income Base (plus any Purchase Payments within 90 days of the rider effective date) on the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. If you choose to surrender your Contract at this time, any applicable surrender charges will apply.

You may not elect to receive an increase in Contract Value if any withdrawal is made, including Protected Annual Income amounts or RMDs, prior to the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. If you make a withdrawal prior to the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, the charge for this Plus Option (in addition to the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage charge) will continue until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary. After the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, the 0.15% charge for the Plus Option will be removed from your Contract and the charge for your Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will continue.

If you do not elect to exercise the Plus Option, after the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, your Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage and its charge will continue and the Plus Option 0.15% charge will be removed from your Contract.

The following example illustrates the Plus Option elected on a Design 1 contract upon the seventh Benefit Year anniversary:

Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000; Initial Protected Income Base of $100,000.

On the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, if the current Contract Value is $90,000; the Contractowner may choose to have $10,000 placed in the Contract and the Plus Option (including the right to continue Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage) will terminate at that time.

If you purchased the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus option, you have limited investment options until the seventh Benefit Year anniversary as set forth in the Investment Requirements section of this prospectus. After the seventh Benefit Year anniversary, if your Contract continues, you may invest in other Subaccounts in your Contract, subject to the Investment Requirements applicable to your purchase date of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage.

Protected Annual Income Payout Option. If you are required to annuitize your Protected Annual Income amount because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, the Protected Annual Income Payout Option is available.

The Protected Annual Income Payout Option is a fixed annuitization in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annual annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life (this option is different from other annuity payment options discussed in your prospectus, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value). Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount (including the Nursing Home Enhancement if you qualify) for your life or the life of you and your spouse for the joint life option.

If the Contract Value is zero and you have a remaining Protected Annual Income amount, you will receive the Protected Annual Income Payment Option.

If you are receiving the Protected Annual Income Payout Option, your Beneficiary may be eligible for a final payment upon death of the single life or surviving joint life. To be eligible the Death Benefit option in effect immediately prior to the exercise of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount Annuity Payout Option must not be the Account Value Death Benefit.

The final payment is equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option will reduce the sum of the Purchase Payments dollar for dollar. If your Death Benefit option in effect immediately prior to the Protected Annual Income Payout Option provided for deduction for withdrawals on a dollar for dollar basis,

C-24

then any withdrawals that occurred prior to the election of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will reduce the sum of all Purchase Payments on a dollar for dollar basis.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage provides no increase in value to the Death Benefit over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described in the Death Benefit section of this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

Upon the death of the single life, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus will also terminate, if in effect. If the Beneficiary elects to continue the Contract after the death of the single life (through a separate provision of the Contract), the Beneficiary may purchase a new Living Benefit Rider if available under the terms and charge in effect at the time of the new purchase. There is no carryover of the Protected Income Base.

Upon the first death under the joint life option, the lifetime payout of the Protected Annual Income amount will continue for the life of the surviving spouse. The 5% Enhancement, 200% Step-up, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus and Account Value Step-up will continue if applicable as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus will also terminate, if in effect.

As an alternative, after the first death, the surviving spouse may choose to terminate the joint life option and purchase a new single life option, if available, under the terms and charge in effect at the time for a new purchase. The surviving spouse must be under age 65. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider: 1) if the change will cause the Protected Income Base and the Protected Annual Income amount to decrease and 2) if the single life rider option for new issues will provide an earlier age (59) to receive Protected Annual Income amounts.

Impact of Divorce on Joint Life Option. In the event of a divorce, the Contractowner may terminate the joint life option and purchase a single life option, if available, (if the Contractowner is under age 65) at the current rider charge and the terms in effect for new sales of the single life option.

After a divorce, the Contractowner may keep the joint life option to have the opportunity to receive lifetime payouts for the lives of the Contractowner and a new spouse. This is only available if no withdrawals were made from the Contract after the effective date of the rider up to and including the date the new spouse is added to the rider.

Termination. After the seventh anniversary of the effective date of the rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage will automatically terminate:

•

Upon exercise of the Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus option to receive an increase in the Contract Value equal to the excess of your initial Protected Income Base over the Contract Value;

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Payment Option will continue if applicable);

•

upon the death under the single life option or the death of the surviving Secondary Life under the joint life option;

•

when the Protected Annual Income amount is reduced to zero; or

•

upon termination of the underlying annuity contract.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate.

If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time. If you have elected to receive an increase in your Contract Value under Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage Plus (after the seventh Benefit Year), you may elect a new Living Benefit Rider at any time.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Contractowners who previously elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage may decide to later carry over their Protected Income Base to the applicable version of i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This decision must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 3) is available for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased on or after October 6, 2008 and prior to October 31, 2010. Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 2) is available for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage riders purchased prior to October 6, 2008. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage is a Living Benefit Rider that provides:

C-25

•

Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals for you (and your spouse if the joint life option is selected) up to the Protected Annual Income amount which is based upon a Protected Income Base;

•

An Enhancement amount added to the Protected Income Base if certain criteria are met, as set forth below;

•

Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement; and

•

Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount (after reaching a higher age-band and after an Account Value Step-up).

Protected Annual Income payments are based upon specified percentages of the Protected Income Base which are age-based and may increase over time. You may receive Protected Annual Income payments for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse, if the joint life option is chosen.

Please note any withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet, or that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals. In most states, amounts that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are also considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal, and will terminate the rider if the Protected Income Base if reduced to zero. As a result, the Protected Income Amount would be reduced as well. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of an Enhancement.

The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

If you elected Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) prior to January 1, 2017, and you want to terminate that rider to elect Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, we are currently waiving the five-year holding period that is required before terminating a rider. Additionally, we will no longer require a one-year waiting period before electing Lincoln Market Select® Advantage. Other than the termination of your current rider, and the waiver of the holding period, your Contract will not change in any way. Any applicable existing or future surrender charges will continue to apply, as described in your Contract and this prospectus. We are doing this as a customer service to you, and there is no financial incentive being provided to you, your registered representative, or to anyone else if you decide to terminate your existing Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) rider and elect Lincoln Market Select® Advantage. There is no guarantee that these waivers will be offered in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue them at any time.

In general, anytime you terminate a rider, you will no longer be entitled to any of the benefits that have accrued under that rider. If you decide to drop an existing rider, your current Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will terminate without value. In other words, you cannot transfer either your current Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base to the new rider. Your initial Protected Income Base under Lincoln Market Select® Advantage will be equal to the Contract Value on the new rider effective date. Your initial Enhancement Base will be equal to the Protected Income Base on the rider effective date.

You should carefully compare the features and benefits provided by your existing rider to the features and benefits provided by Lincoln Market Select® Advantage before making your decision. Different riders do not include all the same features and may not provide the same level of guarantee. You should also compare the fees and charges of each rider. If you have any question about terminating your existing rider to elect a new one, you should contact your registered representative or call us at 1-800-942-5500.

If you decide to elect Lincoln Market Select® Advantage, you will be required to adhere to the Investment Requirements for your new rider. See – Investment Requirements.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The Protected Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Enhancements, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.

For rider elections on and after February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 for existing Contractowners), and subject to state availability, the Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Protected Income Base upon an Enhancement. The Enhancement Base is equal to the Protected Income Base on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions

C-26

set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by an Enhancement. Rider elections prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 for existing Contractowners) do not have an Enhancement Base but will use the Protected Income Base to determine the Enhancement.

Neither the Protected Income Base nor the Enhancement Base is available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base) and Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit. For example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by $10,300. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credits) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income amount but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating an Enhancement. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credits) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.

Excess Withdrawals reduce the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base as discussed below. The reduction to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base.

Enhancement. You are eligible for an increase in the Protected Income Base through an Enhancement on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a. the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under age 86;

b. there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period (described below);

d. the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement amount is added would be greater than the Contract Value and the same Benefit Year anniversary; and

e. the Enhancement Base, if applicable, is greater than zero.

The Enhancement equals the Enhancement Base or the Protected Income Base (depending on the rider purchase date), minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, multiplied by the Enhancement Rate. The Protected Income Base or the Enhancement Base are not reduced by Purchase Payments received in the first 90 days after the rider effective date for determining the Enhancement Amount.

The current Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the rate may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Enhancement rate for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your rate will not change as a result.

The Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is set forth in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Enhancement rate and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with this rate. The rate may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rate on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Enhancement rates for previous effective periods are included in Appendix F to this prospectus.

During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the annual rate may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. If you decline an Enhancement, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement starting on the next Benefit Year anniversary as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

C-27

Note: The Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary if an Account Value Step-up to the Protected Income Base occurs, or where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value (including a Protected Annual Income payment) in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the Enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of the 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base and assumes that no withdrawals or Bonus Credits have been made:

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000; Enhancement Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 of $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000; Enhancement Base = $125,000

This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider. It will not be eligible for an Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).

As explained below, an Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal to or greater than what the Enhancement provides, you will not receive the Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the Enhancement would not apply. The Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the Enhancement is included in the Withdrawal Amount section below.

Enhancement Period. The original Enhancement Period is up to a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. For riders purchased on and after February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if elected after the contract effective date), and subject to state availability, a new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the Enhancements will stop at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs. Rider elections prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if elected after the contract effective date), and subject to state availability, only have one 10-year Enhancement Period.

Account Value Step-ups. The Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner/Annuitant and spouse (joint life option) are under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement (if any).

For riders elected on or after February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if elected after the contract effective date), and subject to state availability, each time the Account Value Step-up occurs, a new Enhancement Period begins. The Account Value Step-up is available even in those years when a withdrawal has occurred.

The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. That means if the current fee rate has increased, this would cause an increase in your annual fee rate for this rider. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up. See Charges & Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for details. If you decline an Account Value Step-up, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement through the end of the Enhancement Period, including in the year you declined the Account Value Step-up, as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-up and the 5% Enhancements impact the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

C-28

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base
At issue	$50,000	$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$56,700

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). The 5% Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

Withdrawal Amount. Protected Annual Income withdrawals are available at the youngest age on the Rate Sheet. The Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year. As long as the Protected Annual Income amount is not reduced to zero, these withdrawals may be taken for your lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option).

The Protected Annual Income amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Income Base by the applicable rate, based on your age and whether the single or joint life option has been elected. Under the joint life option, the age of the younger of you or your spouse will be used. The Protected Annual Income amount will change upon an Account Value Step-up, an Enhancement (if applicable), additional Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits, and Excess Withdrawals, as described below.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rates indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Rate information for previous effective periods is included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

After your first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase on a Benefit Year anniversary on or after you have reached an applicable higher age band and after there has also been an Account Value Step-up. If you have reached an applicable higher age band and there has not also been a subsequent Account Value Step-up, then the Protected Annual Income rate will not increase until the next Account Value Step-up occurs. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the remaining amount into the next Benefit Year.

If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, the remaining Protected Annual Income amounts for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will automatically resume and continue for your life (and your spouse’s life if the joint life option is chosen) under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base in a lump sum. You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero as a result of an Excess Withdrawal. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate.

Cumulative withdrawals during a Benefit Year that are equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount.

The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount impact the Protected Income Base and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 4% Protected Annual Income rate and an initial Purchase Payment of $200,000: 

C-29

Initial Purchase Payment	$200,000
Bonus Credits	$6,000
Protected Income Base on the rider’s effective date	$206,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider’s effective date ($206,000 x 4%)	$8,240
Contract Value six months after rider’s effective date	$215,000
Protected Income Base six months after rider’s effective date	$206,000
Withdrawal six months after rider’s effective date	$8,240
Contract Value after withdrawal ($215,000 - $8,240)	$206,760
Protected Income Base after withdrawal ($206,000 - $0)	$206,000
Contract Value on first Benefit Year anniversary	$210,000
Protected Income Base on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$210,000
Protected Annual Income amount on the first Benefit Year anniversary ($210,000 x 4%)	$8,400

Since there was a withdrawal during the first year, the 5% Enhancement is not available, but the Account Value Step-up was available and increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $210,000. On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Annual Income amount is $8,400 (4% x $210,000).

Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment and applicable Bonus Credits. For example, assuming a Contractowner has a Protected Annual Income amount of $8,000 (4% of $200,000 Protected Income Base), an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 ($10,300 with the Bonus Credit) increases the Protected Annual Income amount that Benefit Year to $8,700 ($8,000 + 4% of $10,300). The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract. Persistency Credits added to the Contract do not immediately increase the Protected Annual Income amount but are added to the Contract Value and may increase the Protected Income Base upon an Account Value Step-up which in turn may increase the Protected Annual Income amount.

Enhancement and Account Value Step-ups will increase the Protected Income Base and thus the Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Annual Income amount, after the Protected Income Base is adjusted by an Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up will be equal to the adjusted Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate.

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:

1.

the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal;

2.

withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet; or

3.

withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.

When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:

1.

the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and

2.

the Protected Annual Income amount will be recalculated to equal the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal).

Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year, if applicable, in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your registered representative or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have any questions about Excess Withdrawals.

The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, the Protected Annual Income amount, and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and a $10,940 withdrawal, which causes a $10,200 reduction in the Protected Income Base.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)

C-30

After a $10,940 withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $6,690 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value is reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250 and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are not reduced:

Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000

The Contract Value is also reduced by the $6,690 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by approximately 12%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $55,750 Contract Value ($6,690 / $55,750).

Contract Value = $49,060 ($55,750 - $6,690)
Protected Income Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200= $74,800)
Enhancement Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% of $74,800 Protected Income Base)

On the following Benefit Year anniversary:

Contract Value = $48,000
Protected Income Base = $74,800
Enhancement Base = $74,800
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% x $74,800)

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider and Contract will terminate.

Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount. Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waivers of surrender charge provisions set forth in this prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $12,000 withdrawal: the $4,250 Protected Annual Income amount is not subject to surrender charges: the $7,750 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges according to the surrender charge schedule in this prospectus. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge. Withdrawals attributed to Bonus Credits are not subject to surrender charges.

Withdrawals from IRA contracts will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMDs to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

2.

The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than the RMD are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph);

4.

This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and

5.

The younger of you or your spouse (joint life option) reach the youngest age on the Rate Sheet.

If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to the RMD, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

Protected Annual Income Payout Option. The Protected Annual Income Payout Option (“PAIPO”) is an Annuity Payout option under which the Contractowner (and joint life if applicable) will receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for life. This option is different from other Annuity Payout options, including i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit, which are based on your Contract Value. If you are required to take annuity payments because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, you have the option of electing the PAIPO. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero and you have a remaining Protected Income Base, you will receive the PAIPO.

C-31

Contractowners may decide to choose the PAIPO over i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit if they feel this may provide a higher final payment over time and they place more importance on this payment over access to the Account Value. Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for your life or the life of you and your spouse for the joint life option.

If you are receiving the PAIPO, the Beneficiary may be eligible to receive final payment upon death of the single life or surviving joint life. If the Account Value Death Benefit option was in effect immediately prior to electing the PAIPO, the Beneficiary will not be eligible to receive the final payment(s). The final payment is a one-time lump-sum payment. If the effective date of the rider is the same as the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals. If the effective date of the rider is after the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased for Purchase Payments received after the rider effective date and decreased by withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals reduce the final payment in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the PAIPO will reduce the final payment dollar for dollar.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Market Select® Advantage has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base upon death of the Contractowner or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

Upon the death of the single life, this rider will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Upon the first death under the joint life option, withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount continue to be available for the life of the surviving spouse. The Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will continue, if applicable, as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln Market Select® Advantage will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death).

Termination. After the fifth Benefit Year anniversary, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Owners of contracts issued in Florida who elected their rider prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if elected after the contract issue date), may terminate their rider at any time after the first Benefit Year anniversary. Lincoln Market Select® Advantage will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option will continue if applicable);

•

upon death under the single life option or the death of the Secondary Life under the joint life option;

•

when the Protected Income Base or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal;

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the surviving Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed pursuant to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree; or

•

upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefit and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit option. Contractowners who elect Lincoln Market Select® Advantage may decide to later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This transition must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage is a Living Benefit Rider that provides:

•

Guaranteed lifetime periodic withdrawals for you (and your spouse if the joint life option is selected) up to the Protected Annual Income amount which is based upon a guaranteed Protected Income Base;

•

An Enhancement amount added to the Protected Income Base if certain criteria are met, as set forth below;

•

Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement;

•

Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount (after reaching a higher age-band and after an Account Value Step-up).

C-32

Protected Annual Income payments are based upon specified percentages of the Protected Income Base, which are age-based and may increase over time. Your Protected Annual Income payments will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero. You may receive Protected Annual Income payments for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse, if the joint life option is chosen.

Please note any withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet, or that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals. In most states, amounts that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are also considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal, and will terminate the rider if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero. If the Enhancement Base is reduced to zero, you will not be eligible for further Enhancements. As a result, the Protected Income Amount would be reduced as well. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of an Enhancement.

The Contractowner, Annuitant or Secondary Life may not be changed while this rider is in effect (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner), including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The Protected Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, Enhancements, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.

The Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Protected Income Base upon an Enhancement. The Enhancement Base is equal to the Protected Income Base on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by an Enhancement.

Neither the Protected Income Base nor the Enhancement Base is available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by $10,300. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credits) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income amount but must be invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating an Enhancement. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credits) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments may not exceed $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.

Excess Withdrawals reduce the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base as discussed below. The reduction to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base.

Enhancement. You are eligible for an increase in the Protected Income Benefit through an Enhancement on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a. the Contractowner/Annuitant (as well as the spouse if the joint life option is in effect) is under age 86;

b. there are no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period (described below);

d. the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement amount is added would be greater than the Contract Value on the same Benefit Year anniversary; and

e. the Enhancement Base is greater than zero.

C-33

The Enhancement equals the Enhancement Base, minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, multiplied by the Enhancement Rate. The Enhancement Base is not reduced by Purchase Payments received in the first 90 days after the rider effective date.

The current Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the rate may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Enhancement rate for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your rate will not change as a result.

The Enhancement rate applicable to new rider elections is set forth in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Enhancement rate and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with this rate. The rate may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rate on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rate indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Enhancement rates for previous effective periods are included in Appendix F to this prospectus.

During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the annual rate may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. If you decline an Enhancement, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement starting on the next Benefit Year anniversary as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Note: The Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary if an Account Value Step-up to the Protected Income Base occurs, or where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value (including a Protected Annual Income payment) in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the Enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of a 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base and assumes that no withdrawals or Bonus Credits have been made.

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000; Enhancement Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000
On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 of $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000; Enhancement Base = $125,000

This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date for the rider. It will not be eligible for an Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $100,000 x 1.05 + $15,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).

As explained below, an Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal to or greater than what the Enhancement provides, you will not receive the Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the Enhancement would not apply. The Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the Enhancement is included in the Withdrawal Amount section below.

Enhancement Period. The original Enhancement Period is up to a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. A new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the Enhancements will stop at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-ups.

Account Value Step-ups. The Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant (single life option), or the Contractowner/Annuitant and spouse (joint life option) are under age 86; and

C-34

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement (if any).

Each time the Account Value Step-up occurs a new Enhancement Period starts. The Account Value Step-up is available even in those years when a withdrawal has occurred.

The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. That means if the current fee rate has increased, this would cause an increase in your annual fee rate for this rider. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up. See Protected Lifetime Income Fees for details. If you decline an Account Value Step-up, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-up and a 5% Enhancement impact the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base
At issue	$50,000	$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$56,700

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). The 5% Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

Withdrawal Amount. Protected Annual Income withdrawals are available at the youngest age on the Rate Sheet. The Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year. As long as the Protected Annual Income amount is not reduced to zero because of an Excess Withdrawal, these withdrawals may be taken for your lifetime (single life option) or the lifetimes of you and your spouse (joint life option) but will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero.

The Protected Annual Income amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Income Base by the applicable rate, based on your age and whether the single or joint life option has been elected and whether or not your Contract Value has been reduced to zero. Under the joint life option, the age of the younger of you or your spouse will be used. The Protected Annual Income amount will change upon an Account Value Step-up, an Enhancement (if applicable), additional Purchase Payments, and Excess Withdrawals, as described below.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rates indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Rate information for previous effective periods is included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

After your first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase on a Benefit Year anniversary on or after you have reached an applicable higher age band and after there has also been an Account Value Step-up. If you have reached an applicable higher age band and there has not also been a subsequent Account Value Step-up, then the Protected Annual Income rate will not increase until the next Account Value Step-up occurs. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the remaining amount into the next Benefit Year.

Protected Annual Income payments are not available until you have reached the youngest age on the Rate Sheet. If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate and amount will be immediately reduced, as reflected on your Rate Sheet. The Protected Annual Income amount payable as calculated in Table A of the Rate Sheet cannot exceed the remaining Contract Value. However, if the total Protected Annual Income amounts received in the Benefit Year your Contract Value is reduced to zero are less than the recalculated Protected Annual Income amount based on Table B of the rate sheet payable for the remainder of the year, the difference for the remainder of that Benefit Year is payable in a lump sum. Otherwise, you will not be able to receive further Protected Annual Income payments until the next Benefit Year anniversary when scheduled payments automatically resume. Withdrawals equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will continue for your life (and your spouse’s life if the joint life option is chosen) under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base in a lump sum. You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income

C-35

amount if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero as a result of an Excess Withdrawal. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate.

Cumulative withdrawals during a Benefit Year that are equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value.

The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount impact the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Enhancement, a 5% Protected Annual Income rate, and a Contract Value of $200,000: 

Contract Value on the rider’s effective date	$200,000
Bonus Credits	$6,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base on the rider’s effective date	$206,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider’s effective date ($206,000 x 5%)	$10,300
Contract Value six months after rider’s effective date	$210,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base six months after rider’s effective date	$206,000
Withdrawal six months after rider’s effective date	$10,000
Contract Value after withdrawal ($210,000 - $10,000)	$200,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base after withdrawal ($206,000 - $0)	$206,000
Contract Value on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$205,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$205,000
Protected Annual Income amount on the first Benefit Year anniversary ($205,000 x 5%)	$10,250

Since there was a withdrawal during the first year, an Enhancement is not available, but the Account Value Step-up was available and increased the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base to the Contract Value of $207,000. On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Annual Income amount is $10,350 (5% x $207,000).

Purchase Payments added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment. The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract.

Enhancements and Account Value Step-ups will increase the Protected Income Base and thus the Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Annual Income amount, after the Protected Income Base is adjusted by an Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up, will be equal to the adjusted Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate. The Protected Annual Income will be lower when your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than an Excess Withdrawal, which will result in a reduced Protected Annual Income amount.

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:

1.

the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal;

2.

withdrawals made prior to the youngest age on the Rate Sheet; or

3.

withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.

When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:

1.

the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and

2.

the Protected Annual Income amount will be recalculated to equal the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal).

Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year, if applicable, in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your registered representative or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have any questions about Excess Withdrawals.

C-36

The following example demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, the Protected Annual Income amount, and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and a $10,940 withdrawal, which causes a $10,200 reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)

After a $10,940 withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $6,690 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value is reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250 and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are not reduced:

Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000

The Contract Value is also reduced by the $6,690 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by approximately 12%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $55,750 Contract Value ($6,690 / $55,750).

Contract Value = $49,060 ($55,750 - $6,690)
Protected Income Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Enhancement Base = $74,800 ($85,000 x 12% = $10,200; $85,000 - $10,200 = $74,800)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% of $74,800 Protected Income Base)

On the following Benefit Year anniversary:

Contract Value = $48,000
Protected Income Base = $74,800
Enhancement Base = $74,800
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,740 (5% x $74,800)

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider and Contract will terminate.

Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount. Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waivers of surrender charge provisions set forth in this prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $12,000 withdrawal: the $4,250 Protected Annual Income amount is not subject to surrender charges; the $7,750 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges according to the surrender charge schedule in this prospectus. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge.

Withdrawals from IRA contracts will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMDs to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

2.

The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than the RMD are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph);

4.

This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and

5.

The younger of you or your spouse (joint life option) reach the youngest age on the Rate Sheet.

If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to the RMD, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

C-37

Protected Annual Income Payout Option. The Protected Annual Income Payout Option (“PAIPO”) is an Annuity Payout option under which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Income Base multiplied by the Protected Annual Income rate shown in Table B of your Rate Sheet, for life. This option is different from other Annuity Payout options, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value. If you are required to take annuity payments because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, you have the option of electing the PAIPO. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero and you have a remaining Protected Income Base, you will receive the PAIPO.

Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for your life or the life of you and your spouse for the joint life option.

If you are receiving the PAIPO, the Beneficiary may be eligible to receive final payment upon death of the single life or surviving joint life. If the Contract Value Death Benefit option was in effect immediately prior to electing the PAIPO, the Beneficiary will not be eligible to receive the final payment. If the effective date of the rider is the same as the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals. If the effective date of the rider is after the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased for Purchase Payments received after the rider effective date and decreased by withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals reduce the final payment in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the PAIPO will reduce the final payment dollar for dollar.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base upon death of the Contractowner or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

Upon the death of the single life, this rider will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). Upon the first death under the joint life option, withdrawals up to the Protected Annual Income amount continue to be available for the life of the surviving spouse. The Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will continue, if applicable, as discussed above. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death).

Termination. After the fifth Benefit Year anniversary, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Payout Option will continue if applicable);

•

upon death under the single life option or the death of the Secondary Life under the joint life option;

•

upon election of i4LIFE® Advantage;

•

when the Protected Income Base or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal;

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed pursuant to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree; or

•

upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefit and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage

This benefit provides a minimum guaranteed amount (Guaranteed Amount) that you will be able to withdraw, in installments, from your Contract. The Guaranteed Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit applicable to that Purchase Payment (or Contract Value if elected after contract issue) adjusted for subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, step-ups and withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. There are two options that step-up the Guaranteed Amount to a higher level (the Contract Value at the time of the step-up):

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up or

Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up

C-38

Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up, the Contractowner has the option to step-up the Guaranteed Amount after five years. With the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value, if higher, on each Benefit Year anniversary through the tenth anniversary. With the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up, the Contractowner can also initiate additional 10-year periods of automatic step-ups.

You may access this Guaranteed Amount through periodic withdrawals which are based on a percentage of the Guaranteed Amount. With the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up single life or joint life options, you also have the option to receive periodic withdrawals for your lifetime or for the lifetimes of you and your spouse. These options are discussed below in detail.

If you purchased this rider, you are limited in how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If the Contractowner elects to step up the Guaranteed Amount (this does not include Account Value Step-ups within a 10-year period), the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the step-up and each anniversary of the effective date of the step-up after that. The step-up will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the step-up is approved by us. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Guaranteed Amount. The Guaranteed Amount is a value used to calculate your withdrawal benefit under this rider. The Guaranteed Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Guaranteed Amount varies based on when and how you elect the benefit. If you elected the benefit at the time you purchased the Contract, the Guaranteed Amount equals your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. The Bonus Credit is an additional amount credited to the Design 3 contract and is equal to a percentage of the Purchase Payment. If you elected the benefit after we issued the Contract, the Guaranteed Amount equals the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The maximum Guaranteed Amount is $5,000,000 under Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option and $10 million for Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option. This maximum takes into consideration the combined guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or spouse if joint life option) are the covered lives.

Additional Purchase Payments and Bonus Credits automatically increase the Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the Purchase Payment and Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Guaranteed Amount by $10,300. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero.

Each withdrawal reduces the Guaranteed Amount as discussed below.

Step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount. Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, the Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary up to and including the tenth Benefit Year if:

a.

the Contractowner or joint owner is still living; and

b.

the Contract Value as of the Valuation Date, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges and other deductions), the rider charge and account fee plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is greater than the Guaranteed Amount immediately preceding the Valuation Date.

After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, you may initiate another 10-year period of automatic step-ups by electing (in writing) to step-up the Guaranteed Amount to the greater of the Contract Value or the current Guaranteed Amount if:

a.

each Contractowner and Annuitant is under age 81; and

b.

the Contractowner or joint owner is still living.

If you choose, we will administer this election for you automatically, so that a new 10-year period of step-ups will begin at the end of each prior 10-year step-up period.

Following is an example of how the step-ups work in the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

C-39

	Contract Value	Guaranteed Amount
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000	$50,000	$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$54,000
3rd Benefit Year anniversary	$57,000	$57,000

Annual step-ups, if the conditions are met, will continue until (and including) the tenth Benefit Year anniversary. If you had elected to have the next 10-year period of step-ups begin automatically after the prior 10-year period, annual step-ups, if conditions are met, will continue beginning on the eleventh Benefit Year anniversary.

Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option, after the fifth anniversary of the rider, you may elect (in writing) to step-up the Guaranteed Amount to an amount equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the step-up. Additional step-ups are permitted, but you must wait at least 5 years between each step-up.

Under both the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up and the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up options, Contractowner elected step-ups (other than automatic step-ups) will be effective on the next Valuation Date after we receive your request and a new Benefit Year will begin. Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits and withdrawals made after a step-up adjust the Guaranteed Amount. In the future, we may limit your right to step up the Guaranteed Amount to your Benefit Year anniversary dates. All step-ups are subject to the maximum Guaranteed Amount.

Withdrawals. You will have access to your Guaranteed Amount through periodic withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount each Benefit Year until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.

On the effective date of the rider, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is:

•

7% of the Guaranteed Amount under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option; and

•

5% of the Guaranteed Amount under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option.

If you do not withdraw the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the extra amount into the next Benefit Year. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is increased by 7% or 5% (depending on your option) of any additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits. For example, if the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option with a Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000 Guaranteed Amount) is in effect and an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 is made (which receives a 3% Bonus Credit if Design 3 is purchased) the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $3,090 ($2,575 + 5% of $10,300). Step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount (both automatic step-ups and step-ups elected by you) will step up the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to the greater of:

a.

the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the step-up; or

b.

7% or 5% (depending on your option) of the new (stepped up) Guaranteed Amount.

If the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) are within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, then:

1.

the withdrawal will reduce the Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the withdrawal on a dollar-for-dollar basis; and

2.

the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will remain the same.

Withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount are not subject to surrender charges or the Interest Adjustment on the amount withdrawn from the fixed account if applicable. See The Contracts - Fixed Side of the Contract.

If the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option is in effect, withdrawals from IRA contracts will be treated as within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount (even if they exceed the 5% Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount) only if:

•

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

•

the RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

•

no withdrawals other than RMDs are made within the Benefit Year; and

•

this Contract is not a beneficiary IRA.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

When cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount:

1.

The Guaranteed Amount is reduced to the lesser of:

•

the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal; or

C-40

•

the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the amount of the withdrawal.

2.

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be the lesser of:

•

the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the withdrawal; or

•

the greater of:

•

7% or 5% (depending on your option) of the reduced Guaranteed Amount immediately following the withdrawal (as specified above when withdrawals exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount); or

•

7% or 5% (depending on your option) of the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal; or

•

the new Guaranteed Amount.

The following example of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A $7,000 Excess Withdrawal caused a $32,000 reduction in the Guaranteed Amount.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Guaranteed Amount = $85,000
Maximum Annual Withdrawal = $5,000 (5% of the initial Guaranteed Amount of $100,000)

After a $7,000 Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $53,000
Guaranteed Amount = $53,000
Maximum Annual Withdrawal = $2,650

The Guaranteed Amount was reduced to the lesser of the Contract Value immediately following the withdrawal ($53,000) or the Guaranteed Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the amount of the withdrawal ($85,000 - $7,000 = $78,000).

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount was reduced to the lesser of:

1.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount prior to the withdrawal ($5,000); or

2.

The greater of 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount ($2,650) or 5% of the Contract Value following the withdrawal ($2,650); or

3.

The new Guaranteed Amount ($53,000).

The lesser of these three items is $2,650.

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may substantially deplete or eliminate your Guaranteed Amount and reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount.

Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option for IRA contracts, the annual amount available for withdrawal within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount may not be sufficient to satisfy your required minimum distributions under the Internal Revenue Code. This is particularly true for individuals over age 84. Therefore, you may have to make withdrawals that exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. Withdrawals over the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount may quickly and substantially decrease your Guaranteed Amount and Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, especially in a declining market. You should consult your tax advisor to determine if there are ways to limit the risks associated with those withdrawals. Such methods may involve the timing of withdrawals or foregoing step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount.

Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges and an Interest Adjustment on the amount withdrawn from the fixed account. Refer to the Statement of Additional Information for an example of the Interest Adjustment calculation.

Lifetime Withdrawals. (Available only with the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up single or joint life options and not the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option or the prior version of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option). Payment of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be guaranteed for your (Contractowner) lifetime (single life option) or for the lifetimes of you (Contractowner) and your spouse (joint life option), as long as:

1.

No withdrawals are made before you (and your spouse if a joint life) are age 65; and

2.

An Excess Withdrawal (described above) has not reduced the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to zero.

If the lifetime withdrawal is not in effect, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will last only until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.

If any withdrawal is made prior to the time you (or both spouses) are age 65, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will not last for the lifetime(s), except in the two situations described below:

1.

If a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after age 65 causes the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to equal or increase from the immediately prior Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. This typically occurs if the Contract Value equals or exceeds the

C-41

highest, prior Guaranteed Amount. If this happens, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will automatically be available for the specified lifetime(s); or

2.

The Contractowner makes a one-time election to reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to 5% of the current Guaranteed Amount. This reset will occur on the first Valuation Date following the Benefit Year anniversary and will be based on the Guaranteed Amount as of that Valuation Date. This will reduce your Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. A Contractowner would only choose this if the above situation did not occur. To reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, the following must occur:

a.

the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) is age 65;

b.

the Contract is currently within a 10-year automatic step-up period described above (or else a Contractowner submits a step-up request to start a new 10-year automatic step-up period) (the Contractowner must be eligible to elect a step-up; i.e., all Contractowners and the Annuitant must be alive and under age 81); and

c.

you have submitted this request to us in writing at least 30 days prior to the end of the Benefit Year.

As an example of these two situations, if you purchased the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up single life with $100,000, your initial Guaranteed Amount is $100,000 and your initial Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount is $5,000. If you make a $5,000 withdrawal at age 62, your Guaranteed Amount will decrease to $95,000. Since you did not satisfy the age 65 requirement, you do not have a lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. If a step-up of the Guaranteed Amount after age 65 (either automatic or Contractowner-elected) causes the Guaranteed Amount to equal or exceed $100,000, then the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount of $5,000 (or greater) will become a lifetime payout. This is the first situation described above. However, if the Guaranteed Amount has not been reset to equal or exceed the highest prior Guaranteed Amount, then you can choose the second situation described above if you are age 65 and the Contract is within a 10-year automatic step-up period. This will reset the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to 5% of the current Guaranteed Amount; 5% of $95,000 is $4,750. This is your new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount which can be paid for your lifetime unless Excess Withdrawals are made.

The tax consequences of withdrawals and annuity payments are discussed in Federal Tax Matters.

All withdrawals you make, whether or not within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, will decrease your Contract Value. If the Contract is surrendered, the Contractowner will receive the Contract Value (less any applicable charges, fees, and taxes) and not the Guaranteed Amount.

If your Contract Value is reduced to zero because of market performance, withdrawals equal to the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount for that Benefit Year will be paid in a lump sum. On the next rider anniversary, the scheduled amount will resume and continue for the life of you (and your spouse if applicable) if the lifetime withdrawals are in effect. If not, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero. You may not withdraw the remaining Guaranteed Amount in a lump sum.

Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option. If you desire to annuitize your Guaranteed Amount, the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option is available.

The Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option is a fixed annuitization in which the Contractowner (and spouse if applicable) will receive the Guaranteed Amount in annual annuity payments equal to the current 7% or 5% (depending on your option) Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, including the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawals if in effect (this option is different from other annuity payment options discussed in this prospectus, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value). Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. Payments will continue until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero and may continue until death if the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect. This may result in a partial, final payment. You would consider this option only if your Contract Value is less than the Guaranteed Amount (and you don't believe the Contract Value will ever exceed the Guaranteed Amount) and you do not wish to keep your annuity contract in force other than to pay out the Guaranteed Amount. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount until the Guaranteed Amount equals zero.

If the Contract Value is zero and you have a remaining Guaranteed Amount, you may not withdraw the remaining Guaranteed Amount in a lump sum, but must elect the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. There is no provision for a lump sum payout of the Guaranteed Amount upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid other than any applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

Upon the death of the single life under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up – single life option, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, if in effect, will end. If the Contract is continued as discussed below, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount, if any, is zero. In the alternative, the surviving

C-42

spouse can choose to become the new single life, if the surviving spouse is under age 81. This will cause a reset of the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. The new Guaranteed Amount will equal the Contract Value on the date of the reset and the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount. This also starts a new 10-year period of automatic step-ups. At this time, the charge for the rider will become the current charge in effect for the single life option. The surviving spouse will need to be 65 before taking withdrawals to qualify for a lifetime payout. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider:

1.

the change a reset would cause to the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount;

2.

whether it is important to have Maximum Annual Withdrawal amounts for life or only until the Guaranteed Amount is reduced to zero; and

3.

the cost of the single life option.

Upon the first death under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up – joint life option, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, if in effect, will continue for the life of the surviving spouse. Upon the death of the surviving spouse, the lifetime payout of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will end. However, if the spouse's Beneficiary elects to take the annuity Death Benefit in installments over life expectancy, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will continue until the Guaranteed Amount, if any, is zero (see below for a non-spouse Beneficiary). As an alternative, after the first death, the surviving spouse may choose to change from the joint life option to the single life option, if the surviving spouse is under age 81. This will cause a reset of the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount. The new Guaranteed Amount will equal the Contract Value on the date of the reset and the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will be 5% of the new Guaranteed Amount. This also starts a new 10-year period of automatic step-ups. At this time, the charge for the rider will become the current charge in effect for the single life option. In deciding whether to make this change, the surviving spouse should consider:

1.

if the reset will cause the Guaranteed Amount and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount to decrease; and

2.

if the cost of the single life option is less than the cost of the joint life option.

If the surviving spouse of the deceased Contractowner continues the Contract, the remaining automatic step-ups under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option, will apply to the spouse as the new Contractowner. Under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 5 Year Elective Step-up option, the new Contractowner is eligible to elect to step up the Guaranteed Amount prior to the next available step-up date; however, all other conditions for the step-up apply and any subsequent step-up by the new Contractowner must meet all conditions for a step-up.

If a non-spouse Beneficiary elects to receive the Death Benefit in installments over life expectancy (thereby keeping the Contract in force), the Beneficiary may continue the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage if desired. Automatic step-ups under the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage – 1 Year Automatic Step-up option will not continue and elective step-ups of the Guaranteed Amount under both options will not be permitted. In the event the Contract Value declines below the Guaranteed Amount (as adjusted for withdrawals of Death Benefit payments), the Beneficiary is assured of receiving payments equal to the Guaranteed Amount (as adjusted). Deductions for the rider charge will continue on a quarterly basis and will be charged against the remaining Guaranteed Amount. Note: there are instances where the required installments of the Death Benefit, in order to be in compliance with the Internal Revenue Code as noted above, may exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount, thereby reducing the benefit of this rider. If there are multiple Beneficiaries, each Beneficiary will be entitled to continue a share of the Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage equal to his or her share of the Death Benefit.

Impact of Divorce on Joint Life Option. In the event of a divorce, the Contractowner may change from a joint life option to a single life option (if available) (if the Contractowner is under age 81) at the current rider charge of the single life option. At the time of the change, the Guaranteed Amount will be reset to the current Contract Value and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal amount will equal 5% of this new Guaranteed Amount.

After a divorce, the Contractowner may keep the joint life option to have the opportunity to receive lifetime payouts for the lives of the Contractowner and a new spouse. This is only available if no withdrawals were made from the Contract after the effective date of the rider up to and including the date the new spouse is added to the rider.

Termination. After the later of the fifth Benefit Year anniversary of the effective date of the rider or the fifth Benefit Year anniversary of the most recent Contractowner-elected step-up, including any step-up we administered for you, of the Guaranteed Amount, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. After this time, the rider will also terminate if the Contractowner fails to adhere to the Investment Requirements. Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Guaranteed Amount Annuity Payment Option will continue if applicable);

•

upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage;

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed (except if the surviving Secondary Life assumes ownership of the Contract upon death of the Contractowner) including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

upon the last payment of the Guaranteed Amount unless the lifetime Maximum Annual Withdrawal is in effect;

C-43

•

when the Maximum Annual Withdrawal or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal; or

•

upon termination of the underlying annuity contract.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Guaranteed Amount. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate.

If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can purchase any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Contractowners who previously elected Lincoln SmartSecurity® Advantage may decide to later carry over their Guaranteed Amount to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit. This transition will be made to Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). The charge, Guaranteed Income Benefit percentages, Access Period requirements, and Investment Requirements will be those that currently apply to new elections of Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). This decision must be made prior to the maximum age limit and prior to the Annuity Commencement date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time.

Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM

Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM is a Living Benefit Rider that provides:

•

Guaranteed periodic withdrawals for your lifetime, up to the Protected Annual Income amount which is based upon a Protected Income Base;

•

An Enhancement amount added to the Protected Income Base if certain criteria are met, as set forth below;

•

Account Value Step-ups of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement; and

•

Age-based increases to the Protected Annual Income amount (after reaching a higher age-band and after an Account Value Step-up).

Protected Annual Income payments are available after you reach age 70 and are based upon specified percentages of the Protected Income Base which are age-based and may increase over time. You may receive Protected Annual Income Payments for your lifetime. Your Protected Annual Income payments will be reduced if your Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Please note any withdrawals made prior to age 70 or that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount are considered Excess Withdrawals. In most states, amounts that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are also considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base as well as your Protected Annual Income amount by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal, and will terminate the rider if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero. If the Enhancement Base is reduced to zero, you will not be eligible for further Enhancements. Withdrawals will also negatively impact the availability of an Enhancement.

The Contractowner or Annuitant may not be changed while this rider is in effect, including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base. The Protected Income Base is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elect the rider at the time you purchase the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal your initial Purchase Payment plus the amount of any Bonus Credit. If you elect the rider after we issue the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base will equal the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider. The Protected Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, 6% Enhancements and Automatic Annual Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you are the covered life.

The Enhancement Base is the value used to calculate the amount that may be added to the Protected Income Base upon an Enhancement. The Enhancement Base is equal to the Protected Income Base on the effective date of the rider, increased by subsequent Purchase Payments, any Bonus Credits, and Account Value Step-ups, and decreased by Excess Withdrawals in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The Enhancement Base is not increased by a 6% Enhancement.

Neither the Protected Income Base nor the Enhancement Base is available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received after the rider effective date automatically increase the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base); for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base by $10,300. Any Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credits) will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base and will result in an increased Protected Annual Income amount but must be

C-44

invested in the Contract at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating an Enhancement. Any Purchase Payments (including any applicable Bonus Credits) made within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider will be included in the Enhancement Base for purposes of calculating the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.

Excess Withdrawals reduce the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base as discussed below. The reduction to the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base.

Enhancement. You are eligible for an increase in the Protected Income Base through an Enhancement on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a. the Contractowner/Annuitant is under age 86;

b. there are no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year;

c. the rider is within the Enhancement Period (described below);

d. the Protected Income Base after the Enhancement amount is added would be greater than the Protected Income Base after the Account Value Step-up; and

e. the Enhancement Base is greater than zero.

The Enhancement equals the Enhancement Base, minus Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received in the preceding Benefit Year, multiplied by 6%. The Enhancement Base is not reduced by Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits received in the first 90 days after the rider effective date.

During the first ten Benefit Years, an increase in the Protected Income Base as a result of the Enhancement will not cause an increase in the annual protected lifetime income fee rate but will increase the dollar amount of the fee. After the tenth Benefit Year anniversary, if the Enhancement Period has renewed, the annual rate may increase each time the Protected Income Base increases as a result of the Enhancement. If you decline an Enhancement, you will continue to be eligible for an Enhancement starting on the next Benefit Year anniversary as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Note: The Enhancement is not available on any Benefit Year anniversary if an Account Value Step-up to the Protected Income Base occurs, or where there has been a withdrawal of Contract Value (including a Protected Annual Income payment) in the preceding Benefit Year. If you are eligible (as defined above) for the Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the Enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of the 6% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base and assumes that no withdrawals or Bonus Credits have been made.

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000; Enhancement Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000; Enhancement Base = $115,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $121,900 (= $100,000 x 1.06 + $15,000 x 1.06).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 of $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000; Enhancement Base = $125,000

This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date for the rider. It will not be eligible for the 6% Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $131,900 (= $100,000 x 1.06 + $15,000 x 1.06 + $10,000).

As explained below, an Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides an increase equal to or greater than what the Enhancement provides, you will not receive the Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the Enhancement would not apply. The Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

An example of the impact of a withdrawal on the 6% Enhancement is included in the Withdrawal Amount section below.

Enhancement Period. The original Enhancement Period is up to a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. A new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account

C-45

Value Step-ups, the Enhancements will stop at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs.

Account Value Step-ups. The Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Contractowner/Annuitant is under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, plus any Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits and Persistency Credits, if any, made on that date (and after the deduction of any withdrawals, including surrender charges, the rider charge and account fee) is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after an Enhancement (if any).

Each time the Account Value Step-up occurs a new Enhancement Period starts. The Account Value Step-up is available even in those years when a withdrawal has occurred.

The fee rate can change each time there is an Account Value Step-up. That means if the current fee rate has increased, this would cause an increase in your annual fee rate for this rider. If your fee rate is increased, you may opt out of the Account Value Step-up. See Charges & Deductions – Protected Lifetime Income Fees for details. If you decline an Account Value Step-up, you will continue to be eligible for the 6% Enhancement through the end of the Enhancement Period, including in the year you declined the Account Value Step-up, as long as you meet the conditions listed above.

Following is an example of how the Account Value Step-up and the 6% Enhancement impact the Protected Income Base (assuming no withdrawals or additional Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base	Enhancement Base	Enhancement amount added to Protected Income Base
At issue	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	-
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$104,000	$106,000	$100,000	$6,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$115,000	$115,000	$115,000	N/A

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Contract Value is higher than the previous Protected Income Base of $100,000, but since the 6% Enhancement (6% of the Enhancement Base) would increase the Protected Income Base to a higher amount, the Protected Income Base is increased by the $6,000 Enhancement amount to $106,000 and the Enhancement Base remains at $100,000.

On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the Contract Value of $115,000 is higher than the previous Protected Income Base of $106,000 plus the 6% Enhancement ($112,000 = $106,000 + 6% of $100,000), so the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base are increased to equal the Contract Value of $115,000.

Withdrawal Amount. Protected Annual Income withdrawals are available when you are age 70 or older. The Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year. As long as the Protected Annual Income amount is not reduced to zero because of an Excess Withdrawal, these withdrawals may be taken for your lifetime.

The Protected Annual Income amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Income Base by the applicable rate, based on your age, and whether or not your Contract Value has been reduced to zero. The Protected Annual Income amount will change upon an Account Value Step-up, 6% Enhancement, additional Purchase Payments, and Excess Withdrawals, as described below. Additionally, the Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced if the Contract Value reaches zero.

The Protected Annual Income rate will be based on your age as of the date of the first withdrawal on or after age 70. The Protected Annual Income rate will decrease once the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility. Generally, the rates may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. This rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Protected Annual Income rates for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your Protected Annual Income rates will not change as a result.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are set forth in a supplement to this prospectus, called a Rate Sheet. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time, in our sole discretion, and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.

The effective date of a subsequent Rate Sheet will be at least 10 days after it is filed. In order to get the rates indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate

C-46

Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500. Protected Annual Income rates for previous effective periods are included in an Appendix to this prospectus.

After your first Protected Annual Income withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate will only increase on a Benefit Year anniversary on or after you have reached an applicable higher age band and after there has also been an Account Value Step-up. If you have reached an applicable higher age band and there has not also been a subsequent Account Value Step-up, then the Protected Annual Income rate will not increase until the next Account Value Step-up occurs. If you do not withdraw the entire Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, there is no carryover of the remaining amount into the next Benefit Year. The Protected Annual Income rate will be lower if your Contract Value is reduced to zero, which will result in a reduced Protected Annual Income amount.

Protected Annual Income payments are not available until you have reached age 70. If your Contract Value is reduced to zero for any reason other than for an Excess Withdrawal, the Protected Annual Income rate and amount will be immediately reduced, as reflected on your Rate Sheet. The Protected Annual Income amount payable as calculated in Table A of the Rate Sheet cannot exceed the remaining Contract Value. However, if the total Protected Annual Income amounts received in the Benefit Year your Contract Value is reduced to zero are less than the recalculated Protected Annual Income amount based on Table B of the rate sheet payable for the remainder of the year, the difference for the remainder of that Benefit Year is payable in a lump sum. Otherwise, you will not be able to receive further Protected Annual Income payments until the next Benefit Year anniversary when scheduled payments automatically resume. Withdrawals equal to the Protected Annual Income amount will continue for your life under the Protected Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option. You may not withdraw the remaining Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base in a lump sum. You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero as a result of an Excess Withdrawal. If either the Contract Value or the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate.

Withdrawals equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value.

The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount impact the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and a Contract Value of $200,000 on the rider’s effective date: 

Contract Value on the rider’s effective date	$200,000
Bonus Credits	$6,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base on the rider’s effective date	$206,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider’s effective date ($200,000 x 5%)	$10,300
Contract Value six months after rider’s effective date	$215,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base six months after rider’s effective date	$206,000
Withdrawal six months after rider’s effective date	$10,300
Contract Value after withdrawal ($215,000 - $10,300)	$204,700
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base after withdrawal ($206,000 - $0)	$206,000
Contract Value on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$210,000
Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$210,000
Protected Annual Income amount on the first Benefit Year anniversary ($210,000 x 5%)	$10,500

Since there was a withdrawal during the first year, an Enhancement is not available, but the Account Value Step-up was available and increased the Protected Income Base and the Enhancement Base to the Contract Value of $210,000. On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Annual Income amount is $10,500 (5% x $210,000).

Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment and any applicable Bonus Credit. For example, assuming a Contractowner has a Protected Annual Income amount of $10,000 (5% of $200,000 Protected Income Base), an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 ($10,300 with the Bonus Credit) increases the Protected Annual Income amount that Benefit Year to $10,515 ($10,000 + 5% of $10,300). The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract.

Enhancements and Account Value Step-ups will increase the Protected Income Base and thus the Protected Annual Income amount. The Protected Annual Income amount, after the Protected Income Base is adjusted by an Enhancement or an Account Value Step-up,

C-47

will be equal to the adjusted Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate. The Protected Annual Income will decrease when your Contract Value is reduced to zero (for any reason other than an Excess Withdrawal).

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:

1.

the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal;

2.

withdrawals made prior to age 70; or

3.

withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.

When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:

1.

the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and

2.

the Protected Annual Income amount will be recalculated to equal the applicable Protected Annual Income rate multiplied by the new (reduced) Protected Income Base (after the proportionate reduction for the Excess Withdrawal).

Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year, if applicable, in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your registered representative or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have any questions about Excess Withdrawals.

The following example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Income Base, the Enhancement Base, the Protected Annual Income amount, and the Contract Value. The example assumes that the Contractowner makes a $12,000 withdrawal, which causes an $11,815 reduction in the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)

After a $12,000 withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $7,750 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value is reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250 and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are not reduced:
Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Income Base = $85,000
Enhancement Base = $85,000

The Contract Value is also reduced by the $7,750 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Income Base and Enhancement Base are reduced by 13.90134%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the $55,750 Contract Value ($7,750 / $55,750).

Contract Value = $48,000 ($55,750 - $7,750)
Protected Income Base = $73,185 ($85,000 x 13.90134% = $11,815; $85,000 - $11,815 = $73,185)
Enhancement Base = $73,185 ($85,000 x 13.90134% = $11,815; $85,000 - $11,815 = $73,185)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,659 (5% of $73,185 Protected Income Base)

On the following Benefit Year anniversary:

Contract Value = $43,000
Protected Income Base = $73,185
Enhancement Base = $73,185
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,659 (5% x $73,185)

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base, Enhancement Base, and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider and Contract will terminate.

Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount. Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waivers of surrender charge provisions set forth in this prospectus is applicable. Continuing with the prior example of the $12,000 withdrawal: the $4,250 Protected Annual Income amount is not subject

C-48

to surrender charges; the $7,750 Excess Withdrawal may be subject to surrender charges according to the surrender charge schedule in this prospectus. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge.

Withdrawals from IRA contracts will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9). In addition, in order for this exception for RMD’s to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD;

2.

The RMD calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than RMD’s are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph);

4.

This Contract is not a beneficiary IRA; and

5.

You are age 70 or above.

If your RMD withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn and will not be subject to surrender charges. If a withdrawal, other than an RMD is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to RMDs, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income.

Protected Annual Income Payout Option. The Protected Annual Income Payout Option (“GAIPO”) is an Annuity Payout option under which the Contractowner will receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable Protected Annual Income rate shown in Table B of your Rate Sheet, for life. This option is different from other Annuity Payout options, including i4LIFE® Advantage, which are based on your Contract Value. If you are required to take annuity payments because you have reached the Annuity Commencement Date, you have the option of electing the PAIPO. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero and you have a remaining Protected Income Base, you will receive the PAIPO.

Payment frequencies other than annual may be available. You will have no other contract features other than the right to receive annuity payments equal to the Protected Annual Income amount for your life.

If you are receiving the PAIPO, the Beneficiary may be eligible to receive final payment upon death of the covered life. If the Contract Value Death Benefit option is in effect, the Beneficiary will not be eligible to receive the final payment. If the effective date of the rider is the same as the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the sum of all Purchase Payments, decreased by withdrawals. If the effective date of the rider is after the effective date of the Contract, the final payment will be equal to the Contract Value on the effective date of the rider, increased for Purchase Payments received after the rider effective date and decreased by withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals reduce the final payment in the same proportion as the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value; withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and payments under the PAIPO will reduce the final payment dollar for dollar.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base or Enhancement Base upon death of the Contractowner or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9) as applicable as amended from time to time. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

Upon the death of the covered life, this rider will end and no further Protected Annual Income amounts are available (even if there was a Protected Income Base in effect at the time of the death). The Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will continue, if applicable, as discussed above.

Termination. After the fifth Benefit Year anniversary, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date (except payments under the Protected Annual Income Amount Annuity Payout Option will continue if applicable);

•

upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage;

•

upon death of the covered life;

•

when the Protected Annual Income amount or Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal;

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed pursuant to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree; or

•

upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract.

C-49

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base or to the Enhancement Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefit and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time, except i4LIFE® Advantage.

Lincoln Wealth PassSM

Lincoln Wealth PassSM was designed for a Beneficiary with Death Benefit proceeds from another nonqualified contract, or from a qualified (IRA and Roth IRA) contract or qualified retirement plan if the original Contractowner died on or before December 31, 2019. This rider provides guaranteed periodic withdrawals from a benefit base called the Protected Amount (described in detail below). As long as there is a Protected Amount, you will be able to make annual withdrawals called the Protected Annual Income. The Protected Annual Income is equal to the greater of (a) or (b), where:

(a) is an amount less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income; or

(b) is an amount from a qualified or nonqualified contract that is the result of systematic installments withdrawn via an automatic withdrawal service of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) or life expectancy payment rules for the Contract Value of the Contract to which this rider is attached.

Please note any withdrawals that exceed the greater of (a) or (b) or the amounts payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account are considered Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Amount as well as your Protected Annual Income amount by an amount greater than the dollar amount of the Excess Withdrawal. Your rider will terminate if the Protected Amount is reduced to zero.

Withdrawals equal to or less than the Protected Annual Income amount will not reduce the Protected Annual Income amount. All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount or on your RMD, provided your RMD amount is greater than your Protected Annual Income amount.

The Contractowner or Annuitant may not be changed while this rider is in effect, including any sale or assignment of the Contract as collateral.

Distributions must be based on the Contractowner’s life expectancy.

Contractowners age 70 or younger must elect the rider no later than 5 years after the death (if distributions have already begun, or within the time frames listed in (1) and (2) above). Contractowners ages 71 through 80 must elect the rider before beginning life expectancy Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”).

Note: Beneficiaries under the age of majority in your state will not be able to receive proceeds outright. Check your state law to see if a custodian or guardian is needed.

This rider is not available to a Beneficiary of an existing Contract if the Contract was previously annuitized, including i4LIFE® Advantage on nonqualified contracts. A trust beneficiary of a qualified Lincoln contract who chooses to assume ownership of the Contract is not eligible to elect this rider, but instead must purchase a new Contract to elect it. Non-natural beneficiaries of nonqualified contract are not eligible to purchase this rider. No other Living Benefit Riders are available if this rider is elected. Additionally, you cannot terminate this rider until after the fifth Benefit Year anniversary.

We reserve the right to discontinue offering this rider at any time, at our sole discretion, upon advanced written notice to you. This means that there is a chance you may not be able to elect it in the future. We may also make changes to, or discontinue offering, any features for future rider elections at any time at our sole discretion.

Benefit Year. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the effective date of the rider and starting with each anniversary of the rider effective date after that. If your Benefit Year anniversary falls on a day that the New York Stock Exchange is closed, any benefit calculations scheduled to occur on that anniversary will occur on the next Valuation Date.

Protected Amount. The Protected Amount is a value used to calculate your Protected Annual Income amount and is the total amount of guaranteed payments you can receive. The Protected Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Amount varies based on when you elect the rider. If the rider was elected at the time of application, the Protected Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the rider was elected after we issued the Contract, the Protected Amount equals the Contract Value on the rider effective date. The maximum Protected Amount is $10 million, which includes the total guaranteed amounts under the Living Benefit Riders of all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you are the covered lives.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits are allowed only if: 1.) the rider is purchased at the time of application, and 2.) additional Purchase Payments must be received by the earlier of 180 days of the rider effective date or the date required to begin minimum distributions. The source of the Purchase Payments must be from a contract that is the same market type as the Lincoln annuity. That means that if the source contract is a tax qualified (from an IRA or Roth IRA), the Purchase Payment can only be made to a qualified Lincoln contract. If the source contract is nonqualified, the Purchase Payment can only be made to a nonqualified Lincoln contract. If you are making Purchase Payments from more than one source contract, each of the source contracts must have the

C-50

same decedent and the same Beneficiary. Additional Purchase Payments are not allowed if the rider is purchased by the Beneficiary who inherits an existing Lincoln annuity who chooses to continue the Contract as Contractowner.

Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Protected Amount (not to exceed the maximum Protected Amount) by the amount of the Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credit; for example, a $10,000 additional Purchase Payment which may receive a 3% Bonus Credit will increase the Protected Amount by $10,300. Additional Purchase Payment (including any applicable Bonus Credits) will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero.

Certain withdrawals will reduce the Protected Amount on a dollar for dollar basis:

•

Withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount;

•

Withdrawals, using Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service, equal to RMD life expectancy payouts calculated by us for qualified contracts; or

•

Withdrawals, using Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service, equal to RMD life expectancy payouts calculated by us for nonqualified contracts.

All other withdrawals are Excess Withdrawals that reduce the Protected Amount by the same proportion that the withdrawals reduce the Contract Value. The rider will terminate when the Protected Amount is reduced to zero.

Protected Annual Income Withdrawal. The Protected Annual Income is an amount that may be withdrawn from the Contract each Benefit Year as long as there is a Protected Amount.

The Protected Annual Income amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Amount by the applicable rate, based on your age on the latest date to begin withdrawals to stretch payments over the owner’s life expectancy or the date that the Contract Value is reduced to zero. Thereafter, the Protected Annual Income rate will not change. The Protected Annual Income amount will change upon additional Purchase Payments and Excess Withdrawals, as described below. Once the Protected Amount is less than the Protected Annual Income, the Protected Annual Income amount will be reduced to the Protected Amount for the final year’s payment.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are determined in our sole discretion based on current economic factors. Generally, the rates may increase or decrease based on changes in equity market volatility, prevailing interest rates, or as a result of other economic conditions. The rate structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the rider. The Protected Annual Income rates for new rider elections may be higher or lower than prior rates, but for existing Contractowners that have elected the rider, your Protected Annual Income rates will not change as a result.

The Protected Annual Income rates applicable to new rider elections are disclosed in a Rate Sheet prospectus supplement. The Rate Sheet indicates the Protected Annual Income rates and the date by which your application or rider election form must be signed and dated for a rider to be issued with those rates. The rates may be superseded at any time and may be higher or lower than the rates on the previous Rate Sheet.

Any changes to the Protected Annual Income rates will be disclosed in a new Rate Sheet at least 10 days before those rates become effective. In order to get the rates indicated in a Rate Sheet, your application or rider election form must be sent to us, and must be signed and dated on or after the effective date of the Rate Sheet. Current Rate Sheets will be included with the prospectus. You can also obtain the most current Rate Sheet by contacting your registered representative, online at www.lfg.com/VAprospectus or by calling us at 1-800-942-5500.

You will not be entitled to the Protected Annual Income amount if the Protected Amount is reduced to zero.

All withdrawals will decrease the Contract Value. If you withdraw less than the Protected Annual Income amount during a Benefit Year, you are not entitled to carry over the unused Protected Annual Income amount to another Benefit Year.

Withdrawals will not be considered Excess Withdrawals (even if they exceed the Protected Annual Income amount) only if the withdrawals are taken as systematic installments of the amount needed to satisfy the required minimum distribution (RMD) rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) for IRAs or the life expectancy payments for nonqualified contracts. In addition, in order for this exception to apply, the following must occur:

1.

Lincoln’s automatic withdrawal service is used to calculate and pay the RMD or life expectancy payments;

2.

The calculation must be based only on the value in this Contract;

3.

No withdrawals other than RMDs or life expectancy payments are made within the Benefit Year (except as described in the next paragraph).

If your RMD or life expectancy withdrawals during a Benefit Year are less than the Protected Annual Income amount, an additional amount up to the Protected Annual Income amount may be withdrawn. If your RMD or life expectancy payment exceeds the Protected Annual Income amount, the excess will not be considered an Excess Withdrawal. However, if a withdrawal other than an RMD or life expectancy payment is made during the Benefit Year, then all amounts withdrawn in excess of the Protected Annual Income amount, including amounts attributable to RMDs and life expectancy payments, will be treated as Excess Withdrawals.

C-51

The following example shows the calculation of the Protected Annual Income amount and how withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount impact the Protected Amount and the Contract Value. The example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and a Contract Value of $200,000 on the rider’s effective date: 

Contract Value on the rider’s effective date	$200,000
Protected Amount on the rider’s effective date	$200,000
Initial Protected Annual Income amount on the rider’s effective date	$10,000
Contract Value six months after rider’s effective date	$212,000
Protected Amount six months after rider’s effective date	$200,000
Withdrawal six months after rider’s effective date	$10,000
Contract Value after withdrawal ($212,000 - $10,000)	$202,000
Protected Amount after withdrawal ($200,000 - $10,000)	$190,000
Contract Value on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$205,000
Protected Amount on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$190,000
Protected Annual Income amount on the first Benefit Year anniversary	$10,000

Purchase Payments added to the Contract subsequent to the initial Purchase Payment will increase the Protected Annual Income amount by an amount equal to the applicable Protected Annual Income rate, multiplied by the amount of the subsequent Purchase Payment. For example, assuming a Contractowner has a Protected Annual Income amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000 Protected Amount), an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 increases the Protected Annual Income amount that Benefit Year to $3,000 ($2,500 + $10,000 x 1.05). The Protected Annual Income payment amount will be recalculated immediately after a Purchase Payment is added to the Contract.

Excess Withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals are:

1.

the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Benefit Year (including the current withdrawal) that exceed the Protected Annual Income amount at the time of the withdrawal (excludes RMDs and life expectancy payments as outlined above); or

2.

withdrawals that are payable to any assignee or assignee’s bank account.

When an Excess Withdrawal occurs:

1.

the Protected Amount is reduced by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Protected Amount could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal; and

2.

the Protected Annual Income is reduced by the same proportion the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value.

Your quarterly statements will include the Protected Annual Income amount (as adjusted for Protected Annual Income amount payments in a Benefit Year, Excess Withdrawals and additional Purchase Payments) available to you for the Benefit Year in order for you to determine whether a withdrawal may be an Excess Withdrawal. We encourage you to either consult with your registered representative or call us at the number provided in this prospectus if you have any questions about Excess Withdrawals.

The following example assumes a 5% Protected Annual Income rate and demonstrates the impact of an Excess Withdrawal on the Protected Amount, the Protected Annual Income amount, and the Contract Value. The example assumes that the Contractowner makes a $12,000 withdrawal, which causes an $11,225 reduction in the Protected Amount.

Prior to Excess Withdrawal:
Contract Value = $60,000
Protected Amount = $85,000
Protected Annual Income amount = $4,250 (5% of the Protected Income Base of $85,000)

After a $12,000 withdrawal ($4,250 is within the Protected Annual Income amount, $7,750 is the Excess Withdrawal):
The Contract Value and Protected Amount are reduced by the amount of the Protected Annual Income amount of $4,250:

Contract Value = $55,750 ($60,000 - $4,250)
Protected Amount = $80,750 ($85,000 - $4,250)

The Contract Value is also reduced by the $7,750 Excess Withdrawal and the Protected Amount is reduced by 13.90%, the same proportion by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the Contract Value of $55,750 ($7,750 ÷ $55,750).

Contract Value = $48,000 ($55,750 - $7,750) a 13.90% reduction
Protected Amount = $73,185 ($85,000 x 13.90% = $11,225; $85,000 - $11,225= $73,185)
Protected Annual Income amount = $3,660 ($4,250 x 13.90%= $591; $4,250 - $591 = $3,659)

C-52

In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Amount and Protected Annual Income amount. This is because the reduction in the benefit may be more than the dollar amount withdrawn from the Contract Value. If the Protected Amount is reduced to zero, the rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to an Excess Withdrawal, the rider and Contract will terminate.

Surrender charges are waived on cumulative withdrawals less than or equal to the Protected Annual Income amount and on any RMD that is greater than your Protected Annual Income amount. Excess Withdrawals will be subject to surrender charges unless one of the waivers of the surrender charge provision set forth in this prospectus is applicable.

Distributions from qualified contracts are generally taxed as ordinary income. Distributions from nonqualified contracts that are includable in gross income are also generally taxed as ordinary income. See Federal Tax Matters for information on determining what amounts are includable in gross income.

Final Payment Year. The year that the final payment is made is determined from the chart below based on the owner’s age on the latest date to stretch payments over the owner’s life expectancy. This date is one year after the date of death for nonqualified contracts, and December 31st of the calendar year following the date of death occurred for qualified contracts.

If the Contract and rider are still in effect on the Benefit Year anniversary occurring in the final payment year, a final payment will be made that is equal to the greater of the Protected Amount or Contract Value, and the Contract and rider will terminate. The final payment year is determined on the rider effective date and will not change. The final payment year is determined from the chart below and is based on your age. All amounts must be paid out of the Contract in this final payment year. 

Age	Final GMWB Payment Year	Age	Final GMWB Payment Year	Age	Final GMWB Payment Year
0	82	28	55	56	28
1	81	29	54	57	27
2	80	30	53	58	27
3	79	31	52	59	26
4	78	32	51	60	25
5	77	33	50	61	24
6	76	34	49	62	23
7	75	35	48	63	22
8	74	36	47	64	21
9	73	37	46	65	21
10	72	38	45	66	20
11	71	39	44	67	19
12	70	40	43	68	18
13	69	41	42	69	17
14	68	42	41	70	17
15	67	43	40	71	16
16	66	44	39	72	15
17	66	45	38	73	14
18	65	46	37	74	14
19	64	47	37	75	13
20	63	48	36	76	12
21	62	49	35	77	12
22	61	50	34	78	11
23	60	51	33	79	10
24	59	52	32	80	10
25	58	53	31	81	9
26	57	54	30
27	56	55	29

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. Lincoln Wealth PassSM has no provision for a payout of the Protected Amount upon death of the Contractowner or Annuitant and provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. All Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9), as applicable, as amended from time to time.

C-53

Upon the death of the Contractowner, if there is Contract Value and a Protected Amount in effect at the time of the death and there is only one Beneficiary, the Beneficiary may continue the rider to pay out the remaining Protected Amount. We cannot divide the Protected Amount among multiple Beneficiaries. No adjustment will be made to the Protected Amount, Protected Annual Income Amount, protected lifetime income fee base, or final payment year. If the Protected Annual Income amount was not determined prior to death, then the rate will be set according to the deceased Contractowner’s age on the continuation date. Continuation is not available if the Contract Value is reduced to zero prior to the death of the Contractowner.

Termination. After the fifth Benefit Year anniversary, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing of the request to terminate or by failing to adhere to Investment Requirements. Lincoln Wealth PassSM will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date;

•

upon death of the Contractowner, unless there is a Protected Amount and a single Beneficiary elects to continue the Contract and rider;

•

if the Contractowner or Annuitant is changed including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral;

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed pursuant to an enforceable divorce agreement or decree;

•

upon surrender or termination of the underlying annuity contract;

•

on the rider date anniversary occurring in the final payment year;

•

when the Protected Amount and the Protected Annual Income amount are reduced to zero; or

•

when the final payment is made.

The termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Amount. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefit and charges within this rider will terminate.

4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)

4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) is a rider that provides a Protected Income Base which will be used to establish the amount of the Guaranteed Income Benefit payment upon the election of i4LIFE® Advantage. If you elect 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk), you must later elect i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) in order to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk). You will be subject to certain Investment Requirements in which your Contract Value must be allocated among specified Subaccounts. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements.

Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is an amount used to calculate the Guaranteed Income Benefit under i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) at a later date. The Protected Income Base is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit. The initial Protected Income Base varies based on when you elect the rider. If you elected 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) at the time you purchased the Contract, the Protected Income Base equals your initial Purchase Payment and any Bonus Credits. If you elected the rider after you purchased the Contract, the initial Protected Income Base equals the Contract Value on the effective date of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk). The maximum Protected Income Base is $10 million. The maximum takes into consideration the total guaranteed amounts from all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) in which you (and/or Secondary Life, if joint life option) are the covered lives.

Additional Purchase Payments and any Bonus Credits automatically increase the Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments (not to exceed the maximum Protected Income Base). For example, an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 will increase the Protected Income Base by $10,000. After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value decreases to zero for any reason, including market loss.

Each withdrawal reduces the Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal. This means that the reduction in the Protected Income Base could be more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal.

The following example demonstrates the impact of a withdrawal on the Protected Income Base and the Contract Value. The Contractowner makes a withdrawal of $11,200 which causes a $12,550 reduction in the Protected Income Base.

Prior to the withdrawal:
Contract Value = $112,000
Protected Income Base = $125,500

After a withdrawal of $11,200, the Contract Value is reduced by 10% ($11,200) and the Protected Income Base is also reduced by 10%, the same proportion by which the withdrawal reduced the Contract Value ($11,200 ÷ $112,000)

Contract Value = $100,800 ($112,000 - $11,200)
Protected Income Base = $112,950 ($125,500 x 10% = $12,550; $125,500 - $12,550 = $112,950)

C-54

In a declining market, withdrawals may significantly reduce your Protected Income Base. If the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to withdrawals, this rider will terminate. If the Contract Value is reduced to zero due to a withdrawal, both the rider and the Contract will terminate.

Account Value Step-up. The Protected Income Base will automatically step up to the Contract Value on each Benefit Year anniversary if:

a.

the Annuitant (single life option), or the Secondary Life (joint life option) are still living and under age 86; and

b.

the Contract Value on that Benefit Year anniversary, after the deduction of any withdrawals (including surrender charges, the protected lifetime income fee and account fee), plus any Purchase Payments made on that date and Persistency Credits, if any, added on that date, is equal to or greater than the Protected Income Base after the 5% Enhancement (if any).

The Account Value Step-up is available even in years in which a withdrawal has occurred.

5% Enhancement. On each Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base, minus Purchase Payments received in the preceding Benefit Year, will be increased by 5% if:

a.

the Annuitant (as well as the Secondary Life if the joint life option is in effect) are under age 86; and

b.

there were no withdrawals in the preceding Benefit Year; and

c.

the rider is within the Enhancement Period described below.

The Enhancement Period is a 10-year period that begins on the effective date of the rider. A new Enhancement Period begins immediately following an Account Value Step-up. If during any Enhancement Period there are no Account Value Step-ups, the 5% Enhancements will terminate at the end of the Enhancement Period and will not restart until the next Benefit Year anniversary following the Benefit Year anniversary upon which an Account Value Step-up occurs. Any new Purchase Payment made after the initial Purchase Payment will be added immediately to the Protected Income Base. However, any new Purchase Payment must be invested in the Contract for at least one Benefit Year before it will be used in calculating the 5% Enhancement. Any new Purchase Payments made within the first 90 days after the effective date of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will be included in the Protected Income Base for purposes of calculating the 5% Enhancement on the first Benefit Year anniversary.

If you decline the Account Value Step-up during the first 10 Benefit Years, you will continue to be eligible for the 5% Enhancements through the end of the current Enhancement Period, but the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) charge could increase to the then current charge at the time of any 5% Enhancements after the 10th Benefit Year anniversary. You will have the option to opt out of the enhancements after the 10th Benefit Year. In order to be eligible to receive further 5% Enhancements the Annuitant (single life option), or the Secondary Life (joint life option) must still be living and be under age 86.

Note: The 5% Enhancement is not available in any Benefit Year there is a withdrawal from Contract Value. A 5% Enhancement will occur in subsequent years only under certain conditions. If you are eligible (as defined below) for the 5% Enhancement in the next Benefit Year, the enhancement will not occur until the Benefit Year anniversary of that year.

The following is an example of the impact of the 5% Enhancement on the Protected Income Base for a Design 1 contract (assuming no withdrawals):

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000; Protected Income Base = $100,000
Additional Purchase Payment on day 30 = $15,000; Protected Income Base = $115,000

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, because the additional Purchase Payment is within the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $120,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05).

Consider a further additional Purchase Payment on day 95 = $10,000; Protected Income Base = $125,000

This additional Purchase Payment is not eligible for the enhancement on the first Benefit year anniversary because it was received after the first 90 days after the effective date of the rider. It will not be eligible for the 5% Enhancement until the second Benefit Year anniversary. Therefore, on the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Protected Income Base will not be less than $130,750 (= $115,000 x 1.05 + $10,000).

As explained below, the 5% Enhancement and Account Value Step-up will not occur in the same year. If the Account Value Step-up provides a greater increase to the Protected Income Base, you will not receive the 5% Enhancement. It is possible that this could happen each Benefit Year (because the Account Value Step-up provided a larger increase each year), and therefore the enhancement would not apply. The 5% Enhancement or the Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base above the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

You will not receive the 5% Enhancement on any Benefit Year anniversary in which there is a withdrawal. The 5% Enhancement will occur on the following Benefit Year anniversary if no further withdrawals are made from the Contract and the rider is within the Enhancement Period.

C-55

The following is an example of how the Account Value Step-ups and the 5% Enhancement affect the Protected Income Base and the potential for the charge to increase or decrease (assuming there have been no withdrawals or new Purchase Payments or Bonus Credits): 

	Contract Value	Protected Income Base with 5% Enhancement	Protected Income Base
Initial Purchase Payment $50,000	$50,000	N/A	$50,000
1st Benefit Year anniversary	$54,000	$52,500	$54,000
2nd Benefit Year anniversary	$53,900	$56,700	$56,700

On the first Benefit Year anniversary, the Account Value Step-up increased the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value of $54,000 since the increase in the Contract Value is greater than the 5% Enhancement amount of $2,500 (5% of $50,000). On the second Benefit Year anniversary, the 5% Enhancement provided a larger increase (5% of $54,000 = $2,700). An Account Value Step-up cannot increase the Protected Income Base beyond the maximum Protected Income Base of $10 million.

Death Prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) has no provision for a payout of the Protected Income Base upon death of the Contractowners or Annuitant. In addition, 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) provides no increase in the Death Benefit value over and above what the Death Benefit provides in the base contract. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described earlier in this prospectus) will be in effect. Election of the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) does not impact the Death Benefit options available for purchase with your annuity contract. Generally all Death Benefit payments must be made in compliance with Internal Revenue Code Sections 72(s) or 401(a)(9), as amended. See The Contracts – Death Benefit.

If the Contractowner is not also named as the Annuitant or the Secondary Life, upon the first death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life, the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider will continue. Upon the second death of either the Annuitant or Secondary Life, 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will terminate.

Upon the death of the Contractowner, the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider will continue only if either Annuitant or the Secondary Life becomes the new Contractowner and payments under i4LIFE® Advantage begin within one year after the death of the Contractowner.

Termination. After the fifth anniversary of the effective date of the 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider, the Contractowner may terminate the rider by notifying us in writing. (If you elected a 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) rider prior to January 1, 2017, and decide to terminate that rider to elect 4LATER® Select Advantage prior to May 18, 2020, this 5-year waiting period is waived.) After this time, the rider will also terminate if the Contractowner fails to adhere to the Investment Requirements. 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) will automatically terminate:

•

on the Annuity Commencement Date; or

•

upon election of 4LATER® Select Advantage; or

•

if the Annuitant is changed including any sale or assignment of the Contract or any pledge of the Contract as collateral; or

•

upon the second death of either the Annuitant or Secondary Life; or

•

when the Protected Income Base is reduced to zero due to withdrawals; or

•

the last day that you can elect i4LIFE® Advantage (age 99 for nonqualified contracts); or

•

upon termination of the underlying contract.

This termination will not result in any increase in Contract Value equal to the Protected Income Base. Upon effective termination of this rider, the benefits and charges within this rider will terminate. If you terminate the rider, you must wait one year before you can elect any Living Benefit Rider available for purchase at that time.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Option. Contractowners who previously elected 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) may decide to later transition to i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk). The transition must be made prior to the Annuity Commencement Date. You cannot have both i4LIFE® Advantage and another Living Benefit Rider in effect on your Contract at the same time. See i4LIFE® Advantage - i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit Transitions for a discussion of this transition.

4LATER® Advantage

4LATER® Advantage (or “4LATER®”) is a rider that protects against market loss by providing you with a method to receive a minimum payout from your annuity. The rider provides a Protected Income Base (described below) prior to the time you begin taking payouts from your annuity. If you elected 4LATER® Advantage, you must elect i4LIFE® Advantage with the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit to receive a benefit from 4LATER® Advantage. Election of this rider may limit how much you can invest in certain Subaccounts. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements.

C-56

4LATER® Advantage Before Payouts Begin

The following discussion applies to 4LATER® Advantage during the accumulation phase of your annuity, referred to as 4LATER®. This is prior to the time any payouts begin under i4LIFE® Advantage with the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit.

Protected Income Base. The Protected Income Base is a value established when you purchased a 4LATER® and will only be used to calculate the minimum payouts available under your Contract at a later date. The Protected Income Base is not available for withdrawals or as a Death Benefit. If you elected 4LATER® at the time you purchase the Contract, the Protected Income Base initially equals the Purchase Payments. If you elected 4LATER® after we issue the Contract, the Protected Income Base will initially equal the Contract Value on the 4LATER® effective date. Additional Purchase Payments automatically increase the Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments . After the first anniversary of the rider effective date, once cumulative additional Purchase Payments exceed $100,000, additional Purchase Payments will be limited to $50,000 per Benefit Year without Home Office approval. Additional Purchase Payments will not be allowed if the Contract Value is zero. Each withdrawal reduces the Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal.

As described below, during the accumulation phase, the Protected Income Base will be automatically enhanced by 15% (adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals as described in the Future Protected Income Base section below) at the end of each Waiting Period. In addition, after the Initial Waiting Period, you may elect to reset your Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value if your Contract Value has grown beyond the 15% enhancement. You may elect this reset on your own or you may choose to have Lincoln Life automatically reset the Protected Income Base for you at the end of each Waiting Period. These reset options are discussed below. Then, when you are ready to elect i4LIFE® Advantage and establish the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the Protected Income Base (if higher than the Contract Value) is used in the 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit calculation.

Waiting Period. The Waiting Period is each consecutive 3-year period which begins on the 4LATER® Effective Date, or on the date of any reset of the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value. At the end of each completed Waiting Period, the Protected Income Base is increased by 15% (as adjusted for Purchase Payments and withdrawals) to equal the Future Protected Income Base as discussed below. The Waiting Period is also the amount of time that must pass before the Protected Income Base can be reset to the current Contract Value. A new Waiting Period begins after each reset and must be completed before the next 15% enhancement or another reset occurs.

Future Protected Income Base. 4LATER® provides a 15% automatic enhancement to the Protected Income Base after a 3-year Waiting Period. This enhancement will continue every 3 years until i4LIFE® Advantage is elected, you terminate 4LATER® or you reach the Maximum Protected Income Base. See Maximum Protected Income Base. During the Waiting Period, the Future Protected Income Base is established to provide the value of this 15% enhancement on the Protected Income Base. After each 3-year Waiting Period is satisfied, the Protected Income Base is increased to equal the value of the Future Protected Income Base. The 4LATER® charge will then be assessed on this newly adjusted Protected Income Base, but the charge rate will not change.

Any Purchase Payment made after the 4LATER® Effective Date, but within 90 days of the contract effective date, will increase the Future Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment, plus 15% of that Purchase Payment.

elected on a Design 1 contract Example: 

Initial Purchase Payment	$100,000
Purchase Payment 60 days later	$10,000
Protected Income Base	$110,000
Future Protected Income Base (during the 1st Waiting Period)	$126,500	($110,000 x 115%)
Protected Income Base (after 1st Waiting Period)	$126,500
New Future Protected Income Base (during 2nd Waiting Period)	$145,475	($126,500 x 115%)

Any Purchase Payments made after the 4LATER® Effective Date and more than 90 days after the contract effective date will increase the Future Protected Income Base by the amount of the Purchase Payment plus 15% of that Purchase Payment proportionately for the number of full years remaining in the current Waiting Period.

elected on a Design 1 contract Example: 

C-57

Protected Income Base	$100,000
Purchase Payment in Year 2	$10,000
New Protected Income Base	$110,000
Future Protected Income Base (during 1st Waiting Period-Year 2)	$125,500	($100,000 x 115%) +
		($10,000 x 100%) +
		($10,000 x 15% x 1/3)
Protected Income Base (after 1st Waiting Period)	$125,500
New Future Protected Income Base (during 2nd Waiting Period)	$144,325	(125,500 x 115%)

Withdrawals reduce the Future Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal.

During any subsequent Waiting Periods, if you elect to reset the Protected Income Base to the Contract Value, the Future Protected Income Base will equal 115% of the Contract Value on the date of the reset and a new Waiting Period will begin. See Resets of the Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value below.

In all situations, the Future Protected Income Base is subject to the Maximum Protected Income Base described below. The Future Protected Income Base is never available to the Contractowner to establish a 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit, but is the value the Protected Income Base will become at the end of the Waiting Period.

Maximum Protected Income Base. The Maximum Protected Income Base is equal to 200% of the Protected Income Base on the 4LATER® Effective Date. The Maximum Protected Income Base will be increased by 200% of any additional Purchase Payments. In all circumstances, the Maximum Protected Income Base can never exceed $10 million. This maximum takes into consideration the combined guaranteed amounts from any Living Benefit Riders under all Lincoln Life contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) owned by you or on which you are the Annuitant.

After a reset to the current Contract Value, the Maximum Protected Income Base will equal 200% of the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the reset not to exceed $10 million.

Each withdrawal will reduce the Maximum Protected Income Base in the same proportion as the amount withdrawn reduces the Contract Value on the Valuation Date of the withdrawal.

Example: 

Protected Income Base	$100,000	Maximum Protected Income Base	$200,000
Purchase Payment in Year 2	$10,000	Increase to Maximum Protected Income Base	$20,000
New Protected Income Base	$110,000	New Maximum Protected Income Base	$220,000
Future Protected Income Base after Purchase Payment	$125,500	Maximum Protected Income Base	$220,000
Protected Income Base (after 1st Waiting Period)	$125,500
Future Protected Income Base (during 2nd Waiting Period)	$144,325	Maximum Protected Income Base	$220,000
Contract Value in Year 4	$112,000
Withdrawal of 10%	$11,200
After Withdrawal (10% adjustment)
Contract Value	$100,800
Protected Income Base	$112,950
Future Protected Income Base	$129,893	Maximum Protected Income Base	$198,000

Resets of the Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value (“Resets”). You may elect to reset the Protected Income Base to the current Contract Value at any time after the initial Waiting Period following: (a) the 4LATER® Effective Date or (b) any prior reset of the Protected Income Base. Resets are subject to a maximum of $10 million and the Annuitant must be under age 81. You might consider resetting the Protected Income Base if your Contract Value has increased above the Protected Income Base (including the 15% automatic enhancements) and you want to lock-in this increased amount to use when setting the Guaranteed Income Benefit. If the Protected Income Base is reset to the Contract Value, the 15% automatic enhancement will not apply until the end of the next Waiting Period.

This reset may be elected by sending a written request to our Home Office or by specifying at the time of purchase that you would like us to administer this reset election for you. If you want us to administer this reset for you, at the end of each 3-year Waiting Period, if the Contract Value is higher than the Protected Income Base (after the Protected Income Base has been reset to the Future Protected Income Base), we will implement this election and the Protected Income Base will be equal to the Contract Value on that date. We will

C-58

notify you that a reset has occurred. This will continue until you elect i4LIFE® Advantage, the Annuitant reaches age 81, or you reach the Maximum Protected Income Base. If we administer this reset election for you, you have 30 days after the election to notify us if you wish to reverse this election and have your Protected Income Base increased to the Future Protected Income Base instead. You may wish to reverse this election if you are not interested in the increased charge. If the Contract Value is less than the Protected Income Base on any reset date, we will not administer this reset. We will not attempt to administer another reset until the end of the next 3-year Waiting Period; however, you have the option to request a reset during this period by sending a written request to our Home Office.

At the time of the reset, a new Waiting Period will begin. Subsequent resets may be elected at the end of each new Waiting Period. The reset will be effective on the next Valuation Date after notice of the reset is approved by us.

We reserve the right to restrict resets to Benefit Year anniversaries. The Benefit Year is the 12-month period starting with the 4LATER® Effective Date and starting with each anniversary of the 4LATER® Effective Date after that. If the Contractowner elects to reset the Protected Income Base, the Benefit Year will begin on the effective date of the reset and each anniversary of the effective date of the reset after that.

Eligibility. To have purchased 4LATER® Advantage, the Annuitant must have been age 80 or younger. If you plan to elect i4LIFE® Advantage within three years of the issue date of 4LATER® Advantage, you will not receive the benefit of the Future Protected Income Base. i4LIFE® Advantage with 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit must be elected by age 85 for qualified contracts or age 99 for nonqualified contracts.

4LATER® Rider Effective Date. If 4LATER® was elected at contract issue, then it became effective on the Contract's effective date. If 4LATER® was elected after the Contract was issued, then it became effective on the next Valuation Date following approval by us.

4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit

When you are ready to elect i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments, the greater of the Protected Income Base accumulated under 4LATER® or the Contract Value will be used to calculate the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. The 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is a minimum payout floor for your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payments.

The Guaranteed Income Benefit will be determined by dividing the greater of the Protected Income Base or Contract Value (or Guaranteed Amount if applicable) on the Periodic Income Commencement Date, by 1,000 and multiplying the result by the rate per $1,000 from the Guaranteed Income Benefit Table in your 4LATER® rider. If the Contract Value is used to establish the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, this rate provides a Guaranteed Income Benefit not less than 75% of the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment (which is also based on the Contract Value). If the Protected Income Base is used to establish the Guaranteed Income Benefit (because it is larger than the Contract Value), the resulting Guaranteed Income Benefit will be more than 75% of the initial i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment.

If the amount of your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment (which is based on your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value) has fallen below the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, because of poor investment results, a payment equal to the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is the minimum payment you will receive. If the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is paid, it will be paid with the same frequency as your i4LIFE® Advantage Regular Income Payment. If your Regular Income Payment is less than the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will reduce your i4LIFE® Advantage Account Value by the Regular Income Payment plus an additional amount equal to the difference between your Regular Income Payment and the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. This withdrawal from your Account Value will be made from the Subaccounts and the fixed account proportionately according to your investment allocations.

The following example illustrates how poor investment performance, which results in a Guaranteed Income Benefit payment, affects the i4LIFE® Account Value: 

i4LIFE® Account Value before market decline	$135,000
i4LIFE® Account Value after market decline	$100,000
Guaranteed Income Benefit	$810
Regular Income Payment after market decline	$769
Account Value after market decline and Guaranteed Income Benefit payment	$99,190

If your Account Value reaches zero as a result of withdrawals to provide the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, we will continue to pay you an amount equal to the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit.

When your Account Value reaches zero, your i4LIFE® Advantage Access Period will end and the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period will begin. Additional amounts withdrawn from the Account Value to provide the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit may terminate your Access Period earlier than originally scheduled and will reduce your Death Benefit. See i4LIFE® Advantage Death Benefits. After the Access Period ends, we will continue to pay the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit for as long as the Annuitant (or

C-59

the Secondary Life, if applicable) is living (i.e., the i4LIFE® Advantage Lifetime Income Period). If your Account Value equals zero, no Death Benefit will be paid.

If the market performance in your Contract is sufficient to provide Regular Income Payments at a level that exceeds the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit, the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit will never come into effect.

The 4LATER® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit will automatically step-up every three years to 75% of the then current Regular Income Payment, if that result is greater than the immediately prior 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit. The step-up will occur on every third Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary for 15 years. At the end of a 15-year step-up period, the Contractowner may elect a new 15-year step-up period by submitting a written request to the Home Office. If you prefer, when you start the Guaranteed Income Benefit, you can request that Lincoln Life administer this election for you.

Additional Purchase Payments cannot be made to your Contract after the Periodic Income Commencement Date. The 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit is reduced by withdrawals (other than Regular Income Payments) in the same proportion that the withdrawals reduce the Account Value. You may want to discuss the impact of additional withdrawals with your registered representative.

Termination. After the later of the third anniversary of the 4LATER® rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset, the 4LATER® rider may be terminated upon written notice to us. Prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date, 4LATER® will automatically terminate upon any of the following events:

•

termination of the Contract to which the 4LATER® rider is attached;

•

the change of or the death of the Annuitant (except if the surviving spouse assumes ownership of the Contract and the role of the Annuitant upon death of the Contractowner); or

•

the change of Contractowner (except if the surviving spouse assumes ownership of the Contract and the role of Annuitant upon the death of the Contractowner), including the assignment of the Contract; or

•

the last day that you can elect i4LIFE® Advantage (age 85 for qualified contracts and age 99 for nonqualified contracts).

After the Periodic Income Commencement Date, the 4LATER® rider will terminate due to any of the following events:

•

the death of the Annuitant (or the later of the death of the Annuitant or Secondary Life if a joint payout was elected); or

•

a Contractowner requested decrease in the Access Period or a change to the Regular Income Payment frequency.

A termination due to a decrease in the Access Period, a change in the Regular Income Payment frequency, or upon written notice from the Contractowner will be effective as of the Valuation Date on the next Periodic Income Commencement Date anniversary. Termination will be only for the 4LATER® Guaranteed Income Benefit and not the i4LIFE® Advantage election, unless otherwise specified.

If you terminate 4LATER® prior to the Periodic Income Commencement Date, you must wait one year before you can elect another Living Benefit Rider. If you terminate the 4LATER® rider on or after the Periodic Income Commencement Date, you cannot re-elect it. You may be able to elect any available version of the Guaranteed Income Benefit after one year. The Guaranteed Income Benefit will be based on the Account Value at the time of the election. The election of one of these benefits, if available, will be treated as a new purchase, subject to the terms and charges in effect at the time of election.

Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage

Beginning May 18, 2020, this rider will no longer be available for sale. The Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage Rider (the “LTC Rider”) provides a way to manage the potential impact of long-term care expenses. The LTC Rider provides the potential to receive as LTC Benefits your Purchase Payments plus an additional amount equal to two times your Purchase Payments. These benefits are paid to you income tax-free. In addition, you have the opportunity to increase your tax-free long-term care benefits if there is investment gain in your Contract. The LTC Rider provides monthly benefit payments (“Long-Term Care Benefits” or “LTC Benefits”) in the event: (1) you are “Chronically Ill,” which means you are either unable to perform two out of six functional activities of daily living (such as feeding yourself, bathing, or dressing) or you suffer from a severe cognitive impairment that requires substantial supervision, and (2) you are receiving long-term care services that qualify for coverage under the LTC Rider (“Long-Term Care Services”). Long-Term Care Services include, but are not limited to, nursing home care, hospice care, adult day care, assisted living services, home health care and rehabilitative services.

If you purchase the LTC Rider, you may not make any additional Purchase Payments more than 90 days from the contract date. Accordingly, you should plan on making enough Purchase Payments to fund your anticipated needs under the Contract during the first 90 days. Even then, the LTC Rider may not cover all of the long-term care expenses incurred by you during the period of coverage. On the other hand, you may never need long-term care services or, even if you do, you may never qualify to receive any of the benefits provided under this LTC Rider even though you have paid a charge(s) for the LTC Rider. Accordingly, we strongly advise you to review carefully all Contract and rider limitations. The risks associated with the LTC Rider are outlined below.

The LTC Rider, if purchased, must be elected at the time you purchase your Contract and may not be added to existing contracts. While the LTC Rider is in force, you may not purchase any of the other Living Benefit Riders that we offer. By purchasing the LTC Rider, you will be limited in how you may invest and must adhere to Investment Requirements. See The Contracts – Investment

C-60

Requirements. There is no guarantee that the LTC Rider will be available in the future, as we reserve the right to discontinue the benefit at any time. In addition, we may make different versions of the LTC Rider available.

The features and charges for this rider and also the terms and definitions will vary in certain states. You should discuss the specific provisions applicable to your state with your registered representative. Your rider will contain the specific provisions applicable to you. This rider is not available for Design 3 contracts.

Why would I want to purchase the LTC Rider? Some of the reasons why you may consider purchasing the LTC Rider are:

•

you would like to pay for Long-Term Care Services by withdrawing your Contract Value on a tax-free basis and without any surrender charges;

•

for the potential of receiving, in addition to your Contract Value, up to two times your Purchase Payments in tax-free LTC Benefit payments that we pay from our own assets in our general account during the Extension Benefit period;

•

for the favorable tax treatment of the charges deducted in order to pay for the LTC Rider (compared to taking a withdrawal from an annuity contract to pay premiums on a traditional stand-alone long-term care insurance policy);

•

for the opportunity to receive investment gain in the Contract as tax-free LTC Benefits, if you purchase the Growth Benefit option;

•

you want long-term care insurance, but want to retain the ability to access your Contract Value for emergencies (although this could reduce or terminate the LTC Rider), a feature that may not be available in stand-alone long-term care insurance policies; and

•

you want long-term care insurance, but at the same time you want to retain the ability to have a Death Benefit, a feature that may not be available in stand-alone long-term care insurance policies (although you should understand that Acceleration Benefit payments and Growth Benefit payments are considered withdrawals that reduce the amount of the Death Benefit).

Are there ways I can pay long-term care expenses under the Contract other than by purchasing the LTC Rider?

•

You can always access your Contract Value through conventional withdrawals from your Contract, even if you have not elected to purchase the LTC Rider. However, withdrawals may be subject to surrender charges, income taxes (as investment gains, if any, are deemed to be withdrawn first), and if taken before age 59½, penalty taxes. Such withdrawals also would be limited to your Contract Value, which may decrease. Withdrawals may be taken to cover long-term care expenses for yourself or anyone else. LTC Benefits, on the other hand, are subject to favorable tax treatment, would not have any surrender charges, and may exceed the amount of Contract Value you would otherwise have had available. LTC Benefits may be received only if you are the Covered Life.

•

You can also access your Contract Value through conventional annuity payments, even if you have not elected to purchase the LTC Rider. However, while not fully taxable until cost basis has been returned, such payments are not tax-free and are intended to provide protected income payments over an extended lifetime. LTC Benefits, however, may be taken over a shorter period of time (as short as six years) and are received tax-free.

•

We offer other Living Benefit Riders that provide a guaranteed income stream and/or a guaranteed withdrawal benefit that may be used to pay for long-term care services. Like the LTC Rider, benefit payments under these riders may exceed Contract Value, but it may take you 20 years or more to receive them. In addition, these other Living Benefit Riders are not Qualified Long-Term Care insurance and their benefits cannot be received tax-free, even if used to pay long-term care expenses. On the other hand, the cost of the LTC Rider may be higher than the cost of other Living Benefit Riders we sell, and the procedures to determine eligibility and to request benefits under the LTC Rider are more extensive than those required to receive benefits under other Living Benefit Riders. In any case, you will be unable to purchase any other Living Benefit Rider that we may offer if you purchase the LTC Rider. See The Contracts – Living Benefit Riders.

•

You may also speak to your registered representative about other ways to pay for long-term care expenses. There are insurance contracts, other than annuities, which provide long-term care benefits and there may also be programs offered by your state.

How do I qualify for LTC Benefits? If, after the first Contract Year (subject to state variations), you become Chronically Ill and are receiving Long-Term Care Services, you may receive monthly LTC Benefit payments under the LTC Rider. Chronically Ill means you are either unable to perform two out of six functional activities of daily living (such as feeding yourself, bathing, or dressing) or you suffer from a severe cognitive impairment that requires substantial supervision. You should understand that although you may begin receiving LTC Benefits at any time after the first Contract Year, the LTC Rider was designed optimally for LTC Benefits to be paid on or after the fifth contract anniversary.

Importantly, the LTC Rider is not self-effecting and you must satisfy all of the conditions, and take the necessary steps to apply and qualify for, and then maintain your eligibility for, benefits under the LTC Rider. For example, a licensed health care practitioner must certify in a written assessment that you are Chronically Ill, and also complete a plan of care for you, which is a written plan of care that is developed based on your written assessment and specifies the type, frequency and duration of all Long-Term Care Services you will need (“Plan of Care”). In addition, you must wait 90 days after the date that you start to receive Long-Term Care Services before we will start paying LTC Benefits (the “deductible period”). Once we have determined that you are eligible for benefits, you may submit a Request for Benefits form. The Request for Benefits form will be used to pay LTC Benefits for a period of up to three months. You will need to provide a new Request for Benefits form to continue to receive LTC Benefits beyond the period requested in the Request for Benefits form.

C-61

How do LTC Benefits impact my Contract Value? LTC Benefits may be paid out of your Contract Value or from our own assets in our general account. In general, the LTC Rider provides for LTC benefit amounts to be withdrawn out of the Contract Value first on a tax-free basis until you either receive your Purchase Payments or your entire Contract Value is depleted, whichever occurs first. At that time, if you are still living, we will continue to make the same tax-free payments to you from our own assets in our general account for a designated period of time or until your death, if earlier. Because we transfer some or all of your Contract Value to the LTC Fixed Account (which is part of our general account) on the date we make the determination of your initial eligibility to receive LTC Benefits, all LTC Benefit payments are subject to claims of our general creditors and to the claims-paying ability of Lincoln Life. If you begin receiving LTC Benefits and then stop receiving LTC Benefits for twelve consecutive months, we will allow you to transfer in installments the Contract Value in the LTC Fixed Account back to the Subaccounts. See LTC Fixed Account.

Are the LTC Benefit payments tax-free? The LTC Rider is a Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Policy under Section 7702B(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. Any LTC Benefits paid under the LTC Rider, as well as any charges deducted under the Rider, will not be reported as taxable income to you, subject to the Internal Revenue Code limitations.

What are the LTC Benefits? There are two primary LTC Benefits: the Acceleration Benefit and the Extension Benefit. There is also an additional optional LTC Benefit – the Growth Benefit – that is available for an additional charge. The Acceleration and Growth Benefits are calculated based on the LTC Guaranteed Amount. The initial Extension Benefit is calculated based on the initial Acceleration Benefit and will be double the dollar amount of the Acceleration Benefit. The LTC Guaranteed Amount initially is equal to the Acceleration Benefit, which is your initial Purchase Payment and any subsequent Purchase Payments made in the first 90 days after purchase. (If you purchase the LTC Rider, you may not make additional Purchase Payments more than 90 days after purchase.) If you elect the Growth Benefit option, the LTC Guaranteed Amount increases annually by the amount of investment gain, if any, in the Subaccounts and any fixed account in which you are invested through automatic step-ups. You should understand that the LTC Guaranteed Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit. Payment of Acceleration Benefits and Growth Benefits decrease the LTC Guaranteed Amount by the amount of the respective LTC Benefit payment. The LTC Guaranteed Amount is also reduced, but on a proportional basis, by certain withdrawals that exceed a specified percentage of the amount that the Contract Value exceeds the LTC Guaranteed Amount, called “Excess Withdrawals.” The Extension Benefit is also reduced by Excess Withdrawals.

•

Acceleration Benefit: The first payments we will make under the LTC Rider will be Acceleration Benefits, which are paid out of your Contract Value. The Acceleration Benefit is not affected by investment results. Acceleration Benefits are paid from your Contract Value; however, if your Contract Value is reduced to zero before the Acceleration Benefit is paid, we will make remaining payments from our own assets in our general account. In some states the Acceleration Benefit is referred to as the Accumulation Long-Term Care Benefit.

•

Extension Benefit: When the Acceleration Benefit is reduced to zero, we will pay you Extension Benefit payments. Extension Benefits are paid from our general account. This means that, while Acceleration Benefits are funded in whole or in part by your Contract Value, we will make Extension Benefit payments from our own assets in our general account. The initial Extension Benefit will be double the dollar amount of the initial Acceleration Benefit. The Extension Benefit is not affected by investment results.

•

Growth Benefit: If you are interested in potentially being able to “lock in” any investment gains in your Contract with respect to your LTC Rider, you may purchase the Growth Benefit option at issue for an additional charge. The Growth Benefit option increases the LTC Guaranteed Amount annually by the amount of investment gain, if any, in the Subaccounts and any fixed account in which you are invested through automatic step-ups. Automatic step-ups occur annually through age 75 or until you reach the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount of $800,000, whichever occurs earlier. If you do not purchase the Growth Benefit option, any investment gain will not increase your LTC Benefit payments. While you can withdraw any gains from your Contract Value the same way you make regular withdrawals from your Contract, doing so could have a negative impact on your LTC Benefits, as described in more detail below. If you elect the Growth Benefit option, you will not be able to make any Conforming Withdrawals and all withdrawals will be Excess Withdrawals that reduce your LTC Benefits. Conforming and Excess Withdrawals are described below in more detail. Once you begin receiving LTC Benefits and Contract Value is moved to the LTC Fixed Account, the Contract Value in the LTC Fixed Account will only increase by the amount of interest credited to the LTC Fixed Account. Growth Benefits are paid from your Contract Value; however, if your Contract Value is reduced to zero due to conforming or non-excess withdrawals and/or adverse investment experience of the Subaccounts before the locked-in Growth Benefit is paid, we will make remaining payments from our general account.

When are LTC Benefits paid? LTC Benefits are paid monthly, and you tell us the monthly amount that you want to receive up to a maximum monthly amount over a designated period of time. If you are residing in a nursing home or are receiving hospice care, you may request monthly payments up to the full monthly maximum. See Maximum Monthly Level Benefit. Contractowners in certain states may also request up to the full monthly maximum for assisted living services. However, if you are eligible and qualify for other qualified Long-Term Care Services (such as home health care or adult day care) but are not residing in a nursing home or receiving hospice care, you may only request up to 50% of the monthly maximum. Contractowners in the following states may only request up to 50% of the monthly maximum for assisted living services: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY. See Determining LTC Benefits – Maximum Monthly Level Benefit and Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit for a more detailed description.

C-62

The Acceleration Benefit will be paid monthly over a period of time known as the “Acceleration Benefit Duration.” The Acceleration Benefit Duration will be at least 24 months, but may be longer if you take payments in early Contract Years, or if you take less than the maximum permitted. After the Acceleration Benefit Duration ends, the Extension Benefit will then be paid over a period of time known as the “Extension Benefit Duration.” The Extension Benefit Duration is twice the length of the Acceleration Benefit Duration. Growth Benefit payments are spread over both the Acceleration Benefit Duration and the Extension Benefit Duration. The Acceleration Benefit Duration and the Extension Benefit Duration together make up the LTC Benefit Duration. The Acceleration Benefit Duration and Extension Benefit Duration will usually run consecutively and without interruption unless you voluntarily elect to stop payments or become ineligible to receive LTC Benefits. The LTC Benefit Durations would resume if you elect to restart payments or become eligible to receive LTC Benefits.

On the contract date, the Acceleration Benefit Duration is 84 months (i.e., 7 years), so it would take you 84 months to receive the total Acceleration Benefit. However, the Acceleration Benefit Duration shortens each year until the fifth contract anniversary, when the Acceleration Benefit Duration will be its shortest duration of 24 months (i.e., 2 years). Equally important, as the Acceleration Benefit Duration shortens, the maximum monthly amounts under the LTC Rider increase. If you wait to request to begin receiving LTC Benefit payments until the fifth contract anniversary or after, you will maximize the monthly LTC Benefit payment available to you. For example, if you wait to request to begin receiving LTC Benefit payments until the fifth contract anniversary, the Acceleration Benefit Duration will be 24 months, and the Extension Benefit Period will be 48 months, or twice the Acceleration Benefit Period, making the LTC Benefit Duration 72 months. The Growth Benefit would be paid over all 72 months (over both the Acceleration Benefit Duration and the Extension Benefit Duration). If you take less than the maximum monthly amount (by choice or by the 50% limitation applied to non-nursing home/non-hospice care), you will extend the Acceleration Benefit Duration (and thus the Extension Benefit Duration).

How do withdrawals affect my LTC Benefits? The LTC Rider may permit limited withdrawals of Contract Value on an annual basis that will not impact your LTC Benefit payments. You may withdraw each year (and in addition to LTC Benefit payments, if you happen to be receiving these at the same time) up to 5% of the amount that your Contract Value exceeds the LTC Guaranteed Amount (if there is any such excess) as of the immediately preceding contract anniversary, without a decrease in the LTC Benefits. Such withdrawals are referred to as “Conforming Withdrawals.” However, the amount of withdrawals that exceed 5% of any excess of the Contract Value over the LTC Guaranteed Amount will be an “Excess Withdrawal.” This means if the LTC Guaranteed Amount is greater than or equal to the Contract Value on any contract anniversary, any withdrawal will be an Excess Withdrawal.

Excess Withdrawals will result in proportional reductions to all LTC Benefits by the same percentage that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. Excess Withdrawals may result in significant reductions of benefits under the LTC Rider and/or its termination. Accordingly, if you think that you may need to access your Contract Value through withdrawals, the LTC Rider may not be a good investment for you.

To further explain the application of this limitation to withdrawals, if you have not purchased the Growth Benefit option, you may be able to make Conforming Withdrawals if your Contract Value has grown above your Purchase Payments. However, accessing more than modest amounts (i.e., more than 5%) of those investment gains could have a significant negative impact on your LTC Benefits. If you elect the Growth Benefit option, on the other hand, you will not be able to make any Conforming Withdrawals and all withdrawals will be Excess Withdrawals that negatively impact your LTC Benefits. In addition, since Excess Withdrawals result in proportional reductions to all LTC Benefits, your LTC Benefits may be reduced by more than dollar for dollar when those benefits exceed the Contract Value. If you reach age 76 or the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit of $800,000, however, you may be able to then begin making Conforming Withdrawals if your Contract Value exceeds the LTC Guaranteed Amount on the immediately preceding contract anniversary because the Growth Benefit no longer increases after this time. This maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount includes the combined LTC Guaranteed Amounts of all Lincoln Life variable annuity contracts (or contracts issued by our affiliates) owned by you.

If the LTC Guaranteed Amount is equal to or greater than your Contract Value on a contract anniversary, any withdrawal in that Contract Year will be an Excess Withdrawal. Any Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value to zero will terminate the LTC Rider and the only LTC Benefit that you may be eligible to receive will be the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected. See the Withdrawals section later in this discussion.

Are there any restrictions on how I invest my money if I purchase the LTC Rider? By purchasing the LTC Rider, you will be limited in how you can invest in the Subaccounts and the fixed account. Specifically, you may invest only pursuant to Investment Requirements as described in this prospectus. The Subaccounts eligible for investment are designed for steadier, but potentially more modest, investment performance than you may otherwise receive by investing in Subaccounts with more aggressive investment objectives. The fixed account will be available to you for dollar-cost averaging purposes only. When we determine you are eligible to receive LTC Benefits, we will move Contract Value equal to the LTC Guaranteed Amount into the LTC Fixed Account from which we will make Acceleration Benefit payments and, if elected, Growth Benefit payments. Accordingly, after that point, such transferred amounts will not participate in market performance, but will accrue interest.

What are the charges for the LTC Rider? While the LTC Rider is in effect, there is a charge that is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis (the “LTC Charge”). The LTC Charge consists of the sum of three charges: the Acceleration Benefit Charge, the Extension Benefit Charge, and the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge (if elected). The LTC Charge will be higher if you choose the Growth Benefit option because the Acceleration Benefit Charge rate is higher for the Growth Benefit option than it is without it, and

C-63

because the LTC Guaranteed Amount may also be higher if there is Contract growth. The Extension Benefit Charge and the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge do not have guaranteed maximum annual charge rates and may change at any time, subject to state regulatory approval. For more information, please see Fee Tables and Charges and Deductions for Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Long-Term CareSM Advantage Charges.

Will I pay a surrender charge on LTC Benefit payments? LTC Benefit payments are not subject to any surrender charge. However, LTC Benefit payments will count against the Contract’s free withdrawal provision, which may impact whether surrender charges are applied to other withdrawals.

Can I add the LTC Rider to an existing Contract? The LTC Rider may only be purchased at the time the Contract is issued and is not available if you have already purchased a Contract. The availability and certain options and features of the LTC Rider will depend upon your state’s approval, and may not be available in some states. Check with your registered representative regarding the availability of the LTC Rider.

What if I decide to terminate the LTC Rider? The LTC Rider provides a nonforfeiture benefit if you terminate the LTC Rider in certain circumstances. There is a nonforfeiture benefit, called the “Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit,” provided without charge that pays a reduced long-term care insurance benefit if you terminate the LTC Rider due to a specified increase of the charge for the Extension Benefit and/or the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit if elected. You may also choose to add an enhanced nonforfeiture benefit, called the “Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit,” for an additional charge that pays a reduced long-term care insurance benefit if you terminate the LTC Rider for any reason after three years. The only difference between the two nonforfeiture benefits is the circumstances under which you may terminate the LTC Rider to receive the benefit. Under either nonforfeiture benefit you may receive an amount equal to the greater of one month’s maximum monthly benefit or an amount equal to the sum of all Extension Benefit Charges and Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charges paid minus the amount of any Extension Benefits paid prior to the LTC Rider’s termination. Termination of the LTC Rider does not automatically terminate the underlying contract.

What are the risks associated with the LTC Rider? Some of the principal risks associated with the LTC Rider are:

•

You may never need long-term care. Thus, you may pay for a feature from which you never realize any benefits.

•

Even if you need long-term care, you may not qualify for LTC Benefits under the LTC Rider, or the LTC Benefits you receive may not cover all of the long-term expenses you incur since the maximum amount of LTC Benefit you may receive with the Growth Benefit is capped at $22,222 per month and $16,666 per month without the Growth Benefit, assuming you wait until after the fifth contract anniversary to receive LTC Benefits.

•

You may die before you obtain all the LTC Benefit payments to which you would otherwise be entitled. Remaining LTC Benefit payments that would have otherwise been payable, do not increase the amount paid on your death.

•

Your ability to withdraw Contract Value without substantially and irrevocably reducing your LTC Benefits will be limited. Accordingly, you should not purchase the LTC Rider if you anticipate taking withdrawals or needing more than limited access to your Contract Value. In general, if you elect the Growth Benefit option, you will not be able to make any withdrawals without permanently reducing your LTC Benefits. If you do not purchase the Growth Benefit, you will be able to make withdrawals of up to 5% of the excess of your Contract Value over the LTC Guaranteed Amount annually without reducing your LTC Benefits. That restriction will exist until LTC Benefit payments are complete or the LTC Rider otherwise terminates.

•

You must wait at least one year before you can take LTC Benefit payments.

•

If you take LTC Benefit payments before the fifth contract anniversary, your monthly payments will be smaller and it will take you longer to receive the full amount of LTC Benefits than if you begin taking LTC Benefit payments after the fifth contract anniversary.

•

Even if you would otherwise be able to qualify for LTC Benefits, you may fail to file required forms or documentation and have your benefit denied or revoked.

•

Your variable Subaccount investments will be restricted to certain Subaccounts and in certain percentages if you purchase the LTC Rider; the Subaccounts are designed for steadier, but potentially more modest, investment performance that you may otherwise receive by investing in Subaccounts with more aggressive investment objectives.

•

If you begin taking LTC Benefit payments, your Contract Value to the extent of the LTC Guaranteed Amount will be transferred to the LTC Fixed Account, where it will not be insulated from the claims of our general creditors, will be subject to the claims-paying ability of Lincoln Life, and will not participate in any market performance.

•

If you purchase the LTC Rider, you may not purchase any of the other Living Benefit Riders that we offer.

•

The Extension Benefit Charge and Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge rates are not subject to a maximum, and may increase significantly (subject to state approval).

•

LTC Benefit payments may reduce your Death Benefit by deducting withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the Contract Value.

Eligibility to Purchase the LTC Rider

Eligibility Requirements. Beginning May 18, 2020, the Lincoln Long-Term CareSM Advantage Rider will no longer be available. If you wish to purchase the LTC Rider, you must meet certain eligibility requirements:

C-64

•

The LTC Rider must be purchased at the same time you purchase your Contract. The LTC Rider cannot be added to existing contracts.

•

LTC Benefits are payable to the person insured under the LTC Rider (the “Covered Life”). The Covered Life must be the Contractowner and the Annuitant under the Contract. If a grantor trust owns the Contract, the Covered Life will be the Annuitant. There can only be one Covered Life. Thus, if the Contract has joint owners, the Covered Life must be the primary owner.

•

The Covered Life must be at least 45 years of age and not older than 74 years of age on the contract date, unless the Growth Benefit option is elected, in which case the Covered Life may not be older than 69 years of age. We must confirm your eligibility through a verification process that includes a review of prescription medications that you are taking, or have taken in the past 5 years, and your medical history. Certain medical conditions or the use of certain medications or medical devices will disqualify you from being eligible to purchase the LTC Rider. Some of the types of medical conditions that will disqualify you from purchasing the rider are Cancer, Parkinson’s Disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Heart Disease, Diabetes, Alzheimer’s/Dementia, Bipolar Disorder, Schizophrenia, AIDS, Pulmonary Disorders, Kidney Disease, Liver Disease, Lupus, Rheumatoid Arthritis and Myasthenia Gravis as well as medications that are used to treat these conditions. This list is not exhaustive, there are other conditions and medications that are not included. We reserve the right to add or remove medical conditions and prescription drugs at our discretion.

•

You will be required to sign a waiver of confidentiality form that will allow us to conduct a third-party prescription drug screening at the time we process your application.

Issuance Procedures. We will notify you if we decline to issue the LTC Rider within 2 days of our receipt of your application that is in good order. We will not issue the LTC Rider if you do not meet the eligibility requirements. If we decline to issue the LTC Rider, we will still issue the annuity contract.

Required Signature. If the LTC Rider is issued, you will be required to sign and return one copy of a contract amendment to verify that the medical statements relating to your medical history that you provided upon application for the LTC Rider are true. The signed contract amendment must be returned to us within 45 days of the contract date. Failure to sign and return a signed copy of the contract amendment within 45 days of the contract date will result in an automatic termination of the LTC Rider. If the LTC Rider is terminated for failure to return the contract amendment, you will not be able to terminate the Contract without penalty (because the free look period will have expired). Check with your registered representative regarding state specific requirements in California and Maryland.

Limitations on Purchase Payments. The LTC Benefits will be calculated based upon the dollar amount of Purchase Payments made into the Contract in the first 90 days after the contract date. No additional Purchase Payments may be made into the Contract. The minimum Purchase Payment amount under a Contract if you purchase the LTC Rider is $50,000 ($75,000 in California and South Dakota), and the maximum amount of cumulative Purchase Payments that can be made during that 90-day period is $400,000. There is no guarantee that the LTC Rider or certain options will be available for new purchasers in the future as we reserve the right to discontinue the LTC Rider at any time.

Limitations on Purchasing Other Riders. You may not purchase any other Living Benefit Rider otherwise available with your Contract or any other living benefits that we may offer in the future while you own the LTC Rider.

Investment Restrictions. By purchasing the LTC Rider, you will be limited in how you can invest in the Subaccounts and the fixed account. You must allocate all of your Purchase Payments and Contract Value at all times in accordance with Investment Requirements. For details about these limitations, see The Contracts – Investment Requirements.

Eligibility to Receive LTC Benefit Payments

Establishing Initial Eligibility for LTC Benefits

You will not be eligible to receive LTC Benefit payments under the LTC Rider until after the first Contract Year. (Although we refer to the first contract anniversary throughout this discussion, this provision may vary by state.) After the first contract anniversary, you may start the process to request and receive LTC Benefits. You must take the following steps to start receiving LTC Benefit payments: 

PLEASE NOTE: The process to request LTC Benefits is involved and you should carefully consider that you may need substantial

assistance from a family member or other trusted person to claim and obtain LTC Benefits once you are receiving long-term care.

In this regard, our claims-processing department can help you if necessary. You should plan ahead to ensure that a person you

trust has agreed to be responsible for completing the initial process, as well as the ongoing requirements, discussed below.

 

Step 1: You must first notify us by phone at 800-487-1485, or send written notice to: PO Box 21008, Dept. 0514, Greensboro, NC 27420-1008 of your intent to request LTC Benefits. We will process any notifications or requests for LTC Benefits submitted by you, or on your behalf by your legally authorized representative, which may include a court-appointed conservator or an individual acting under a valid power of attorney. Before starting the eligibility process we will verify that the first contract anniversary has passed.

C-65

Step 2:	Once we receive notification of your intent to request LTC Benefits, we will provide you with claims forms which will be used to determine your initial eligibility to receive LTC Benefits.
Step 3:	You must complete and submit the claims forms. This requires that you have a Licensed Health Care Practitioner certify in a written assessment that you are Chronically Ill and complete a Plan of Care for you, which is a written plan of care that is developed based on your written assessment and specifies the type, frequency and duration of all Long-Term Care Services you will need.
Step 4:	We will determine your eligibility based on the 1) assessment; 2) Plan of Care; and 3) whether you have been or will be receiving Long-Term Care Services covered by the LTC Rider due to you being Chronically Ill. Once we have determined your eligibility for benefits, we will send you a Request for Benefits form to be completed by you in order to receive LTC Benefits.
Step 5:	You must submit a Request for Benefits form within 90 days after we have determined that you are eligible for LTC Benefits. The Request for Benefits form will be used to pay LTC Benefits for a period of up to three months.
Step 6:	You must satisfy the 90 day deductible period before any LTC Benefits will be paid. The 90-day deductible period is measured from the date you first receive Long-Term Care Services. See the Deductible Period paragraph later in this section.

Written Assessment. In order to determine whether you have been or will be receiving Long-Term Care Services due to being Chronically Ill, we require that a Licensed Health Care Practitioner certify, within the preceding 12 months, in a written assessment that you are Chronically Ill. You have a Chronic Illness if you require either: 1) substantial assistance with performing at least two of six Activities of Daily Living (“ADLs”) for at least 90 days or; 2) substantial supervision to protect you from threats to health and safety due to severe cognitive impairment. Severe cognitive impairment is deterioration or loss of intellectual capacity that is:

•

Comparable to (and includes) Alzheimer’s disease and similar forms of irreversible dementia; and

•

Is measured and confirmed by clinical evidence and standardized tests that reliably measure impairment in short-term or long-term memory; orientation as to person (such as who they are), place (such as their location), and time (such as day, date and year); and deductive or abstract reasoning, including judgment as it relates to safety awareness.

The written assessment will evaluate your ability to perform ADLs and/or your cognitive condition. You will be responsible for the cost of obtaining the initial and any subsequent assessments. 

A Licensed Health Care Practitioner is a physician (as defined in Section 1861(r)(1) of the Social Security Act, as amended); a

registered professional nurse; a licensed social worker; or another professional individual who meets the requirements prescribed

by the United States Secretary of the Treasury.

 

The six Activities of Daily Living are:
1.	Bathing – the ability to wash oneself by sponge bath, or in either a tub or shower, including the task of getting into or out of the tub or shower.
2.	Continence – the ability to maintain control of bowel and bladder function, the ability to perform associated personal hygiene (including caring of a catheter or colostomy bag).
3.	Dressing – the ability to put on or take off all items of clothing and any necessary braces, fasteners or artificial limbs.
4.	Eating – the ability to feed oneself by getting food into the body from a receptacle (such as plate, cup or table) or by a feeding tube or intravenously.
5.	Toileting – the ability to get to and from the toilet, get on or off the toilet, and perform associated personal hygiene.
6.	Transferring – the ability to move oneself into or out of a bed, chair or wheelchair.

Plan of Care. The Licensed Health Care Practitioner must also complete a Plan of Care for you, which is a written plan of care that is developed based on the written assessment that you are Chronically Ill (as described in the preceding section) and specifies the type, frequency and duration of all Long-Term Care Services you will need. Long-Term Care Services are maintenance or personal care services, or any necessary diagnostic, preventive, therapeutic, curing, treating, mitigating, and rehabilitative service that is required because you are Chronically Ill and that are provided pursuant to a Plan of Care. The Long-Term Care Services include, but are not limited to, nursing home care, hospice care, adult day care, assisted living services, home health care and rehabilitative services as described in the Long-Term Care Coverage Endorsement. You will be responsible for the cost of obtaining the required Plan of Care. In order to receive LTC Benefits under the LTC Rider, you must follow the Plan of Care.

Exclusions and Limitations. The following are not Long-Term Care Services under the LTC Rider:

•

alcohol and drug treatment, unless the drug addiction is a result of medication taken in doses prescribed by a physician

•

care in a facility operated primarily for the treatment of mental or nervous disorders, other than qualifying stays or care resulting from a clinical diagnosis of Alzheimer’s Disease or similar forms of irreversible dementia

C-66

•

treatment arising out of an attempt (while sane or insane) at suicide or an intentionally self-inflicted injury

•

treatment in government facilities, such as the healthcare facilities run by the Veterans Administration (unless exclusion of coverage is otherwise prohibited by law)

•

services for which benefits are available to you under Medicare or other governmental program (other than Medicaid), workers compensation laws, employer liability laws, occupational disease laws or motor vehicle no-fault laws

•

services or care provided to you outside the United States

•

all care and support services that are provided by immediate members of your family, whether paid or unpaid.

Deductible Period. You must satisfy the 90 day deductible period before any LTC Benefits will be paid. This means, you must wait 90 days after the date that you start to receive Long-Term Care Services covered under the LTC Rider before we will start paying LTC Benefits. For example, assume that you enter a nursing home on March 1 of a particular year after the first contract anniversary, due to not being able to perform two of the six ADLs. You notify us of your intent to request LTC Benefits on April 1. On April 8, you receive the claims forms from us. On May 1, we receive the completed claims forms, including the written assessment and Plan of Care. On May 10, we determine that your eligibility to receive LTC Benefits was March 1 and send you a Request for Benefits form. On May 20, we receive the completed Request for Benefits form. The deductible period would be 90 days from March 1 and will end as of May 29. We would start monthly LTC Benefit payments after May 29.

Requesting LTC Benefits. We will notify you in writing once we have determined your eligibility for benefits and will send you a Request for Benefits form to be completed by you in order to receive LTC Benefits. The Request for Benefits form will be used to pay LTC Benefits for a period of up to three months. You will need to provide a new Request for Benefits form to continue to receive LTC Benefits beyond the period requested in the Request for Benefits form. This form will notify us of the dollar amount of LTC Benefit payments that you are requesting, where you would like us to pay them, and from whom you are receiving Long-Term Care Services. If the Request for Benefits form is not received within 90 days after we have determined that you are eligible for LTC Benefits, you will no longer be deemed eligible to receive LTC Benefits and the eligibility determination process will restart. See the Federal Taxation of this section for a discussion of the limits on the dollar amount of LTC Benefit payments. 

Please Note: The amount you request in LTC Benefits may be more or less that your actual expenses for Long-Term Care

Services. The LTC Rider is not a reimbursement plan and does not depend on your actual expenses. However, if you receive

amounts in excess of the IRS limit, those amounts may be taxable unless you have actually incurred long-term care expenses of

that amount. See General Provisions – Federal Taxation.

Denial of LTC Benefits. We will notify you in writing if we deny any request for LTC Benefits. We will deny a request for LTC Benefits if we determine that you are not eligible to receive LTC Benefits as set forth in the preceding sections or if you have not fulfilled any of the requirements in order for us to determine your eligibility or process your request. You may request a review of our decision. A request for a review of a denial of a request for LTC Benefits must be in writing and must include any information that may support your request or eligibility status. The request for a review of a denial of a request for LTC Benefits must be submitted to us generally within 3 years (although this period may vary by the state in which the LTC Rider is issued) after the time the request for LTC Benefits was filed. We will review your request for a review and provide a written decision, generally within 60 days after receiving it (although this period may vary because of a different requirement imposed by the state in which the LTC Rider is issued). There is no further review after we provide you with our written decision. If we determine that a request for LTC Benefits should have been granted we will pay you the LTC Benefits you should have received.

Establishing Continued Eligibility for LTC Benefits

Once you qualify and begin to receive LTC Benefit payments, you must take certain steps to continue to receive LTC Benefits. If you fail to take these steps, your LTC Benefits will stop, and you will have to reestablish your eligibility to restart LTC Benefit payments. You must take the following steps to continue receiving LTC Benefit payments: 

Every Three Months: You must submit a new Request for Benefits form, which must be received by us no earlier than 30 days prior to the end of the current three-month period for which you are receiving LTC Benefits. We will provide you with a new Request for Benefits form prior to the end of the current three-month period. If a new Request for Benefits form is not submitted prior to the end of the current three-month period for which you are receiving LTC Benefits, we will automatically pay the LTC Benefit that you are receiving for an additional month. If you do not want to receive this payment you must contact us either by phone or in writing at the address or phone number provided above. LTC Benefits paid during that month will be equal to the amount of the most recent LTC Benefit payment paid to you. If we do not receive a Request for Benefits form within 90 days after the three-month period for which LTC Benefits were previously requested, you will have to reestablish your eligibility to receive benefits. Request for Benefits form are always available by contacting us at 800-487- 1485.

C-67

Every Year: At least once every 12 months after we have established your initial benefit eligibility, a Licensed Health Care Practitioner must (1) complete a new assessment on a form provided by us and again certify that you are Chronically Ill, and that you are expected to remain Chronically Ill for at least 90 days, and (2) either prescribe a new Plan of Care, or reconfirm the existing Plan of Care. We will provide you with a new assessment form prior to the end of the current twelve-month period. The appropriate forms are always available by contacting us at 800-487-1485.

Revocation of Eligibility for LTC Benefits. We will notify you in writing if we revoke your eligibility for LTC Benefits. You may request a review of our decision. We may revoke your eligibility if we determine that you are no longer eligible to receive LTC Benefits or should not have been found eligible to receive LTC Benefits. We may also revoke your eligibility for failure to follow any of the procedures as discussed above. A revocation of eligibility does not mean that you may be found eligible in the future. A request for a review of a revocation of eligibility must be in writing and must include any information that may support your request or eligibility status. The request for a review of a revocation of eligibility must be submitted to us generally within 3 years (although this period may vary because of a different requirement imposed by the state in which the LTC Rider is issued) after the time the last Request for Benefits form was filed. We will review your request for a review and provide a written decision within 60 days after receiving it. There is no further review after we provide you with our written decision. If we determine that we should not have revoked your eligibility we will pay you the LTC Benefits you should have received.

Verification of Continued Eligibility

At any time and as often as we reasonably require, we reserve the right to verify that all of the conditions for initial and ongoing eligibility are satisfied. Verification of your continued eligibility may include any or all of the following:

•

review of medical facts (including, but not limited to, medical files or diagnostic test results) to determine the extent of any Chronic Illness;

•

a physical examination at our expense by a physician of our choosing to determine that all of the criteria for eligibility are met;

•

requiring proof that you have received the prescribed care or support services.

If the Company is unable to verify that you are receiving Long-Term Care Services as set forth in the Plan of Care or that you are Chronically Ill, the Company will revoke your eligibility to receive LTC Benefits and reject any pending or subsequent request for benefits, and take action pursuant to the overpayment provision described below. Any subsequent determination of benefit eligibility will be treated as the initial determination of eligibility.

Overpayment of LTC Benefits

If you no longer meet the eligibility criteria or no longer wish to receive LTC Benefit payments, you will need to notify us by contacting us either by phone or in writing at the address or phone number provided above. Failure to notify us that you no longer meet the eligibility criteria may result in an overpayment. In the event we make an overpayment to you, we will notify you and request repayment. An overpayment could be made under an existing Request for Benefits after a Covered Life is no longer eligible to receive benefits or as a result of an administrative error in processing a request for benefits. If you receive an overpayment, it is your responsibility to return the amount of the overpayment within 60 days of our request. If you do not return the overpayment within 60 days of our request, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment from your future LTC Benefits, if any, or otherwise from any withdrawals, cash surrender, or Death Benefit proceeds.

Determining LTC Benefits

General Summary of LTC Benefits

Before delving into a more detailed discussion, we want to provide you with an overview of the basic choices you have relating to the LTC Rider, as well as a brief roadmap of the general concepts that impact your LTC Benefits.

Choices Under the LTC Rider. The amount of LTC Benefits that you may receive under the LTC Rider is dependent upon several choices that you make.

•

You will decide how much money to invest in the Contract in order to fund the LTC Rider. The amount of the initial Purchase Payment and of any subsequent Purchase Payments made in the first 90 days after the contract date will determine the amount of Acceleration Benefits and Extension Benefits you may receive.

•

You will also choose whether you would like the opportunity to grow the LTC Benefits by choosing, for a higher charge, the Growth Benefit option.

•

You will choose whether to purchase for an additional cost the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit option which provides an LTC Benefit if you terminate the LTC Rider under certain circumstances after the third contract anniversary.

•

Once you are eligible to receive LTC Benefits, you will decide when and in what amounts up to certain limits you would like to receive monthly LTC Benefit payments. As long as you have met the conditions described earlier in this discussion (Eligibility for LTC Benefits), you may use the LTC Benefit payments for any purpose and may receive more than your actual expenses for LTC Services.

C-68

Roadmap of Important LTC Concepts. There are certain important features of the LTC Rider you need to understand. The following section summarizes these features.

As described above, there are two primary LTC Benefits: the Acceleration Benefit and the Extension Benefit. There is also an additional optional LTC Benefit – the Growth Benefit – that is available for an additional charge. The Acceleration and Growth Benefits are calculated based on the LTC Guaranteed Amount. The Extension Benefit at issue of the LTC Rider is calculated based on the initial Acceleration Benefit and will be double the dollar amount of the Acceleration Benefit. The LTC Guaranteed Amount is also important as it affects the charges you pay for the LTC Rider. See “LTC Charges” for additional information. The LTC Guaranteed Amount is equal to the Acceleration Benefit plus the Growth Benefit, if elected. However, you should understand that the LTC Guaranteed Amount is not available to you as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit. See the discussion following this chart for a more detailed discussion of each LTC Benefit. 

Acceleration Benefit
•	First payments made under the LTC Rider
•	Deducted from your Contract Value
•	Equals your initial Purchase Payment and any subsequent Purchase Payments made in the first 90 days
•	Paid monthly up to a monthly maximum amount (referred to as Maximum Monthly Level Benefit which is described in the Determining LTC Benefits-Maximum Monthly Level Benefit section)
•	Payments reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount and Acceleration Benefit
•	If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, benefits are paid by us from our general account
•	Not affected by investment results
•	No surrender charges, although LTC Benefit payments will be applied against the Contract’s free withdrawal provision reducing the amount you may otherwise withdraw without a surrender charge

⇩ 

Extension Benefit
•	Second payments made under the LTC Rider once Acceleration Benefit is reduced to zero
•	Paid by us from our general account
•	Equals double the Acceleration Benefit as of the 90th day after the contract date
•	Paid monthly up to a monthly maximum amount (referred to as Maximum Monthly Level Benefit which is described in the Determining LTC Benefits-Maximum Monthly Level Benefit section)
•	Payments reduce the Extension Benefit
•	Not affected by investment results

⇩ 

Growth Benefit
•	May be purchased for an additional cost
•	Increases the LTC Guaranteed Amount annually by the amount of investment gain, if any, in the Subaccounts and any fixed account
•	Payments made in addition to Acceleration Benefit and Extension Benefit payments
•	Deducted from your Contract Value
•	Paid monthly up to a monthly maximum amount that is different from the monthly maximum amounts applicable to the Acceleration Benefit and Extension Benefit and that may increase but will never decrease based upon investment performance
•	Payments reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount and Growth Benefit
•	If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, LTC benefits are paid by us from our general account
•	Each annual step-up is not affected by subsequent investment results
•	No surrender charges, although LTC Benefit payments will be applied against the Contract’s free withdrawal provision reducing the amount you may otherwise withdraw without a surrender charge

⇩ 

Withdrawals
•	Permitted any time in addition to LTC Benefit payments

C-69

Withdrawals
•	Unless the Growth Benefit has been elected, will not decrease LTC Benefits (but will reduce Contract Value) to the extent annual withdrawals are less than or equal to 5% of the excess amount, if any, of the Contract Value over the LTC Guaranteed Amount as of the immediately preceding contract anniversary
•	The amount of any withdrawal that exceeds 5% of the excess amount of the Contract Value over the LTC Guaranteed Amount will be an Excess Withdrawal (i.e., if the LTC Guaranteed Amount is greater than or equal to the Contract Value on any contract anniversary, any withdrawal will be an Excess Withdrawal)
•	If the Growth Benefit has been elected, ANY withdrawal is an Excess Withdrawal
•	Excess Withdrawals result in proportional reductions to all LTC Benefits by the same percentage that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value
•	Thus, if you purchase the Growth Benefit option, any withdrawal will be an Excess Withdrawal (unless you are age 76 or the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit of $800,000 has been reached, and your Contract Value on the immediately preceding contract anniversary exceeds the LTC Guaranteed Amount)

Now that we have discussed the general important features that impact your LTC Benefits, we can engage in a more detailed discussion of how exactly these LTC Benefits are calculated.

Acceleration Benefit Payments

Once you become eligible to receive LTC Benefits and we make a determination of your eligibility, we will move your Contract Value to the extent of the LTC Guaranteed Amount to our LTC Fixed Account. Amounts allocated to the LTC Fixed Account will no longer have the ability to participate in market performance. See LTC Fixed Account for more information. We then pay you the Acceleration Benefit as monthly Acceleration Benefit payments during the Acceleration Benefit Duration. Each payment will be the amount you request up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. See Determining LTC Benefits – Maximum Monthly Level Benefit below for a detailed description. The Acceleration Benefit is first paid from the Contract Value. Surrender charges are waived for all Acceleration Benefit payments. However, Acceleration Benefit payments will be applied against the Contract’s free withdrawal provision, which may impact whether surrender charges are applied to other withdrawals. 

Acceleration Benefit Duration = the period of time over which Acceleration Benefits are paid. If you have not received LTC Benefits

prior to the fifth contract anniversary, the minimum Acceleration Benefit Duration will be 24 months (i.e., 2 years).

 

Acceleration Benefit = the initial Purchase Payment, plus each subsequent Purchase Payment made within the first 90 days after

the contract date, less Excess Withdrawals (adjusted as described in this discussion), less Acceleration Benefit payments. If you

have not elected the Growth Benefit, the LTC Guaranteed Amount equals the Acceleration Benefit.

 

Excess Withdrawals will reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount and Acceleration Benefit by the same percentage that the Excess

Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value.

We promise that if your Contract Value is reduced to zero due to investment losses and there is a remaining amount of Acceleration Benefit, the remaining Acceleration Benefit payments will be paid from our assets and investments we hold in our general account, subject to the conditions discussed in this prospectus. Because we transfer Contract Value equal to the LTC Guaranteed Amount (or all Contract Value, if less) to the LTC Fixed Account (which is part of our general account) once you begin receiving payments, all Acceleration Benefit payments are subject to the claims of our general creditors and the claims-paying ability of Lincoln Life. The Acceleration Benefit is not available as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit.

Acceleration Benefit payments reduce the Acceleration Benefit, LTC Guaranteed Amount and Contract Value. Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Acceleration Benefit and LTC Guaranteed Amount by the same proportion that the Excess Withdrawal reduces your Contract Value. See Withdrawals for more information on Excess Withdrawals.

Once the Acceleration Benefit is reduced to zero, the Extension Benefit Duration will begin. In the last month that you receive an Acceleration Benefit payment, if the remaining amount of Acceleration Benefit is less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount, the payment that you receive will include the remaining Acceleration Benefit plus an amount of Extension Benefit to make the payment equal to the amount you have requested. The following month the LTC Benefit will be paid from the Extension Benefit.

Extension Benefit Payments

Once the Acceleration Benefit is reduced to zero and you are still requesting and otherwise eligible to receive LTC Benefit payments, we will start to pay you the Extension Benefit as monthly Extension Benefit payments. Extension Benefit payments are paid up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. See “Determining LTC Benefits – Maximum Monthly Level Benefit” below for more details.

C-70

The Extension Benefit is an obligation of Lincoln Life subject to the claims-paying ability of Lincoln Life and is supported by the general account, not by your Contract Value. We promise to pay the Extension Benefit during the Extension Benefit Duration subject to the conditions discussed in this prospectus. The Extension Benefit is not available as a lump sum withdrawal or as a Death Benefit. 

Extension Benefit Duration = the period of time over which Extension Benefits are paid. The Extension Benefit Duration is initially

twice the length of the Acceleration Benefit Duration. If you have not received LTC Benefits prior to the fifth contract anniversary,

the minimum Extension Benefit Duration will be 48 months (i.e., 4 years).

 

Extension Benefit = twice the initial Acceleration Benefit ( Purchase Payments within the first 90 days after the contract date), less

Excess Withdrawals (adjusted as described in this discussion), less Extension Benefit payments.

 

Excess Withdrawals will reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount and Extension Benefit by the same percentage that the Excess

Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value.

 

Example: The following example shows the calculation of the LTC Guaranteed Amount, the Acceleration Benefit and the Extension Benefit as of the contract date, and the recalculation of those amounts after a subsequent Purchase Payment is made prior to the 90th day after the contract date.
Initial Purchase Payment January 1 (contract date equals January 1):		$100,000
Contract Value January 1:		$100,000
LTC Guaranteed Amount January 1 (equals initial Purchase Payment):		$100,000
Acceleration Benefit January 1 (equals LTC Guaranteed Amount):		$100,000
Extension Benefit January 1 (2 x $100,000 Acceleration Benefit):		$200,000
Contract Value February 1 prior to subsequent Purchase Payment:		$110,000
Subsequent Purchase Payment received February 1:		$100,000
LTC Guaranteed Amount after subsequent Purchase Payment
	($100,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount + $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment made within 90 days of contract date):	$200,000
Acceleration Benefit after subsequent Purchase Payment:		$200,000
Extension Benefit after subsequent Purchase Payment
	(2 x $200,000 Acceleration Benefit):	$400,000
Contract Value after additional Purchase Payment:		$210,000

Maximum Monthly Level Benefit

The Maximum Monthly Level Benefit is the monthly limit for Acceleration and Extension Benefits that may be paid to you under the LTC Rider. The Maximum Monthly Level Benefit is calculated on the contract date and each contract anniversary up to, and including, the fifth contract anniversary. Because the maximum monthly amount is based upon the number of months over which the Acceleration Benefits are paid, the maximum monthly amount is lowest on the first contract anniversary and is recalculated and increases every year you wait to request LTC Benefits up to fifth contract anniversary. If you receive LTC Benefit payments prior to the fifth contract anniversary, the maximum monthly amount will be lower than if you wait until after five years after the contract date. We promise that the total amount of LTC Benefits available will be the same, but will be paid out over a longer time period (as long as you are alive) and at a lower monthly maximum amount. 

Maximum Monthly Level Benefit = the remaining Acceleration Benefit divided by the number of months of remaining Acceleration

Benefit Duration. For example, if the Acceleration Benefit is $200,000 and the Acceleration Benefit Duration as of the fifth contract

anniversary was 24 months, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit would be $8,333.33 ($200,000/24).

Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount by the same percentage the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. See Withdrawals. All other withdrawals and LTC Benefit payments will not change the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. The Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount does not include Growth Benefits. 

C-71

IMPORTANT NOTE:

We designed the LTC Rider to function most optimally if you do not start receiving LTC Benefits until on or after the fifth contract

anniversary. After the fifth contract anniversary, you can maximize your monthly LTC Benefit payments and receive those

payments over the shortest period of time (which means you will have a shorter period of time to access the money we pay from

our general account during the Extension Benefit period). This discussion assumes that you do not begin taking LTC Benefit

payments until after the fifth contract anniversary. However, because we wanted to provide you with the flexibility to begin

taking LTC Benefit payments prior to the fifth contract anniversary if the need arises, we will highlight the impact of taking LTC

Benefit payments earlier in a later section. See “Determining LTC Benefits – Electing to Receive LTC Benefits Before the Fifth

Contract Anniversary.”

Whether you can request all of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit (after the required waiting period and fulfilling all other applicable requirements to receive LTC Benefits) will depend on whether you are residing in a “nursing home” or are receiving “hospice care” (which may be received in your home or in a hospice care facility). Both of these terms, and other qualified Long-Term Care services, are defined in the Long-Term Care Coverage Endorsement form; the actual terms and definitions may vary because of requirements imposed by the particular state in which the LTC Benefit was issued. The following chart shows the amount you may request in LTC Benefits. 

Type of Long-Term Care Services	Amount of Monthly Benefit You Can Request
If you are residing in a nursing home or are receiving hospice care:	You may request an amount up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. Contractowners with contracts issued in certain states not listed below may also request up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount if they are in an assisted living facility.
If you are eligible and qualify for other qualified Long-Term Care Services (such as but not limited to home health care, adult day care, assisted living services), but are not residing in a nursing home or receiving hospice care:	You may request only up to 50% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount*. If upon commencement of a month you qualify to receive up to 50% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount and during that month you enter a nursing home or start to receive hospice care, you will qualify to receive up to 100% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount the following month.

 

*

Contractowners whose contracts were issued in the following states may only request up to 50% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount for assisted living services: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY. Contractowners in all other states may request up to 100% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount for assisted living services.

The Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount will not change after the fifth contract anniversary unless you make an Excess Withdrawal (as described below). If, after the fifth contract anniversary, you receive less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount in any given month, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount will not be increased, but the minimum Acceleration Benefit Duration or minimum Extension Benefit Duration will be increased and will equal the remaining Acceleration Benefit or Extension Benefit divided by the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. 

Example: The following is an example of how taking less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit impacts future Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amounts and extends the Acceleration Benefit Duration and Extension Benefit Duration. This example also illustrates how the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit does not change after the fifth Contract Year. Assume LTC Benefit payments begin after the fifth contract anniversary and the owner receives 50% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit each month.
On fifth contract anniversary:
Acceleration Benefit:		$100,000
Acceleration Benefit Duration:		24 months
Extension Benefit:		$200,000
Extension Benefit Duration:		48 months
Maximum Monthly Level Benefit ($100,000/24):		$4,166.67
Monthly LTC Benefit payment (50% of $4,166.67):		$2,083.33
On the sixth contract anniversary:
Remaining Acceleration Benefit:
	($100,000 – LTC Benefit payments of $25,000 ($2,083.33 x 12))	$75,000
Remaining Acceleration Benefit Duration

C-72

	(assuming the Contractowner continues to receive 50% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit): ($75,000 / $2,083.33)	36 months
Remaining Acceleration Benefit Duration
	(if the Contractowner begins receiving 100% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit): ($75,000 / $4,166.67)	18 months
Remaining Extension Benefit:		$200,000
Remaining Extension Benefit Duration
	(assuming the Contractowner continues to receive 50% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit each year): ($200,000 / $2,083.33)	96 months
Remaining Acceleration Benefit Duration
	(if the Contractowner begins receiving 100% of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit): ($200,000 / $4,166.67)	48 months

Special Considerations When Determining the Amount of Benefits to Request: Keep in mind that you may use the LTC Benefit payments for any purpose and may request more than your actual expenses for Long-Term Care Services (subject to the maximums discussed above). When determining the amount of the LTC Benefit to request, however, there are a number of factors you may want to take into account.

During the Acceleration Benefit Duration, for example, you may want to consider the actual cost of your care and the expected length of your care, the chance that you may not live long enough to receive all the LTC Benefit payments, and the need for Death Benefit and/or annuity features under your Contract. During the Acceleration Benefit Duration, taking less than the maximum amount of the Acceleration Benefit to which you are entitled will extend the Acceleration Benefit Duration (and thus will extend the beginning of the Extension Benefit Duration, when LTC Benefits are being paid out of our assets). (As discussed below, not taking Growth Benefit payments will not extend the Acceleration Benefit Duration.) If the cost of any qualified Long-Term Care Services that you are receiving is less than the maximum you can request and you anticipate needing money for Long-Term Care Services for a longer period of time than the LTC Benefit Duration, then you may want to consider taking less than the maximum amount. Taking less than the maximum has the advantage of extending your benefits over a longer time period and/or allowing you to retain your Death Benefit and annuity options (which are reduced by withdrawals including LTC Benefit payments and thus will not be reduced as quickly), but has the disadvantage of there being a greater chance that you may not live long enough to receive all or as many LTC Benefit payments.

Once you are in the Extension Benefit Duration, when LTC Benefits are being paid out of our assets, it is almost universally better to take your maximum permitted amount each month, in case of death prior to all LTC Benefit payments being made.

In all cases, you should also consider the limits imposed under IRS rules. See General Provisions – Federal Taxation below.

Growth Benefit Option

At the time you purchase the Rider, you will choose whether to add the Growth Benefit option. The Growth Benefit option may not be added after the LTC Rider is issued. The Growth Benefit option may provide an additional amount of LTC Benefit from investment gains in the Subaccounts and fixed account. The Growth Benefit is paid as monthly Growth Benefit payments up to the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount.

Growth Benefit payments may be paid in addition to Acceleration Benefit payments and Extension Benefit payments and are paid during both the Acceleration Benefit Duration and the Extension Benefit Duration. Thus, while your initial Purchase Payment (and any subsequent Purchase Payment made during the first 90 days up to the applicable maximum limit) is returned to you over the Acceleration Benefit Duration, your Growth Benefit is spread over both the Acceleration Benefit Duration and the Extension Benefit Duration. After the Extension Benefit is reduced to zero and if there is any remaining LTC Guaranteed Amount, you may continue to receive Growth Benefits, if otherwise eligible, until the LTC Guaranteed Amount is reduced to zero. At such point, Growth Benefit payments will no longer be subject to the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit limit (i.e., you can request a lump sum of any remaining LTC Guaranteed Amount).

Surrender charges are waived for all Growth Benefit payments. However, Growth Benefit payments will be applied against the Contract’s free withdrawal provision, which may impact whether surrender charges are applied to other withdrawals.

On each contract anniversary until you reach age 76, the LTC Guaranteed Amount may increase to an amount equal to the Contract Value, if higher, due to automatic step-ups, up to the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit of $800,000 (referred to as the automatic step-up). The Growth Benefit is equal to the difference between the LTC Guaranteed Amount and the Acceleration Benefit, if any. On the contract date, the Growth Benefit is zero. The Growth Benefit will be calculated on each contract anniversary or at the time of an Excess Withdrawal. 

Automatic Step-Ups = On each contract anniversary, the LTC Guaranteed Amount will automatically step up to the Contract Value

as of the contract anniversary if:

C-73

• The Covered Life is still living and under age 76;

• The Contract Value on that contract anniversary is greater than the LTC Guaranteed Amount; and

• The maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit has never been reached.

 

Excess Withdrawals will reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount and Growth Benefit by the same percentage that the Excess

Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value.

Once you begin receiving LTC Benefit payments, we transfer Contract Value to the LTC Fixed Account (which is part of our general account) equal to the LTC Guaranteed Amount (or the Contract Value, if less). Each contract anniversary thereafter, we transfer to the LTC Fixed Account the amount by which the LTC Guaranteed Amount “stepped up” that year. See LTC Fixed Account for additional information. Because your Contract Value will be earning fixed interest in the LTC Fixed Account and will no longer be participating in any investment performance in the separate account, there is very little likelihood that the automatic step-ups will continue to increase the LTC Guaranteed Amount while you are receiving LTC Benefits even though you will still be paying an increased Acceleration Benefit Charge for the Growth Benefit. Thus if you purchase the Growth Benefit, you should allow sufficient time before you anticipate needing LTC Benefits to allow the automatic step-ups to increase the LTC Guaranteed Amount and should not purchase it if you anticipate needing LTC Benefit within a short time-frame.

You will pay a higher LTC Charge for the Growth Benefit option than for the Level Benefit option. In addition, when deciding whether to purchase the Growth Benefit option, you should consider that under the Growth Benefit option, any withdrawal will be an Excess Withdrawal. However, if the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit of $800,000 has been reached or you are age 76 or older, and your Contract Value exceeds the LTC Guaranteed Amount on a contract anniversary, you may withdraw an amount up to the Conforming Withdrawal amount. See Withdrawals for an example of how an Excess Withdrawal reduces the LTC Guaranteed Amount.

Once the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit has been reached or you are age 76 or older, you will not receive any further automatic step-ups of the LTC Guaranteed Amount (even if it later declines due to Excess Withdrawals or LTC Benefit payments). Contract Value in excess of the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount will not provide any additional Growth Benefit. 

Example: Following is an example of how the automatic step-ups will work through the first three contract anniversaries (assuming no withdrawals).
Total Purchase Payments added to the Contract as of 90th day after the contract date:		$200,000
LTC Guaranteed Amount as of 90th day after the contract date equals total Purchase Payments made into the Contract:		$200,000
Acceleration Benefit as of 90th day after the contract date:		$200,000
Total Contract Value on first contract anniversary reflecting investment gain:		$225,000
New LTC Guaranteed Amount on first contract anniversary:
	(LTC Guaranteed Amount steps up since $225,000 is greater than LTC Guaranteed Amount of $200,000)	$225,000
Growth Benefit on first contract anniversary
	($225,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount - $200,000 Acceleration Benefit):	$ 25,000
Total Contract Value on second contract anniversary reflecting investment loss from previous contract anniversary
	($225,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount does not change as the Contract Value of $218,000 is less; $25,000 Growth Benefit does not change):	$218,000
Total Contract Value on third contract anniversary reflecting investment gain from previous contract anniversary:		$240,000
New LTC Guaranteed Amount on third contract anniversary
	(LTC Guaranteed Amount steps up as $240,000 is greater than LTC Guaranteed Amount of $225,000):	$240,000
Growth Benefit on third contract anniversary
	($240,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount - $200,000 Acceleration Benefit):	$ 40,000

You may choose to irrevocably terminate the automatic step-ups if you believe that you have sufficient LTC Benefits to cover your needs and do not want or need to further increase the LTC Benefits. You may terminate automatic step-ups after the fifth contract anniversary by notifying us in writing at least 30 days prior to the next contract anniversary. By choosing to terminate the automatic step-ups, the LTC Guaranteed Amount will no longer step up to the Contract Value, if higher. You will still pay the higher Acceleration Benefit Charge associated with the Growth Benefit if you terminate automatic step-ups. However, the charge will not increase as the LTC Guaranteed Amount (which the charge is based on) will no longer increase because of step-ups to the Contract Value. See Charges and Deductions for Discontinued Living Benefit Riders – Long-Term CareSM Advantage Charge.

Growth Benefit payments reduce the Growth Benefit, the LTC Guaranteed Amount, and the Contract Value by the dollar amount of the payment. Excess Withdrawals reduce the Growth Benefit by the same percentage that the Excess Withdrawal amount reduces the

C-74

Contract Value. This means that the reduction in the Growth Benefit could be more than the dollar amount withdrawn. Because we transfer Contract Value equal to the LTC Guaranteed Amount (or all Contract Value, if less) to the LTC Fixed Account once you begin receiving payments and each contract anniversary thereafter, all Growth Benefit payments are subject to claims of our general creditors and to the claims-paying ability of Lincoln Life.

Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit

The Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount is the maximum amount of Growth Benefit that may be paid in any calendar month. The Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount is recalculated each contract anniversary and upon an Excess Withdrawal. The calculation of the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount is based on payment of the Growth Benefit over both the Acceleration and Extension Benefit Durations.

Under the formula, we determine how many months of Acceleration and Extension Benefit payments are remaining by dividing the total remaining Acceleration and Extension Benefits by the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. Then the Growth Benefit is divided over this same number of months. 

The Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount = [i ÷ ((ii + iii) ÷ iv)] where:
(i)	equals the Growth Benefit on the contract anniversary;
(ii)	equals any remaining Acceleration Benefit on the contract anniversary;
(iii)	equals any remaining Extension Benefit on the contract anniversary; and
(iv)	equals the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount on the contract anniversary.

When you make a request for benefits, you may request an amount up to the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount. You will receive a single monthly LTC Benefit payment that will include the Growth Benefit payment, in addition to either the Acceleration Benefit payment or Extension Benefit payment. We deduct your request first from the Acceleration Benefit (during the Acceleration Benefit Duration) or Extension Benefit (during the Extension Benefit Duration) up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit (which is the maximum amount you could request if you did not have the Growth Benefit option). Any amount requested above that amount will be deducted from the Growth Benefit up to the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount. Thus, no Growth Benefit payments will be made unless you are requesting more than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount available to you for that month. However, any unused Growth Benefit Payments can be used once the Maximum Growth Benefit Monthly payment is recalculated. 

Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount = the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount plus the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit

amount

Whether you can request all of the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit will depend on whether you are residing in a nursing home or receiving hospice care: 

Type of Long-Term Care Services	Amount of Monthly Benefit You Can Request
If you are residing in a nursing home or are receiving hospice care:	You may request an amount up to the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount. Contractowners with contracts issued in certain states not listed below may also request up to the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount if they are in an assisted living facility.
If you are eligible and qualify for other qualified Long-Term Care Services (such as but not limited to home health care, adult day care, assisted living services), but are not residing in a nursing home or receiving hospice care:	You may request only up to 50% of the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount*. If upon commencement of a month you qualify to receive up to 50% of the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount and during that month you enter a nursing home or start to receive hospice care, you will qualify to receive up to 100% of the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount the following month.

 

*Contractowners whose contracts were issued in the following states may only request up to 50% of the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount for assisted living services: AK, AL, AR, AZ, DC, DE, GA, IA, KY, LA, MD, ME, MI, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NM, OK, OR, RI, SC, SD, WV, WY. Contractowners in all other states may request up to 100% of the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount for assisted living services. 

Example: The following is an example of how the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount, Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount and the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit are calculated on the fifth contract anniversary with growth of the Contract Value from investment gains of $20,000 and assuming $100,000 Purchase Payments were made prior to 90th day after the contract date.
Acceleration Benefit on fifth contract anniversary:	$100,000
Extension Benefit on fifth contract anniversary:	$200,000
Contract Value on fifth contract anniversary:	$120,000

C-75

LTC Guaranteed Amount on fifth contract anniversary steps-up to Contract Value of $120,000:		$120,000
Growth Benefit
	($120,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount - $100,000 Acceleration Benefit):	$20,000
Maximum Monthly Level Benefit
	($100,000 ÷ 24 months of Acceleration Benefit Duration left):	$4,166.67
Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit
	[$20,000 Growth Benefit ÷ (($100,000 Acceleration Benefit + $200,000 Extension Benefit) ÷ $4,166.67 Maximum Monthly Level Benefit)]:	$277.78
Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit ($4,166.67 + $277.78):		$4,444.45

Special Considerations When Determining the Amount of Benefits to Request: If you receive less than the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount, the unused Growth Benefit for that month will not be available for the remainder of that Contract Year. On the next contract anniversary, the remaining Growth Benefit for the prior year will carry over and the Growth Benefit and the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount will be recalculated, and will increase, as stated above. Taking less than the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit amount will not extend the Acceleration Benefit Duration or Extension Benefit Duration. This calculation is intended to permit you to take your remaining Growth Benefit over the same period you will receive your remaining Acceleration Benefit plus your Extension Benefit. Any Growth Benefit remaining at the end of the Extension Benefit Duration will continue to be available to you as LTC Benefit payments until exhausted, and will not be subject to a monthly maximum limit. 

Example: Continuing the prior example if, during the first six months of the Contract Year, you requested that you be paid the

entire Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit each month and then for the other six months you requested no Growth Benefit, there

will be unused Growth Benefit for that Contract Year of $1,666.68 ($277.78 Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit x 6 months). On the

next contract anniversary, the Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit will increase because there was unused Growth Benefit during

the current Contract Year.

Electing to Receive LTC Benefits Before the Fifth Contract Anniversary

As we previously mentioned, we designed the LTC Rider to function most optimally if you do not start receiving LTC Benefits until on or after the fifth contract anniversary. The LTC Rider is designed to provide the highest amount of monthly LTC Benefits if you wait until after the fifth contract anniversary to receive LTC Benefit payments, though no matter when you start to receive LTC Benefit payments, we promise to pay you the same overall amount of LTC Benefits. The preceding discussion assumed that you do not begin taking LTC Benefit payments before the fifth contract anniversary. However, you have the flexibility to begin taking LTC Benefit payments prior to the fifth contract anniversary if the need arises. This section highlights the impact of taking LTC Benefit payments earlier.

When you purchase the LTC Rider, the LTC Benefit Duration is equal to 252 months and is comprised of 84 months (i.e., 7 years) of Acceleration Benefit Duration plus 168 months (i.e., 14 years) of Extension Benefit Duration. If you have not received LTC Benefits, on each contract anniversary up to the fifth contract anniversary, we will recalculate the LTC Benefit Duration by subtracting 12 months from the Acceleration Benefit Duration and 24 months from the Extension Benefit Duration. This is important because the Acceleration Benefits and the Extension Benefits are paid monthly up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount and the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount is calculated based on the number of months remaining in the Acceleration Benefit Duration or Extension Benefit Duration.

The following chart illustrates how the LTC Benefit Durations decrease each year that you wait to receive LTC Benefit payments up to the fifth contract anniversary. You should refer to this chart and carefully consider the information contained in the chart in order to determine the minimum Acceleration Benefit Duration and the minimum Extension Benefit Duration based on the Contract Year you start to submit requests for LTC Benefits. 

LTC Benefit Duration Chart
Contract Year of First Request for Maximum Level Benefit amounts	Acceleration Benefit Duration	Extension Benefit Duration	Total LTC Benefit Duration
1*	84 months	168 months	252 months
2	72 months	144 months	216 months
3	60 months	120 months	180 months
4	48 months	96 months	144 months
5	36 months	72 months	108 months
6+	24 months	48 months	72 months

C-76

*

You may not receive LTC Benefit payments prior to the first contract anniversary and satisfaction of the 90-day deductible period.

When a benefit payment less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount is made prior to the fifth contract anniversary, we will recalculate your Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount and it will increase, but we will not extend the Acceleration Benefit Duration. Accordingly, if you receive less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount in any Contract Year prior to the fifth contract anniversary, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit will be recalculated on the contract anniversary and will increase. In addition, the minimum Extension Benefit Duration will be recalculated on the contract anniversary and will decrease due to the higher Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. The Extension Benefit Duration will be recalculated to equal the Extension Benefit divided by the recalculated Maximum Monthly Level Benefit.

Example: The following chart provides an example of how the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit (annualized) increases each year that you wait to start receiving Acceleration Benefit payments up to the fifth contract anniversary. This chart illustrates a Purchase Payment of $100,000, resulting in an Acceleration Benefit of $100,000 as of the Contract Year when you start to receive Acceleration Benefit payments. The example also assumes you have chosen the Level Benefit option and that the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount is taken each Contract Year starting at the beginning of the Contract Year and that no withdrawals have been made other than the illustrated LTC Benefit amounts. 

Maximum Monthly Level Benefit (annualized) based on when Acceleration Benefit payments begin
LTC Benefit Duration	Contract Year	Acceleration Benefit payments Begin in Year 2	Acceleration Benefit payments Begin in Year 3	Acceleration Benefit payments Begin in Year 4	Benefit payments Begin in Year 5	Acceleration Benefit payments Begin in Year 6
Acceleration Benefit	1*
	2	$16,667
	3	$16,667	$20,000
	4	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000
	5	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000
	6	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000	$50,000
	7	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000	$50,000
Extension Benefits	8	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000	$50,000
	9	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000	$50,000
	10	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000	$50,000
	11	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000	$50,000
	12	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000
	13	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000	$33,000
	14	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000
	15	$16,667	$20,000	$25,000
	16	$16,667	$20,000
	17	$16,667	$20,000
	18	$16,667
	19	$16,667

*

You may not receive LTC Benefit payments prior to the first contract anniversary and satisfaction of the 90-day deductible period. For illustrative purposes, this chart does not include satisfaction of the deductible period. 

Example: Continuing the example illustrated by the chart, if you started to receive Acceleration Benefit payments during the third Contract Year, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit would be calculated as follows:
LTC Guaranteed Amount as of second contract anniversary:		$100,000
Acceleration Benefit (equals LTC Guaranteed Amount):		$100,000
Extension Benefit (2 x Acceleration Benefit):		$200,000
Acceleration Benefit Duration (from LTC Benefit Duration chart):		60 months
Maximum Monthly Level Benefit
	($100,000 Acceleration Benefit ÷ 60 months):	$1,666.67 or $20,000 per year
Extension Benefit Duration (from LTC Benefit Duration chart):		120 months

C-77

By electing to start receiving Acceleration Benefit payments in the third Contract Year, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit

(annualized) would be $20,000. If the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit were requested and paid out each month, the Acceleration

Benefit Duration would be 60 months (5 years) followed by an Extension Benefit Duration of 120 months (10 years). The total

available Acceleration and Extension Benefits would still be $300,000 ($100,000 Acceleration Benefit plus $200,000 Extension

Benefit). If you waited to start receiving the Acceleration Benefit payments on or after the fifth contract anniversary, the annual

benefit would have been $50,000 paid out over the minimum Acceleration and Extension Benefit Durations of 24 and 48 months

respectively.

If you are receiving the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit each month, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit will not change the

following Contract Year. If you receive less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount in any Contract Year prior to the

fifth contract anniversary, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit will be recalculated on the contract anniversary and will increase.

In addition, the minimum Extension Benefit Duration will be recalculated on the contract anniversary and will decrease due to the

higher Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. The Extension Benefit Duration will be recalculated to equal the Extension

Benefit divided by the recalculated Maximum Monthly Level Benefit.

 

Example: Continuing the previous example, the following is an example of how the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount and the minimum Extension Benefit Duration are recalculated on the third contract anniversary where less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount has been requested. The example assumes the Level Benefit option has been chosen. The $100,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount as of the second contract anniversary has been reduced by Acceleration Benefit payments of only $10,000 (paid in the third Contract Year) of the available annual amount of $20,000.
LTC Guaranteed Amount as of the third contract anniversary
	($100,000 - $10,000 LTC Benefit payment in prior Contract Year):	$90,000
Acceleration Benefit (equals the LTC Guaranteed Amount):		$90,000
Extension Benefit (has not been reduced as no Extension Benefits have been paid):		$200,000
Acceleration Benefit Duration:		48 months
Maximum Monthly Level Benefit
	($90,000 Acceleration Benefit ÷ 48 months):	$1,875.00 or $22,500 per year
Extension Benefit Duration
	($200,000 Extension Benefit ÷ $1,875 Maximum Monthly Level Benefit):	107 months
The remaining Acceleration Benefit Duration after the third contract anniversary is 48 months. The new Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount increases to $22,500 (annualized) and the Extension Benefit Duration decreases to 107 months due to receiving less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount. Only one-half of the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount ($937.50) will be available to you if you are not confined to a nursing home or are not receiving hospice care.
On the fifth contract anniversary, we will recalculate the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount for the last time and it will not change thereafter unless you make an Excess Withdrawal. If after the fifth contract anniversary, you receive less than the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount in any given month, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount will not be increased; but the Acceleration Benefit Duration or Extension Benefit Duration will be increased and will equal the remaining Acceleration Benefit or Extension Benefit divided by the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount.

Withdrawals

You may be able to make withdrawals pursuant to the withdrawal provision of your Contract without a reduction to the LTC Benefits if the LTC Guaranteed Amount is less than the Contract Value. Under the LTC Rider, withdrawals are either Conforming Withdrawals or Excess Withdrawals. Conforming Withdrawals will not have any effect on the LTC Benefits and will reduce the Contract Value by the amount of the withdrawal. Excess Withdrawals reduce the LTC Benefits by the same percentage that the Excess Withdrawal reduced the Contract Value. Excess Withdrawals reduce the Contract Value by the amount of the withdrawal. The tax consequences of withdrawals are discussed in the Federal Tax Matters section of this prospectus.

All withdrawals you make, whether or not within the Conforming Withdrawal amount, will continue to be subject to any other terms and conditions contained in your Contract, including surrender charges, unless one of the waiver of surrender charge provisions is applicable. See The Contracts - Surrenders and Withdrawals and Charges and Other Deductions - Surrender Charge. All withdrawals, whether Conforming or Excess, will be applied against the Contract’s free withdrawal provision. See General Provisions - Contract Free Withdrawal Provision for additional information.

Conforming Withdrawals

If available, you may make periodic withdrawals from your Contract Value in amounts less than or equal to the Conforming Withdrawal amount each Contract Year without reducing the LTC Benefits. Conforming Withdrawals may be withdrawn in addition to

C-78

receiving LTC Benefit payments and are subject to surrender charges, if any. Conforming Withdrawals will not reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount, the Acceleration Benefit, the Extension Benefit, and if elected, the Growth Benefit. If the LTC Guaranteed Amount is equal to or greater than your Contract Value on a contract anniversary, any withdrawal in that Contract Year will not be a Conforming Withdrawal. Moreover, if you elect the Growth Benefit option, any withdrawal will be deemed an Excess Withdrawal unless you are age 76 or older or the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount limit of $800,000 has been reached and your Contract Value exceeds the maximum LTC Guaranteed Amount on a contract anniversary, in which case you may withdraw an amount up to the Conforming Withdrawal amount for that Contract Year. 

Conforming Withdrawal = any withdrawal that does not exceed during a Contract Year the greater of $0 and (a) minus (b) where:
(a)	equals 5% of the difference of the Contract Value over the LTC Guaranteed Amount as of the most recent contract anniversary (or, prior to the first contract anniversary, the contract date); and
(b)	equals all prior withdrawals in that Contract Year.

Excess Withdrawals

Excess Withdrawals are the cumulative amounts withdrawn from the Contract during the Contract Year that exceeds the Conforming Withdrawal amount. Only that portion of the current withdrawal amount that exceeds the Conforming Withdrawal amount will be deemed to be an Excess Withdrawal. Any Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value to zero will terminate the LTC Rider and the only LTC Benefit that you may be eligible to receive will be the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected. 

More specifically, Excess Withdrawals reduce various benefits in accordance with the following formula:
•	Multiply the benefit being affected (i.e., the Acceleration Benefit) before the Excess Withdrawal by (1 – the Reduction Percentage due to Excess Withdrawal).
•	The Reduction Percentage due to Excess Withdrawal = Excess Withdrawal ÷ Contract Value before the Excess Withdrawal.
Importantly, this means that the reduction could be more than the dollar amount withdrawn.

Excess Withdrawals will reduce the LTC Guaranteed Amount, Acceleration Benefit, Extension Benefit, Maximum Monthly Level Benefit and any Growth Benefit and Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit by the same percentage that the Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. This means that the reductions in these amounts could be more than the dollar amount withdrawn. In a declining market, Excess Withdrawals may substantially reduce or eliminate the LTC Benefits, the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit, and if elected, Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit. 

Example: The following example shows how an Excess Withdrawal, in a declining market, reduces the Acceleration Benefit, LTC Guaranteed Amount, Maximum Monthly Level Benefit, Extension Benefit, Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit and Growth Benefit. The example assumes you have chosen the Growth Benefit option. Since the LTC Guaranteed Amount is greater than the Contract Value, any withdrawal is an Excess Withdrawal and there is no Conforming Withdrawal amount.
LTC Guaranteed Amount:		$320,000
Acceleration Benefit:		$120,000
Extension Benefit:		$240,000
Maximum Monthly Level Benefit:		$5,000
Growth Benefit:		$200,000
Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit:		$2,778
Excess Withdrawal from Contract Value:		$4,000
Contract Value immediately prior to Excess Withdrawal:		$85,000
Reduction Percentage due to Excess Withdrawal
	[$4,000 Excess Withdrawal ÷ $85,000 Contract Value]:	4.71%
LTC Guaranteed Amount after Excess Withdrawal
	[$320,000 LTC Guaranteed Amount x (1-4.71%)]:	$304,928
Extension Benefit after Excess Withdrawal
	[$240,000 x (1-4.71%)]:	$228,696
Maximum Monthly Level Benefit after Excess Withdrawal
	[$5,000 Maximum Monthly Level Benefit x (1-4.71%)]:	$4,765
Growth Benefit after Excess Withdrawal [$200,000 Growth Benefit x (1-4.71%)]:		$190,580
Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit after Excess Withdrawal

C-79

[$2,778 Maximum Monthly Growth Benefit x (1-4.71%)]: $2,647

LTC Fixed Account

The LTC Fixed Account is part of the general account, and thus is not insulated from the claims of our general creditors. The LTC Fixed Account is designated to hold an amount equal to the LTC Guaranteed Amount while paying LTC Benefits. The LTC Fixed Account will offer a rate of interest that will be adjusted periodically and is guaranteed to be an effective rate of not less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate stated in your Contract on amounts held in the LTC Fixed Account. Contracts issued in certain states may guarantee a higher minimum rate of interest than in other states. Refer to your Contract for the specific guaranteed minimum interest rate applicable to your Contract. See Fixed Side of the Contract for more information about the general account.

On the date we make the initial determination that you are eligible to receive LTC Benefits (as described in the “Establishing Benefit Eligibility” section), we will transfer Contract Value equal to the LTC Guaranteed Amount (or all Contract Value, if less) as of that date to the LTC Fixed Account. Amounts transferred to the LTC Fixed Account will no longer have the ability to participate in the performance of the variable Subaccounts. The Contract Value will be transferred proportionately from the variable Subaccounts and the fixed account for use with dollar-cost averaging, if any, in which you are invested. Transfers of Contract Value to the LTC Fixed Account may reduce the Contract Value in the Subaccounts to zero. Acceleration Benefit payments and Growth Benefit payments (if elected) will first be deducted from the LTC Fixed Account. LTC Charges will be deducted proportionally from the LTC Fixed Account, the fixed account for use with dollar-cost averaging and the Subaccounts.

On the contract anniversary that follows the initial determination of eligibility to receive LTC Benefits and on each contract anniversary that follows, we will transfer Contract Value to and from the LTC Fixed Account, the Subaccounts and any other fixed account. The amount of Contract Value that will be transferred into the LTC Fixed Account will be equal to the difference, if any, between the LTC Guaranteed Amount and the Contract Value that is in the LTC Fixed Account. This may result in the entire Contract Value being allocated to the LTC Fixed Account. If the Contract Value in the LTC Fixed Account exceeds the LTC Guaranteed Amount, we will move Contract Value equal to the difference between the Contract Value and the LTC Guaranteed Amount from the LTC Fixed Account to the Subaccounts according to your instructions for future allocations.

If you begin receiving LTC Benefits and then stop receiving LTC Benefits for twelve consecutive months, we will allow you to transfer in installments the Contract Value in the LTC Fixed Account back to the Subaccounts. This transfer will be made under a twelve-month dollar-cost averaging service. See The Contracts – Additional Services for more details on dollar-cost averaging. If, after you stop receiving LTC Benefits and then at a later date recommence receiving benefits, sufficient Contract Value will be transferred back to the LTC Fixed Account so that the balance in the LTC Fixed Account equals the LTC Guaranteed Amount.

Termination

Termination Events

The LTC Rider will terminate under any of the following circumstances:

•

termination of the Contract;

•

upon written request to terminate the LTC Rider after the third contract anniversary (you may not request to terminate the LTC Rider prior to the third contract anniversary);

•

you elect to receive Annuity Payouts under any of the Annuity Payout options available under the Contract, including but not limited to electing i4LIFE® Advantage (with or without the Guaranteed Income Benefit);

•

on the date the Contractowner is changed due to death or divorce;

•

upon the death of the Covered Life;

•

45 days after the contract date if a signed duplicate copy of the contract amendment issued with the LTC Rider is not returned to Lincoln Life;

•

an Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value to zero;

•

all LTC Benefits are reduced to zero;

•

you terminate the LTC Rider under either Nonforfeiture Benefit provision;

•

within the first six months following the contract date we determine that you made a misrepresentation in the application or contract amendment that was material to the issuance of the rider we may void or terminate the rider;

•

after the first six months but prior to the end of the first 24 months after the contract date we determine that you made a misrepresentation that was material to both the issuance of the rider and a claim for LTC Benefits we may void or terminate the rider; or

•

after 24 months from the contract date if we determine that you knowingly or intentionally misrepresented relevant facts relating to your health the LTC Rider may be voided or terminated by us.

Upon termination of the LTC Rider, the LTC Benefits (except benefits provided under either Nonforfeiture Benefit provision) and LTC Charge will terminate and a proportional amount of the LTC Charge will be deducted. Contract Value in the LTC Fixed Account will be

C-80

transferred to the Subaccounts according to your future Subaccount allocation instructions. The termination will not result in any increase to the Contract Value to equal the LTC Guaranteed Amount.

Nonforfeiture Benefit

The LTC Rider provides a nonforfeiture benefit (“Nonforfeiture Benefit”) if you terminate the LTC Rider in certain circumstances (described below). The Nonforfeiture Benefit provides a reduced long-term care insurance benefit.

•

There is a Nonforfeiture Benefit called the Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit, provided without charge that pays a reduced long-term care insurance benefit if you terminate the LTC Rider due to a specified increase of the charge for the Extension Benefit and/or the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit.

•

You may also choose to add an enhanced Nonforfeiture Benefit, called the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, for an additional charge, that pays a reduced long-term care insurance benefit. It is “enhanced” because you may terminate the LTC Rider for any reason after three years, rather than just if there is a specified increase of the charge for the Extension Benefit and/or the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit.

Once either Nonforfeiture Benefit is in effect, the LTC Charges will terminate. You should be aware that the Nonforfeiture Benefit provision provides only a limited amount of LTC Benefits. Moreover, the LTC Benefits provided by the Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit and the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit are equivalent; (this amount is hereinafter referred to as the “Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount”) the important difference between the two are the conditions under which they will be paid. These conditions are described below. The Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount is the greater of:

•

one month’s Maximum Monthly Level Benefit in effect on the date that the LTC Rider is terminated; or

•

an amount equal to the sum of all Extension Benefit Charges and Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charges paid for the LTC Rider minus any Extension Benefits paid prior to the date the LTC Rider is terminated.

In the state of California, the Nonforfeiture Benefit amount is the greater of:

•

the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit in effect on the date the Contractowner fully surrendered or annuitized the Contract, multiplied by either;

•

1, if the Contract is fully surrendered or annuitized prior to the tenth rider date anniversary; or

•

2, if the Contract is fully surrendered or annuitized on or after the tenth rider date anniversary.

•

an amount equal to the sum of all Extension Benefit Charges and Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charges paid for the LTC Rider minus any Extension Benefits paid prior to the date the Contractowner fully surrendered or annuitized the Contract.

Payments of the Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount are made only after the seventh contract anniversary (after the third anniversary in the state of Texas) and after the conditions set forth below are met. Payment of the Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount is subject to the benefit eligibility and deductible period requirements described in the Establishing Benefit Eligibility section. Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount payments must be requested as described in the Requesting LTC Benefits section. Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount payments will be payable monthly up to the Maximum Monthly Level Benefit amount in effect on the date that the LTC Rider is terminated.

Once the Nonforfeiture Benefit provision is effective, it will remain effective until the earlier of the death of the Covered Life or the date the total Nonforfeiture Benefit Amounts have been fully paid out. Upon the death of the Covered Life, the Nonforfeiture Benefit terminates. The Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount will not exceed the remaining amount of Extension Benefits that would have been paid if the LTC Rider had remained in force.

Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit. The Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit is provided at no charge on all LTC Riders. The Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit will pay you the Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount if both of the following conditions are met:

•

the sum of the Extension Benefit Charge rate and/or Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge rate, if elected, has increased by more than a specified percentage over the initial charge; and

•

you surrender your Contract or elect to terminate the LTC Rider within 120 days after the Extension Benefit Charge rate and/or Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge rate, if elected, is increased.

The specified percentage of change to the sum of the Extension Benefit Charge rate and/or the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit Charge rate that will trigger the availability of Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit is determined by your age as of the contract date. The specified percentages are as follows: 

Age on Contract Date	Percent Over Initial Charge	Age	Percent Over Initial Charge
45 – 49	130%	66	48%
50 – 54	110%	67	46%
55 – 59	90%	68	44%
60	70%	69	42%
61	66%	70	40%

C-81

Age on Contract Date	Percent Over Initial Charge	Age	Percent Over Initial Charge
62	62%	71	38%
63	58%	72	36%
64	54%	73	34%
65	50%	74	32%

Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. As noted, for an additional charge, you may purchase the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. The Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit provides for payment of the Nonforfeiture Benefit Amount under the following conditions:

•

you surrender the Contract at least three years after the contract date; or

•

you submit a written request to terminate the LTC Rider at least three years after the contract date; or

•

you elect to receive annuity payments under any Annuity Payout option available in the Contract or any other annuity settlement option we make available and commencing prior to the Contract’s maturity date and at least three years after the contract date.

If you purchase the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit and terminate the LTC Rider under conditions applicable under either the Contingent Nonforfeiture Benefit and the Optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, only the one applicable Nonforfeiture Benefit will be payable. The Optional Nonforfeiture provision may not be purchased after the LTC Rider is issued.

General Provisions

Death Benefits

The LTC Rider has no provision for Death Benefits, other than the Death Benefit provision in the underlying contract. The LTC Rider terminates upon death of the Covered Life and the LTC Benefits, including the LTC Guaranteed Amount, will not be payable under any Death Benefit option. At the time of death, if the Contract Value equals zero, no Death Benefit options (as described in the “Death Benefit” section of the prospectus) will be in effect. If a Contractowner who had been receiving LTC Benefit payments dies while the Contract is in effect, we reserve the right to withhold a portion of any Death Benefits that would otherwise be payable until we have verified that we have received all requests for LTC Benefits. Death Benefit distributions in accordance with Code section 72(s) or 401(a) (9) will not be made later than five years from the date of the Contractowner’s death.

The Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit and Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit both calculate Death Benefit amounts by deducting withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the Contract Value. For purposes of calculating Death Benefits under those contracts, Acceleration Benefit payments and Growth Benefit payments, as well as Conforming and Excess Withdrawals, are considered withdrawals that reduce the amount of the Death Benefit. See The Contracts – Death Benefits.

Contract Free Withdrawal Provision All withdrawals, whether Conforming or Excess, as well as LTC Benefit payments, will be applied against the Contract’s free amount, which is the amount that may be withdrawn annually without imposition of a surrender charge. Thus, Acceleration Benefit or Growth Benefit payments will reduce the amount available for free withdrawal, even though those payments do not incur a surrender charge. See Charges and Other Deductions – Surrender Charge for additional information on the free amount.

Investment Requirements

By purchasing the LTC Rider, you will be limited in how you can invest in the Subaccounts and the fixed account. You will be subject to Investment Requirements. See The Contracts – Investment Requirements for a description of these investment restrictions. The Investment Requirements will apply to your entire Contract Value. No Purchase Payments can be directly invested in the LTC Fixed Account.

Federal Taxation

Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contract. The LTC Rider is a Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contract under section 7702B(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. As described above, the LTC Charge is deducted from the Contract Value on a quarterly basis. For tax years beginning after December 31, 2009, the deductions from the Contract Value to pay LTC Charges will not be reported as taxable distributions from the variable annuity contract and such deductions will reduce the Contractowners basis in the Contract. The deductions from the Contract Value will reduce the Contract Value, but not below zero.

Federal Income Tax Treatment of Benefits under the LTC Rider. The LTC Benefits provided under the LTC Rider are treated as provided under a “Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contract,” as that term is defined under section 7702B(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. This discussion outlines our understanding of the federal income tax treatment of the LTC Benefits, as well as how the LTC Benefit payments will be reported to you. However, you should always consult a tax advisor about the application of tax rules to your individual situation.

Benefits that you receive under a Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contract will not be treated as taxable income to you as long as such benefits do not exceed the greater of (i) the expenses that you actually incur for Covered Services, or (ii) a maximum per diem,

C-82

or daily, dollar amount determined by the IRS. All payments that you receive under all Qualified Long-Term Care Insurance Contracts, as well as any payments under an accelerated benefit rider made to you if you are chronically ill, are included in determining whether the benefit limits have been exceeded and reduce the Contractowner’s basis in the Contract. These payments may also reduce the basis in your annuity contract.

If the LTC Benefits that you receive exceed the benefit limits outlined above, the amount of the excess benefits may represent taxable income to you. If you are under age 59½ at the time of the payment of excess benefits, an additional 10% “penalty tax” may apply.

If the Maximum Monthly LTC Benefit amount, if applicable, exceeds the limits under IRS rules (currently $410.00 per day or $149,650 annually for 2024), amounts received by you in excess of the IRS limit may be excludable from ordinary income to the extent that you have actually incurred long-term care expenses of that amount. You should take into account the IRS limit when selecting the amount of monthly LTC Benefit you would like to receive. We recommend that you discuss the tax implications of receiving benefits in excess of the IRS limit with a tax advisor.

Maturity Date

When you purchase the LTC Rider, the maturity date set forth in your Contract will be the Annuitant’s 99th birthday. The maturity date is the date when you must choose an Annuity Payout option and annuitize your Contract. Except as set forth below, annuitization of your Contract will terminate the LTC Rider.

If you are receiving LTC Benefit payments under this LTC Rider at the maturity date (when you reach age 99), we will extend the maturity date and continue to provide LTC Benefit payments, subject to the terms and conditions of the LTC Rider. If you decide to elect an Annuity Payout option and annuitize your Contract Value, the LTC Rider will terminate.

If you are not receiving LTC Benefit payments at the maturity date and you have a Contract Value, you will need to elect an Annuity Payout option available under your Contract. This will terminate the Acceleration and Growth Benefits (that would have been paid from your Contract Value) and also the LTC Charge. However, the Extension Benefit, if any, will continue on your Contract.

If LTC Benefit payments end after you reach age 99 and you still have value in your Contract, you must elect an Annuity Payout option within 90 days after the last LTC Benefit payment is made. This will terminate the LTC Rider. An exception to this occurs if LTC Benefit payments stop after age 99 because you are not currently eligible to receive benefits (for example, you are no longer receiving LTC Services). In this situation, the Acceleration and Growth Benefits that would have been paid from your Contract Value will terminate as well as the LTC Charge. Any Extension Benefit will remain in effect to provide payments in the event of future eligibility for LTC Benefits.

Any LTC Benefit paid after age 99 will be paid in the same manner as any LTC Benefit previously described in this discussion, including, but not limited to, eligibility, deductible period and maximum monthly limits.

Misstatement of Age or Sex

If your age or sex has been misstated, we will adjust the LTC Charges to the amounts that would have applied based on your correct age or sex. If the LTC Rider would not have been issued at the correct age and sex, it will be cancelled and we will refund to you all LTC Charges paid minus the amount of LTC Benefits that have been paid.

LTC Rider Return Privilege

You may cancel the LTC Rider within 30 days of your receipt of the LTC Rider for any reason by delivering or mailing the LTC Rider, postage prepaid, to the Home Office at PO Box 2348, 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802-2348. A LTC Rider cancelled under this provision will be void and any LTC Charges assessed will be refunded. Cancellation of the LTC Rider under this provision will not result in cancellation of the Contract.

If you surrender the entire Contract within the 30 day LTC Rider free-look period but after the underlying Contract’s free-look period, any applicable surrender charges will be deducted from the Contract Value.

Monthly Statements

In addition to the quarterly variable annuity statement, we will send you a monthly statement once you begin receiving LTC Benefit payments detailing the amount of LTC Benefits that have been paid and remaining available LTC Benefits. The monthly statement will only be sent to you for those months that you received an LTC Benefit. The statement will also show the impact of such LTC Benefit payments on your Contract Value and Death Benefit, if any. See General Provisions – Death Benefits for a description of the impact of the LTC Rider on Death Benefits.

C-83

Appendix D — Protected Annual Income Rates for Previous Rider Elections

  Lincoln ProtectedPay® Lifetime Income SuiteProtected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® applications or rider election forms signed between January 22, 2024 and April 30, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.10%
65 – 69	6.00%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	6.15%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.30%	75+	5.85%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® applications or rider election forms signed between January 2, 2024 and January 21, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.10%
65 – 69	5.85%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	6.15%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.30%	75+	5.85%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® applications or rider election forms signed between October 2, 2023 and January 1, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.10%
65 – 69	6.00%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	6.05%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.30%	75+	5.85%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® applications or rider election forms signed between April 3, 2023 and October 1, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.10%
65 – 69	5.65%	65 – 69	5.20%
70 – 74	6.05%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.30%	75+	5.85%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

D-1

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® applications or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and April 2, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 64	3.60%
65 – 69	5.50%	65 – 69	5.00%
70 – 74	5.60%	70 – 74	5.10%
75+	5.75%	75+	5.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® applications or rider election forms signed between January 22, 2024 and April 30, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.75%	59 – 64	4.35%
65 – 69	6.10%	65 – 69	5.60%
70 – 74	6.30%	70 – 74	5.85%
75+	6.55%	75+	6.10%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® applications or rider election forms signed between January 2, 2024 and January 21, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.75%	59 – 64	4.35%
65 – 69	6.00%	65 – 69	5.60%
70 – 74	6.30%	70 – 74	5.85%
75+	6.55%	75+	6.10%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® applications or rider election forms signed between October 2, 2023 and January 1, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.75%	59 – 64	4.35%
65 – 69	6.10%	65 – 69	5.60%
70 – 74	6.30%	70 – 74	5.85%
75+	6.55%	75+	6.10%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® applications or rider election forms signed between April 3, 2023 and October 1, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.75%	59 – 64	4.35%
65 – 69	5.90%	65 – 69	5.45%
70 – 74	6.30%	70 – 74	5.85%
75+	6.55%	75+	6.10%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

D-2

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® applications or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and April 2, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
59 – 64	4.50%	59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 69	5.75%	65 – 69	5.25%
70 – 74	5.85%	70 – 74	5.35%
75+	6.00%	75+	5.50%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus® applications or rider election forms signed between April 22, 2024 and April 30, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.70%	5.20%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	7.65%	7.10%	65 – 69	4.50%	4.25%
70 – 74	7.90%	7.15%	70 – 74	4.50%	4.25%
75+	8.00%	7.40%	75+	4.50%	4.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus® applications or rider election forms signed between July 17, 2023 and April 21, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.30%	4.80%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	7.25%	6.60%	65 – 69	4.00%	4.00%
70 – 74	7.50%	6.75%	70 – 74	4.00%	4.00%
75+	7.60%	7.00%	75+	4.00%	4.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Plus® applications or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and July 16, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.30%	4.80%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	7.00%	6.35%	65 – 69	4.00%	4.00%
70 – 74	7.15%	6.50%	70 – 74	4.00%	4.00%
75+	7.25%	6.75%	75+	4.00%	4.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

D-3

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus® applications or rider election forms signed between April 22, 2024 and April 30, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.25%	59 – 64	3.50%	3.25%
65 – 69	7.50%	7.10%	65 – 69	5.00%	4.50%
70 – 74	7.75%	7.15%	70 – 74	5.00%	4.50%
75+	7.85%	7.50%	75+	5.00%	4.50%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus® applications or rider election forms signed between July 17, 2023 and April 21, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.15%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	7.50%	6.85%	65 – 69	4.00%	4.00%
70 – 74	7.75%	7.00%	70 – 74	4.00%	4.00%
75+	7.85%	7.25%	75+	4.00%	4.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Plus® applications or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and July 16, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.15%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	7.25%	6.85%	65 – 69	4.00%	4.00%
70 – 74	7.40%	7.00%	70 – 74	4.00%	4.00%
75+	7.50%	7.25%	75+	4.00%	4.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® applications or rider election forms signed between April 22, 2024 and April 30, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.70%	5.20%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.30%	7.90%	65 – 69	3.50%	3.25%
70 – 74	8.55%	8.10%	70 – 74	3.50%	3.25%
75+	8.80%	8.30%	75+	3.50%	3.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

D-4

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® applications or rider election forms signed between July 17, 2023 and April 21, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.30%	4.80%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.30%	7.90%	65 – 69	3.50%	3.25%
70 – 74	8.55%	8.10%	70 – 74	3.50%	3.25%
75+	8.80%	8.30%	75+	3.50%	3.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® applications or rider election forms signed between April 3, 2023 and July 16, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.30%	4.80%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.30%	7.90%	65 – 69	3.00%	3.00%
70 – 74	8.55%	8.10%	70 – 74	3.00%	3.00%
75+	8.80%	8.30%	75+	3.00%	3.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Max® applications or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and April 2, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.30%	4.80%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.00%	7.70%	65 – 69	3.00%	3.00%
70 – 74	8.25%	7.85%	70 – 74	3.00%	3.00%
75+	8.40%	8.00%	75+	3.00%	3.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max® applications or rider election forms signed between April 22, 2024 and April 30, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.25%	59 – 64	3.50%	3.25%
65 – 69	8.50%	8.10%	65 – 69	3.50%	3.25%
70 – 74	8.75%	8.30%	70 – 74	3.50%	3.25%
75+	9.00%	8.50%	75+	3.50%	3.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.

D-5

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max® applications or rider election forms signed between July 17, 2023 and April 21, 2024 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.15%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.50%	8.10%	65 – 69	3.50%	3.25%
70 – 74	8.75%	8.30%	70 – 74	3.50%	3.25%
75+	9.00%	8.50%	75+	3.50%	3.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max® applications or rider election forms signed between April 3, 2023 and July 16, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.15%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.50%	8.10%	65 – 69	3.00%	3.00%
70 – 74	8.75%	8.30%	70 – 74	3.00%	3.00%
75+	9.00%	8.50%	75+	3.00%	3.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Max® applications or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and April 2, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option
59 – 64	5.65%	5.15%	59 – 64	3.00%	3.00%
65 – 69	8.25%	8.00%	65 – 69	3.00%	3.00%
70 – 74	8.50%	8.15%	70 – 74	3.00%	3.00%
75+	8.65%	8.30%	75+	3.00%	3.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

**The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.  

  Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between July 18, 2022 and December 18, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	4.35%	59 – 64	3.85%
65 – 69	5.50%	65 – 69	4.75%
70 – 74	5.50%	70 – 74	4.85%

D-6

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
75+	5.65%	75+	5.15%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between May 23, 2022 and July 17, 2022 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	4.35%	59 – 64	3.85%
65 – 69	5.40%	65 – 69	4.65%
70 – 74	5.50%	70 – 74	4.75%
75+	5.65%	75+	5.15%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between November 15, 2021 and May 22, 2022 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	3.50%	59 – 64	3.00%
65+	5.15%	65+	4.65%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between December 14, 2020 and November 14, 2021 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	3.50%	59 – 64	3.00%
65+	5.00%	65+	4.50%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between September 14, 2020 and December 13, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	3.50%	59 – 64	3.00%
65+	4.75%	65+	4.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

D-7

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between May 18, 2020 and September 13, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	2.75%	55 – 58	2.50%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	5.00%	65 – 69	4.50%
70 – 74	5.00%	70 – 74	4.50%
75+	5.00%	75+	4.50%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between March 16, 2020 and May 17, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.20%	55 – 58	2.90%
59 – 64	4.10%	59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 69	5.35%	65 – 69	5.00%
70 – 74	5.45%	70 – 74	5.10%
75+	5.60%	75+	5.20%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between November 18, 2019 and March 15, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.20%
59 – 64	4.40%	59 – 64	4.10%
65 – 69	5.50%	65 – 69	5.20%
70 – 74	5.60%	70 – 74	5.30%
75+	5.70%	75+	5.40%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between July 15, 2019 and November 17, 2019 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.75%	55 – 58	3.75%
59 – 64	4.50%	59 – 64	4.25%
65 – 69	5.60%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	5.75%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.00%	75+	5.75%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

D-8

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between April 1, 2019 and July 14, 2019 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.75%	55 – 58	3.75%
59 – 64	4.50%	59 – 64	4.25%
65 – 69	5.75%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	5.80%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.00%	75+	5.75%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between October 1, 2018 and March 31, 2019 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.75%	55 – 58	3.75%
59 – 64	4.50%	59 – 64	4.25%
65 – 69	5.60%	65 – 69	5.50%
70 – 74	5.75%	70 – 74	5.60%
75+	6.00%	75+	5.75%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between May 21, 2018 and September 30, 2018 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.75%	55 – 58	3.75%
59 – 64	4.50%	59 – 64	4.25%
65 – 74	5.60%	65 – 74	5.35%
75+	6.00%	75+	5.75%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) applications or rider election forms signed between September 25, 2017 and May 20, 2018 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.50%	59 – 64	4.25%
65 – 74	5.50%	65 – 74	5.25%
75+	5.85%	75+	5.60%

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) rider elections on or after January 23, 2017 but prior to September 25, 2017 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 - 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.00%
65+	5.25%	65+	5.00%

D-9

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) for rider elections on or after May 20, 2013 but prior to January 23, 2017 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 - 64	4.00%	59 – 64	4.00%
65+	5.00%	65 – 74	4.50%
		75+	5.00%

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) for rider elections on or after December 3, 2012 but prior to May 20, 2013 

Single & Joint Life Option*	Single & Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.50%
59 - 64	4.00%
65+	5.00%

*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) for rider elections prior to December 3, 2012 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	4.00%	55 – 64	4.00%
59+	5.00%	65+	5.00%

  Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 for rider elections on or after December 3, 2012 but prior to May 20, 2013 

Single & Joint Life Option*	Single & Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.00%
59 – 64	3.50%
65 – 69	4.50%
70+	5.00%

*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 rider elections on or after April 2, 2012 but prior to December 3, 2012 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option*
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 64	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%	65 – 69	4.50%
65 – 69	4.50%	70+	5.00%
70+	5.00%

*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

D-10

Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 rider elections prior to April 2, 2012 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option*
Age	Protected Annual Income rate	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate
55 – 58	4.00%	55 – 64	4.00%
59+	5.00%	65+	5.00%

*If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

  Lincoln Market Select® Advantage Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between July 18, 2022 and December 18, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	5.00%	65 – 69	4.35%
70 – 74	5.10%	70 – 74	4.45%
75+	5.25%	75+	4.75%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between May 23, 2022 and July 17, 2022 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	5.00%	65 – 69	4.25%
70 – 74	5.10%	70 – 74	4.35%
75+	5.25%	75+	4.75%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between November 15, 2021 and May 22, 2022 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	3.00%
65 – 74	4.75%	65 – 74	4.15%
75+	5.00%	75+	4.50%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between December 14, 2020 and November 14, 2021 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	3.00%
65+	4.75%	65+	4.15%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

D-11

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between September 14, 2020 and December 13, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	3.00%
65+	4.50%	65+	4.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between May 18, 2020 and September 13, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	3.50%	59 – 64	3.00%
65 – 69	4.75%	65 – 69	4.25%
70 – 74	4.75%	70 – 74	4.25%
75+	4.75%	75+	4.25%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between March 16, 2020 and May 17, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	3.10%	55 – 58	2.85%
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 64	3.65%
65 – 69	5.10%	65 – 69	4.65%
70 – 74	5.15%	70 – 74	4.75%
75+	5.55%	75+	5.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between November 18, 2019 and March 15, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	3.25%	55 – 58	3.00%
59 – 64	4.15%	59 – 64	3.85%
65 – 69	5.15%	65 – 69	4.85%
70 – 74	5.35%	70 – 74	5.00%
75+	5.55%	75+	5.25%

For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between October 1, 2018 and November 17, 2019 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 69	5.25%	65 – 69	5.15%
70 – 74	5.50%	70 – 74	5.25%
75+	5.75%	75+	5.50%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

D-12

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between May 21, 2018 and September 30, 2018 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.25%	59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 74	5.25%	65 – 74	5.00%
75+	5.75%	75+	5.50%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between January 19, 2018 and May 20, 2018 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 74	5.00%	65 – 74	4.50%
75+	5.50%	75+	5.00%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Market Select® Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) and January 18, 2018 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Protected Annual Income rate*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Protected Annual Income rate*
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 64	4.00%
65+	5.00%	65 – 74	4.50%
		75+	5.00%

*For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

  Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

The rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. When the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will always be used and, the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B. The rate in Table B will be based on the later of (a) your age at the time the first Protected Annual Income withdrawal occurred, or (b) your age as of the Valuation Date of the most recent Account Value Step-up. If no withdrawals have been taken prior to the Contract Value reaching zero, then your current age (single life option) or the younger of you and your spouse (joint life option) will be used to determine the Protected Annual Income rate in Table B. For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between July 18, 2022 and December 18, 2023 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*
59 – 64	5.00%	4.50%	59 – 64	3.00%	2.75%
65 – 69	7.50%	7.00%	65 – 69	3.00%	2.75%
70 – 74	8.00%	7.50%	70 – 74	3.00%	2.75%
75 – 79	8.00%	7.50%	75 – 79	3.00%	2.75%
80 +	8.00%	7.50%	80 +	3.00%	2.75%

 

D-13

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between May 23, 2022 and July 17, 2022 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*
59 – 64	4.50%	3.60%	59 – 64	3.00%	2.75%
65 – 69	7.25%	6.00%	65 – 69	3.00%	2.75%
70 – 74	7.25%	6.25%	70 – 74	3.00%	2.75%
75 – 79	7.75%	6.50%	75 – 79	3.00%	2.75%
80 +	7.75%	6.50%	80 +	3.00%	2.75%

 

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between November 15, 2021 and May 22, 2022 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	N/A	N/A	55 – 58	N/A	N/A
59 – 64	4.25%	3.10%	59 – 64	3.00%	2.75%
65 – 69	7.00%	5.50%	65 – 69	3.00%	2.75%
70 – 74	7.00%	5.75%	70 – 74	3.00%	2.75%
75 +	7.50%	6.00%	75 +	3.00%	2.75%

 

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between June 21, 2021 and November 14, 2021 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	N/A	N/A	55 - 58	N/A	N/A
59 – 64	4.25%	3.10%	59 – 64	3.00%	2.75%
65 – 69	6.75%	5.50%	65 – 69	3.00%	2.75%
70 – 74	7.00%	5.75%	70 – 74	3.00%	2.75%
75 +	7.00%	6.00%	75 +	3.00%	2.75%

 

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between December 14, 2020 and June 20, 2021 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life & Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	N/A	N/A	55 – 58	N/A
59 – 64	5.25%	3.00%	59+	3.00%
65 – 69	6.50%	5.50%
70 – 74	6.75%	5.75%
75 +	7.00%	6.00%

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

D-14

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between May 18, 2020 and December 13, 2020 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life & Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	N/A	N/A	55 – 58	N/A
59 – 64	5.25%	3.00%	59+	3.00%
65 – 69	6.25%	5.75%
70 – 74	6.50%	6.00%
75 +	6.75%	6.25%

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications or rider election forms signed between October 1, 2018 and May 17, 2020 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life & Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	4.50%	4.00%	55+	3.00%
59 – 64	5.50%	5.00%
65 – 69	6.50%	6.00%
70 – 74	6.75%	6.25%
75 +	7.00%	6.50%

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications signed between January 19, 2018 and September 30, 2018 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life & Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	4.50%	4.00%	55+	3.00%
59 – 64	5.50%	5.00%
65 – 74	6.50%	6.00%
75 +	7.00%	6.50%

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage applications signed between May 22, 2017 and January 18, 2018 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life & Joint Life Option*
55 – 58	4.00%	3.50%	55+	3.00%
59 – 64	5.00%	4.50%
65 – 74	6.00%	5.50%
75 +	7.00%	6.50%

* If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

  Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

Two options are available, and you can decide which option is best suited to your needs. Option 1 may be appropriate if you would like lower initial income with higher income once the Contract Value reaches zero. Comparatively, Option 2 will provide a higher initial income with lower income once the Contract Value reaches zero.

For both Option 1 and Option 2, the rates in Table A apply prior to the Contract Value reaching zero. Once the Contract Value reaches zero, Table B will be used, and the Protected Annual Income amount will be immediately recalculated to equal the Protected Income Base multiplied by the applicable rate shown in Table B.

D-15

Lincoln IRA Income PlusSM applications or rider election forms signed between January 14, 2019 and May 18, 2020:

Option 1 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life
70+	6.25%	N/A%	70+	5.00%

*Joint Life is currently not available.

** For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

Option 2 

TABLE A			TABLE B
Age	Single Life Option	Joint Life Option*	Age	Single Life & Joint Life Option
70+	7.00%	N/A	70+	4.00%

*Joint Life is currently not available.

** For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

  Lincoln Wealth PassSM Protected Annual Income Rates by Ages:

Lincoln Wealth PassSM applications or rider election forms signed between September 16, 2019 and May 18, 2020 

Age	PAI Rate
0 – 54	4.50%
55 – 58	5.00%
59 – 69	5.50%
70+	6.00%

D-16

Appendix E — Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages for Previous Rider Elections

  i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income BenefitGuaranteed Income Benefit Percentages by Ages:

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for prior purchasers of Lincoln ProtectedPay Select Core® or 4LATER® Select Advantage with applications and/or rider election forms signed between November 28, 2022 and April 30, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.15%	Under age 40	2.15%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.25%
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.25%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	2.75%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	3.25%
70 – 74	4.50%	70 – 74	3.75%
75 – 79	4.75%	75 – 79	4.00%
80+	4.75%	80+	4.25%

*In order to have received the percentage indicated, your application or rider election form must have been signed or dated on or before the last day of the effective period noted above. Purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for prior purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage with applications and/or rider election forms signed between December 14, 2020 and December 18, 2023, or for prior purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage with applications and/or rider election forms signed between December 14, 2020 and November 27, 2022 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.00%	Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.25%	40 – 54	2.00%
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.00%	59 – 64	2.50%
65 – 69	3.75%	65 – 69	2.75%
70 – 74	4.00%	70 – 74	3.25%
75 – 79	4.25%	75 – 79	3.50%
80+	4.25%	80+	3.75%

*In order to have received the percentage indicated, your application or rider election form must have been signed or dated on or before the last day of the effective period noted above. Purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Account Value Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for prior purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage or 4LATER® Select Advantage with applications and/or rider election forms signed between May 18, 2020 and December 13, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.00%	Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.25%	40 – 54	2.00%
55 – 58	2.25%	55 – 58	2.00%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	2.50%
65 – 69	4.00%	65 – 69	2.75%
70 – 74	4.25%	70 – 74	3.25%

E-1

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
75 – 79	4.50%	75 – 79	3.50%
80+	4.50%	80+	3.75%

*In order to have received the percentage indicated, your application or rider election form must have been signed or dated on or before the last day of the effective period noted above. Purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Account Value Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections and for prior purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage or 4LATER® Select Advantage with applications and/or rider election forms signed between November 18, 2019 and May 17, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.50%	Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%	40 – 54	2.75%
55 – 58	3.25%	55 – 58	3.00%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.50%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	4.00%
70 – 74	5.00%	70 – 74	4.25%
75 – 79	5.00%	75 – 79	4.75%
80+	5.25%	80+	5.00%

*In order to have received the percentage indicated, your application or rider election form must have been signed or dated on or before the last day of the effective period noted above. Purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Account Value Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit elections between August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) and November 17, 2019, or for purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage between August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) and November 17, 2019, or for purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage between January 9, 2017 and November 17, 2019. 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.50%	Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%	40 – 54	3.00%
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 69	4.00%
65 – 69	4.50%	70 – 74	4.50%
70 – 79	5.00%	75 – 79	5.00%
80+	5.50%	80+	5.50%

*In order to have received the percentage indicated, your applications or rider election form must have been signed or dated on or before the last day of the effective period noted above. Purchasers of Lincoln Market Select® Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Account Value Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Select Advantage may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

E-2

  i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk)Guaranteed Income Benefit Percentages by Ages:

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections and for prior purchasers of Lincoln ProtectedPay Secure Core® between November 28, 2022 and April 30, 2024 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.25%	Under age 40	2.25%
40 – 54	2.75%	40 – 54	2.50%
55 – 58	3.00%	55 – 58	2.75%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.25%
65 – 69	4.75%	65 – 69	4.00%
70 – 74	5.25%	70 – 74	4.25%
75 – 79	5.50%	75 – 79	4.50%
80+	5.50%	80+	4.75%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections between May 23, 2022 and November 27, 2022, or for prior purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) between May 23, 2022 and December 18, 2023 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.00%	Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.20%
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.20%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	2.75%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	3.50%
70 – 74	4.75%	70 – 74	3.75%
75 – 79	5.00%	75 – 79	4.00%
80+	5.00%	80+	4.25%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections and for prior purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) between December 14, 2020 and May 22, 2022 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.00%	Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.20%
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.20%
59 – 64	3.25%	59 – 64	2.75%
65 – 69	4.00%	65 – 69	3.25%
70 – 74	4.50%	70 – 74	3.50%
75 – 79	4.50%	75 – 79	3.75%
80+	4.50%	80+	4.00%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

E-3

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections and for prior purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) between May 18, 2020 and December 13, 2020 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.00%	Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.20%
55 – 58	2.50%	55 – 58	2.20%
59 – 64	3.50%	59 – 64	2.75%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	3.25%
70 – 74	4.75%	70 – 74	3.50%
75 – 79	4.75%	75 – 79	3.75%
80+	4.75%	80+	4.00%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections between November 18, 2019 and May 17, 2020. 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.50%	Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%	40 – 54	3.00%
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.25%
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 64	3.75%
65 – 69	5.00%	65 – 69	4.25%
70 – 74	5.25%	70 – 74	4.50%
75 – 79	5.50%	75 – 79	5.00%
80+	5.50%	80+	5.25%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections for prior purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) between November 18, 2019 and May 17, 2020. 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Percentage of Account Value or Protected Income Base*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Percentage of Account Value or Protected Income Base*
Under age 40	2.50%	Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%	40 – 54	2.75%
55 – 58	3.25%	55 – 58	3.00%
59 – 64	3.75%	59 – 64	3.50%
65 – 69	4.25%	65 – 69	4.00%
70 – 74	5.00%	70 – 74	4.25%
75 – 79	5.00%	75 – 79	4.75%
80+	5.25%	80+	5.00%

*

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Account Value Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections between February 19, 2019 and November 17, 2019. 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
Under age 40	2.50%	Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%	40 – 54	3.00%
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%

E-4

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	GIB Percentage*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	GIB Percentage*
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 69	5.00%	65 – 69	4.50%
70 – 74	5.25%	70 – 74	5.00%
75 – 79	5.50%	75 – 79	5.25%
80+	5.50%	80+	5.50%

* For additional Rate Sheet information see Living Benefit Riders – Rate Sheets.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections on or after May 20, 2013 and prior to February 18, 2019, or for purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) on or after May 20, 2013, or for purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) on or after May 20, 2013 and prior to November 17, 2019. 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option
Age	Percentage of Account Value or Protected Income Base*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Percentage of Account Value or Protected Income Base*
Under age 40	2.50%	Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%	40 – 54	3.00%
55 – 58	3.50%	55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%	59 – 69	4.00%
65 – 69	4.50%	70 – 74	4.50%
70 – 79	5.00%	75 – 79	5.00%
80+	5.50%	80+	5.50%

 *

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Account Value Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit elections or for prior purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 on or after May 20, 2013. 

Single Life Option		Joint Life Option**
Age	Percentage of Account Value, Protected Income Base or Guaranteed Amount*	Age (younger of you and your spouse’s age)	Percentage of Account Value, Protected Income Base or Guaranteed Amount*
Under age 40	2.00%	Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.50%	40 – 54	2.50%
55 – 58	3.00%	55 – 58	3.00%
59 - 64	3.50%	59 – 69	3.50%
65 – 69	4.00%	70 – 74	4.00%
70 – 74	4.50%	75+	4.50%
75+	5.00%

 *

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up or the rider's effective date (if there has not been any Account Value Step-up) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

 **

If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) elections between May 21, 2012 and May 19, 2013, or for purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) between April 2, 2012 and May 19, 2013, or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) between July 16, 2012 and May 19, 2013. 

Single & Joint Life Option*	Single & Joint Life Option*
Age	Percentage of Account Value or Income Base**
Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%
55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 69	4.50%

E-5

Single & Joint Life Option*	Single & Joint Life Option*
Age	Percentage of Account Value or Income Base**
70 – 79	5.00%
80+	5.50%

 *

If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

 **

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Income Base reduced by all Guaranteed Annual Income payments since the last Automatic Annual Step-up, if any, or the rider’s effective date (if there have not been any Automatic Annual Step-ups) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit. Purchasers of 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) may use any remaining Protected Income Base to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit elections between May 21, 2012 and May 19, 2013, or for
purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 between April 2, 2012 and May 19, 2013. 

Single & Joint Life Option*	Single & Joint Life Option*
Age	Percentage of Account Value, Income Base or Guaranteed Amount**
Under age 40	2.00%
40 – 54	2.50%
55 – 58	3.00%
59 – 64	3.50%
65 – 69	4.00%
70 – 74	4.50%
75+	5.00%

 *

If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

 **

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up or the rider's effective date (if there has not been any Account Value Step-up) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit elections prior to May 21, 2012, or for purchasers of
Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 prior to April 2, 2012. 

Single & Joint Life Option*	Single & Joint Life Option*
Age	Percentage of Account Value, Income Base or Guaranteed Amount**
Under age 40	2.50%
40 – 54	3.00%
55 – 58	3.50%
59 – 64	4.00%
65 – 69	4.50%
70 – 79	5.00%
80+	5.50%

 *

If joint life option is in effect, the younger of you and your spouse’s age applies.

 **

Purchasers of Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 may use any remaining Protected Income Base reduced by all Protected Annual Income payments since the last Account Value Step-up or the rider's effective date (if there has not been any Account Value Step-up) if greater than the Account Value to establish the initial Guaranteed Income Benefit.

 

E-6

Appendix F — Enhancement Rates for Previous Rider Elections

  Lincoln ProtectedPay® Lifetime Income Suite Enhancement Rates:

 

If your rider was purchased:	The Enhancement is…	The Enhancement is…
Prior to April 30, 2024	Equal to the Enhancement Value (initial Enhancement Value = Protected Income Base, and is increased by Enhancement Base x Enhancement Rate)	6%

 

  Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) Enhancement Rates:

 

If your rider was purchased:	The Enhancement is based on the…	…multiplied by the Enhancement Rate of…
On or after July 18, 2022, but prior to December 18, 2023	Enhancement Base	6%
On or after May 18, 2020, but prior to July 18, 2022	Enhancement Base	5%
On or after February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018, if your rider was elected after the contract issue date), but prior to May 18, 2020, subject to state availability	Enhancement Base	6%
Prior to February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018, if your rider was elected after the contract issue date)	Protected Income Base	5%

 

  Lincoln Market Select® Advantage Enhancement Rates:

 

If your rider was purchased:	The Enhancement is based on the…	…multiplied by the Enhancement Rate of…
On or after July 18, 2022, but prior to December 18, 2023	Enhancement Base	6%
On or after May 18, 2020, but prior to July 18, 2022	Enhancement Base	5%
On or after February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if your rider was elected after the contract issue date), but prior to May 18, 2020, subject to state availability	Enhancement Base	6%
Between August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 if your rider was elected after the contract issue date) and February 20, 2018 (April 2, 2018 if your rider was elected after the contract issue date)	Protected Income Base	5%
Prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016, if your rider was elected after the contract issue date)	N/A	N/A

 

F-1

  Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage Enhancement Rates:

 

If your rider was purchased:	The Enhancement is based on the…	…multiplied by the Enhancement Rate of…
On or after July 18, 2022, but prior to December 18, 2023	Enhancement Base	6%
On or after May 18, 2020, but prior to July 18, 2022	Enhancement Base	5%
Prior to May 18, 2020	Enhancement Base	6%

 

  4LATER® Select Advantage Enhancement Rates:

 

If your rider was purchased:	The Enhancement is based on the…	…multiplied by the Enhancement Rate of…
On or after November 28, 2022, but prior to April 30, 2024	Equal to the Enhancement Value (initial Enhancement Value = Protected Income Base, and is increased by Enhancement Base x Enhancement Rate)	6%
On or after August 22, 2022, but prior to November 28, 2022	Enhancement Base	6%
On or after May 18, 2020, but prior to August 22, 2022	Enhancement Base	5%
On or after June 11, 2018, but prior to May 18, 2020, subject to state availability	Enhancement Base	6%
Prior to June 11, 2018	Protected Income Base	5%

 

F-2

Appendix G — Current Rider Charges for Previous Elections

The following tables reflect the current charge for optional Living Benefit Riders by election date. The current charges for new elections are disclosed in a Rate Sheet supplement.

Optional Protected Lifetime Income Fees:

  Lincoln ProtectedPay® Lifetime Income Suite

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Riders elected between November 28, 2022 and April 30, 2024	1.50%	1.60%

  Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk)

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Riders elected between December 14, 2020 and December 18, 2023	1.50%	1.60%
Riders elected on or after May 21, 2018 and on or prior to December 13, 2020	1.25%	1.50%

  Lincoln Market Select® Advantage

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Riders elected between December 14, 2020 and December 18, 2023	1.50%	1.60%
Riders elected on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) and on or prior to December 13, 2020	1.25%	1.50%

  Lincoln Max 6 SelectSM Advantage

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Riders elected between December 14, 2020 and December 18, 2023	1.50%	1.60%
Riders elected on or prior to December 13, 2020	1.25%	1.50%

  4LATER® Select Advantage

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
Riders elected between December 14, 2020 and April 30, 2024	1.50%	1.60%
Riders elected on or prior to December 13, 2020	1.25%	1.50%

  i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) riders elected between May 21, 2018 and April 30, 2024	0.95%	1.15%

G-1

  i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for Contractowners who Transition from Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) or 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk)

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected between December 14, 2020 and December 18, 2023	1.50%	1.60%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected on or after May 21, 2018 and on or prior to December 13, 2020	1.25%	1.50%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (Managed Risk) for Lincoln Lifetime IncomeSM Advantage 2.0 (Managed Risk) riders elected prior to May 21, 2018 and for all 4LATER® Advantage (Managed Risk) riders	1.05%	1.25%

  i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit for Contractowners who Transition from Lincoln Market Select® Advantage or 4LATER® Select Advantage

 

	Single Life	Joint Life
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for Lincoln Market Select® Advantage riders elected between December 14, 2020 and December 18, 2023 and 4LATER® Select Advantage riders elected between December 14, 2020 and April 30, 2024	1.50%	1.60%
i4LIFE® Advantage Select Guaranteed Income Benefit for Lincoln Market Select® Advantage riders elected on or after August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners) and on or prior to December 13, 2020 and 4LATER® Select Advantage riders on or prior to December 13, 2020	1.25%	1.50%
i4LIFE® Advantage Guaranteed Income Benefit (version 4) for Lincoln Market Select® Advantage riders elected prior to August 29, 2016 (October 3, 2016 for existing Contractowners)	0.95%	1.15%

G-2

The SAI includes additional information about the Contract, Lincoln Life, and the VAA, and is incorporated by reference in this prospectus. The SAI is dated the same date as this prospectus. We will provide the SAI without charge upon request. You may obtain a free copy of the SAI and submit inquiries by:

•

Mailing: The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, PO Box 2348, Fort Wayne, IN 46801-2348

•

Visiting: www.lfg.com/VAprospectus

•

Emailing: CustServSupportTeam@lfg.com

•

Calling: 1-800-942-5500

You may also obtain reports and other information about the VAA on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at the following email address: publicinfo@sec.gov. The SEC file numbers and the Contract’s contract identifier number are listed below.

  SEC File Nos. 333-135219; 811-05721
EDGAR Contract Identifier C000035632

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (SAI)

Dated May 1, 2024
Relating to Prospectus Dated May 1, 2024 for

American Legacy® Design

American Legacy® Design 1

American Legacy® Design 2

American Legacy® Design 3

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H, Registrant

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, Depositor

The SAI provides you with additional information about Lincoln Life, the VAA, and your Contract. It is not a prospectus.

A copy of the product prospectus dated May 1, 2024, may be obtained without a charge by writing to the Home Office: Lincoln Life Customer Service, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, PO Box 2348, Fort Wayne, IN 46801-2348, by calling: 1-800-942-5500, or by emailing: CustServSupportTeam@lfg.com and requesting a copy of the American Legacy® Design product prospectus.

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE SAI

 

Contents	Page
Special Terms	B-2
General Information and History	B-2
The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company	B-2
Variable Annuity Account (VAA)	B-2
Investment Results	B-3
Capital Markets	B-3
Advertising & Ratings	B-3
Non-Principal Risks of Investing In The Contract	B-3
Services	B-4

Contents	Page
Purchase of Securities Being Offered	B-4
Principal Underwriter	B-4
Contract Information	B-5
Interest Adjustment Example	B-5
Additional Services	B-6
Other Information	B-7
Determination of Accumulation and Annuity Unit Value	B-7
Annuity Payments	B-8
Financial Statements	B-8

 

Special Terms

The special terms used in this SAI are the ones defined in the prospectus.

General Information and History

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company), organized in 1905, is an Indiana-domiciled insurance company, engaged primarily in the direct issuance of life insurance contracts and annuities. Lincoln Life is wholly owned by Lincoln National Corporation (LNC), a publicly held insurance and financial services holding company incorporated in Indiana. Lincoln Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to Contractowners under the contracts.

Our Financial Condition. Depending on when you purchased your Contract, you may be permitted to make allocations to the fixed account, which is part of our general account. See The Fixed Side of the Contract. In addition, any guarantees under the Contract that exceed your Contract Value, such as those associated with Death Benefit options and Living Benefit Riders are paid from our general account (not the VAA). Therefore, any amounts that we may pay under the Contract in excess of Contract Value are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. We issue other types of insurance policies and financial products in addition to the Contract. We also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the general account. Moreover, unlike assets held in the VAA, the assets of the general account are subject to the general liabilities of the Company and, therefore, to the Company’s general creditors. In the event of an insolvency or receivership, payments we make from our general account to satisfy claims under the Contract would generally receive the same priority as our other Contractowner obligations.

The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the Indiana Insurance Department as well as the insurance laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the contracts are distributed. The laws and regulations applicable to us regulate the investments we can make with assets held in our general account. In general, those laws and regulations determine the amount and type of investments which we can make with general account assets.

In addition, state insurance regulations require that insurance companies calculate and establish on their financial statements, a specified amount of reserves in order to meet the contractual obligations to pay the claims of our Contractowners. In order to meet our claims-paying obligations, we regularly monitor our reserves to ensure we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected contract and claims payments. However, it is important to note that there is no guarantee that we will always be able to meet our claims paying obligations, and that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.

State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital in excess of liabilities, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on assets held in our general account, which include bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in value of these investments resulting from a loss in their market value.

How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective Contractowners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on both a statutory basis and according to Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Our audited GAAP financial statements, as well as the financial statements of the VAA, are located in the SAI. Instructions on how to obtain a free copy of the SAI, are provided on the last page of this prospectus. You may obtain our audited statutory financial statements and any unaudited statutory financial statements that may be available by visiting our website at www.LincolnFinancial.com.

You also will find on our website information on ratings assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance and annuity contracts based on its financial strength and/or claims-paying ability. Additional information about rating agencies is included in the SAI.

Lincoln Financial Group is the marketing name for Lincoln National Corporation (NYSE:LNC) and its affiliates. Through its affiliates, Lincoln Financial Group offers annuities, life, group life and disability insurance, 401(k) and 403(b) plans, and comprehensive financial planning and advisory services.

Variable Annuity Account (VAA)

On February 7, 1989, the VAA was established as an insurance company separate account under Indiana law. It is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the provisions of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (1940 Act). The VAA is a segregated investment account. Income, gains and losses credited to, or charged against, the VAA reflect the VAA’s own investment experience

B-2

and not the investment experience of Lincoln Life’s other assets. The assets of the VAA may not be used to pay any liabilities of Lincoln Life other than those arising from the contracts supported by the VAA. Lincoln Life is obligated to pay all amounts promised to Contractowners under the contracts.

The VAA is used to support other annuity contracts offered by us in addition to the contracts described in this prospectus. The other annuity contracts supported by the VAA generally invest in the same funds as the contracts described in this prospectus. These other annuity contracts may have different charges that could affect the performance of their Subaccounts, and they offer different benefits.

Investment Results

At times, the VAA may compare its investment results to various unmanaged indices or other variable annuities in reports to shareholders, sales literature and advertisements. The results will be calculated on a total return basis for various periods, with or without surrender charges. Results calculated without surrender charges will be higher. Total returns include the reinvestment of all distributions, which are reflected in changes in unit value.

There can be no assurance that a money market fund will be able to maintain a stable net asset value of $1.00 per share. During periods of low interest rates, the yield of a money market fund may become extremely low and possibly negative. In addition, if the yield of a Subaccount investing in a money market fund becomes negative, due in part to contract fees and expenses, your Contract Value may decline. An investment in a money market fund is not insured or guaranteed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other government agency. The sponsor of a money market fund has no legal obligation to provide financial support to the fund, and you should not expect that the sponsor will provide financial support to the fund at any time. If, under SEC rules, a money market fund suspends payments of redemption proceeds, we will delay payment of any transfer, withdrawal, or benefit from a Subaccount investing in the money market fund until the fund resumes payment. If, under SEC rules, a money market fund institutes a liquidity fee, we may assess the fee against your Contract Value if a payment is made to you from a Subaccount investing in the money market fund.

The annual performance of the Subaccounts is based on past performance and does not indicate or represent future performance.

Capital Markets

In any particular year, our capital may increase or decrease depending on a variety of factors — the amount of our statutory income or losses (which is sensitive to equity market and credit market conditions), the amount of additional capital we must hold to support business growth, changes in reserving requirements, our inability to secure capital market solutions to provide reserve relief, such as issuing letters of credit to support captive reinsurance structures, changes in equity market levels, the value of certain fixed-income and equity securities in our investment portfolio and changes in interest rates.

Advertising & Ratings

We may include in certain advertisements, endorsements in the form of a list of organizations, individuals or other parties which recommend Lincoln Life or the policies. Furthermore, we may occasionally include in advertisements comparisons of currently taxable and tax deferred investment programs, based on selected tax brackets, or discussions of alternative investment vehicles and general economic conditions.

Our financial strength is ranked and rated by nationally recognized independent rating agencies. The ratings do not imply approval of the product and do not refer to the performance of the product, or any separate account, including the underlying investment options. Ratings are not recommendations to buy our products. Each of the rating agencies reviews its ratings periodically. Accordingly, all ratings are subject to revision or withdrawal at any time by the rating agencies, and therefore, no assurance can be given that these ratings will be maintained. Our insurer financial strength ratings are on outlook stable except for the ratings assigned by Fitch for all three insurance subsidiaries and the rating assigned by AM Best for First Penn Pacific Life Insurance Company, which are on outlook negative. Our financial strength ratings, which are intended to measure our ability to meet contract holder obligations, are an important factor affecting public confidence in most of our products and, as a result, our competitiveness. A downgrade of our financial strength rating could affect our competitive position in the insurance industry by making it more difficult for us to market our products as potential customers may select companies with higher financial strength ratings and by leading to increased withdrawals by current customers seeking companies with higher financial strength ratings. For more information on ratings, including outlooks, see https://www.lfg.com/public/aboutus/investorrelations/financialinformation/ratings.

Non-Principal Risks of Investing In The Contract

Opportunity Cost. Principal amounts committed to an annuity contract are only available to choose from investment options available on the Contract, potentially causing you an opportunity cost.

Dying early. If you die earlier than expected, your designated beneficiary may not receive the full benefit of the future payments.

B-3

Divorce. If you get divorced, you could forfeit some or all of the value of your annuity to your former spouse.

Affiliated Funds. We may have incentive to select affiliated funds because we receive more revenue from an affiliated fund than a non-affiliated fund.

Fund of Funds. In some fund of funds (or master-feeder) arrangements, you may pay fees and expenses at both fund levels, which can reduce your investment return.

Services

Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, One Commerce Square, 2005 Market Street, Suite 700, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 19103, has audited a) the financial statements of each of the subaccounts listed in the appendix to the opinion that comprise Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H, as of December 31, 2023, the related statements of operations and the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods indicated in the appendix to the opinion; and b) the consolidated financial statements of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2023 and 2022 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2023 as set forth in their reports, which are included in this SAI and Registration Statement. The aforementioned financial statements are included herein in reliance on Ernst & Young LLP's reports, given on their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.

Keeper of Records

All accounts, books, records and other documents which are required to be maintained for the VAA are maintained by us or by third parties responsible to Lincoln Life. We have entered into an agreement with State Street Bank and Trust Company, c/o WeWork, 1100 Main Street, Suite 400, Kansas City, MO 64105, to provide accounting services to the VAA. No separate charge against the assets of the VAA is made by us for this service.

Purchase of Securities Being Offered

The variable annuity contracts are offered to the public through licensed insurance agents who specialize in selling our products; through independent insurance brokers; and through certain securities brokers/dealers selected by us whose personnel are legally authorized to sell annuity products. There are no special purchase plans for any class of prospective buyers. However, under certain limited circumstances described in the prospectus under the section Charges and Other Deductions, any applicable account fee and/or surrender charge may be reduced or waived.

Both before and after the Annuity Commencement Date, there are exchange privileges between Subaccounts, and from the VAA to the general account (if available) subject to restrictions set out in the prospectus. See The Contracts, in the prospectus. No exchanges are permitted between the VAA and other separate accounts.

The offering of the contracts is continuous.

Principal Underwriter

Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) is a wholly owned subsidiary of Lincoln National Corporation and an affiliate of Lincoln Life. LFD serves as the principal underwriter (the “Principal Underwriter”) for the contracts, as described in the prospectus. The Principal Underwriter currently offers, and expects to continue offering, the contracts to the public on a continuous basis, but reserves the right to discontinue offering the contracts at any time. The Principal Underwriter offers the contracts through sales representatives, who are registered with either Lincoln Financial Advisors Corporation (“LFA”) or Lincoln Financial Securities Corporation (“LFS”) (collectively, “LFN”), both of which are affiliates of LFD. The Principal Underwriter also may enter into selling agreements with other broker-dealers (“Selling Firms”) for the sale of the contracts. Sales representatives who are registered with Selling Firms are appointed as our insurance agents. LFD, in its capacity as Principal Underwriter, paid to LFN and Selling Firms, sales compensation totaling $290,102,661, $240,217,121 and $214,270,291 in 2021, 2022 and 2023, respectively, in connection with all of the contracts offered under the VAA. The Principal Underwriter retained no underwriting commissions for the sale of the contracts. LFD maintains its principal place of business at 130 North Radnor Chester Road, Radnor, Pennsylvania 19087.

B-4

Contract Information

Interest Adjustment Example

Note: This example is intended to show how the Interest Adjustment calculation impacts the surrender value of a representative contract. The surrender charges, annual account fee, adjustment factor, and guaranteed minimum interest rate values shown here are generally different from those that apply to specific contracts, particularly those contracts that deduct an initial sales load or pay a bonus on deposits. Calculations of the Interest Adjustment in your Contract, if applicable, will be based on the factors applicable to your Contract. The Interest Adjustment may be referred to as a Market Value Adjustment in your Contract.

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS FOR MALE 35 ISSUE
CASH SURRENDER VALUES 

Single Premium	$50,000
Premium taxes	None
Withdrawals	None
Guaranteed Period	5 years
Guaranteed Interest Rate	3.50%
Annuity Date	Age 70
Index Rate A	3.50%
Index Rate B	4.00% End of Contract Year 1 3.50% End of Contract Year 2 3.00% End of Contract Year 3 2.00% End of Contract Year 4
Percentage adjustment to B	0.50%

 

Interest Adjustment Formula	(1 + Index A)n	-1
n = Remaining Guaranteed Period	(1 + Index B + % Adjustment)n

SURRENDER VALUE CALCULATION 

Contract Year	(1) Annuity Value	(2) 1 + Interest Adjustment Formula	(3) Adjusted Annuity Value	(4) Minimum Value	(5) Greater of (3) & (4)	(6) Surrender Charge	(7) Surrender Value
1	$51,710	0.962268	$49,759	$50,710	$50,710	$4,250	$46,460
2	$53,480	0.985646	$52,712	$51,431	$52,712	$4,250	$48,462
3	$55,312	1.000000	$55,312	$52,162	$55,312	$4,000	$51,312
4	$57,208	1.009756	$57,766	$52,905	$57,766	$3,500	$54,266
5	$59,170	N/A	$59,170	$53,658	$59,170	$3,000	$56,170

ANNUITY VALUE CALCULATION 

Contract Year	BOY* Annuity Value		Guaranteed Interest Rate		Annual Account Fee		EOY** Annuity Value
1	$50,000	x	1.035	-	$40	=	$51,710
2	$51,710	x	1.035	-	$40	=	$53,480
3	$53,480	x	1.035	-	$40	=	$55,312
4	$55,312	x	1.035	-	$40	=	$57,208
5	$57,208	x	1.035	-	$40	=	$59,170

B-5

SURRENDER CHARGE CALCULATION 

Contract Year	Surrender Charge Factor		Deposit		Surrender Charge
1	8.5%	x	$50,000	=	$4,250
2	8.5%	x	$50,000	=	$4,250
3	8.0%	x	$50,000	=	$4,000
4	7.0%	x	$50,000	=	$3,500
5	6.0%	x	$50,000	=	$3,000

1 + INTEREST ADJUSTMENT FORMULA CALCULATION 

Contract Year	Index A	Index B	Adj Index B	N	Result
1	3.50 %	4.00 %	4.50 %	4	0.962268
2	3.50 %	3.50 %	4.00 %	3	0.985646
3	3.50 %	3.00 %	3.50 %	2	1.000000
4	3.50 %	2.00 %	2.50 %	1	1.009756
5	3.50 %	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A

MINIMUM VALUE CALCULATION 

Contract Year			Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate		Annual Account Fee		Minimum Value
1	$50,000	x	1.015	-	$40	=	$50,710
2	$50,710	x	1.015	-	$40	=	$51,431
3	$51,431	x	1.015	-	$40	=	$52,162
4	$52,162	x	1.015	-	$40	=	$52,905
5	$52,905	x	1.015	-	$40	=	$53,658

 *

BOY = beginning of year

 **

EOY = end of year

Additional Services

Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA)—You may systematically transfer, on a monthly basis or in accordance with other terms we make available, amounts from certain Subaccounts, or the fixed side (if available) of the contract into the Subaccounts or in accordance with other terms we make available. You may elect to participate in the DCA program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by completing an election form available from us. The minimum amount to be dollar cost averaged is $1,500 over any time period between six and 60 months. We may offer different time periods for new Purchase Payments and for transfers of Contract Value. State variations may exist. Once elected, the program will remain in effect until the earlier of:

•

the Annuity Commencement Date;

•

the value of the amount being DCA'd is depleted; or

•

you cancel the program by written request or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file.

We reserve the right to discontinue or restrict access to this program at any time.

A transfer made as part of this program is not considered a transfer for purposes of limiting the number of transfers that may be made, or assessing any charges or Interest Adjustment which may apply to transfers. Upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment allocated to the DCA fixed account, the existing program duration will be extended to reflect the end date of the new DCA program. However, the existing interest crediting rate will not be extended. The existing interest crediting rate will expire at its originally scheduled expiration date and the value remaining in the DCA account from the original amount as well as any additional Purchase Payments will be credited with interest at the standard DCA rate at the time. DCA does not assure a profit or protect against loss.

Automatic Withdrawal Service (AWS)—AWS provides an automatic, periodic withdrawal of Contract Value to you. AWS may take place on either a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis, as selected by the Contractowner. You may elect to participate in AWS at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by sending a written request to us. The minimum Contract Value required to establish AWS is $10,000. You may cancel or make changes to your AWS program at any time by sending a written request to us. If telephone authorization has been elected, certain changes may be made by telephone. Notwithstanding the requirements of the program, any withdrawal must be permitted under Section 401(a)(9) of the IRC for qualified plans or

B-6

permitted under Section 72 of the IRC for nonqualified contracts. To the extent that withdrawals under AWS do not qualify for an exemption from the contingent deferred sales charge, we will assess any applicable surrender charges on those withdrawals. See Surrender Charge.

Cross Reinvestment Program/Earnings Sweep Program — Under this option, Account Value in a designated variable Subaccount of the contract that exceeds a certain baseline amount is automatically transferred to another specific variable Subaccount(s) of the contract at specific intervals. You may elect to participate in the cross reinvestment program at the time of application or at any time before the Annuity Commencement Date by sending a written request to us or by telephone if we have your telephone authorization on file. You designate the holding account, the receiving account(s), and the baseline amount. Cross reinvestment will continue until we receive authorization to terminate the program.

The cross reinvestment service is no longer available unless the Contractowner was enrolled in this service prior to May 1, 2010. Contractowners who are currently enrolled in this service will not be impacted by this change.

Portfolio Rebalancing — Portfolio rebalancing is an option, which, if elected by the Contractowner, restores to a pre-determined level the percentage of the Contract Value (or Account Value under i4LIFE® Advantage), allocated to each variable Subaccount. This pre-determined level will be the allocation initially selected when the Contract was purchased, unless subsequently changed. The portfolio rebalancing allocation may be changed at any time by submitting a written request to us. If portfolio rebalancing is elected, all Purchase Payments allocated to the variable Subaccounts must be subject to portfolio rebalancing. Portfolio rebalancing may take place on either a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis, as selected by the Contractowner. The Contractowner may terminate the portfolio rebalancing program or re-enroll at any time by sending a written request to us. If telephone authorization has been elected, the Contractowner may make these elections by phone. The portfolio rebalancing program is not available following the Annuity Commencement Date.

Please note that all of the services discussed in this section will stop once we become aware of a pending death claim.

SecureLine® Account – SecureLine® is an interest bearing draft account established from the proceeds payable on a Contract administered by us that helps you manage your surrender or death benefit proceeds. You are the owner of the account, and are the only one authorized to transfer proceeds from the account. You may choose to leave the proceeds in this account, or you may use the checkbook we previously provided and write checks against the account until the funds are depleted. The SecureLine® account is part of our general account. It is not a bank account and it is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency. As part of our general account, it is subject to the claims of our creditors. We receive a benefit from all amounts left in the SecureLine® account.

Interest credited in the SecureLine® account is taxable as ordinary income in the year such interest is credited, and is not tax deferred. We recommend that you consult your tax advisor to determine the tax consequences associated with the payment of interest on amounts in the SecureLine® account. The balance in your SecureLine® account began earning interest the day your account was opened and will continue to earn interest until all funds are withdrawn. Interest is compounded daily and credited to your account on the last day of each month. The interest rate will be updated monthly and we may increase or decrease the rate at our discretion. The interest rate credited to your SecureLine® account may be more or less than the rate earned on funds held in our general account. The interest rate offered with a SecureLine® account is not necessarily that credited to the fixed account. There are no monthly fees. You may be charged a fee if you stop a payment or if you present a check for payment without sufficient funds.

Other Information

Due to differences in redemption rates, tax treatment or other considerations, the interests of policyholders under the variable life accounts could conflict with those of Contractowners under the VAA. In those cases, where assets from variable life and variable annuity separate accounts are invested in the same fund(s) (i.e., where mixed funding occurs), the Boards of Directors of the fund involved will monitor for any material conflicts and determine what action, if any, should be taken. If it becomes necessary for any separate account to replace shares of any fund with another investment, that fund may have to liquidate securities on a disadvantageous basis. Refer to the prospectus for each fund for more information about mixed funding.

Determination of Accumulation and Annuity Unit Value

A description of the days on which Accumulation and Annuity Units will be valued is given in the prospectus. The New York Stock Exchange's (NYSE) most recent announcement (which is subject to change) states that it will be closed on weekends and on these holidays: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Day, President's Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Juneteenth, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. If any of these holidays occurs on a weekend day, the Exchange may also be closed on the business day occurring just before or just after the holiday. It may also be closed on other days.

Since the portfolios of some of the funds and series will consist of securities primarily listed on foreign exchanges or otherwise traded outside the United States, those securities may be traded (and the net asset value of those funds and series and of the variable account could therefore be significantly affected) on days when the investor has no access to those funds and series.

B-7

Annuity Payments

Variable Annuity Payouts

Variable Annuity Payouts will be determined on the basis of:

•

the dollar value of the Contract on the Annuity Commencement Date less any applicable premium tax (and less any surrender charges on purchase payments in the contract for less than 12 months if bonus credits applied to the purchase payments);

•

the annuity tables contained in the Contract;

•

the type of annuity option selected; and

•

the investment results of the fund(s) selected.

In order to determine the amount of variable Annuity Payouts, we make the following calculation:

•

first, we determine the dollar amount of the first payout;

•

second, we credit the Contract with a fixed number of Annuity Units based on the amount of the first payout; and

•

third, we calculate the value of the Annuity Units each period thereafter.

These steps are explained below.

The dollar amount of the first periodic variable Annuity Payout is determined by applying the total value of the Accumulation Units credited under the Contract valued as of the Annuity Commencement Date (less any premium taxes) to the annuity tables contained in the Contract. The first variable Annuity Payout will be paid 14 days after the Annuity Commencement Date. This day of the month will become the day on which all future Annuity Payouts will be paid. Amounts shown in the tables are based on the 1983 Table “a” Individual Annuity Mortality Tables, modified, with an assumed investment return at the rate of 3%, 4%, 5% or 6% per annum, depending on the terms of your Contract. The first Annuity Payout is determined by multiplying the benefit per $1,000 of value shown in the contract tables by the number of thousands of dollars of value accumulated under the Contract. These annuity tables vary according to the form of annuity selected and the age of the Annuitant at the Annuity Commencement Date. The assumed interest rate is the measuring point for subsequent Annuity Payouts. If the actual net investment rate (annualized) exceeds the assumed interest rate, the payout will increase at a rate equal to the amount of such excess.

Conversely, if the actual rate is less than the assumed interest rate, Annuity Payouts will decrease. If the assumed rate of interest were to be increased, Annuity Payouts would start at a higher level but would decrease more rapidly or increase more slowly.

We may use sex-distinct annuity tables in contracts that are not associated with employer sponsored plans and where not prohibited by law.

At an Annuity Commencement Date, the Contract is credited with Annuity Units for each Subaccount on which variable Annuity Payouts are based. The number of Annuity Units to be credited is determined by dividing the amount of the first periodic payout by the value of an Annuity Unit in each Subaccount selected. Although the number of Annuity Units is fixed by this process, the value of such units will vary with the value of the underlying fund. The amount of the second and subsequent periodic payouts is determined by multiplying the Contractowner’s fixed number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount by the appropriate Annuity Unit value for the Valuation Date ending 14 days prior to the date that payout is due.

The value of each Subaccount’s Annuity Unit will be set initially at $1.00. The Annuity Unit value for each Subaccount at the end of any Valuation Date is determined by multiplying the Subaccount Annuity Unit value for the immediately preceding Valuation Date by the product of:

•

The net investment factor of the Subaccount for the Valuation Period for which the Annuity Unit value is being determined, and

•

A factor to neutralize the assumed investment return in the annuity table.

The value of the Annuity Units is determined as of a Valuation Date 14 days prior to the payment date in order to permit calculation of amounts of Annuity Payouts and mailing of checks in advance of their due dates. Such checks will normally be issued and mailed at least three days before the due date.

Financial Statements

The December 31, 2023 financial statements of the VAA and the December 31, 2023 consolidated financial statements of Lincoln Life are incorporated into this SAI by reference to the VAA’s most recent Form N-VPFS (“Form N-VPFS”) filed with the SEC.

B-8

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

PART C - OTHER INFORMATION

Item 27. Exhibits

(a) Resolutions of the Board of Directors of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company establishing Separate Account H incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 (File No. 033-27783) filed on December 5, 1996.

(b) None

(c)(1) Form of Broker-Dealer Selling Agreement among The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company, Lincoln Life & Annuity Company of New York and Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-222786) filed on January 30, 2018.

(2) Amended and Restated Principal Underwriting Agreement dated May 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment 24 (File No. 333-61554) filed on December 18, 2007.

(d)(1) Annuity Contract (30070-B) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 (File No. 333-36304) filed on August 9, 2001.

(2) Annuity Payment Option Rider (32147) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 (File No. 333-36304) filed on August 9, 2001.

(3) Interest Adjusted Fixed Account Rider (32143) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 (File No. 333-36304) filed on August 9, 2001.

(4) DCA Fixed Account Rider (32145) incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-135039) filed on June 15, 2006.

(5) Persistency Credit Rider (32154) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 (File No. 333-36304) filed on August 9, 2001.

(6) Bonus Rider (32146) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 (File No. 333-36304) filed on August 9, 2001.

(7) Amendment for IRA Retirement Plan (AE-283) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 63 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 12, 2016.

(8) Amendment for Roth IRA Retirement Plan (AE-284) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 63 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 12, 2016.

(9) Variable Annuity Rider (32793) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6 (File No. 333-35780) filed on April 22, 2003.

(10) Section 403(b) Annuity Endorsement (32481-I) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6 (File No. 333-35780) filed on April 22, 2003.

(11) Estate Enhancement Benefit Rider (32151-A) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6 (File No. 333-35780) filed on April 22, 2003.

(12) Enhanced Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider (32149) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6 (File No. 333-35780) filed on April 22, 2003.

(13) Guarantee of Principal Death Benefit Rider (32148) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6 (File No. 333-35780) filed on April 22, 2003.

(14) Variable Annuity Rider (32793HWM 4/04) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 (File No. 333-35780) filed on June 9, 2004.

(15) Variable Annuity Income Rider (i4LA-NQ-PR 9/05) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 12 (File No. 333-35784) filed on June 20, 2005.

(16) Variable Annuity Income Rider (i4LA-Q-PR 9/05) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 12 (File No. 333-35784) filed on June 20, 2005.

(17) Guaranteed Income Later Rider (4LATER 2/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 (File No. 333-36316) filed on April 4, 2006.

(18) Guaranteed Income Benefit Rider (GIB 1/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 22 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 18, 2006.

(19) Guaranteed Income Benefit Rider (IGIB 1/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 22 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 18, 2006.

(20) Contract Benefit Data (CBD 1/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 22 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 18, 2006.

(21) Allocation Amendment (AR503 1/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 22 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 18, 2006.

(22) Variable Annuity Payment Option Rider (I4LA-Q) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 22 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 18, 2006.

(23) Variable Annuity Payment Option Rider (I4LA-NQ) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 22 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 18, 2006.

(24) Variable Annuity Rider (LSSA 32793 7/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 (File No. 333-63505) filed on September 26, 2006.

(25) Contract Specifications (B Share) incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-135219) filed on June 22, 2006.

(26) Contract Specifications (L Share) incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-135219) filed on June 22, 2006.

(27) Variable Annuity Payment Option Rider (I4LA-Q 1/07) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 (File No. 333-135219) filed on April 10, 2007.

(28) Variable Annuity Death Benefit Rider (DB-3 1/06) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 (File No. 333-135219) filed on April 10, 2007.

(29) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (AR-512 2/08) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 24 (File No. 333-61554) filed on December 18, 2007.

(30) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (AR-512 1/09) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 (File No. 333-63505) filed on April 3, 2009.

(31) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (AR-512P 1/09) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 (File No. 333-63505) filed on April 3, 2009.

(32) Guaranteed Income Benefit Rider (AGIB 6/08) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 (File No. 333-63505) filed on April 3, 2009.

(33) Section 403(b) Annuity Endorsement (32481-I-12/08) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 (File No. 333-63505) filed on April 3, 2009.

(34) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (LINC 2.0) (AR-529 8/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 (File No. 333-40937) filed on October 28, 2010.

(35) Guaranteed Income Benefit Rider (GIB v4) (AR-528 8/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 (File No. 333-40937) filed on October 28, 2010.

(36) Contract Benefit Data (CBD 8/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 (File No. 333-40937) filed on October 28, 2010.

(37) Variable Annuity Payment Option Rider (I4LA-NQ 8/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 (File No. 333-40937) filed on October 28, 2010.

(38) Variable Annuity Payment Option Rider (I4LA-Q 8/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 (File No. 333-40937) filed on October 28, 2010.

(39) Long-Term Care Benefits Rider (AR 518 3/10 Level) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 (File No. 333-138190) filed on December 29, 2010.

(40) Long-Term Care Benefits Rider (AR 519 3/10 Growth) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 (File No. 333-138190) filed on December 29, 2010.

(41) Contract Amendment for LTC Benefits (AA 531 3/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 (File No. 333-138190) filed on December 29, 2010.

(42) LTC Fixed Account Rider (AR 532) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 (File No. 333-138190) filed on December 29, 2010.

B-2

(43) LTC Benefit Specifications (AS 533) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 (File No. 333-138190) filed on December 29, 2010.

(44) Long-Term Care Coverage Endorsement (AE 517) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 (File No. 333-138190) filed on December 29, 2010.

(45) Variable Annuity Living Benefit Rider (LINC 2 + Protected Funds) (AR-529 8/10) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 2 (File No. 333-170695) filed January 30, 2012.

(46) Guaranteed Income Later Rider (4LATER Adv Protected Funds) (AR-547 3/12) incorporated herein by reference to Registration on Form N-4 (File No. 333-181612) filed on May 23, 2012.

(47) Contract Amendment – Maturity Date (AR-554 10/14) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 (File No. 333-181616) filed on April 8, 2015.

(48) Variable Annuity Living Benefit Rider (Market Select Advantage) (AR-591) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 63 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 12, 2016.

(49) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (AR-600) (Lincoln Max 6 Select Advantage) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 36 (File No. 333-135039) filed on April 7, 2017.

(50) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (Market Select Advantage/LINC 2.0) (AR-607) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 (File No. 333-214143) filed on June 4, 2018.

(51) Guaranteed Income Later Rider (4LATER Select Adv) (AR-547 03/18) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 (File No. 333-214143) filed on June 4, 2018.

(52) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (IRA Income Plus – AR-600) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 71 (File No. 333-40937) filed on February 7, 2019.

(53) Variable Annuity Living Benefit Rider (Wealth Pass - AR-623) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 (File No. 333-212681) filed on June 25, 2019.

(54) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (22AR-700) (ProtectedPay Core) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 36 (File No. 333-170897) filed on August 8, 2022.

(55) Variable Annuity Living Benefits Rider (22AR-701) (ProtectedPay Select, Secure) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 36 (File No. 333-170897) filed on August 8, 2022.

(56) Guaranteed Income Later Rider (22AR-707) (4LATER Select Advantage) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 36 (File No. 333-170897) filed on August 8, 2022.

(57) Variable Annuity Payout Rider Credit Endorsement (23AE-730) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 41 (File No. 333-181615) filed on November 15, 2023.

(e) Application (ALD 1/08) incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 (File No. 333-135219) filed on April 8, 2008.

(f)(1) Articles of Incorporation of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company are incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 (File No. 333-04999) filed on September 25, 1996.

(2) By-laws of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company are incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 on Form N-6 (File No. 333-118478) filed on April 5, 2007.

(g)(1) Automatic Reinsurance Agreement dated July 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Swiss Re Life & Health America Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 (File No. 333-138190) filed on April 8, 2008.

(i) Amendments to Automatic Reinsurance Agreement dated July 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Swiss Re Life & Health America Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 40 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 7, 2010.

(ii) Amendment No. 3 to Automatic Reinsurance Agreement dated July 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Swiss Re Life & Health America Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 69 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 11, 2018.

(iii) Amendment No. 4 to Automatic Reinsurance Agreement dated July 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Swiss Re Life & Health America Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 48 (File No. 333-138190) filed on April 18, 2019.

B-3

(iv) Amendment No. 5 to Automatic Reinsurance Agreement dated July 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Swiss Re Life & Health America Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 50 (File No. 333-138190) filed on August 22, 2019.

(v) Amendment No. 6 to Automatic Reinsurance Agreement dated July 1, 2007 between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Swiss Re Life & Health American Inc. incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 56 (File No. 333-138190) filed on August 14, 2020.

(2) Fourth Amended and Restated Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Union Hamilton Reinsurance, LTD incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 72 (File No. 333-40937) filed on April 16, 2019.

(i) Amendment No. 1 to the Fourth Amended and Restated Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Union Hamilton Reinsurance, LTD incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 74 (File No. 333-40937) filed on August 22, 2019.

(ii) Amendment No. 2 to the Fourth Amended and Restated Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Union Hamilton Reinsurance, LTC incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 79 (File No. 333-40937) filed on August 14, 2020.

(iii) Amendment No. 3 to the Fourth Amended and Restated Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Union Hamilton Reinsurance, LTC incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 (File No. 333-212680) filed on April 14, 2023.

(3) Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Talcott Resolution Life Insurance Company incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 34 (File No. 333-186894) filed on February 7, 2022.

(i) Amendment No. 1 to the Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Talcott Resolution Life Insurance Company incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 (File No. 333-212680) filed on April 14, 2023.

(ii) Amendment No. 2 to the Reinsurance Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Talcott Resolution Life Insurance Company incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 (File No. 333-212680) filed on April 14, 2023.

(4) Third Amended and Restated Automatic Indemnity Reinsurance Agreement dated January 1, 2023, between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Lincoln National Reinsurance Company (Barbados) Limited incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 (File No. 333-212680) filed on April 14, 2023.

(i) Amendment No. 1 to the Third Amended and Restated Automatic Indemnity Reinsurance Agreement dated January 1, 2023, between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Lincoln National Reinsurance Company (Barbados) Limited incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 16 (File No. 333-212682) filed on February 2, 2024.

(h) Fund Participation Agreements among The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and:

(1) American Funds Insurance Series incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 on Form N-6 (File No. 333-146507) filed on April 3, 2017;

(1-a) amendment no. 15 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 27 on Form N-4 (File No. 333-181615) filed on April 3, 2020.

(2) Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 24 on Form N-6 (File No. 333-146507) filed on April 1, 2016.

(i) Accounting and Financial Administration Services Agreement dated January 1, 2019 among State Street Bank and Trust Company, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and Lincoln Life & Annuity Company of New York is incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 36 on Form N-6 (File No. 333-125790) filed on April 12, 2019.

(j) Rule 22c-2 Agreement between The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company and:

(1) American Funds Insurance Series incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 30 (File No. 333-36304) filed on May 29, 2008.

(2) Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 30 (File No. 333-36304) filed on May 29, 2008.

B-4

(k) Opinion and consent of Mary Jo Ardington, Senior Counsel, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company as to legality of securities being issued incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 (File No. 333-135219) filed on August 25, 2006.

(l)(1) Consent of Ernst & Young LLP, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm filed herein.

(2) Power of Attorney - Principal Officers and Directors of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company filed herein.

(m) Not applicable

(n) Not applicable

(o) Not applicable

(p) Lincoln National Corporation Organizational Chart incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 on Form N-6 (File No. 333-125790) filed on April 9, 2024.

EX-101.SCH XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document

Item 28. Directors and Officers of the Depositor

The following list contains the officers and directors of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company who are engaged directly or indirectly in activities relating to Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H as well as the contracts. The list also shows The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company's executive officers.  

Name	Positions and Offices with Depositor
Craig T. Beazer*	Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Director
Jayson R. Bronchetti*	Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer and Director
Adam M. Cohen*	Senior Vice President, Chief Accounting Officer and Treasurer
Ellen G. Cooper*	President and Director
Stephen B. Harris*	Senior Vice President and Chief Ethics and Compliance Officer
Christopher M. Neczypor*	Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Director
Nancy A. Smith*	Senior Vice President and Secretary
Joseph D. Spada**	Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer for Separate Accounts
Eric B. Wilmer***	Assistant Vice President and Director

*Principal business address is 150 N. Radnor-Chester Road, Radnor, PA 19087

**Principal business address is 350 Church Street, Hartford, CT 06103

***Principal business address is 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802

Item 29. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with the Depositor or Registrant

See Exhibit (p) above: Lincoln National Corporation Organization Chart

Item 30. Indemnification

a) Brief description of indemnification provisions.

In general, Article VII of the By-Laws of The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company (Lincoln Life or Company) provides that Lincoln Life will indemnify certain persons against expenses, judgments and certain other specified costs incurred by any such person if he/she is made a party or is threatened to be made a party to a suit or proceeding because he/she was a director, officer, or employee of Lincoln Life, as long as he/she acted in good faith and in a manner he/she reasonably believed to be in the best interests of, or act opposed to the best interests of, Lincoln Life. Certain additional conditions apply to indemnification in criminal proceedings.

In particular, separate conditions govern indemnification of directors, officers, and employees of Lincoln Life in connection with suits by, or in the right of, Lincoln Life.

Please refer to Article VII of the By-Laws of Lincoln Life (Exhibit no. f(b) hereto) for the full text of the indemnification provisions. Indemnification is permitted by, and is subject to the requirements of, Indiana law.

b) Undertaking pursuant to Rule 484 of Regulation C under the Securities Act of 1933:

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the provisions described in Item 28(a) above or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification

B-5

against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any such action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

Item 31. Principal Underwriter

(a) Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc. (“LFD”) currently serves as Principal Underwriter for: Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account C; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account D; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account F; Lincoln National Flexible Premium Variable Life Account G; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H; Lincoln Life & Annuity Variable Annuity Account H; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account J; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account K; Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account L; Lincoln Life & Annuity Variable Annuity Account L; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account M; Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account M; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N; Lincoln New York Account N for Variable Annuities; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account Q; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account R; LLANY Separate Account R for Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account S; LLANY Separate Account S for Flexible Premium Variable Life Insurance; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account T; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account W; and Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account Y and Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account Y; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JF-H; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JF-I; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JF-A; Lincoln Life Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JF-C; Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account JL-A; Lincoln Life & Annuity Flexible Premium Variable Life Account JA-B; Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust; Lincoln Advisors Trust.

(b) Officers and Directors of Lincoln Financial Distributors, Inc.: 

Name	Positions and Offices with Underwriter
Adam M. Cohen*	Senior Vice President and Treasurer
Jason M. Gibson**	Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer
Claire H. Hanna*	Secretary
John C. Kennedy*	President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
Jared M. Nepa*	Senior Vice President and Director
Thomas P. O'Neill*	Senior Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Head of Financial Institutions Group
Timothy J. Seifert Sr*	Senior Vice President and Director

*Principal business address is 150 N. Radnor-Chester Road, Radnor, PA 19087

**Principal business address is 1301 South Harrison Street, Fort Wayne, IN 46802

(c) N/A

Item 32. Location of Accounts and Records

This information is provided in the Registrant’s most recent report on Form N-CEN.

Item 33. Management Services

Not Applicable.

Item 34. Fee Representation

Lincoln Life represents that the fees and charges deducted under the contracts, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Lincoln Life.

B-6

SIGNATURES

(a) As required by the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, each Registrant certifies that it meets the requirements of Securities Act Rule 485(b) for effectiveness of these registration statements and has caused these Post-Effective Amendments to the registration statements to be signed on its behalf, in the City of Fort Wayne, and the State of Indiana on this 10^th day of April, 2024 at 3:21 pm.

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H

Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N

(Registrants)

By:	/s/ Daniel P. Herr
	Daniel P. Herr
	Senior Vice President, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Signed on its behalf, in the City of Hartford, and the State of Connecticut on this 10^th day of April, 2024 at 2:32 pm.

The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

(Depositor)

By:	/s/ Michelle L. Grindle
	Michelle L. Grindle
	(Signature-Officer of Depositor)
	Vice President, The Lincoln National Life Insurance Company

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account E (File No. 811-04882; CIK: 0000804223)

033-26032 (Amendment No. 78)

Lincoln National Variable Annuity Account H (File No. 811-05721; CIK: 0000847552)

033-27783 (Amendment No. 77)	333-63505 (Amendment No. 86)	333-181615 (Amendment No. 43)
333-18419 (Amendment No. 80)	333-135219 (Amendment No. 59)	333-212681 (Amendment No. 23)
333-35780 (Amendment No. 60)	333-170695 (Amendment No. 53)	333-233762 (Amendment No. 10)
333-35784 (Amendment No. 75)	333-175888 (Amendment No. 29)	333-233764 (Amendment No. 16)
333-61592 (Amendment No. 77)

Lincoln Life Variable Annuity Account N (File No. 811-08517; CIK: 0001048606)

333-36316 (Amendment No. 98)	333-172328 (Amendment No. 47)	333-214143 (Amendment No. 28)
333-36304 (Amendment No. 86)	333-174367 (Amendment No. 35)	333-214144 (Amendment No. 17)
333-40937 (Amendment No. 92)	333-181612 (Amendment No. 41)	333-214235 (Amendment No. 16)
333-61554 (Amendment No. 92)	333-186894 (Amendment No. 44)	333-236907 (Amendment No. 12)
333-135039 (Amendment No. 59)	333-193272 (Amendment No. 31)	333-239288 (Amendment No. 9)
333-138190 (Amendment No. 70)	333-193273 (Amendment No. 23)	333-252473 (Amendment No. 17)
333-149434 (Amendment No. 42)	333-193274 (Amendment No. 20)	333-252653 (Amendment No. 12)
333-170529 (Amendment No. 44)	333-212680 (Amendment No. 26)	333-252654 (Amendment No. 12)
333-170897 (Amendment No. 48)	333-212682 (Amendment No. 19)

(b) As required by the Securities Act of 1933, these Amendments to the registration statements have been signed by the following persons in their capacities indicated on April 10, 2024 at 3:21 pm.

Signature	Title
*/s/ Ellen G. Cooper	President and Director
Ellen G. Cooper	(Principal Executive Officer)
*/s/ Christopher M. Neczypor	Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, and Director
Christopher M. Neczypor
*/s/ Craig T. Beazer	Executive Vice President and Director
Craig T. Beazer
*/s/ Jayson R. Bronchetti	Executive Vice President, Chief Investment Officer, and Director
Jayson R. Bronchetti
*/s/ Adam M. Cohen	Senior Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer
Adam M. Cohen	(Principal Accounting Officer)
*/s/ Eric B. Wilmer	Assistant Vice President and Director
Eric B. Wilmer

* By	/s/ Daniel P. Herr, Pursuant to a Power of Attorney
	Daniel P. Herr